^ v ^ "Vgvs^y 



w ^> .<&> 







/ % 



"o V^ 



> rS"' 




w 











^tO^ « 



s> <3* °, 







^d* 



* to 



^ 







^ 



^ 9, ' 



^^,v , - i */.-.\' , - , vv., < 



<*.. 



' .». 



^ 



O, *0. X* A* 




v ^*^. *% 






_ » O O -» fll' 




V * ^ * ° 







o- v 



^.d« 



r J ** 







£<& 



», ^ 
K ^ 



v * Y * ° * ^ 



°a. *<>♦ x* \^ 




^ 



G C 



* \ 

4 ^ 






^ ^ 






*V ^ 







•VM:%^ 






c3 ^> 












^ 



%lO* * 






^^o,^ ^ ^ * y °« x* A^> 










6, 'o, x* a 










/ % r/ = "^ 







V o. 1 ' * 



C 



^ ^ 1$* ^< 

5 ^ 



<* r 

















^0^ * 



^ ^" 




% 









CU y o 



•^ .^ 




W 






* a 



/ * * s * A G 







^S <k> - ^. ■- 
















tS ^ 



*».*■ ,#" '^ 



s \0 V 



/ ^ 



'V ^V" ^^^V" ^ ^ 



^ ; 






* 4 %. 













^ y o . x * <y* q^ ^ o * x ■* a v ki y " -^ ' v A^ , 



( 



WHITNEY'S MODERN LANGUAGE BOOKS. 



FRENCH. 

A FRENCH GRAMMAR. With Exercises and Illustrative Sentences 

from French Authors. i2mo, 442 pp. 
PRACTICAL FRENCH. Taken from the author's larger Grammar. 

and supplemented by Conversations and Idiomatic Phrases. 

12111U, 304 pp. 

GERMAN. 

A COMPENDIOUS GERMAN GRAMMAR. i 2 mo, 303 pp. 
BRIEF GERMAN GRAMMAR. i6mo, 143 pp. 
GERMAN REA^' < 2 mo, 523 pp. 

GERMAN-ENGL.oN DICTIONARY. 8vo, 900 pp. 
GERMAN TEXTS. Edited by Prof. W. D. Whitney. 

Lessing's ?* ina von Barnhelm. Annotated by W. D. Whitney, 

Prof, in Yale College. i6mo, 138 pp. 
Schiller's VVilhelm Tell. Annotated by Prof. A. Sachtleben, of 

Charleston, S C. i6mo, 199 pp. 
Goethe's Faust. Annotated by Win. Cook. i6mo, 229 pp. 
Goethe's Iphigenie auf Tauris. Annotated by Prof. Franklin Car- 
ter, Williams College. i6mo, 113 pp. 
Schiller's Maria Stuart. Annotated by E. S. Joynes, Prof, in Uni- 
versity of South Carolina. i6mo, 222 pp. 
Lessing's Nathan der Weise. Annotated by H. C. G. Brandt, Prof, 
in Hamilton College. i6mo, 158 pp. 

WH1TNEY-KLEMM GERMAN SERIES. 

By William D. Whitney, and L. R. Klemm. 

RUDIMENTS OF GERMAN. {In Preparation.) 
GERMAN BY PRACTICE, mno, 305 pp. 
ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER. i 2 mo, 237 pp. 



HENRY HOLT & CO , Publishers, NEW YORK. 



PRACTICAL FRENCH 



Taken from the Atcthor s Larger Grammar, 
and Supplemented by 

CONVERSA TIONS 
and 
IDIOMATIC PHRASES 



WILLIAM D WIGHT WHITNEY 

w 






NEW YORK 
HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY 

F. W. CHRISTERN 
BOSTON: CARL SCHOENHOF 



\ 









Copyright, 1887, 

BY 

HENRY HOLT & CO. 



PREFACE, 



This volume is the outcome of the author's experience 
as a teacher of French during many years. The design 
had in view in it has been to furnish a text-book which 
should combine the advantages of practice and theory in a 
higher degree than others now existing. To this end, the 
most important facts of the language have been grouped 
and arranged in a series of Lessons, in an order suggested 
by practical convenience, each Lesson being accompanied 
by sufficient Exercises. The general plan, while not un- 
like the method followed in many grammars, is so far ac- 
cordant especially with that of the widely used and valued 
" Conversation- Gram mar" of Otto, that it may fairly be 
said to be founded upon the latter — though no more than 
that, since both text and Exercises are entirely new, and 
deviations from the older plan not only numerous, but of 
much importance. As one example among many, a more 
systematic course is followed in the important item of the 
learner's introduction to the verbs: all the principal forms 
are learned and practised, one after another, before any 
complete paradigm is set forth; and the commonest and 
most useful of the irregular verbs are worked in by de- 
grees, before they are taken up as a body. It is believed 
that the method here adopted of presenting and teaching 
the irregular verbs has decided practical advantages over 
any other, and lightens, as much as it is possible to 
lighten, this heaviest burden in French grammar. In the 
Exercises, care has been taken not to embarrass the learner 



IV PREFACE. 

with long lists of words of which little use is to be made, 
but rather to make him practise over and ovp a more lim- 
ited and slowly increasing vocabulary. 

If, in the case of any class, the Lessons are found too 
long, the intelligent teacher will easily divide the Exer- 
cises, returning to take up what was omitted, in the course 
of that review and reiteration by which alone the desired 
degree of mastery of the material can be obtained. Where 
an early introduction to reading is especially aimed at, the 
Exercises may be reduced to a minimum, and (so much 
like English are French words and construction) a Eeader 
or a text can be taken up as soon as the auxiliaries, the 
regular conjugations, and a few of the commonest irregu- 
lar verbs are learned. This summary process will be great- 
ly aided by the French Vocabulary, in which are to be 
found, besides many of the oftenest-used words of the 
language, nearly all the form-words — the auxiliaries, the 
articles and pronouns, and the prepositions and conjunc- 
tions — with full references to the explanations and illus- 
trations of their use that are given in the volume. In 
this Vocabulary are also furnished, in a brief and unsyste- 
matic form, the Latin (and other) etymologies of French 
words, as an encouragement and aid to that comparison of 
French with its mother-tongue which is both in itself of 
high interest and value, and a 'practical help to any one 
who has already studied Latin. 

The pronunciation of a new language is not a thing that 
can be learned out of a book and by rule; it must be got- 
ten through the ear of the pupil from the mouth of the 
teacher. Yet there is sufficient consistency in French 
orthography to render it possible to hold a pupil, after 
sufficient introductory practice, to responsibility for not 
making too blundering work of uttering a word that is 
normally pronounced, or even of an exceptional one that 
he has met with before. In order to this, however, dis- 
tinct statements as to the facts of pronunciation are re- 



PREFACE. V 

quired. And they are of no small value to the teacher 
also, unless he have enjoyed very exceptional advantages. 
It is partly in view of the needs of the great majority of 
teachers not French by birth or education, that so much 
fulness has been given in this work to the preliminary 
chapter on pronunciation, and that all the commoner 
words that are exceptionally pronounced (whether they do 
or do not occur in the Exercises and Themes) are entered, 
marked as such, in the Vocabularies. Different teachers 
will make different use of the chapter in instruction, ac- 
cording to their various training and habit. It is believed, 
however, that a class of beginners may to their decided ad- 
vantage be required to learn at the outset certain points: 
namely, the division of syllables (4«, b); to name correctly 
the orthographic marks (5-10); to tell when e is mute 
(18); the value of y as double i (37); the chief rules as to 
the nasal vowels (46-7, 52, 53); those as to final conso- 
nants (56'', b); as to ch (59); to gn (63); to h (64«, e); to 
liquid 1 (68, 68e); to r (73, 73a); to s pronounced as z 
(74«); to ti in endings (77a); and as to the linking of 
final consonants (84^, b, 85Z>, 86«). The rest may well 
be left to oral teaching, one and another rule being later 
brought in as found desirable: especially, the pupil will 
need further on to note the rules as to the occurrence of 
mute e and 6 and e (19, 20a, 21a), which settle so many 
cases of otherwise doubtful orthography. 

At the end of the volume are appended a few conversa- 
tions, illustrations of the idiomatic usages of French and 
English, and a list of ihe verbs governing the infinitive 
in French, with explanations of their construction. All 
these, it is believed, will be found useful auxiliaries by a 
well-instructed teacher. 

The ' ' Second Part" here and there referred to is a sup- 
plement and successor to the main part of the work as here 
given, and constituting together with it the "Practical 
French Grammar, with Exercises, and Illustrative Sen- 



VI PKEFACE. 

tences from French Authors," published last year. Tt pre- 
sents a fuller and more penetrating view of the usages of 
the language, especially of the syntactical usages. It is 
not divided into Lessons, but follows the usual order of 
subjects in a systematic grammar, adding under each sub- 
ject sentences excerpted from French authors of repute, 
in illustration of the rules given and principles stated. 
English Themes are also given, for further practice in ap- 
plying the rules. A succinct view of the relations of 
French to Latin introduces the Part. 

Yale College, New Haven, June, 1887. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



The references are to pages only. 

PAGE 

Alphabet and Pronunciation, 1-26 

Alphabet, 1-2 ; division of syllables, 2 ; accents and 
other orthographic marks, 2-4 ; accent, 4 ; pronuncia- 
tion of the simple vowels, 4-10 ; of the digraphs or 
vowel compounds, 11-2 ; of the nasal vowels, 12-5 ; 
of the consonants, 15-25 ; linking or carrying-on of 
final consonants, 25-6. 

Lessons, with Exercises, 27-198 

I. Gender, articles, etc. ; present of avoir, . . 27 
II. Plural of nouns ; present of etre, . . .30 

III. The prepositions a and de ; imperfect of avoir 

and etre, 33 

IV. Partitive and inclusive senses of the noun ; pret- 

erit of do. , .36 

V. Material and measure ; future of do., . . 40 
VI. Prepositions ; proper names ; conditional of do. , 43 
VII. Adjectives— gender ; imperative of do. , . . 46 
VIII. Adjectives — number, position ; present subjunc- 
tive of do. , . . . . . . .50 

IX. Adjectives — comparison ; imperfect subjunctive 

of do. , 54 

X. Conjugation — the verb avoir have, . .57 

XI. Conjugation of the verb etre be, . .62 

XII. Negative conjugation, 65 

XIII. Demonstrative and interrogative adjectives, . 69 

XIV. Possessive and indefinite adjectives, . . .72 
XV. Cardinal numerals, 76 

XVI. Ordinal numerals, 79 

XVII. Numerals continued — months and week-days, . 82 
XVIII. Regular verbs ; first conjugation, . .85 



Vlii TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

PAOK 

XIX. Second regular conjugation, . . .90 

XX. Third regular conjugation, . . . .94 

XXI. Irregular verbs : first conjugation, . . 98 

XXII. Conjunctive personal pronouns, . . .102 

XXIII. Disjunctive and conjunctive pronouns, . . 107 

XXIV. Demonstrative pronouns ; irregular verbs, 

vouloir, Ill 

XXV. Interrogative pronouns ; the irregular verb 

pouvoir, 117 

XXVI. Relative pronouns ; the irregular verb devoir, 121 
XXVII. Possessive and indefinite pronouns ; the ir- 
regular verb aller, 12G 

XXVIII. Passive verbs ; auxiliaries, . . . .131 

XXIX. Reflexive verbs, . 135 

XXX. Impersonal verbs, 139 

XXXI. Adverbs from adjectives; the irregular verb 

venir, 143 

XXXII. Various adverbs ; the irregular verb faire, . 148 

XXXIII. Prepositions ; the irregular verb dire, . . 153 

XXXIV. Conjunctions ; the irregular verb savoir, . 157 
XXXV. Irregular verbs ending in ire (1-14), . . 162 

XXXVI. Irregular verbs in aindre etc. and aitre 

etc. (15-20), 166 

XXXVII. Further irregular verbs in re (21-29), . .171 

XXXVIII. The remaining irregular verbs in re (30-37), 175 

XXXIX. Irregular verbs in ir (38-51), . . .180 

XL. The remaining irregular verbs in ir (52-64), 185 

XLI. Irregular verbs in oir (65-71), • . .190 

XLII. The remaining irregular verbs in oir, and those 

in er (72-83), 194 

Index of Irregular Verbs, Simple and Compound, . 199-201 

Infinitive Constructions, 202 

Vocabularies: 

I. French-English Vocabulary, 207 

II. English-French Vocabulary, 232 

Familiar Conversations, 247 

Idiomatic Phrases, 267 

General Index, 299 



FIRST PART. 



ALPHABET A1STD PKONLWCIATIOK 

For suggestions as to the use of this introductory chapter on pronunciation, see 
the Preface. 






u u 


P pe 
q ku 


v ve 

w double ve 


r erre 


x iks 


s esse 
t te 


y i grec 
z zed 



ALPHABET. 

1. The French alphabet is the same with the English. 

a. But the letters k aud w occur only in a few words, borrowed 
out of other languages. 

2. The letters of the alphabet and their names are as 
follows (the names pronounced as French words) : 

a a h ache 

b be i i 

c ce j ji 

d de k ka 

e e 1 elle 

f effe m emme 

g ge n enne 

a. In reading and spelling, however, it is now common to name 
each consonant by its own sound followed by a mute e (18), which 
is pronounced only just enough to let the character of the conso- 
nant be distinguished : thus, for b, be instead of be ; for g, guo or 
je (according as the g is hard or soft) instead of ge ; and so on. 
But when any letter is named by itself, it is always by the name 
given in the above table. 

3. Use of Capitals. — As regards the use of capitals, 
French agrees in general with English, but with the fol- 
lowing important exceptions : 

a. An adjective derived from a proper name does not 

take a capital when used as an adjective, but only when 

it has the value of a noun. 

Thus, un livre francais, a French book, but un Franqais, a 
Frenchman ; des chevaux americains, American horses, but des 
Americains, Americans. 



2 ALPHABET. [3— 

b. The names of the days of the week and of the 
months are not written with capitals in French. 

Thus, lundi, Monday, juin, June. 

c. The word for 7, namely je, is not written with a 
capital. 

DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 

4. The rules as to how a French word is to be divided 
into syllables are of much practical importance in their 
bearing on the mute e (18) and on the nasal vowels (46). 

a. A single consonant between vowels always belongs 

to the following vowel. 

Thus, fi-ni, ai-me-rai, de-cou-ra-ger, ge-ne-reu-se-ment, i-ni- 
mi-ta-bi-li-te. 

b. Also two consonants, if they are such as may begin 
a French word, belong to the following vowel. 

Thus, a-pres, re-gler, a-bri, e-clos, a-droit, tre-fle, ou-tre, 
ou-vris. 

Such groups have r or 1 as their final member : they are br, bl ; 
cr, cl ; dr ; fr, fl ; gr, gl ; pr, pi ; tr ; vr. 

c. A consonant digraph, or group of two consonants repre- 
senting a single sound, is treated as if one consonant only ; such 
are ch, ph, th, gn : thus, a-che-ter, pro-phe-ti-e, pa-the-ti-que, 
a-gneau. 

d. Other groups of two consonants are divided, the former 
consonant going to the preceding vowel, the latter to the follow- 
ing vowel : thus, al-ler, frap-per, in-su, es-pe-ran-ce, ad-mi-ra- 
ble. 

e. Groups of three or more consonants follow the same princi- 
ples of division : thus, com-bler, per-dre, in-stant. 

/. A few exceptional cases occur : x belongs to the preceding 
vowel, as ex-em-ple; n and h. (in words of compound origin) 
are divided, though the h. is silent, as bon-heur; also divide 
in-strui-re, at-mo-sphe-re, etc. 

ACCENTS AND OTHER ORTHOGRAPHIC MARKS. 

5. Three accent-marks are used in French, and consti- 
tute a part of the necessary written form of French 
words. They are the acute accent, as in 6t6, cr66 ; the 



9] OETHOGBAPHIC MARKS. 3 

grave accent, as in des, la, oil ; and the circumflex ac- 
cent, as in pate, fete, ile, hote, futes. 

a. These accent-marks do not at all point out the actually ac- 
cented syllable of a word ; but they in part show differences of 
vowel-sound, in part are means of distinction of words otherwise 
spelt alike, and in part show something respecting the history of 
the word. 

b. It is just as great a fault in writing French to leave off an 
accent or to write a wrong accent, as to leave out a letter or to 
write a wrong letter. 

c. In spelling, the accent should always be mentioned along 
with the vowel to which it belongs : thus, ete is " e acute, t, e 
acute"; a. is "a grave' 1 ; ile is " i circumflex, 1, e"; and so on. 

6. a. The acute accent occurs only on the vowel e. 

b. The grave occurs almost always on e ; but also on a in a 
very few words (16), and on u in ou, where. 

c. The circumflex occurs on all vowels, usually as a sign of con- 
traction, and in the great majority of cases showing the loss of an 
s, formerly written after the vowel now circumflexed : thus, hate 
for older haste (Eng. haste), f§te for feste (Eng. feast), hdte for 
hoste (Eng. host), ile for isle (Eng. isle), futes for fustes (Lat. 
fuistis), maitre for maistre (Eng. master), couter for couster 
(Eng. cost), and so on. 

7. The cedilla is a mark placed under a c (thus, 9), to 
give it its soft or s-sound before the vowels a, 0, u (where 
it would otherwise be pronounced hard, like k : 585) : 
thus, placa, facon, recu, c'a. 

8. The dleresis (Fr. trema) is a double dot, set (as 
sometimes also in English) over a vowel which is to be 
pronounced separately from a preceding vowel, not form- 
ing with it a diphthong : thus, hair (i.e. ha-ir), oui (i.e. ou-i). 

a. It is also used on the vowel that follows a gu, if the u is to be 
pronounced (compare 62/) : thus, ambiguite, ambigue (where 
the e itself is silent). 

9. The apostrophe shows, as in English, the loss of a 
final vowel which has been cut off before another vowel : 
thus, l'ami, s'il. 

a. The vowel thus cut off is almost always e (26c); 
but in a few cases it is a (15) or i (296). 



4 PRONUNCIATION. [10— 

10. The hyphen is used, as in English, but more fre- 
quently and strictly, between parts of words, and whole 
words regarded as having an, especially close connection 
with one another. The cases where it is required will be 
stated below. 

ACCENT. 

11. The actual accent, or stress of voice on one of the 

syllables of a word of two or more syllables, rests in 

French on the last syllable that is fully pronounced — i.e. 

that does not have as its vowel a mute e. 

Thus, palais', mala'de, maladroit', maladroi'te, melancoli'e, 
indubita'ble, reconcilier', reconcilie'rent, indivisibilite'. 

a. This accented syllable regularly and usually represents the one which had 
the accent in Latin: see Part Second, § J8u. 

h. But the stress of voice is very slight. In general, 

the syllables of a French word (except those containing a 

mute e) are uttered with equal distinctness and nearly 

even stress. 

c. This evenness of utterance, and equal distinctness of vowel 
sound in all the syllables of a word, is one of the most striking 
peculiarities of French pronunciation as compared with English, 
and cannot be too much insisted on and practised. 

PRONUNCIATION OF THE VOWELS. 

12. Quantity. — There is no strongly-marked distinc- 
tion of long and short vowels in French, such as there is 
in English (and in German). French vowels are in general 
short, though sometimes a little prolonged — oftenest be- 
fore a final pronounced r, and when circumflexed. 

13. A, a. — a. When final, or followed at the end of a 
word only by a silent consonant or by r, a has very nearly 
the full open sound of English a mfar or father. 

Thus, ira, donna, la, a, cas, bras, plat, drap, car. 
b. Elsewhere, a is a little flattened, like English a in 
flat, cap, jack, only not quite so much so, 



18] TOWELS. 5 

Thus, ami, animal, cabane, malade, bague, place, passe, ame, 
pate, age, chateau. 

c. For an and am nasal, see 48. 

14. The a is silent in aotit, August, aouteron, reaper, taon, 
horse-fly, Caen, Curacao (last syllable), Saone. 

15. The final a of la (article and object-pronoun) is cut off be- 
fore a vowel (or a silent h) : thus, l'amie, l'histoire, il l'aime. 

a. But not that of la as pronoun after the verb, except before 
another object-pronoun: thus, trouve-la aimable ; but envoyez- 

l'y. 

16. An a has the grave accent in the preposition a, to, and 
the adverbs la, there (with most of its compounds, but not cela, 
that), and ca, here (with its compound deca, on this side), to 
distinguish these words from a (verb), la (article and pronoun), 
and 9a (pronoun) ; also in deja, already (and the almost obsolete 
ja). It often has the circumflex ; but never the acute. 

17. E, e. — This vowel has in French a greater variety 
of written form and of pronunciation than any other, 
being written as e, 6, e, e, and pronounced with a mute, 
a closer, and an opener sound. 

18. Mute ok Silent e. — a. A simple e (that is, one 
without accent-sign) standing at the end of a syllable (4) 
has the so called " mute" or " silent" value (e mnet) : 
that is, it is pronounced as briefly and lightly as possi- 
ble, and what sound it has is like that of English u in hut 
or hurt. - 

6. The sound is quite precisely that in English the before a 
consonant in real colloquial utterance : thus, "tell us the name of 
the man." Examples are le, me, de, te-nir, re-gard, re-gar-de, 
re-le-va, ra-me-na, en-ne-mi. In many situations — especially at 
the end of a word of more than one syllable, as table, rare, ma- 
chine, abortive — it is in ordinary utterance entirely silent ; but 
still it makes theoretically a syllable (thus, ra-re, ma-chi-ne, a- 
bor-ti-ve), which counts as such in poetry, and in singing must 
be uttered as much as any other syllable. In learning French 
pronunciation, the pupil must first be able to give the right sound 
to the vowel, and then duly to slight or Omit it. 

c. The same sound belongs also to the e of es at the end of a 
word (excepting in the monosyllables les, des, ces, mes, tes, ses), 
and to that of ent at the end of the 3d pers. plural of a verb : 
thus, rares, machines, certes, donnes, donnent, regardent, don- 
nassent. 



6 PRONUNCIATION. [18— 

d. More exceptional cases are dessus, dessous, ressource, and 
most other words beginning with ress-; also faisant etc. (39c), 
and monsieur (546). 

e. The e of je, i", when following the verb, is completely 
silent, in the same manner as at the end of a word of more than 
one syllable : thus, ai-je, have I? pronounced as if written 
aige ; suis-je, am If as if suige ; avais-je, had If as if avaige ; 
and so on. 

19. The acute and grave accents, as used on e, are 
signs giving it a full pronunciation, where otherwise it 
would be mute. No 6 or e is ever written unless with- 
out the accent the e would (by the rules of the preced- 
ing paragraph) have its mute value. 

20. a. As between the acute and grave, the general 
rule is that the grave is written if a next following sylla- 
ble in the same word is a mute one; otherwise, the acute. 

Thus, pe-re, che-re, le-ve, ce-de, me-ne-rai, pe-le-rin ; but 
ce-der, ce-da, ce-de, ce-le-bri-te ; and de-ce-de, ce-le-bre, ce-le- 
brent, pre-fe-res, te-ne-bres. 

But to this rule there are some exceptions: 

b. An e remains in the future and conditional of a verb having 
e in the infinitive: thus, ce-de-rai, ce-de-rais. 

c. An e, and not e, is usually written before g : thus, col-le-ge, 
ab-re"-ge. 

But the French. Academy has recently ruled that e should stand 
before g, just as before other consonants: thus, college, abrege. 

d. On the other hand, e is written before s at the end of a few 
words : thus, des, tres, pres, apres, expres, progres, succes. 

e. There are a few other special exceptions : thus, only e is in- 
itial, as in e-le-ver ; e is used in certain individual words, as de- 
velopper, evenement, medecin. 

21. a. It is to be noted that the occurrence of two 
successive mute syllables in the same word is generally 
avoided. Thus, no word is ever composed of, or ends 
in, two mute syllables ; nor do two often come together 
in the middle of a word ; at the beginning they are not 
quite so rare (especially when re or de is prefixed to a 
verb already beginning with a mute syllable, as venir, 



25] VOWELS. 7 

revenir, devenir, and even redevenir). And no word ever 
begins with a mute e. 

b. Hence, such words as leve, mene, jete, chere, complete, ap- 
peles, leves, menes, cheres, or (as 3d pi. of a verb) levent, me- 
nent, are impossible in French; and wherever they would occur 
in the regular processes of word-formation or inflection, the con- 
currence of the two mute syllables is avoided by giving a full 
pronunciation to the first. This is oftenest done by writing the 
grave accent over it : thus, leve, mene, chere, complete, menes, 
menent — but sometimes by doubling the consonant (if it be 1 or 
n or t) instead : thus, belle (bel-le), appelles, sienne, prennent 
(3d pi.), nette, jette. 

o. Hence also (since a following je is pronounced as if a part of 
the same word with a preceding verb : 18e) the final e of a verb- 
form before je takes an accent, and this accent is the acute : thus, 
donne-je. 

22. The e with acute accent, or 6, has the sound of 
English so-called " long «," in day and they, and the like 
(yet without the vanishing sound of " long <?," with which 
our " long a" usually ends). It is called the close e (e 
ferme). 

23. The e with grave accent, or e, has an opener sound, 
nearly like our " short e" in ebb, send, and the like ; and 
it even in some cases, especially before a following r, ap- 
proaches our still opener sound of e in there and the like. 
It is called the open e (e ouvert). 

24. The e with circumflex accent, or e, has the open 

sound, like e. 

a. The § is not, like e and e, restricted to situations where the 
e would otherwise be mute, but it is found (though not often) be- 
fore a consonant in the same syllable : thus, foret, ben§t. 

25. An e that is followed by a consonant in the same 
syllable (whether that consonant be pronounced or silent) 
is not mute, but has either the closer sound of 6 or the 
opener of e. 

a. It has the closer sound in the final syllables (with silent con- 
sonants) er, ez, ed : thus, citer, chantier, nez, citez, pied. 
6. It has the opener sound before a pronounced r (whether 



8 PEON UNCI ATIOK. [25— 

final or not), and usually before a double consonant ; also before 
(silent) t final : thus, fer, verre, elle, nette, mienne, richesse, 
valet. 

26. E in a few words lias an irregular pronunciation : 

a. It is pronounced as an a would be, before n and m, in 
femme, woman, solennel, solemn, and its derivatives, and ad- 
verbs ending in -emment; also in nenni, nay, hennir, neigh, 
indemnite, indemnity. 

b. It is sometimes used after g merely as a device for showing 
that the g is to have its soft sound, being itself not pronounced 
(62e): thus, mangeai, mangeons. 

c. The final mute e of a monosyllable is generally cut 
off before a vowel, and replaced by an apostrophe. 

Such monosyllables are : the article le ; the pronouns je, me, te, 
se, ce, le, que; the preposition de; the conjunction que; the 
negative particle ne. But the subject-pronouns je and ce are not 
thus abbreviated when they come after the verb ; nor the object- 
pronoun le in the same position, except before another object- 
pronoun, as envoyez-1'y. 

The same elision takes place also in jusque ; and in lorsque, 
puisque, quoique before il, elle, on, un. Further, in a few com- 
pound words, as quelqu'un, presqu'ile, entr'acte, aujourd'hui. 

d. For en and em nasal, see 48. 

27. I, i. — The vowel i has in French invariably the 
sound of English " long <?," or of i in the words machine, 
pique. 

Thus, il, ri, vite, ici, midi, defini, divise, visibility. 

a. The error of pronouncing a French i anywhere like the 
English " short i n of pin, finish, and the like, must be very care- 
fully avoided. 

b. For i before a liquid 1, see 68 ; for in and im nasal, see 50. 

28. a. An i followed by mute e has, of course, its full pro- 
nunciation, the e being the vowel of a succeeding mute syllable : 
thus, vie, amies, rient (divided vi-e, a-mi-es, ri-ent). 

b. But an i followed in the same syllable by an e not mute, or 
by any other vowel (or diphthong), is uttered very briefly, as a 
mere ^/-prefix to the following sound : thus, pied, ciel, metier, 
etiez, arriere, arriere, vierge, vienne, vient, vieille, lieu, mon- 
sieur, viole, avions, fiacre, diable, bestiaux. And even if the 
i is (in verse) regarded as forming a separate syllable, it is apt to 
lose more or less of its full quantity before another vowel : thus, 
manier, priere, pieux, menciiant, niais, action. 



33] VOWELS. 9 

29. a. An i never takes any other accent-mark than the cir- 
cumflex : thus, ile, plait, fit, maitre. 

6. A final i is elided only in the conjunction si, if, before the 
pronouns il, ils, he, they : thus, s'il, s'ils. 

30. 0, o. — a. The vowel o has in general the sound of 

the English o in note (but without the vanishing sound 

of oo, in which the English " long o" usually ends). 

It is so pronounced especially when it is circumflexed, or is the 
final sound of a word : thus, c6te, notre, role, trone, mot, cachot, 
trop, nos. 

b. But in many words o has an opener sound, ap- 
proaching that of English o in not (or midway between 
that and the o of come)', and before a final ^-sound it 
comes near to our o in nor. 

Thus, robe, mode, Rome, dogue, ecole, dorer, notre, porter, 
occuper, modeste ; and or, mort, corps. 

31. a. The o is silent in faon, fawn; paon, peacock; Laon 
(pronounced as fan, etc.). 

6. An o never takes any other accent-mark than the circumflex : 
thus, hote, roti, hdpital. 

c. For the diphthong oi, see 43 ; for on and om nasal, see 49. 

32. TJ, u. — The French u has a sound unlike anything 
in English (but precisely agreeing with that of the Ger- 
man " modified u" or " u with umlaut," written u). It 
is produced by a combination of that position of the 
tongue with which ee (as in meet) is made, with that po- 
sition of the lips with which oo (as in moot) is made. Fix 
the tongue, then, to say ee, and, without moving it, round 
the lips as if to say oo, and the product is the sound de- 
sired. 

Thus, yu, du, nul, pure, sure, sucre, minute, ferule, occuper, 
multitude, minuscule. 

33. a. U is generally silent after q ; for the exceptions, see 
under q (726). 

b. U is also regularly silent after g, when itself followed by 
another vowel, usually e or i, except when the following e or i 
has the diaeresis (see 8) : thus, guerre, guide, langue, longueur, 
fatigue, fatigue, voguer, vogua, voguons. For the exceptious, 
see under g (62/). 



10 PRONUNCIATION". [33— 

c. The um at the end of a Latin word is pronounced nearly as 
in English : thus, forum, album. In mameluk and a few other 
foreign words, it has the sound of English oo. 

d. For un and um nasal, see 51. 

34. U often has the circumflex accent : thus, du, mur, chute, 
fut, fates. It never takes the acute ; nor the grave except in ou 
wliere (for distinction from ou or). 

35. A u followed by a mute e keeps its own full sound : thus, 
vue, vues, saluent (3d pi.). But before any other vowel — name- 
ly, a, i, and e not mute — in the same syllable, it is abbreviated 
and slighted, becoming nearly like English w, while the following 
vowel has the principal vowel-sound of the syllable. Thus, in 
words where it is by exception pronounced after g and q, lingual, 
linguiste, Guise, loquace, loquele, equestre ; after other conso- 
nants (where it retains more of the peculiar French sound of u), 
lui, ennui, autrui, fruit, fuite, cuir, nuire, suivre, cuisse, puis- 
sant, duel, ecuelle. 

36. Y, y. — The sound of y, when it is the vowel of a 

syllable, is the same with that of i : thus, y, style, sys- 

teme, syllabe, physique, Yves. 

a. The value of i belongs to y also when followed in the same 
syllable by another vowel, as in yeux, eyes, Yonne, and a few 
other proper names and foreign words. 

37. A y between two vowels has the value of double 
i, or i-i, one of the i's belonging to the vowel of the pre- 
ceding syllable, the other (as a brief y-like prefix : 2Sb) 
to that of the following syllable. 

Thus, essayer is pronounced as if written essai-ier ; appuyer, 
as if appui-ier ; envoyer, as if envoi-ier ; and so on. 

a. The same value belongs to the y in pays (pronounced as if 
written pai-is), and in its derivatives pay sage, paysan. 

6. A y is not allowed as final, nor in general before mute e ; 
and, both in derivation and in inflection, the interchange of i and 
y, according as final or not, and as a mute e or any fully pro- 
nounced vowel follows, is very common : thus, joie, joyeux ; roi, 
royal ; aie, ayons, ayez, aient ; appuie, appuies, appuyons, ap- 
puyez, appuient ; and so on. 

c. But y is in some verbs allowed to stand after a even before 
mute e, as essaye ; and it is the rule (though rare) after e, as 
grasseye, asseye. 



41] VOWELS. 11 



DIPHTHONGS OR VOWEL COMPOUNDS. 

38. There are a few very common combinations of two 
vowels (or three), which represent for the most part sim- 
ple sounds, but which are commonly called diphthongs ; 
they are ai and ei, au (and eau), en (and oeu), ou, and oi. 

a. It is to be noticed that real diphthongal sounds, like those 
in English file, foul, foil, are altogether wanting in French. 

b. As to vowels followed by mute e, see 45 ; as to the vowel- 
groups, compound both in form and in pronunciation, which be- 
gin with i and u, see 286, 35. 

39. Ai and ei. — These compounds have no other 
sounds than those of e when not mute, or of 6 or e. 

a. Ai final is pronounced as e : thus, gai, donnai, donnerai. 
Elsewhere, it is usually like e, especially in the endings ais, ait : 
thus, etais, aurait. 

b. Ei (which is never final) has usually the sound that e (not 
mute) would have in the same situation : thus, peine, reine. 

c. In certain forms of the verb faire, do (XXXII. 8) — namely, 
the pres. pple. faisant and those following its analogy, also in 
the compounds of faisant and the derivatives faisance and fai- 
seur — ai is pronounced as a silent e. 

d. For ai and ei nasal, with following n or m, see 50c; for 
their pronunciation before liquid 1, see 686. 

40. Au and eau are pronounced as o would be in the 
same situation. 

Thus, au, eau, beau, beaute, tombeau, chevaux, aurai, Maure. 

41. Eu has a peculiar sound, nearly like that of Eng- 
lish u mfur, hurt (or nearly like German o). 

Thus, feu, lieu, leur, veuve, jeune, peuple, aveugle, heureux. 

a. (Eu, which is much less common, is pronounced in the same 
manner as eu : thus, vobu, oeuf, boeuf, oeuvre. 

6. In all parts of the very common verb avoir, have, eu is 
pronounced as if simple u (32): thus, eu, eue, eus, eurent, eusse, 
etc. The same is true in a few words after g, where the e is only 
written in order to preserve the soft sound of the g (62e) : thus, 
mangeure, gageure. 

c. In a word or two occurs oe before liquid 1 (68 : written il) ; it 
is pronounced like eu : thus, ceil, eye. 

d. After c and g, before liquid 1 (written il or ill), in a very 



12 PEOHUNCIATIOH. [41— 

few words, ue is written instead of en, and is pronounced like eu : 
thus, cueillir, orgueil. 
e. For eu nasal, with following n, see 51. 

42. Ou. — The combination ou is everywhere pro- 
nounced like English oo, in pool, boon, etc. 

Thus, ou, ou (34), cou, bout, hiboux, coupe, source, courte, jou- 
jou, douloureux. 

a. In a few words, ou is followed in the same syllable by a 
pronounced vowel (not mute e). In such a case, the following 
vowel has the principal vowel-sound of the syllable, and the ou is 
shortened before it to a sound nearly like that of English w: 
thus, oui, ouais, ouest, bivouac, fouet, fouetter, etc. 

43. Oi. — The combination oi, which is extremely com- 
mon in French, is everywhere pronounced like the Eng- 
lish wa in was (not with the broader sound of wa in 

water). 

Thus, moi, soi, foi, oiseau, toile, ploie, cloitre, crois, trois, 
adroite, froideur, proie. 

a. The i is silent in oignon, onion. 

44. a. As to oy as substitute and equivalent of oi-i, see 37 ; as 
to oi nasal, with following n or m, see 50<7. 

b. Until recently, many syllables now written with ai were 
written with oi, and the latter spelling is still occasionally met 
with : thus, etois, Anglois, connoitre, foible, and so on. Tbey 
should be pronounced as when written with ai. It is still in good 
usage to write oi in roide and its derivatives, but the usual pro- 
nunciation is that of raide. 

45. As after i (28a) and u (35), so also after e and the vowel- 
compounds, a mute e may stand without making (in prose) any 
difference in their pronunciation: thus, fee, cree, crees, creent 
(3dpl.); gaie, gaies, aient (3d pi.); bleue, bleues ; moue, loue, 
loues, louent (3d pi.); oie, croie, croies, croient (3d pi. ) ; pluie, 
appuie, appuies, appuient. In all such cases, the e is the vowel 
of an additional mute syllable : thus, fe-e, lou-es, croi-ent. 

NASAL VOWELS. 

46. If a vowel, simple or compound, is followed in 
the same syllable by n or m, the n or m loses its separate 
pronunciation, and the vowel itself is made nasal. 

a. A nasal vowel is one that is pronounced partly through the 
mouth and partly through the nose : that is, while the mouth- 






50] VOWELS. 13 

organs are fixed as in the utterance of an ordinary vowel, the 
passage from the mouth into the nose is also opened, so that a 
part of the expelled air goes through the nose and resounds there, 
giving a nasal twang to the vowel-tone. Beginners may help ac- 
custom themselves to recognize and produce this nasal twang by 
shutting the nostrils with the fingers, in which case the nasality 
becomes especially loud and conspicuous. 

b. In learning to pronounce the nasal vowels, the fault especi- 
ally to be avoided is the shutting of the mouth-organs after the 
vowel-sound, so as to end it with anything like an n or w^-sound. 
A habit of so doing, if once form eel, is extremely hard to get rid 
of. Better than this is to leave the vowel at first unnasalized, 
hoping to learn by degrees to give it the right quality. 

47. There are in French four nasal vowels, or nasalized 
vowel-sounds. They are very nearly those heard in the 
English words wan, song, sang, and swig, or on, pawn, 
pan, and pu n — as these would be if the n- and ^-sounds 
in them were not separately uttered, but had their nasal 
tone as it were absorbed into the vowel itself. 

48. The nasalized vowel-sound of English wan or on 

belongs in French to an and am, and to en and em. 

Thus, an, pan, banc, quand, lance, manger, ebranler, ban- 
quet, anse, aya.nt, vanter ; camp, lampe, ample, chambre ; en, 
dent, enfant, pente, prudence, genre ; temps, trempe, remplir, 
membre, embleme. 

a. The same sound is heard, of course, after the prefixed half- 
vowel sounds of i, y, etc., in the same syllable: thus, viande, 
croyant (pronounced as croi-iant), patience, orient, pingouin. 
But en after i or y has sometimes a different sound ; see 50e. 

49. The nasalized vowel-sound of English pawn or 

song belongs in French to on and om. 

Thus, on, non, done, long, plonge, annonce, conter, ronde; 
nom, plomb, tomber, romps, rompre, combler, comte. So also 
action and the like. 

50. a. The nasalized vowel-sound of English sang or 

pan belongs in French especially to in and im. 

Thus, vin, vint, vinrent, vinsse, pincer, Inde, ingrat ; imbu, 
timbre, simple, impur. 

b. The same sound belongs to ym and yn, in the few words in 
which they occur : thus, thym, nymphe, symbole ; syntaxe. 



14 PRONUKCIATION. [50— 

c. The same sound belongs to the compound vowels 

ai and ei with following n or m. 

Thus, sain, sainte, craindre ; faim, essaim ; sein, serein, pein- 
dre, peinture. 

d. The oi of oin has not its ordinary value, but the in of it has 
the regular nasal sound of in, to which the o gives a prefix like a 
w. Thus, loin, moins, ointe, oindre, joindre, accointance. 

e. Final en after i (or y), and en everywhere after i in the 
forms of the verbs tenir and venir, has the sound of in : thus, 
rien, bien, sien, moyen (pronounced as moi-ien), tiens, viendra. 
Many pronounce in the same way final en after 6 : thus, euro- 
peen, vendeen. En and em are also pronounced as in in a few 
proper names and foreign words : thus, Mentor, Memphis, Ben- 
gale, Rubens, agenda, appendice, pensum, examen, pentame- 
tre, etc. 

51. The nasalized vowel-sound of English sung or 
pun belongs in French to un, um, and eun. 

Thus, un, brun, tribun, defunt, lundi, emprunter ; parfum, 
humble; jeun. 

a. .In a few foreign proper names, un has the sound of on : 
thus, Dunkerque, Sund. 

o. In reading Latin, and in a few words taken unchanged from 
the Latin — as album, pensum, museum, Te-deum, triumvir, also 
in rhum, rum — um is pronounced very nearly as in English, the 
vowel not being nasal. 

52. If the n or m is followed by a vowel, the preced 
ing vowel is of course not nasal, because (4a) the n or 
m is not in the same syllable w T ith it. 

Thus, tenir, semer, honorer, une, inutile (divided te-nir, ho- 
no-rer, i-nu-ti-le, etc.) ; also inhumain, inhabite, etc. (the n be- 
ing silent, and not counting as a consonant : see 64). 

a. But in enivrer and enorgueillir and their derivatives the e 
is nasal. 

53. Also when the n or m is doubled, the preceding 
vowel is not nasal. 

Thus, annee, hebamme, tienne, ennemi, femme, lionne, 
homme, innocent, immoler. 

a. But in ennui and its derivatives, in ennoblir, also in em- 
mener, and most other words beginning with emm (from en-m), 
the e is nasal. 

b. The combination mn is also treated as if a double letter, so 






57] CONSONANTS. 15 

far as concerns the nasalization of a preceding vowel : thus, con- 
damner (cf. 69a), indemnite (26a), hymne, gymnase. 

54. Other cases of vowels which, against the general rule, are 
not pronounced as nasal are : 

a. The en of ent in the 3d plural of verbs (the e being here 
mute : 18c). 

b. The on of monsieur, being pronounced as a mute e (18o T ). 

c. Final am, em, en, im in many foreign proper names : thus, 
Priam, Abraham, Jerusalem, Niemen, Ibrahim, ^phraim. 

d. A few other t words of foreign origin and form : thus, amen, 
hymen, specimen, Eden, decemvir, Nemrod, Kremlin. 

55. As to the pronunciation of the n or m of a final nasal syl- 
lable upon a following vowel, see 86c. 

PEONTJNCIAHON OF THE CONSONANTS. 

56. General Rules. — a. Final consonants, either one 

or more than one, are in general silent at the end of a 

French word. 

Thus, pied, trop, les, fait, prix, maux, nez ; plomb, rand, 
pieds, draps, romps, faits, doigt, vingt, vents, vends, instincts. 

b. But final c, f, 1, and r are usually pronounced. 

Thus, sec, avec, tic, bloc, sue, turc ; fief, vif, neuf ; bal, cruel, 
vol, seul ; par, fer, finir, or, sur, martyr. 

For exceptional cases, in which these four finals are silent, or 
others than these are pronounced, see under the several letters ; 
for the pronunciation of a final usually silent upon a following 
initial vowel, see 84 etc. 

c. Consonants written double are, as in English, pro- 

nounced as single. 

Thus, abbe, greffier, pelle, couronne, frappant, arriver 
blesse, jettera. 

For certain exceptions, see below, 58c (c), 62c (g), 73<2 (r). 

57. B, b. — The letter b is pronounced as in English. 

Thus, beau, bien, robe, barbier, bombe, subtil. 

_ a. Final b is silent after m : thus, plomb ; but after a vowel 
(in a few cases only, mostly foreign words and proper names) it 
is pronounced : thus, club, radoub, Achab, Joab. 

b. B is silent also in a few proper names : thus, Doubs, Lefeb- 
vre. 



16 PRONUHCIATIOH. [58— 

58. C, c. — This consonant has in French, as in Eng- 
lish, two sounds : a soft sound, like s ; and a hard sound, 
like k. 

As to ch, see the next paragraph. 

a. C is soft before e and i (or y), and the compound 

vowels in which e or i is first (ei, eu, ie). 

Thus, ce, ceci, ici, place, proces, douce, ceint, ceux, adoucie, 
ciel, cymbale. 

h. In all other situations — before other vowels, before 

consonants, and as final — c has its hard sound. 

Thus, car, caisse, cause, col, coeur, cour, cure, cuir; croc, 
clair ; lac, sec, tic, roc, due. 

c. A double c is pronounced as single only if the second c 
would be hard according to the above rule ; otherwise, cc is like 
ks or x : thus, succes, accident ; but accord, acclamer, accroc. 

d. C is soft also before a, o, u, if it has the cedilla (7): thus, 
placa, placons, francais, recu, c/a (from ce a). 

e. For the exchange of c and qu, when c comes to be followed 
by a soft vowel, see 12a. 

f. The c of second and its derivatives is pronounced like g. 

g. A final c is usually pronounced (566). But it is silent after 
a nasal vowel: thus, blanc, done, vainc; — also in some words 
after r: thus, clerc, pore, marc; — also in estomac, stomach; 
tabac, tobacco; lacs, snare; eric, jack; broc, jug; croc, hook; 
accroc, nook; caoutchouc, india-rubber. 

59. Ch, ch. — This combination has in French regu- 
larly and usually the sound of English sh, or eh in ma- 
chine. 

Thus, chasse, chaise, chaud, chez, cochon, choux, choix, chute, 
chuinter ; hache, recherche, chuchoter, ponche. 

a. But there are many words of foreign origin (chiefly Greek) 
in which ch has the sound of k. Thus, always before a conso- 
nant, as Christ, Chretien, chronique, technologie, chloral, 
fuchsia, yacht ; — but often also before a vowel, as in archange, 
archeologie, chaos, chceur, cholera, orchestre, echo, and other 
less common words ; and in proper names, as Chaldee, Bacchus, 
Charybde, Antiochus, Chanaan, Moloch, Munich, Michel-Ange, 
Achab. 

&. As special irregularities, ch is silent in almanach ; it is usu- 
ally pronounced as g in drachme. For sch, see 75c. 



62] COKSOHAKTS. 17 

60. D, d. — This consonant is pronounced as in Eng- 
lish. 

Thus, de, des, dedire, dindon, droit, guide, mode, poudre, 
plaindre. 

a. Final d (usually silent : 56a) is pronounced in sud, south, 
and in most proper names, as Alfred, David, Cid, Nemrod, 
Joad (but not in Madrid, Saint-Cloud). 

61. F, f. — This consonant is pronounced as in English. 

Thus, faux, feu, fou, fleur, froid, fief, sauf, affaire, forfait, 
serf, neuf. 

a. Final f (usually pronounced : 566) is silent in clef, Tcey, in 
cerf (as usually pronounced), in the chef of chef-d'oeuvre, in the 
plurals ceufs, boeufs, nerfs (though pronounced in the singular of 
these words, except in nerf used figuratively), in the combina- 
tions bceuf gras, ceuf dur, ceuf frais, nerf de boeuf, and in Neuf- 
chatel. Also the f of neuf, nine, is silent before an initial con- 
sonant of a word numbered by it : thus, neuf livres, neuf cents 
(not in le neuf Janvier, Jan. 9th; neuf par an, nine a year, etc.). 

62. G, g. — This consonant has in French, as in Eng- 
lish, two sounds : a soft sound, like English z in azure 
or s m pleasure f and a hard sound, like English g in gig. 

a. Gr has its soft sound before the vowels e, i, y. 

Thus, gele, gele, genie, geindre, orageux, gilet, bougie, 
gymnase. 

b. In other situations — 'before any other vowel than 
e, i, y, and before a consonant — g has its hard sound. 

Thus, gant, gai, gauche, gomme, goitre, gout, aigu ; gloire, 
gros, flegme, ogdoade. For g with following n, see the next 
paragraph. 

o. Of double gg; (which very rarely occurs), the second g is 
pronounced soft if followed by e, i, y : thus, suggerer (but ag- 
glutiner). 

d. A final g (generally silent : 56a) is pronounced (hard) in 
joug and in a few foreign words and proper names, as zigzag, 
grog, Zadig. By some it is pronounced in legs. 

e. In order to preserve the soft sound of a g, when in the 
changes of inflection or derivation it would come to stand before 
a or o or u, an e (not itself pronounced) is often written after it : 
thus, from manger come mangeant, mangeons, mangeure. 
The same silent e used to soften a g is found in a few independ- 
ent words, as geai, George, Geoffroi, pigeon. 



18 PRONTTNCIATIOX. [62— 

/. A u after g, when the u is followed by e or i or y, has usu- 
ally in like manner the office of giving the g its hard sound, and 
is itself silent. But u after g is pronounced when the following 
vowel has the diaeresis (8), also in aiguille, aiguiser, lingual, 
linguiste, arguer (and their derivatives;, and a few proper names, 
as Guise, Guide, Guy, Guyane. 

g. The u of a verb like conjuguer is retained through the 
whole inflection : thus, conjuguant, conjuguons, etc. 

63. The combination gn has in general a peculiar 

liquid sound, nearly like English ny in lanyard or ni in 

union. 

Thus, gagner, re'gner, regne, ligne, cicogne, repugne, cygne, 
magnifique, ignorant, rognon, seigneur. 

This is in reality a palatal ^-sound, made with the flat of the 
tongue, instead of its tip, against the fore part of the roof of the 
mouth. 

a. But in a considerable number of words, coming from other 
languages and not yet fully naturalized, the g and n are pro- 
nounced separately, the g having its usual hard sound before a 
consonant. Some of the commonest of these are : gnome (and 
all other words with initial gn), agnat, cognat, magnat, geog- 
nosie, cognition, stagnant, expugnable. 

b. In a few words, the g is silent before n : thus, signet, Com- 
piegne, Clugny, Regnard, Regnault. 

64. H, h. — This consonant is not pronounced in 
French ; no such sound as the English h should ever be 
heard in any French word. 

a. But there is a considerable number of words in 
which an initial h, though now silent, is treated as if it 
were still pronounced — namely, by the absence before it 
of the elision (26c), of the carrying-on of a final consonant 
(84), etc. Such an initial h is called " aspirate h," the 
other being called, for distinction, " mute or silent h." 

b. The commonest of the words beginning with aspirate h are 
as follows : 



hache 


hanter 


harnais 


heros 


hors 


haie 


harangue 


harpe 


heurter 


houille 


hair 


haras ser 


hasard 


hibou 


huguenot 


halle 


hardes 


hate 


hideux 


huit 


halte 


hardi 


haut 


homard 


humer 


hameau 


haricot 


heraut 


honte 


hurler 



68] COFSOKA^TS. 19 

c. In general, the other words related with these have aspirate 
h also : thus, haine and haissable like hair, hauteur and hausse 
like haut ; but heroine, heroique, heroisme, have mute h, though 
heros has aspirate. And the h of huit is silent after dix. 

d. Initial aspirate h is generally marked in the dictionaries 
with an inverted apostrophe — thus, ' haie, ' heros, ' honte, etc. ; 
and the same method will be followed in this work in the vocabu- 
laries. 

e. The silent initial h is treated as if it had no exist- 
ence, or as if the word actually began with the following 
vowel ; the aspirate initial h is treated like any other con- 
sonant. 

Thus, l'homme like rombre, cet homme like cet ombre, son 
heure like son euphonie, etc. ; but le hasard, ce heros, sa harpe, 
etc. 

/. The words oui and onze (with onzieme) are treated as if 
they began with an aspirate h : thus, que oui, le onze. 

g. H with preceding c forms a compound consonant, pro- 
nounced like English sit ; see 59 above. In a number of words of 
foreign origin, it follows other consonants, but without changing 
their usual pronunciation : thus, thee, atheiste, Rhin, rhum, 
myrrhe. Ph is pronounced as f : thus, philosophe. 

65. J, j. — This consonant has in French invariably 
the sound of English z in azure, or s in pleasure (the 
same as soft g : 62). 

Thus, jamais, je, jeu, joie, joujou, juge, julf. 

66. K, k. — This consonant occurs in French only in a 
few borrowed words ; it has the sound of English h. 

Thus, kilometre, kepi, kermesse, kiosque. 
a. The ft-sound is represented in French words by c hard (586), 
by ch (59a), and by qu (72). 

67. L, 1. — This consonant, except when liquid, is pro- 
nounced in French as in English. 

Thus, le, la, lilie, loi, lui, lucre, lamelle, folle, nul, table, 
boucle, souffle, ebranle, simple, hurle. 

a. L is silent in soul, surfeited, pouls, pulse, aulx, pi. of ail, 
garlic; and before a consonant after au, eu, ou in the endings of 
a few other words. 

68. An 1 following i in the same syllable is generally 
made liquid — that is, it is pronounced as a close y. 



20 PRONUNCIATION. [68— 

Thus, cil, babil, mil, millet, avril, peril, gresil, fille, cedille, 
billard, artillerie, guillotine, bar billon. 

a. The sound of French " liquid 1" (1 mouille) was formerly 
that of a palatal I, one made with the flat of the tongue, instead 
of its tip, against the roof of the mouth, nearly like English ly 
in steelyard, or Hi in brilliant; and this sound it still has in parts 
of France ; but the now prevailing and accepted pronunciation 
has changed the Zy-sound into a simple y. 

b. If the i before 1 is preceded by another vowel, simple or 
compound, that vowel has its own sound, not forming a com- 
pound with the i, the latter's sole office being to show the liquid 
sound of the 1: thus, travail, travailler, conseil, conseiller, 
vieil, vieillir, seuil, feuille, feuillage, houille, houilleur. And 
ue (after c or g) and oe before liquid il have the sound of eu: 
thus, accueil, orgueil, ceil. But in poil the oi is the usual diph- 
thong, and 1 has its full sound. 

c. But final 1 is silent after i in a number of words. The com- 
monest of these are : baril, barrel, chenil, kennel, coutil, tick- 
ing, fournil, bakehouse, fusil, gun, nombril, navel, outil, tool, 
sourcil, eyebroiv; also 1 in fils, son (74<7), and the plural gen- 
tilshommes, gentlemen (in gentilhomme it is liquid ; also in 
gentil, nice, except at the end of a sentence or when followed by 
a consonant, when it is silent). 

d. Final 1 has the proper 1-sound after i in a number of words : 
thus, il, Tie, fil, thread, mil, thousand, Nil, Nile, vil, civil, 
exil, profil, subtil, viril, pueril, voiatil; further, according 
to the more usual pronunciation, in cil, avril, and peril (pro- 
nounced also with liquid or with silent 1). 

In fact, il final except after a vowel is liquid only in the few 
words given at the beginning of this paragraph ; in some of the 
others, usage varies. 

e. At the beginning of a word, ill is not liquid : thus, illatif, 
illegal, illimite, illogique, illustre. 

f. Double 1 after i has the full 1-sound also in the interior 
and at the end of a number of words : thus, ville, town, mille, 
thousand, tranquille, pupille, ward, distiller, distil, vaciller, 
vacillate, pusillanime, axillaire, axillary (with their compounds, 
and derivatives), and a few others. 

69. M, m. — Except where it makes the preceding 

vowel nasal, and is itself not pronounced (46 etc.), m has 

the same sound in French as in English. 

Thus, me, ma, m§me, moi, meurt, mur, femme, homme, imme- 
more, hymne. 



73] CONSO^AKTS. 21 

a. But m is pronounced as n in automne (not in automnal), 
etc. ; also in damner and its compounds and derivatives. 

70. N, n. — Except where it makes the preceding 

vowel nasal, and is itself not pronounced (46 etc.), n has 

the same sound in French as in English. 

Thus, nappe, naine, ne, neuf, nid, non, noir, nouveau, mil, 
nuire, bonne, brune. 

71. P, p. — This consonant is in general pronounced 
as in English. 

Thus, pape, pere, peuple, pourpre, pur, puits, plaire, pre, 
frapper, huppe, soupe. 

a. Final p is usually silent (56), as drap, trop, coup; also, a p 
followed by another silent final, as rompt, temps, corps. It is 
also silent in sept, seven, and septieme, seventh (not in other 
derivatives of sept, as septembre) ; in bapteme, baptism, and 
baptiser, baptize ; in compter, reckon, dompter, subdue, exemp- 
ter, prompter, sculpter, and the words related with these (ex- 
cept exemption, impromptu). But final p is pronounced in cap, 
cape, and in a few proper names, as Alep. For ph, see 64^. 

72. d, q. — This consonant is almost always followed 
in French, as in English, by u ; but in French the u is 
generally silent, and the combination qu has the sound 
of A 

Thus, quatre, quai, que, queue, quelque, qui, quint, quotidien, 
quoique, calquer, marquer, vainquis, vainquons. 

a. A hard &-sound before e or i cannot be written in French 
except by qu ; and hence qu sometimes takes the place of c in 
inflection and derivation when e or i is added : thus, vainquez, 
vainquent, vainquis, from vaincre; turque, from turc; ca- 
duque, from caduc. 

b. But in a number of French words qu has the same sound as 
in English. The commonest of these are quadrat, quadri-, 
quadru-, quarto, quaterne, questeur, quiescent, quiet (according 
to some authorities), quinqua-, quinque-, quintette, quintuple, 
equateur, equation, equestre, equilateral, requiem. 

c. A final q occurs (save in a very few proper names) only in 
cinq, five, and coq, cock, and is usually pronounced as a k ; but 
it is silent in coq d'Inde, and in cinq before an initial consonant 
of a word numbered by it : thus, cinq livres, five books (not in le 
cinq mai, May Uh, etc.). 

73. R, r. — This consonant is always more or less rolled 



22 PKONUNCIATIOK. [73— 

or trilled in French, and so is made much more distinct 

than in ordinary English pronunciation. 

Thus, rare, frere, rire, aurore, parure, roi, trois, froid, croix, 
droit, partir, porteur, arbre, meurtre, bruit, grand, pres, vrai, 
arriverai. 

a. A final r is regularly pronounced (56 h) ; but it is 
usually silent after e in words of more than one syllable. 

Thus, silent in fier (verb), aimer, parler, leger, entier, officier, 
etc.; pronounced in cher, fer, fier (adj.), hier, mer, etc., and, 
before other silent finals, in clerc, perd, perds, cerf, tiers, sert, 
etc. 

o. Final r is also pronounced after e in the words of more than 
one syllable, amer, bitter, cancer, cuiller, spoon, enfer, hell, 
hiver, winter, and a few foreign words, chiefly proper names, as 
magister, Jupiter, Esther, Oder. It is not silent in such words 
before another silent final, unless that final be the plural-sign s : 
thus, it is pronounced in envers, Anvers, univers, acquiers, 
desert, Robert (but silent in entiers, ofliciers, etc.). 

c. Final r is silent in monsieur, messieurs. 

d. In the future and conditional of the verbs courir, run, 
mourir, die, querir, ask, and their compounds, the double r is dis- 
tinctly to be heard as two separate r's : thus, courrai, mourrais, 
acquerront-. 

74. S, s. — This consonant is in general pronounced 

with the sound which it ordinarily has in English (in our 

words sense, sister, etc.). 

Thus, sa, se, si, son, sur, espace, estime, poste, prisme, fiasque, 
disparu, descriptif, transcrire, anse, penser. 

a. But s between two vowels has the sound of our z. 

Thus, raser, raison, lese, misere, rose, blouse, ruse; also 
deshonneur (silent h), deshabiller, etc. 

b. S has the sound of z also in trans- before a vowel : thus, 
transaction, transhumer (h silent), transitif; also in Alsace 
and alsacien, and in balsamique; also in a few other words 
where followed by a sonant consonant, as presbytere, Desde- 
mone, desmode, and disgrace (according to some authorities). 

c. On the other hand, s has its own s-sound even between two 
vowels, when it is the initial of the second part of a compound 
word, as in vraisemblable, parasol, polysyllabe, desuetude, 
resauver, Deseze; also in the conjugation of gesir(XL. 4), ex- 
cept the infinitive gesir itself. 

(L, S final is regularly silent (56) ; but it is sounded in as, ace, 



76] COKSOKANTS. 23 

aloes, cens, census, express, fils, son, helas, alas ! jadis, for- 
merly, laps, lis, lily (except in fleur-de-lis), mais, maize, mars, 
March, mceurs, morals, ours, bear, sens, sense (except in sens 
commun), sus (in en sus), tous, all (except when followed by a 
word which it limits adjectively), vis, screw ; also in a number of 
words of unchanged Latin form, as atlas, bis, twice, blocus, 
gratis, omnibus ; also in most foreign proper names, as Romulus, 
Adonis, Memphis, Lesbos, Andalous, Ladislas, Gil Bias, and a 
number of French ones, as Mons, Rheims, Senlis, Frejus, Sieves 
(usually si-eze). 

e. Sin the interior of a word is usually pronounced, even in 
the compounds lorsque, presque, puisque, plus-que-parfait ; but 
it is silent in many proper names (which have kept unchanged an 
ancient style of spelling), as Cosme, Cosne, Rosny, Duguesclin, 
Praslin, Vosges, Pelasges. 

75. There are certain consonant compounds containing s and 
having a simple sound. Thus : 

a. A double s, or ss, is pronounced like a single s (as usual : 
56c), but always with the hissing s-sound, never as z : thus, assez, 
blesser, disse, grossesse, poussasse, prussien, vinsse. 

b. Sc, before e, i, y, is sounded as ss : thus, scene, scie, science, 
ascetique, lascif, obscenite, Scythe. 

c. Sen occurs only in a few foreign words, and is mostly pro- 
nounced as ch would be (English sh) : thus, schisme, schamane ; 
but sometimes like sk, as in scheme and its related words, scho- 
lastique. 

76. T, t. — This consonant is generally sounded as in 

English. 

Thus, ta, taire, taux, tater, te, t§te, titre, ton, toute, tuteur, 
nette, trottoir, etroite. 

a. Final t is regularly silent (56a) ; but it is pronounced in a 
number of words : namely, after a vowel in ut, do, brut, crude, 
chut, hush ! deficit, dot, dowry, fat, fop, mat, dull, net, neat, 
subit, sudden (according to many authorities), transit, and 
huit, eight (except before the initial consonant of a word num- 
bered by it) ; after a consonant in est, east, ouest, west, lest, 
ballast, Christ (but the s and t are silent in antichrist, and 
usually in Jesus-Christ), whist, rapt, rape, sept, seven (except 
before an initial consonant of a word numbered by it), and vingt, 
twenty, in the numbers 21-29. As to words ending in ct after a 
vowel, there is much difference of usage ; ordinarily, c and t are 
both pronounced in tact, contact, exact, abject, correct, direct, 
infect, strict ; only c is pronounced in circonspect, suspect, dis- 
trict; both c and t are silent in aspect, respect. Final t is 
further pronounced in a few unchanged Latin words, as exeat, 



24 PKONUNCIATIOK. [76— 

and in many foreign proper names, as Japhet, Achmet ; also, ac- 
cording to some, at the end of a sentence, in but, goal, and in 
fait, deed, and sot, fool, used as nouns. 

77. a. T followed by i, in certain endings where ti in English 
has the sh-sound, is sounded as s (not as sh) : thus, partial, es- 
sentiel, egyptien, ambitieux, plenipotentiaire, Actium, pa- 
tient, patience, portion ; also in tie corresponding to cy or tia 
in English, as democratic, prophetie, minutie, inertie, Beotie ; 
and in tier (of a verb) corresponding to -tiate in English, as 
initier, balbutier ; and in satiete. 

b. But where the ti is preceded by s or x (and ti has in Eng- 
lish the c/*-sound), t retains its proper value : thus, question, 
mixtion. The same is the case in chretien and in chatier. 

c. Elsewhere, t before i has its own proper sound : thus, moitie\ 
portier, contient, portions and portiez (i.e., before the endings 
ions and iez of 1st and 2d pi. of verbs), etc. 

78. The combination th is everywhere pronounced as simple 
t: thus, theatre, the\ pathetique, atheiste, sympathie. It is 
silent in asthme and isthme. ■ 

79. V, v. — Tliis consonant is sounded as in English. 

It never occurs as final. 

Thus, valu, venir, veuve, vivant, vienne, vol, voir, vrai, 
active, vivre. 

80. W, w. — This consonant occurs only in a very small num- 
ber of foreign words. It is usually pronounced like English v ; 
thus, wagon; but in a word or two rather as English w: thus, 
whist, whig (the h silent). 

81. X, x. — This consonant is for the most part pro- 
nounced like ks, as in English. 

Thus, saxe, sexe, fixer, boxeur, luxe, Alexandre, annexation, 
exciter, excuse, experience. 

a. In the initial syllable ex before a vowel, it is pronounced 
like gz : thus, exalte, exemple, exister, exil, exode, exhorter, 
exhumer (h silent) ; as also, of course, in the compounds of such 
words, as inexact. Initial x has in most words the same gz- 
sound : thus, Xenophon, Xavier, xylographe. Xerxes is pro- 
nounced gzersesse. 

b. Final x is regularly silent (56a) . but it is pronounced, like 
s, in the numerals six, six, and dix, ten (except before an initial 
consonant of a word numbered by them), in dix-sept, seventeen, 
Beatrix, Cadix, Aix en Provence ; in Aix-la-Chapelle it is pro- 
nounced like ks, also in a few foreign words, as Ajax, Styx, 
larynx, index, prefix. In the compound numerals dix-huit, 
eighteen, and dix-neuf, nineteen, it is sounded as z. 






84] CONSONANTS. 25 

c. Medial x is sounded as s (not z) in soixante sixty, and in a 
few proper names, as Bruxelles, Auxerre ; and as z in deuxieme 
second, sixieine sixth, dixieme tenth, sixaine half a dozen. 

82. Y, y. — This letter has generally the value of a vowel, 
being pronounced as i, or as double i, and as such has been 
treated of above (36, 37). In a few foreign words, it has the 
value of the English consonantal (semi- vowel) y: thus, yacht 
(pronounced yak), Yemen, Yucatan, etc. 

83. Z, z. — This consonant has in general the same 
sound as in English. 

Thus, Zama, zele, zigzag, zone, zymotique, gazon. 

a. Final z is regularly silent (56a) : thus, nez, aimez, riz. 

But it is pronounced, as z, in gaz gas, and in certain proper 
names, as Achaz, Berlioz ; and as s in a few other proper names, 
as Cortez, Velasquez, Suez. 

LINKING OK CARBYING-ON OF FINAL CONSONANTS. 

84. A final consonant usually silent is liable to be pro- 
nounced when followed by another word beginning with 
a vowel (or mute h). This is called the linking or carry- 
ing-on of the final (in French, liaison). 

a. The final consonant thus carried on is pronounced 
directly upon the following vowel, as if a part of the 
same syllable with it ; any relaxation or pause is to be made 
before the consonant, not between it and the vowel. 

b. The carrying-on of the final in any case depends 
upon the closeness of connection between the two words, 
and also in part upon the general style of utterance. 

c. Thus, close grammatical connection between the two words, 
dependence of the one on the other, favors the linking. This, 
then, generally or invariably takes place between an article or 
possessive or other adjective and the following qualified noun ; 
between a verb and its preceding or following pronoun, subject 
or object, or a verb and its preceding subject noun ; between an 
auxiliary and following participle ; between an adverb and the fol- 
lowing qualified adjective or adverb ; between a preposition and 
its governed noun ; and so on. In cases of less close connection, 
the linking depends in part on euphony as determined by the 
general habits of the language, in part on the style of delivery ; 



26 PKONUNCIATICW. [86 

in reading aloud, namely, and in formal or solemn discourse, a 
great deal more linking is done than in the freedom of conversa- 
tion. This class of differences, of course, is only to be learned by 
much experience. And linking is to be avoided where there is a 
natural pause, whether marked by a sign of punctuation or not. 

85. a. Some final consonants have their own proper 

sound when carried on to the following initial vowel. 

Thus, de broc^en bouche, il est donc^arrive, un^homme, 
rien^a faire, trop^avant, beaucoup^occupe, cinq^enfants, 
aimer^a boire, le premier^homme, cet^habit, est c il, mot 3 a- 
mot, avez^ete, allez c y. 

h. But final s and x, when linked, take the sound of z ; 
d takes that of t ; and g (rare) takes that of k. 

Thus, les^hommes, nos^amis^ont, nous^aurons^eu, pas^en- 
core, sans^elle ; deux^hommes, de beaux^yeux, des cha- 
peaux^enormes, tu peux^y aller; un grands hc-mme, vend_il, 
quand^il vient, pied-a-terre; un rang^eleve, ce long^hiver, 
le joug^insupportable. But the d of nord keeps its d-sound. 

c. A final consonant that is not silent has in general the same 
sound before a vowel as before a consonant : thus, sud-ouest, 
David etait, Ajax eut. But six and dix are linked with a fol- 
lowing numbered noun after the manner of words ending in 
silent x (i.e., with z) ; and the f of neuf in a like situation has 
the sound of v : thus, six^enfants, dix^hommes, neuf_ans. Al- 
so, according to most authorities, the s of fils, jadis, sens, is 
linked as z. 

86. Special exceptional cases are to be noted as fol- 
lows: 

a. The t of et and is never carried on. 

b. A final consonant after r (unless it be the plural sign s) is 
averse to linking : thus, vers une heure, hors un seul, il ne sert 
a rien (but sert 3 il). 

c. The final n of a nasal syllable is carried on only in cases of 
close grammatical connection ; and when the carrying-on takes 
place, the preceding vowel loses more or less (sometimes all) of 
its nasal tone, while retaining the same vowel-quality as in its 
nasal utterance : thus, un^enfant, mon^ami, ce bon^homme,. 
en^Italie, bien^aimable, rien^a dire, en plein^air, enivrer,* 
enorgueillir. 

BSi" All words having an exceptional pronunciation will be marked 
in the vocabularies below by a prefixed asterisk : thus, *fils. Then 
the general vocabulary at the end of the volume will give the neces- 
sary references, 



GEOTER, ARTICLES, ETC. 27 



LESSON I. 

GENDER, ARTICLES, ETC. 

1. All nouns in French are either masculine or femi- 
nine. 

For the distinction of masculine and feminine nouns as shown 
by their meaning or by their ending, see Second Part, § 13 etc. In 
general, names of male beings are masculine, and those of female 
beings are feminine ; the names of things having no sex are mas- 
culine or feminine, for the most part according as they were so in 
Latin ; but, the old neuter having been lost, nouns of that gender 
in Latin have become masculine in French. 

2. Hence, words qualifying or relating to nouns — 
as articles, adjectives, pronouns — have also usually a dis- 
tinction of masculine and feminine form, so as to agree 
in gender with the nouns to which they belong. 

3. There are, as in English, two articles, the definite 
and the indefinite. 

4. The definite article has in the singular a different 

form for each gender: namely, le before a masculine 

noun, and la before a feminine. Examples are : 

le pere, the father la mere, the mother 

le roi, the king la reine, the queen 

le cheval, the horse la vache, the cow 

' r - - ' 

le livre, the book la fleur, the flower 

But in the plural there is one form of the article, les, 
for both genders : thus, 

les peres, the fathers les meres, the mothers 

les livres, the books les fleurs, the flowers 

. 5. Before a word beginning with a vowel (or h mute : 
64^), le and la both lose their vowel, and take the apos- 
trophe, becoming alike 1' (26<?, 15) : thus, 

l'ami, the friend l'amie, the {female) friend 

l'homme, the man l'heure, the hour 



28 LESSOR 1. 

6. The indefinite article is un before a masculine 
noun, and une before a feminine : thus, 

un pere, a father une mere, a mother 

un roi, a king une reine, a queen 

un livre, a book une fleur, a flower 

The indefinite article has no plural. 

7. The articles must always be repeated in French 
before every noun to which they belong (that is, an ar- 
ticle may not be understood from a noun to a following 
noun, as it often is in English) : thus, 

the father and mother, le pere et la mere 
a king and queen, un roi et une reine 

8. The commonest possess! ves used with nouns are 
mon masc, ma fern., my ; son m., sa f., his or her or 
its J notre m. f. our; votre m. f. your : thus, 

mon pere, my father ma mere, my mother 

son livre, his or her book sa fleur, his or her or its flower 

notre ami, our friend votre amie, your (female) friend 

VERB-LESSON. 

9. The present tense of the verb avoir have is as fol- 
lows: 

j'ai, I have nous avons, we have 

tu as, thou hast vous avez, you have 

il a, he has ils ont, they (m.) have 

elle a, she has elles ont, they (f.) liave 

a. The abbreviation j' is for je, I (26c). Notice that je is not 
written with a capital, like English /. 

b. In French, as in English, the pronoun of the 2d pers. plural, 
vous you, is ordinarily used in addressing any one, instead of 
tu thou. In the exercises, therefore, you should always be ren- 
dered with vous (and your with votre), and tu should be used 
only when thou is given in the English. 

10. The same tense in the interrogative form is as 
follows : 

ai-je, have I? avons-nous, have we? 

as-tu, hast thou ? avez-vous, have you ? 

a-t-il, lias he? ont-ils, have they (m.)? 

a-t-elle, has she? ont-elles, have they (f.)? 



GENDER, ARTICLES, ETC. 29 

a. For the pronunciation of je in ai-je and the like, see 18e. 

b. It is seen that in French (as in English) the subject-pronoun 
is put after the verb in asking a question ; and it must always be 
joined to the verb by a hyphen. 

c. If the 3d pers. sing, of any verb ends in a vowel, a t is 
added to it, with a hyphen between, whenever it is followed by 
the pronoun il or elle (or by on: XXVII. 4). 

This t is that of the 3d sing, in Latin: thus, a-t-il is habet ille. 

11. But if the subject of a verb used interrogatively 
is a noun, the noun is generally put first, and then a cor- 
responding pronoun is put after the verb : that is, the 
subject is first stated, and then the question is asked about 
it by means of a pronoun. 

Thus, has the man a book ? is not a l'homme un livre ? but 
l'homme a-t-il un livre ? (literally, the man, has he a book T). 

a. For certain exceptions, see XXV. 6. 

VOCABULARY. 

le pere, the father la mere, the mother 

le *fils, the son la fille, the daughter, gi/rl 

le frere, the brother la soeur, the sister 

l'oncle, the uncle la tante, the aunt 

le cousin m., the cousin la cousine, the cousin f. 

rhomme m. , the man la *femme, the woman, wife 

le livre, the book le papier, the paper 

la plume, the pen le crayon, the pencil 



le chien, the dog le chat, the cat 

et, and ou, or 

oui, yes non, no 



Exercise 1. 

1 L'homme a un pere et une mere. 3 A-t-il un chien ou 
un chat ? 3 II a un chien, et nous avons un chat. 4 Avez- 
vous le livre ? 5 Oui, j'ai mon livre et votre crayon. 6 Mon 
pere a le papier et la plume. 7 As-tu une soeur? 8 J'ai 
une sceur et un frere. 9 Ont-ils un cousin ? 10 lis ont une 
cousine et une tante. " La femme a-t-elle sa plume ou son 
crayon ? 12 Elle a mon papier et notre crayon. 13 Sa tante 



30 LESSOK I. 

a-t-elle un fils ? 14 Non, elle a une fille. 16 Nous avons 
notre livre, et vous avez votre papier. 16 Mon oncle a une 
femme. 17 A-t-il un fils ? 18 Non, il a une fille. 

Theme 1. 

1 1 have an uncle. 2 My uncle has a dog, and my aunt 
has a cat. 3 Has the man the paper ? 4 He has my paper 
and your pen. 6 Have you a brother ? 6 No, we have a 
sister. 7 Our sister has her book and her pencil. 8 Hast 
thou a dog ? 9 Yes, and my brother has a dog and a cat. 
10 Has the woman a mother or a father ? " She has a moth- 
er, and her mother has a father and a cousin. " Has your 
cousin our pencil? 13 No, she has her pencil and our pen. 
14 They have our pencil and your pen. 1& The man has his 
book, and we have our paper. 

The sentences given in the exercises and themes should he varied and repeated, 
and turned into question and answer between teacher and pupils, until the words 
and forms are impressed on the memory. 



LESSON II. 

PLURAL OF NOUNS. 

1. The plural of a noun is generally formed in 
French, as in English, by adding s to the singular: thus, 

le roi, the king les rois, the kings 

la fleur, the flower les fleurs, the flowers 

l'homme, the man les hommes, the men 

The principal exceptions to this rule are as follows : 

2. Nouns ending in the sibilants s, x, and z have the 
same form in the plural as in the singular: thus, 

le fils, the son les fils, the sons 

la noix, the walnut les noix, the walnuts 

le nez, the nose les nez, the noses 






PLtJKAL OF KOTOS. 31 

3. JSTouns ending in au and eu, and a few in on, add x 
instead of s : thus, 

le chapeau, the hat les chapeaux, the hats 

le lieu, the place les lieux, the places 

le genou, the knee les genoux, the knees 

The nouns in ou taking x in the plural are bijou jewel, cail- 
lou pebble, chou cabbage, genou knee, hibou owl, joujou play- 
thing, pou louse— all masculine. Other nouns in ou take s, ac- 
cording to the general rule: e.g., fous fools, clous nails, trous 
holes. 

4. Most nouns ending in al and ail change these end- 
ings to aux for the plural: thus, 

le cheval, the horse les chevaux, the horses 

le travail, the work les travaux, the works 

Exceptions are bals balls, carnavals carnivals, chacals jackals, 
regals treats, details details, eventails fans, gouvernails rud- 
ders, portails doorivays (all masculine), and a few others. 

5. A few nouns form their plural quite irregularly ; 
the most important are : 

l'oeil, the eye les yeux, the eyes 

le ciel, the heaven les cieux, the lieavens 

For other cases, see Second Part, § 19 etc. 

6. Some nouns are used only in the singular, others only in 
the plural ; some have different plural forms, according to their 
different meanings : see Second Part, § 19 etc. 

7. The plurals of the possessives already given are 
mes my, ses his or her or its, nos our, vos your. 

VERB-LESSON. 

8. The present tense of the verb etre he is as fol- 
lows ; 

je suis, I am nous sommes, we are 

tu es, thou art vous etes, you are 

il est, he is ils sont, they (m.) are 

elle est, she is elles sont, they ( f .) are 

a. Compare the Latin : ego sum, tu es, ille est, nos sumus, vos estis, Alii 
sunt. 

b. The question-forms are suis-je, es-tu, etc. (as for the pres- 
ent of avoir: I. 10), with the subject after the verb, and a hy- 
phen between. 



32 LESSOR II. 

VOCABULARY. 

la maison, the house la chambre, the room, chamber 

la porte, the door, gate la fenetre, the window 

l'habit m., tlie coat la robe, the dress 

le cbapeau, the hat, bonnet le tableau, the picture 

V animal in., the animal le cheval, the horse 

le bras, the arm la jambe, the leg 

l'oeil m., the eye les yeux, the eyes 

un m., une f., one deux, two 

trois, three quatre, four 

mais, but aussi, afcp 

EXERCISE 2. 

1 Votre pere a-t-il une maison ? 2 Oui, il a une maison. 
* Sa maison a une porte, deux chambres, et quatre fenetres. 
4 Mon oncle a deux fils ; ils sont mes cousins. B . J'ai un 
habit et deux chapeaux. c L'homme a deux jambes ; mais 
les chevaux et les chiens ont quatre jambes. 7 L'homme a 
deux bras et deux yeux, et les animaux ont aussi deux 
yeux. 8 La fille a-t-elle une robe ? 9 La fille a trois robes 
et un chapeau. 10 Avez-vous mes tableaux ? " J'ai mon 
tableau ; mais ma cousine a vos tableaux. 12 Sa chambre 
a trois fenetres et deux portes. 13 Vous avez nos robes et 
nos habits. 14 Mes cousins ont une maison, un cheval, et 
deux chiens. 

Theme 2. 

1 Has the man two legs ? 2 He has two arms and two 
legs, but the animals have four legs. 3 My father and my 
mother have a house, three horses, and four dogs. 4 The 
girls are my cousins. 5 Her cousins are three girls, and 
they have three hats and three dresses. e The men have a 
dog and a horse. 7 Our uncle has four sons ; they are our 
cousins. 8 His daughter is also a cousin. 9 She has my 
hat, and I have her dresses. 10 Your sister has a house. 
11 Her house has two doors, three rooms, and four windows. 
" The horse is an animal. ri His brothers have three pic- 
tures. 14 My two sisters have two horses. 




THE PREPOSITIONS A AND DE. 



VERB-EXERCISE. 

Are you ? We are and you are also. Are they ? Has 
she ? Thou art. Is he ? They have. They are. I am. 
You have. Are we ? She is. Hast thou ? We are and 
we have. 

All the tenses learned should be exercised upon with such scattering questions 
as these. 



LESSON III. 

THE PREPOSITIONS k AND dC 

1. Nouns in French have no cases. The same noun- 
forni is used both as subject and object of a verb, and 
after a preposition (as in English) ; and the meaning of 
the English possessive is (as often in English also) ex- 
pressed by help of the preposition de of. 

a. Thus, we have to say in French the book of the man, le 
livre de 1'homme, for the marl's book, because the French has no 
possessive case-form like man's. The phrase de 1'homme of the 
man is in some grammars called the genitive case of homme 
man — and so with other nouns. 

2. The preposition de is always contracted with the 
article le into du, and with the article les into des; while 
with la and 1' it remains unchanged : thus, 

du pere (never de le pere), of the father, the father's 
des peres (never de les peres), of tlie fathers, the fathers' 
des meres (never de les meres), of the mothers, the mother^ 

but, on the other hand, 

de la mere, of the mother, the de la fleur, of the flower 

mother's 
de 1'homme, of the man, tlie man's de l'amie, of the {female) friend 
3 



34 LESSOR III. 

3. The e of de is apostrophized (26c) before any 
vowel (or silent h): thus, 

d'un homme, of a man d'une fleur, ofafloicer 

d' ami, of friend d'homme, of man 

4. The preposition a to is in like manner always con- 
tracted with the article le into an, and with the article les 
into aux ; but with la and 1' it remains unchanged : thus, 
au pere (never a le pere), to tlie aux peres, to the fathers 

father 

au roi (never a le roi), to the king aux reines, to the queens 

but, on the other hand, 

a la mere, to (lie motlier a la fleur, to the flower 

a l'homme, to the man a l'amie, to the {female) friend 

a. A noun in French is never used (as it sometimes is in English) 

datively, or as indirect object of a verb without a preposition. 

Thus, / give the man the book is always je donne le livre a 

1'homme — literally, / give the book to the man. The phrase a 

l'homme to the man is in some grammars called the dative case 

of homme man — and so with other nouns. 

5. The prepositions de and a must be repeated before 
every noun that they govern : thus, 

des peres et des meres, of the fathers and mothers 
aux hommes, aux femmes, et aux enfants, to the men, women, and 
children 

6. For belong is used the verb §tre be, followed by a to. 
Thus, a qui est-il whose is it? il est a ma cousine it is my 
cousin's (literally, it is or belongs to my cousin). 

VERB-LESSON. 

7. The imperfect tenses of avoir have and etre be 
are as follows : 

j'avais, Ihad j'etais, I was 

tu avais, thou hadst tu etais, thou wast 

il avait, he had il etait, he was 

nous avions, we had nous etions, we were 

vous aviez, you Jiad vous etiez, you were 

ils avaient, they had ils etaient, they were 
a. Every imperfect in the language, without exception, is in- 



THE PREPOSITIONS A AND DE. 35 

fleeted in this way, with the endings -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, 
-aient. 

6. This tense expresses continuous past action (see § 119), and 
is often to be rendered by was having, kept having, used to have, 
and the like. 

c. The interrogative form is avais-je, e*tais-tu, avait-il, etc., 
as in the tenses already given. 

d. The French imperfect is from the Latin imperfect : avais is habebam ; 
etais is stabam— since parts of the verb stare stand have been taken to fill 
up the inflection of the verb be in French (see below, XI. la). 

VOCABULARY. 

l'ami m., the friend l'amie f., the friend 

le neveu, the nephew la niece, the niece 

l'enfant m. , the child le garcon, the boy 

le jardin, the garden l'arbre m., the tree 

la feuille, the leaf, sheet la fleur, the flower 

je donne, I give il, elle donne, he, she gives 

voici, here is or are voila, there is or are 

Exercise 3. 
1 La fille de mon oncle est ma cousine, et je suis son 
cousin. 2 Ma cousine donne la fleur a votre niece. 3 Le 
garcon est le fils du neveu de mon pere. 4 Je donne les 
fleurs du jardin aux enfants. 5 Votre scaur a-t-elle mes 
crayons ? G Elle a les crayons des filles et des garcons. 
7 L'enfant est le fils de l'ami de ma soeur. 8 Yoici la maison 
des deux amies de ma mere. 9 Votre ami a-t-il un jardin ? 
10 Voila les arbres du jardin de mon ami. " La femme 
donne une fleur au garcon. 12 La maison est a mon pere. 

13 Voila les feuilles de l'arbre ; elles sont a votre amie. 

14 A-t-elle aussi les fleurs ? 15 Non, les fleurs sont a l'enfant. 
16 Voici la porte de ma chambre. 17 La maison de nos 
amis a quatre f enetres. 

Theme 3. 

1 The man's coat and hat. 2 The woman's dress. 3 The 
eyes of the horse are two, his legs are four. 4 1 have the 
boy's dog and the girl's cat. 6 1 give the cat to the chil- 



36 LESSON IV. 

dren, and the dog to the son of my cousin. 6 The brothers 
of the girls have also a horse. 7 He gives a hat to the son 
of his friend. 8 My uncle gives the boys the leaves, and 
the girls the flowers. 9 There are the boy's books. 10 The 
house is my friend's. " The boy gives his sister a book, 
and the girl gives her brother a pen and pencil. 12 The 
paper is the children's, but the pens are my sisters'. 13 The 
house belongs to my father's brother. M The sister of my 
nephew is my niece. 15 She gives her aunt a flower and 
three leaves. 

VERB-EXERCISE. 

He was. Had you? They are. Was she? Thou 
hadst. They were. Are we? I had. Was I? Had 
she or had he ? They have and they had. Am I ? You 
are. Art thou ? She is. 



LESSON IY. 

PAKTTTrVE AND INCLUSIVE SENSES OF THE NOUN. 

1. The partitive sense of a noun is that which in 

English may be expressed by putting some or any before 

the noun, but which is oftenest left unexpressed. 

Thus, have you bread {i.e., some bread, or any bread)? we 
have books (or, some books) ; they had pens, but they had no ink 
{i.e., some pens, not any ink) ; and so on. 

2. In French, this sense of a noun is in general dis- 
tinctly expressed, by putting before it the preposition de 
of y along (usually) with the definite article : thus, 

j'ai du pain, I ham bread (literally, of the bread) 
avez-vous des livres, ham you books (literally, of the books)t 
donnez moi de la farine et de l'eau, give me some flour and water 



PARTITIVE AHD INCLUSIVE SENSES OF THE NOUN. 37 

The rules for the combination of de with le and les, and for 
the repetition of de before every noun that it governs, have been 
already given (III. 2, 5). 

3.* Sometimes, however, the article is omitted, and the prepo- 
sition alone expresses the partitive sense of the noun. This is 
the case : 

a. When the noun has an adjective before it (see below, VIII. 
6) : thus, 

j'ai de bon pain (not du bon pain), I have good bread 
nous avons d'excellents livres, we have excellent books 

b. After a negative verb (see below, XII. 7) : thus, 

je n'ai pas de pain (not du pain), I have not any bread 
nous n'avons jamais de livres, we never have books 

4. More rarely, both preposition and article are omitted, and 
the bare noun stands in the partitive sense, as in English. This 
is the case : 

a. After ni . . . ni, meaning neither . . . nor (see below, XII. la) : 
thus, 

je n'ai ni pain ni beurre, I have neither bread nor butter 

b. In long enumerations : thus, 

il y a sur la table eau, vin, biere, pain, beurre, fromage, 
there is on the table water, wine, beer, bread, butter, cheese 
For further details and exceptions as to the expression of the 
partitive sense of a noun, see Second Part, § 35. 

5. On the other hand, a noun is sometimes used in 
its most inclusive sense, or as signifying the whole class 
of objects to which it applies. This sense, which is usu- 
ally left unexpressed in English, requires in French the 
definite article before the noun : thus, 

man {i.e., the whole race) is mortal, l'homme est mortel 
men {i.e., all men) are mortal, les hommes sont mortels 
life is short, la vie est courte 
sleep is the brother of death, le sommeil est le frere de la mort 

a. The article thus used may conveniently be called 
the inclusive article. 

b. The inclusive article is especially common before abstract 
nouns : e.g., la vie life, la beaute beauty, la nature Nature, la 
fortune fortune, la sensibilite 



* Paragraphs 3 and 4 are added here because it is desirable to have in one place 
all the principal rules about the partitive. Classes may well omit them until they 
take this Lesson in review, after having had Lessons VIII. and XII, 



38 LESSON IT. 

c. The inclusive article is not wholly wanting with a singular 
noun in English : thus, the dog is an enemy of the cat ; the hand 
has five fingers, and so on. 

6. The frequently occurring expression of the partitive and 
inclusive senses of the noun, which in English are left to be 
simply inferred from the connection, is a marked feature of 
French usage. Often, the two senses, alike unexpressed in Eng- 
lish, are distinguished in French in the same brief sentence : 
thus, birds have wings {i.e., all birds, but a certain limited num- 
ber of wings), les oiseaux ont des ailes; time is money, le temps 
est de l'argent. 

VERB-LESSON. 

7. The preterit tenses of avoir have and etre be are 
as follows : 

j'eus, I had je fus, I was 

tu eus, thou hadst tu fus, thou wast 

il eut, he had il fut, he was 

nous eumes, we had nous fumes, we were 

vous eutes, you Itad vous futes, you were 

ils eurent, tliey had ils furent, they were 

a. As to the pronunciation of eu in eus etc. , see 416. 

b. All preterits in the language, without exception, have the 
plural endings -mes, -tes, -rent, and before the first two of these 
endings they have a circumflexed vowel (either u, as here, or a, 
or i) ; and all excepting those of the first regular conjugation 
(XVIII.) have -s, -s, -t, as here, in the singular. 

c. The preterit expresses simple past action, with nothing else 
implied. In some grammars, the tense is called the past defi- 
nite (Fr. passe defini). 

d. The interrogative form is eus-je, fus-tu, eut-il, and so on, as 

in the other tenses. 

e. The French preterit is the Latin perfect : compare with fus etc. the Latin 
fui, fuisti, fuit, fuimus, fuistis, fuerunt. 

VOCABULARY. 

Dieu, God la terre, the earth 

le pain, the bread la viande, the meat 

le beurre, the butter le fromage, the cheese 

le sel, the salt le poivre, the pepper 

le cafe, the coffee le the, the tea, 

le lait, the milk le sucre, the sugar 

le fruit, the fruit l'encre f., the ink 



PARTITIVE AND INCLUSIVE SENSES OF THE NOUN. 39 

Exercise 4. 

1 L'enfant avait-il du pain ? 2 Oui, il avait du pain et 
du beurre. 3 Mon frere donne des fruits a votre soeur. 
4 Ses filles ont-elles du cafe ? 5 Elles ont du cafe, et elles 
ont aussi du lait et du sucre. 6 Avez-vous du fromage ? 
7 Non, mais j'ai du beurre. 8 Je donne au gallon de la 
viande ; il a du sel et du poivre aussi. 9 A-t-il des livres 
et des crayons? 10 Elle avait du papier et de l'encre. 

11 L'homme est l'enfant de Dieu. ia Dieu donne aux 
hommes les fruits de la terre. 13 L'bomme est un animal. 

14 Voila des livres ; ils sont a mon ami. 16 As-tu des freres 
et des sceurs ? 16 Non, mais j'ai des amis et des amies. 

Theme 4. 

1 Have you any coffee or tea ? 2 Yes, we bave some 
coffee, and our mother bas some tea. 3 His mother gives 
bread and milk to her children. 4 Have your sisters meat, 
pepper, and salt ? 5 No, but they have bread and cheese. 
6 1 have a garden, and I give fruit to my friends. 7 Have 
you my pencils ? 8 Your brother bas your pencils, but I 
have some paper and pens. 9 The boy has horses and 
dogs. 10 Cats are animals. " The dog is also an animal. 

12 God gives to man flowers, the fruits of the earth. 13 God 
is the friend of man. l4 The earth is the garden of God. 

15 Had the child a father or mother? lfJ No, but she had 
friends and sisters. l7 Here are coats and hats. 18 There 
are books and pens. 

VERB-EXERCISE. 
(For the past forms, give both imperfect and preterit.) 

You had. Had they? Has she? We have. They 
were. Is he? Have you? You were. He was. Had 
I ? I am. Thou wast, Hadst thou ? I was. 



40 LESSON Y. 

LESSON V. 

MATERIAL AND MEASURE. 

1. In French (as often in English), the material of 
which anything is made is expressed by help of the 
preposition de of: thus, 

une bague d'or, a ring of gold une *cuiller d'argent, a spoon 

of silver 
la bourse de soie, the purse of silk des chapeaux de velours, hats 

of velvet 

a. Such expressions as a gold ring, a silver spoon, a silk purse, 
a velvet hat, in which we use in English the noun of material as 
if it were an adjective, are impossible in French. 

b. English adjectives of material in -en or -n, as wooden, woolen, 
leathern, also have to be expressed in French by de and the noun 
of material : thus, 

une table de bois, a wooden table du drap de laine, some woolen cloth 

2. ISTouns expressing measure of quantity, of weight, 
of number, and so on, are also followed (as usually in 
English) by de of before the name of the thing meas- 
ured : thus, 

une bouteille de vin, a bottle of une livre de sucre, a pound of 
wine sugar 

des morceaux de pain, bits of des paires de bas, pairs of stock- 
bread ings 

3. Also after adverbs of quantity, de of is required 
in French (though usually omitted in English) : thus, 

beaucoup d'eau, much water (literally, much of water) 

trop de vin, too much wine assez de fleurs, enough flowers 

This construction is that of a noun instead of an adverb, or 
like that of the corresponding English words before this and 
that : thus, enough of this and too much of that. 

4. The commonest adverbs of quantity are : 

beaucoup, much, many peu, little, few 

plus, more moins, less 

trop, too much, too many trop peu, too little, too few 

tant, so much, so many autant, as much, as many 

Qombien, how much ? assez, enough 



MATEKIAL A.WD MEASUEE. 41 

a. Assez enough is never allowed to stand, as in English, after 
the noun measured : thus, always assez de pain, for English 
enough bread, or bread enough. 

b. After bien, also meaning much, many, and la plupart 
most (literally, the more part), de must be followed by the defi- 
nite article before the noun : thus, bien des hommes (not 
d'hoznmes) many men, la plupart des livres most books. 

VERB-LESSON. 

5. The future tenses of avoir have and etre be are 

these : 

j'aurai, I shall have je serai, I shall be 

tu auras, thou wilt have tu seras, thou will be 

il aura, he will have il sera, he will be 

nous aurons, we shall have nous serons, we shall be 

vous aurez, you will have vous serez, you will be 

ils auront, they will have ils seront, they will be 

a. Every future in the language, without exception, is inflected 
like these, with the endings -ai, -as, -a, -ons, -ez, -ont, and with 
r before the endings. 

b. The interrogative form is, as in other 
seras-tu, aura-t-il (I. 10c), etc. 

c. The French future corresponds with no Latin tense, but is a modern forma- 
tion, made by adding the present of avoir to the infinitive of the verb : thus, 
aurai is contracted from avoir-ai, I have to have, etc. Hence the correspond- 
ence of the endings with those of the present of avoir, and hence also the pre- 
ceding r ; since the French infinitive always ends in r (or re). 

VOCABULARY. 

(Besides the words of quantity given in the Lesson.) 

le vin, tlie wine l'eau f., the icater 

le drap, the cloth le velours, the velvet 

la laine, the wool la soie, the silk 

la table, the table la chaise, the chair 

le metre, the meter, yard la livre, the pound 



la bouteille, the bottle le verre, the 

la tasse, the cup le morceau, the bit, 

le bois, the wood que, than, as 

Exercise 5. 

1 Avez-vous une bouteille de vin ? 2 Non, mais j'ai un 
verre d'eau, et un morceau de pain, 3 Mon ami a une table 



42 LESSON" V. 

de bois et beaucoup de chaises. * II a plus de chaises que 
de tables. 5 Combien de tableaux avez-vous? G Nous 
avons trois tableaux. 7 Le garcon a moins de plumes que 
de crayons. 8 Votre soeur a-t-elle des robes de drap ? 

9 Elle a des robes de soie et un chapeau de velours. 

10 J'avais deux habits et autant de chapeaux. " Avaient- 
elles du drap de laine ? ia Aviez-vous autant de soie que 
de velours ? 13 Nous avons quatre metres de soie, et assez 
de velours. l4 II avait trop de vin et trop peu d'eau. 

15 Elle donne a son frere une tasse de the ou de cafe. 

16 Bien des hommes ont peu de pain et de viande. 17 La 
plupart des tables sont de bois. 

Theme 5. 

1 Had you much wine ? 2 1 had a cup of tea and a bit 
of bread. 3 Your daughter has my silk dress. 4 1 had too 
many pens and pencils, and too little paper. 5 Has the girl 
dresses enough ? 6 She has three woollen dresses, and as 
many hats. 7 The man gives a bottle of wine to his friends. 
8 She had also a bit of bread and cheese, and a glass of 
milk. 8 1 have more friends than brothers. 10 Most men 
have water enough, and many men have too much wine. 

11 My mother had many yards of silk and velvet. 12 We 
have wooden tables and glass bottles. 13 Most bottles are 
of glass. " My father gives his niece four yards of cloth 
and a little velvet. 15 1 had three pounds of tea and as 
much coffee, and a pound of sugar. 16 You have less pep- 
per than salt. 17 There are many books and sheets of pa- 
per. 

fp 

VERB-EXERCISE. 

She will have. Will he be? Were they? We shall 
be. They will have. Is he? Had you? I shall be. 
Shall I have? They had. We are. We shall have. 
Wilt thou have ? You will be. 






PREPOSITIONS; PROPER NAMES. 



43 



LESSOR VI. 



PREPOSITIONS ; PROPER NAMES. 



apres, after 

avant, before (previous 

to) 
avec, with 
chez, at the house of 
dans, in, into 



pour, for 
sans, without 

sous, under 

sur, upon 

vers, en vers, toward 



1. The commonest French prepositions (besides a and 
de) are as follows : 

derriere, behind 
devant, before (in front 

of) 
en, in, into 
entre, between 
par, by, through 

Other prepositions and preposition-phrases will be given in a 
later Lesson (XXXIII.). 

a. For in or into, dans is more common than en; and en is 
almost never used before the definite article or a possessive. 

b. Of the two prepositions meaning before, avant is used only 
of time, devant only of place. 

c. Chez at the house of may often be rendered by with, but in a 
different sense from avec : thus, dinez chez nous, dine with us, 
i.e., at our house ; but dinez avec nous, dine with us, i.e., along 
with us, in our company somewhere. 

2. Names of countries and provinces in French gen- 
erally take the definite article. 

a. Some of the commonest names of countries are: 



la France, France 
l'Angleterre, England 
l'Allemagne, Germany 
l'Espagne, Spain 
l'ltalie, Italy 
la Suisse, Switzerland 
l'Autriche, Austria 
la Prusse, Prussia 
la Russie, Russia 



l'Amerique, America 
l'Europe, Europe 
l'Asie, Asia 
l'Afrique, Africa 
la Chine, China 
la Belgique, Belgium 
la'Hollande, Holland 
la Suede, Sweden 
la Norvege, Norway 



44 LESSON VI. 

All these are feminine ; masculine are le Danemark Denmark, 
le Hanovre Hanover, le Mexique Mexico, le Japon Japan, and 
a few others. 

3. But the article is omitted before names of coun- 
tries in certain cases, especially the following : 

a. After en in, into, to : thus, il est en France he is 
in France, je vais en Amerique I am going to America. 

b. After words meaning king, emperor, kingdom, empire, 
duchy, or the like ; also after histoire history, carte map, etc. : 
thus, roi de France king of France, l'empire d'Allemagne the 
empire of Germany, une carte d' Amerique a map of America. 

c. After the name of a commodity coming from the country 
designated : thus, les vins de France the nines of 'France (French 
wines), du cuir de Russie Russian leather, de Tor de Californie 
some Califomian gold. 

4. With the name of a country, the preposition en is 

used, to express both in and to (literally, into) ; but with 

the name of a city or town, a is used, to express both to 

and at or in. 

Thus, je vais en Angleterre I am going to England, but je 
vais a Londres 1 am going to London, and il demeure en Italie 
he lives in Italy, but il demeure a Rome he lives in {at) Rome. 

5. With regard to the use of the article, other proper 
names follow the same rules in French as in English : 
thus, 

a. Names of persons and of cities and towns are used without 
the article. 

b. Names of mountains and rivers take the article. 

c. Examples of common names of persons are : 
Jean, John Jeanne, Jane, Joan, Joanna 
Louis, Lewis Louise, Louisa 

Henri, Henry Henriette, Henrietta, Harriet 

Jules, Julius Julie, Julia 

Francois, Francis, Frank Franchise, Frances, Fanny 

Guillaume, 'William Marie, Mary, Maria 

d. Examples of names of towns are : 

Londres, London Geneve, Geneva 

Vienne, Vienna Venise, Venice 

Lyon, Lyons 






PROPER NAMES. 45 

e. Examples of names of mountains and rivers are : 

les Alpes, the Alps les Pyrenees, the Pyrenees 

le Ehin, the Rhine la Tamise, the Thames 

le Danube, the Danube la Seine, the Seine 

But names of single mountains also take the article : thus, le 
Vesuve Vesuvius. 

f. A few names of persons and places require the article : thus, 
le Dante Dante, le Havre Havre, le Caire Cairo. 

VERB-LESSON. 

6. The conditional tenses of avoir have and etre le 
are: 

j'aurais, I should have je serais, I should be 

tu aurais, thou wouldst have tu serais, thou wouldst be 

il aurait, he would have il serait, he would be 

nous aurions, we should have nous serious, we should be 

vous auriez, you would have vous seriez, you would be 

ils auraient, they would have ils seraient, they would be 

a. Every conditional in the language, without exception, is in- 
flected like these, with the endings -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, 
-aient — which are precisely the same with the imperfect endings 
(III. 7a) ; and these endings are invariably preceded by r. 

b. The conditional is, in fact, a kind of imperfect or pasb tense to the future, 
always differing from it in the endings only. It is made up of the infinitive with 
the imperfect of avoir added to it (aurais = avoir avais, literally, I had to 
have). 

VOCABULARY. 
(Only the words of the lists given in the Lesson.) 

Exercise 6. 

1 Jean est-il chez son cousin ? 2 Non, il est chez sa tante. 
3 Sa soeur est avec ses amies dans le jardin derriere la 
maison. 4 Le vin de France etait sur la table de bois entre 
les deux f enetres. 5 Aviez-vous du the dans votre tasse ? 
6 J'avais du the avec du lait et du sucre. 7 La bouteille de 
lait etait pour l'enfant. 8 Louis est en France, mais sa 
soeur est a Rome. 9 Paris, sur la Seine, est la capitale de 
la France. 10 Serez-vous en Ansdeterre ? " Oni, nous 



46 LESSOH VII. 

serons a Londres. 12 La Suisse est entre la France et 
l'ltalie. 13 Les Alpes sont en Suisse. 14 Le chapeau de 
Jeanne etait sous une chaise devant la porte. 15 Avez-vous 
des amis en Amerique ? 16 Mon ami a beaucoup d'arbres 
devant sa maison. 

Theme 6. 

1 Is the child at his uncle's ? 2 No, he is in his room with 
his brothers. 3 The fruit on the table is for the girls. 
4 Your brother William is in front of the house behind a 
tree. 6 John is with Mary at her father's. 6 The chair is 
between the two windows. 7 Henry is in France, and he 
will be at Paris. 8 The dress was of French silk, and the 
coat was of English cloth. 9 The trees are in the garden 
behind my house, and the fruit is on the trees. 10 You 
will have sugar and milk in your coffee. " Henry's dog is 
under the table. 12 Frank had water in his glass. 13 The 
bread and the Italian cheese will be on the table. 

VERB-EXERCISE. 

Would you have ? They will be. She would be. He 
will have. Will she have ? They had. I should be. 
Wouldst thou be? We are. Have they? We should 
be. Would they be ? I am. Have I ? He had. They 
will have. 



LESSON VII. 

ADJECTIVES — GENDER. 



1. Adjectives in French have in general a variation 
of form for gender and for number, and are made to 
agree in both these respects with the nouns (or pronouns) 
to which they relate. 



ADJECTIVES — GEKDEIL 47 

a. The adjective, whether attributive or appositive or predica- 
tive, whether before or after the word it qualifies or otherwise 
separated from it, whether qualifying a word expressed or under- 
stood, must be of the gender and number of the qualified word. 

b. Exceptions are adjectives relating to nous we and vous 
you, when these pronouns are used with reference to a single per- 
son. Such adjectives are singular only. Thus, you are very good 
is vous §tes tres bon (to a man), or vous etes tres bonne (to a 
woman) ; but tres bons or tres bonnes, if addressed to more than 
one. 

2. A feminine adjective ends always in mute e ; and 
the feminine of most adjectives is made by simply add- 
in^ mute e to the masculine form : thus, 

m. f. m. f. 

petit, petite, small aise, aisee, easy 

grand, grande, great joli, jolie, pretty 

noir, noire, black vrai, vraie, true 

royal, royale, royal nu, nue, naked 

plein, pleine,/w^ bleu, bleue, blue 

But there are many exceptions to this rule. Thus : 

3. If a masculine adjective ends already in e mute, 
the feminine has the same form : thus, 

m. f. m. f. 

sage, wise, well-behaved honnete, Jwnest 

facile, easy impie, impious 

4. Adjectives ending in the masculine in el, eil, ien, 
on, also many in s and t, double their final consonant be- 
fore the added mute e of the feminine : thus, 

m. f. m. f. 

cruel, cruelle, cruel pareil, pareille, like 

ancien, ancienne, ancient bon, bonne, good 

gros, grosse, big bas, basse, low 

net, nette, neat sot, sotte, stupid 

a. Adjectives in s and t falling under this rule are mostly 
monosyllabic, but also epais (epaisse) thick, sujet (sujette) lia- 
ble, inuet (muette) mute, and a few others. But ras smooth, 
obtus obtuse, pret ready, mat dull, add e simply. 

b. Nul (nulle), gentil fgentille), and fol and mol (below, 7), 
follow the analogy of adjectives in el and eil. 

5. Adjectives ending in the masculine in x and f 



48 LESSON VII. 

change these respectively to s and v before the added e 
mute : thus, 

m. t. m. f. 

heureux, heureuse, happy jaloux, jalouse, jealous 

vif, vive, lively neuf, neuve, new 

For an exception or two, see below, 8. 

6. In some adjectives, changes of spelling are the ne- 
cessary result of the addition of e for the feminine : thus, 

a. Adjectives having in the masculine an e before a 
final consonant (whether pronounced or silent) change it 
to e in the feminine, if the consonant is not doubled 
(21b) : thus, 

m. f. m. f. 

cber, chere, dear complet, complete, complete 

And ef in like manner becomes eve : thus, bref, breve, brief. 

b. Final c is changed for the feminine to que (72a), and final g 
to gue (62/) : thus, 

m. f. m. f. 

public, publique, public [franc,] franque, Prankish 

turc, turque, Turkish long, longue, long 

And so oblong oblong. But grec Greek makes grecque (not 

greque) ; and blanc white, franc frank, sec dry, make more 

irregularly blanche, franche, seche. 

c. Adjectives ending in gu add e for the feminine (8a) : thus, 
aigu, aigue, acute ; ambigu, ambigue, ambiguous. 

7. Five adjectives have two different forms in the 
masculine, from one of which the feminine is made ; 
they are : 

beau bel, belle, beautiful 

nouveau nouvel, nouvelle, new, novel 
vieux vieil, vieille, old 

fou fol, folle, foolish, mad 

mou mol, molle, soft 

a. Of the two masculine forms, the one in 1 is used be- 
fore a word beginning with a vowel (or h. mute) : thus, 
un bel homme, a handsome man 
le nouvel ordre, the new order 
un fol espoir, a foolish hope 



ADJECTIVES — GENDER. . 49 

but un beau livre a handsome book, le livre est beau the book 
is handsome, and so on. 

8. Some adjectives form their feminine more irregu- 
larly ; of these the commonest are : 

m. f. m. f. 

frais, fraiche, fresh faux, i&usse, false 

doux, douce, sweet favori, favorite, favorite 

VERB-LESSON. 

9. The imperatives of avoir have and etre he are as 
follows : 

aie, have, have thou, do thou have sois, le, etc. 

ayons, let us have, have we soyons, let us be, etc. 

ayez, have, have ye, do you have soyez, be, etc. 

a. While the English imperative may be used either with or 
without a subject expressed, the French never allows one. 

b. Third persons imperative are supplied from the present sub- 
junctive : see below, VIII. 7c. 

VOCABULARY. 

bon, bonne, good mauvais, -aise, bad, wicked 

beau bel, belle, handsome, beautiful joli, jolie, pretty 

grand, grande, large, tall petit, petite, small, little 

vieux vieil, vieille, old jeune, young 

rouge, red noir, noire, black 

blanc, blanche, white long, longue, long 

beureux, heureuse, happy cher, chere, dear 

la *ville, the city le *village, the village 

le maitre, the master Peleve, the pupil 

tres, very trop, too 

Exercise 7. 

1 Votre soeur est-elle jolie ? 2 Ma petite sceur est sage 
et jolie. 3 La maison de mon pere est belle, et son jardin 
est grand. 4 Le fruit de son arbre est bon. 5 Votre oncle 
est-il beau ? 6 Oui, mon oncle est un bel homme, et ma tante 
est une tres belle femme. 7 Le maitre est bon, et l'enfant 
sera heureux. 8 Le petit enfant a un vieux maitre. 9 Le 
village est-il grand ? 10 Non, il est petit, mais la ville est 
grande et belle. "Le petit vieil homme est mon cher 



50 LESSON VIII. 

maitre. 12 La flcur est blanche, mais le fruit est rouge ou 
noir. 13 Le maitre etait tres vieux, et l'eleve etait trop 
jeune. 14 Ma vieille tante est chez ma chore cousine. 
16 Le beau jeune homme est le cousin de mon vieil ami. 
16 Votre robe est trop longue. 

Theme 7. 
1 Is your brother large ? a Yes, I have a tall brother and 
a pretty little sister. 3 The house is handsome, but it is too 
small. 4 We have a large house and a small garden. 6 The 
flower is red and the fruit is white. 6 Your city is large 
and beautiful ; our village is small and pretty. 7 1 was 
young and happy, but my master was old. 8 The old man 
is tall and black. ° The woman is young, white, and hand- 
some. 10 The beautiful woman is my dear aunt. " The 
master was too old, or the pupil was too young. 12 Is your 
mother beautiful ? 13 No, but she is good and happy. 
11 My cousin (f.) is a pretty young woman. v " Milk (IV. 5) 
is white, wine is red, and ink is black. 16 The tree is tall 
and handsome, but the fruit is small and bad. 

VERB-EXERCISE. 

Be. Let us have. They were. He would be. Be 
(ye). You will have. They would have. He is. We 
were. Have (thou). Will he have? Would they be? 
She has. They (f.) will have. Let us be. He will be. 
We were. Should I be ? 



LESSON VIII. 

ADJECTIVES — NUMBER, POSITION. 

1. The plural of an adjective is generally formed as 
the plural of a noun of like ending would be : thus, 

a. A feminine adjective (since it ends in e) always adds s for 
the plural. 



i 



ADJECTIVES — NUMBER, POSITION. 51 

b. Masculines in general add s; but final s or x (z does not 
occur) remain unchanged ; au and eu (not ou) add x ; al is 
usually changed to aux. 

c. But bleu blue makes bleus ; some in al make als (as fatals, 
finals, ovals, etc.) ; of the adjectives having two forms in the sin- 
gular (VII. 7), the plural is made from the form ending in u: 
thus, beaux, nouveaux, fous, mous. 

2. The adjective in French, comes more usually after 

than before the noun which it qualifies. 

a. Adjectives have great freedom of position in French, and it 
depends very much upon the euphony of the sentence and the 
choice of the writer or speaker whether in a given case the adjec- 
tive shall precede or follow the noun. The following rules point 
out some of the leading considerations that help to determine the 
question. 

3. A few of the commonest adjectives are almost in- 
variably placed before the noun. 

a. These are especially the adjectives meaning good 
and bad (bon, mauvais), large or big and small (grand or 
gros, petit), young and old (jeune, vieux), also beau hand- 
some, vrai true, with some others : thus, 

le bon *sens, good sense un beau livre, a handsome book 

de grands homm.es, great men mon vieux cousin, my old cousin 

4. a. An adjective denoting a physical quality, as color or 
form, inclines to follow the noun ; one denoting an ideal or moral 
quality, to precede it : thus, 

des fleurs rouges, red flowers une tete ronde, a round head 

son lit dur, his hard bed le bouillon chaud, the hot broth 

b. An adjective tends to follow the noun when taken in a more 
literal sense, and to precede it when taken in a more figurative 
sense : thus, 

un fosse profond, a deep ditch un profond silence, a deep silence 

la barbe noire, the black beard une noire trahison, a black treason 

un livre cher, a dear book un cher ami, a dear friend 

5. a. An adjective having adjuncts rather follows the noun ; 
but a simple adjective rather precedes a noun that has other ad- 
juncts : thus, une fille assez jeune et passablement belle a 
rather young and tolerably handsome girl; l'immortel auteur 
du Paradis perdu the immortal author of Paradise Lost. 

b. An adjective used more appositively, or having a special 
prominence or emphasis, or signifying something brought for- 



52 LESSON VIII. 

ward as new rather than referred to as already understood, 
comes after the noun : thus, e'est un livre excellent this is an 
excellent book, but cet excellent livre est a moi this excellent 
book is mine. 

c. In virtue of these differences, some adjectives have a well- 
marked distinction of meaning, according as they precede or fol- 
low the noun : thus, cher dear means costly after the noun, but 
loved before it ; brave is brave after, but excellent, worthy be- 
fore ; honn§te is nice, civil after, but honest before ; pauvre is 
indigent after, but of poor quality or 'pitiable before ; simple is 
mere before ; certain is certain in the sense of one or some be- 
fore, of sure after ; dernier is last elapsed after, but concluding, 
final before ; propre is neat after, but own before — and so on. 

6. The partitive sense of a noun that is preceded by 

an adjective is usually expressed by de alone, without the 

definite article : thus, 

de bon pain, good bread de petits enfants, little children 

de mauvais sucre, bad sugar de belles fleurs, beautiful flowers 

a. But if the adjective follows the noun, the article is not 
omitted : thus, du pain excellent excellent bread, des fleurs 
magnifiques magnificent flowers. 

b. Also, if the adjective and following noun form together a 
current combination, a kind of compound name for something, the 
article remains : thus, du bon sens good sense, des jeunes gens 
young folks, des petits pois green peas. 

VERB-LESSON. 

7. The present subjunctives of avoir have and etre 
be are as follows : 

que j'aie, that I may have que je sois, that I may be 

que tu aies, that thou mayest have que tu sois, that thou mayest be 

qu'il ait, that Tie may have qu'il soit, that he may be 

que nous ayons, that we may have que nous soyons, that we may be 

que vous ayez, that you may have que vous soyez, that you may be 

qu'ils aient, that they may have qu'ils soient, that they may be 

a. For the exchange of i and y in these forms, see 376. 

b. It is customary to prefix the conjunction que that to the 
inflection of the subjunctive tenses in French grammars, because 
a subjunctive usually (not always) has that conjunction before it. 
For the abbreviation of que to qu\ see 26c. 

c. The 3d persons of this tense are often used in an imperative 
sense, and in some grammars they are given also with the impera- 
tive, as its 3d persons : thus, 






ADJECTIVES — NUMBER, POSITION. 53 

qu'il ait, let Mm have qu'il soit, let Mm be 

qu'ils aient, let them have qu'ils soient, let them be 

d. This tense corresponds to the one of the same name in Latin. 

VOCABULARY. 

l'ecole f . , the school l'eglise f . , the church 

la vie, life la famille, the family 

pauvre, poor riche, rich 

bleu, blue brun, brown 

actif, active laborieux, laborious 

aimable, amiable honnete, honest 

simple, simple modeste, modest 

interessant, interesting excellent, excellent 

nouveau (VII. 7), new aveugle, blind 

Exercise 8. 

1 Avez-vous de belles fleurs ? 2 J'ai des fleurs bleues et 
rouges. 3 Les jeunes filles ont de beaux chapeaux. 4 Elles 
ont aussi de nouvelles robes simples et modestes. 5 Mon 
pauvre oncle a un fils aveugle. 6 Les bomm.es pauvres ont 
une vie active et laborieuse. 7 La vieille eglise est de bois 
noir. 8 L'enfant vertueux est a l'ecole chez un maitre ex- 
cellent. 9 L'excellent maitre est un bon ami des enfants 
riches et des enfants pauvres. 10 ISTous avons des livres 
tres bons et tres interessants, mais nous avons aussi de 
mauvais livres. " L'honnete liomme laborieux aura une 
vie heureuse. 12 Mon frere est un garcon bonnete et aima- 
ble. 13 J'ai de bon vin blanc dans des bouteilles noires. 
14 lis ont de bon pain noir, du beurre, et de tres-mauvais 
fromage. 1B La pauvre fille aveugle a un pere riche. 16 Elle 
a de grands yeux noirs. 17 Mon pere a une famille aimable 
et interessante. 

Theme 8. 

1 Have you good friends ? 2 1 have interesting friends 
and dear sisters. 3 She is a laborious young girl. 4 My 
poor cousin is very unhappy. B She has a little blind 
daughter. 6 1 have a rich uncle. T My rich uncle is an 



54 LESSON IX. 

honest man. 8 He has a simple and modest life. 9 "We 
shall have an excellent school in our little village. 10 There 
is an interesting old church. " Mary is a pretty and mod- 
est girl. 32 She has small hands and large blue eyes. 
15 Have you black bread and good butter ? 14 Here is 
good white bread and excellent butter. 15 You have old 
red wine in new black bottles. 1C My good old uncle has 
very interesting books in his little brown house. " He has 
a large family. 



LESSON IX. 

ADJECTIVES— COMPARISON. 

1. Adjectives in French are for the most part Dot 
otherwise compared than by putting before them ad- 
verbs meaning more etc. 

a. The comparative adverb is plus more, and this is 
made superlative by prefixing to it the definite article : 
thus, le plus the most. 

b. We may also prefix moins less and le moins least to an 
adjective, producing a comparison downwards, or of diminution. 

2. Hence, examples of tlie ordinary comparison of a 
French adjective are as follows: 

beau, handsome plus beau, handsomer le plus beau, handsomest 

jeune, young plus jeune, younger le plus jeune, youngest 

aimable, amiable plus aimable, more ami- le plus aimable, most 
able amiable 

a. The article before plus is of course varied for gender and 
number, like the adjective : thus, la plus belle handsomest (wo- 
man), les plus jeunes youngest (men or women). 

3. But three adjectives have a special form for the 
comparative, which then is made superlative by prefix- 
ing to it the definite article. They are : 

bon, good meilleur, better le meilleur, best 

mauvais, bad pire, worse le pire, worst 

petit, small moindre, smaller le moindre, smallest 






ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. 55 

a. But mauvais and petit are also compared with plus ; and 
even bon, in the sense of good-natured. 

4. Comparison of equality is expressed by aussi as 
before the adjective. After the adjective, both as and 
than are expressed by que. Thns : 

aussi belle que sa soeur, as handsome as her sister 
plus petit que mon frere, smaller than my brother 

5. Special rules are : 

a. The article showing the superlative has to be dropped after 
a possessive : thus, mon plus jeune frere my youngest brother 
(not distinguishable from my younger brother). 

b. If a superlative adjective is put after a noun having the 
definite article, the article must be repeated : thus, l'homme le 
plus savant the most learned man, la ville la plus peuplee the 
most populous city. 

c. After a superlative, the preposition de of, and not dans in, 
is used before a word of place : thus, le plus bel homme du 
monde the handsomest man in the world, la plus grande ville 
de l'Europe the largest city in Europe. 

VERB-LESSON. 

6. The imperfect subjunctives of avoir have and etre 
oe are as follows : 

que j'eusse, that I might hate que je fusse, that I might be 

que tu eusses, that thou mightest que tu fusses, that thou mightest 

have • be 

qu'il eut, that he might have qu'il fut, that he might be 

que nous eussions, that ice might que nous fussions, that we might 

have be 

que vous eussiez, that you might que vous fussiez, that you might 

have be 

qu'ils eussent, that they might qu'ils fussent, that they might be 

have 

a. Every imperfect subjunctive in the language, without excep- 
tion, is inflected like these, with the endings -sse, -sses, -t, -ssions, 
-ssiez, -ssent, and with a circumflexed vowel (u or a or i) before 
the t of the 3d singular. 

b. The subjunctive tenses are by no means always to be ren- 
dered in English with the auxiliaries may and might, but some- 
times with others, as should and would, and sometimes by simple 
subjunctive or even indicative forms. 



56 LESSOR IX. 

c. This tense is from the Latin pluperfect subjunctive : compare fusse etc. 
with Lat. fuissem etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

plus, wore moins, less 

meilleur, better pire, worse 

le paysan, the peasant la rose, the rose 

laid, ugly 'haut, high 

Exercise 9. 

1 Mon frere est le plus joli garcon du village. a Mon 
ami est plus beau que ton frere. 3 Le pauvre garcon est 
le plus jeune des enfants de mon vieil ami. * Etiez-vous 
plus jeune que votre soeur ? ° Non, ma sceur etait la plus 
jeune et la plus jolie de notre famille. 6 Paris est la plus 
grande ville de la France, mais elle est moins grande et 
moins riche que Londres. 7 L'Amerique est plus grande 
que l'Europe, et moins grande que l'Asie. ' Louise est la 
jeune fille la plus aimable du monde. 9 L'enfant sera aussi 
laid que son pauvre pere. 10 Le meilleur vin etait dans la 
plus petite bouteille. " Les paysans les plus honnetes et 
les plus beaux de l'Europe sont dans les plus hautes mon- 
tagnes. 12 Les eleves sont plus jcunes que le maitre. 
13 Henri est le pire de tous les garcons du village. M Avez- 
vous de meilleur vin ? 15 La rose est la plus belle de toutes 
les fleurs. 

Theme 9. 

1 His sister is ugly, but his niece is the ugliest girl in the 
city. 2 The boy is as handsome as his beautiful cousin. 

3 The largest pieces of bread are for the poorest children. 

4 The good and honest peasants are less poor than the bad 
men of the city. 5 The Alps are the highest mountains in 
Europe. 6 A city is larger than a large village. 7 Mary is 
as pretty as Helen, but she is less amiable and interesting. 
8 The youngest of the children are my sisters. 9 The pret- 
tiest child is my youngest sister. 10 The peasants of the 
Alps were his best friends. " The women are as handsome 
as the men. " The smallest horse is larger than the largest 






conjugation of avoir. 57 

dog. 13 The cat is smaller than the dog. 14 The worst boy 
in the village was your dearest friend. 15 The red wine is 
better than the white wine. 



LESSON X. 
conjugation — the veeb avoir have. 

1. In the preceding lessons have been given, with 
their complete inflection, examples of all the simple 
tenses and modes of the French verb. The remaining 
parts are the infinitive, the present and past participles, 
and the compound forms, made with an auxiliary verb. 

2. The infinitives of the two verbs have and he are : 

avoir, have, to have etre, be, to be 

a. The infinitive always ends in r or re. 

b. The "sign of the infinitive," corresponding to the English 
to, is either a to or (quite as often) de of. As to the use of the 
one or the other of these, see Part Second, § 172 etc. But the 
French infinitive is often also (like the English) used without a 
sign, as subject of a verb, after various verbs, and after preposi- 
tions, especially pour in order to (literally for, for to) : thus, 
parler est mieux to speak is better, il veut avoir he wishes to 
hace, pour etre in order to be. 

c. The French infinitive corresponds to the Latin infinitive active. 

3. The present participles of the same verbs are : 

ayant, having etant, being 

a. The present participle invariably ends in ant. 

b. This participle, when used as a participle, has no variation 
for gender or number. Often, however, it is used as an adjec- 
tive, and then is varied like any other adjective : thus, une char- 
mante femme a charming woman, des yeux per^ants piercing 
eyes. 

c. This participle is also (apparently) very commonly used after 
the preposition en : thus, en etant in being, in the act of being, 
while being (and often best rendered being simply). 

d. In fact, however, the so-called participle with en answers to the Latin abla- 
tive gerund in -ndo (en ayant = Lat. in habendo). The participle is the Latin 
present participle (ayant = Lat. liabent-em). 

4. The past participles of the same verbs are : 

eu, Jiad ete, been 



58 LESSON X. 

a. This participle is variable for gender and number, like any 
ordinary adjective. 

b. The past participle corresponds to the Latin passive participle. 

5. Compound forms for all the parts of a French 
verb (except the imperative arid the past participle) are 
made, as in English, by adding its past participle to the 
various forms of an auxiliary verb. The auxiliary is 
usually avoir have / but some verbs take instead etre be 
(see below, XXVIII. 5-7). 

a. Hence, to make any given compound form, the correspond- 
ing simple form of avoir (or sometimes of §tre) is to be taken, 
and the past participle of the principal verb added to it. 

b. The participle is for the most part unvaried, or has its mas- 
culine singular form, in the compound forms of the verb when 
made with avoir. But it is a rule in French that if a compound 
verb-form has a direct object, and that object stands before the 
verb, the participle is made to agree with it in gender and num- 
ber : thus, quels livres avez-vous eus what books have you had/ 
les fleurs que j'ai eues the flowers which I have had, and so on : 
see Part Second, § 191 etc. 

6. The compounds of the present and imperfect tenses are 
best called, as in English, the perfect and pluperfect ; that of 
the preterit, the past anterior ; those of the future and condi- 
tional, the FUTURE PERFECT and CONDITIONAL PERFECT. 

a. In many grammars, the indicative perfect is called the past 
indefinite (Fr. passe indefinij. It is very often used where in 
English we have the preterit ; and especially, of anything that 
has happened during this day, or during any period of which the 
present is viewed as a part. 

b. For the use of the past anterior, see Part Second, § 122. 

7. The compound forms of avoir have are made, as 
in English, with avoir itself as auxiliary. The simple 
and compound forms are given together in full below. 

Complete Conjugation of avoir have. 

Infinitive. Perfect Infinitive. 

avoir, have, to have avoir eu, to have had 

Present Participle. Perfect Participle. 

ayant, having ayant eu, having had 

Past (or Passive) Participle. 
eu, had 



conjugation of avoir. 



59 



Present. 

j'ai, I have 
tu as, thou hast 
il a, he has 
nous avons, we have 
vous avez, you have 
ils ont, they have 



Indicative. 

Perfect. 

j'ai en, I have had 

tu as eu, thou hast had 

il a eu, lie has had 

nous avons eu, we have had 

vous avez eu, you have had 

ils ont eu, they have had 



Imperfect. Pluperfect. 

j'avais, I had, was having, etc. j'avais eu, Ihad Jiad 

tu avais, thou hadst etc. tu avais eu, thou hadst had 

il avait, he had etc. il avait eu, he had had 

nous avions, tee had etc. nous avions eu, we had had 

vous aviez, you had etc. vous aviez eu, you had had 

ils avaient, they had etc. ils avaient eu, they had had 



Preterit. 

j'eus, Ihad 
tu eus, thou hadst 
il eut, lie had 
nous eumes. we had 
vous eutes, you had 
ils eurent, they had 

Future. 

j'aurai, I shall have 
tu auras, thou wilt have 
il aura, he will have 
nous aurons, we shall have 
vous aurez, you will have 
ils auront, they icill have 

Conditional. 

j'aurais, I should have 
tu aurais, thou icouldst have 
il aurait, he would have 
nous aurions, we should have 
vous auriez, you would have 
ils auraient, they would have 



aie, have, liave thou 



Past Anterior. 

j'eus eu, Ihad had 
tu eus eu, thou hadst had 
il eut eu, he had had 
nous eumes eu, we had had 
vous eutes eu, you hadhad 
ils eurent eu, they had had 

Future Perfect. 

j'aurai eu, I shall have had 
tu auras eu, thou wilt have had 
il aura eu, he will have had 
nous aurons eu, we shall have had 
vous aurez eu, you will have had 
ils auront eu, they icill have had 

Conditional Perfect. 

j'aurais eu, I should have had 
tu aurais eu, thou wouldst have had 
il aurait eu, lie would have had 
nous aurions eu, ice should have had 
vous auriez eu, you would have had 
ils auraient eu, they would have had 

Imperative. 

ayons, let us have 
ayez, have, liave ye 



60 LRSSOK X. 

Subjunctive. 
Present. Perfect. 

que j'aie, that I may have que j'aie eu, that I may have had 

que tu aies, that thou mayest have que tu aies eu, that thou mayest etc. 

qu'il ait, that he may have qu'il ait eu, that he may have had 

que nous ayons, that toe may have que nous ayons eu, that we may etc. 

que vous ayez. that you may have que vous ayez eu, that you may etc. 

qu'ils aient, that they may Jiave qu'ils aient eu, that they may etc. 

Imperfect. Pluperfect. 

que j'eusse, that I might have que j'eusse eu, that I might have Iwd 

que tu eusses, that thou mightest que tu eusses eu, that thou mightest 

have hare had 

qu'il eut, thai 7ie might have qu'il eut eu, that he might have had 

que nous eussions, that we might que nous eussions eu, tliat we might 

have have Ik id 

que vous eussiez, that you might que vous eussiez eu, that you might 

have have had 

qu'ils eussent, that they might have qu'ils eussent eu, that they might 

have had 

VOCABULARY. 

l'or m., gold l'argent m., silver, money 

la main, the hand la poche, the pocket 

le marchand, the (retail) merchant le boulanger, the baker 

malheureux, unhappy ignorant, ignorant 

si, if quoique, although 

Note.— Quoique (XXXIV. la) always requires the following verb to be in the 
subjunctive ; si (XXXIV. 16) has the indicative. For the abbreviation of si to 
s', see 29b. 

Exercise 10. 

1 J'ai un raorceau de pain, et j'aurai anssi du beurre. 
2 Avez-vous eu assez de fromage? 3 Nous aurions eu au- 
tant de beurre que de fromage. 4 Eurent-ils de l'argent ? 
5 Elle eut de l'argent dans la main, et il avait eu de For 
dans la poche. 6 Mon cousin aurait eu du vin, s'il avait 
eu un verre. 7 Mes soeurs auront de jolies robes. 8 Aurai- 
ent-elles eu aussi de beaux chapeaux ? 9 Ayez du cafe avec 
votre pain. 10 Ayons de la viande aussi. !I Mon frere a 
eu un grand cheval laid ; il aura un beau petit cheval. 






conjugation of avoir. 61 

12 II aura eu deux chevaux. 13 Qu'il ait aussi un chien ! 

14 Si nous avions eu un frere, nous aurions eu des amis. 

15 Quoique nous ayons beaucoup d'argent, nous sommes 
tres malheureux. 16 Ayant un bon pere, elle est heureuse. 

17 Quoiqu'il ait eu un maitre excellent, 1'eleve est paresseux 
et ignorant. 18 Le marchand a-t-il eu de la soie bleue ? 
19 II avait beaucoup de soie, mais j'avais tres peu d'argent. 
20 Le boulanger a du pain noir et de bon pain blanc. 21 II 
6tait malbeureux, quoiqu'il etit assez de pain et de vin. 

Theme 10. 

1 Had the merchant some pens ? 2 He had pens, and he 
will have paper, ink, and books. 3 You have had black 
ink ; he will have had good red ink. * Had you had white 
bread ? 5 1 should have had bread enough, if he had had 
butter. 6 The boys had money enough ; they will have 
meat and wine. 7 Our old master would have had a new 
school, if he had had more pupils. 8 Although he had few 
pupils, he was satisfied. 9 Had you a bit of gold in your 
pocket ? 10 1 had gold in my hand, and silver in my pocket. 
11 Have a bit of bread and cheese. 12 Let us have new 
hats and handsome red and blue dresses. 13 We shall have 
had coffee and tea. 14 Will your sisters have red flowers? 
15 Though they had much money, they were unhappy. 

18 That I might have some wine and water ! 17 That you 
might have had a horse ! 18 The man will have a laborious 
life, if he has too little money. 19 The baker, having had 
some wine, had a bottle in his hand. 20 Although the peas- 
ants have little money, they are happy and content. 21 Al- 
though the girl had beautiful eyes, she was very ugly. 



62 



LESSON XI. 



LESSON XL 
conjugation of the verb etre he. 



1. All the simple forms of etre he have been given in 
previous lessons. They are here repeated in their order, 
along with the compound forms, which are made, as in 
English, with the help of the auxiliary avoir have. 

Infinitive. 
etre, be, to be 
Present Participle. Perfect Participle. 

etant, being ayant ete, having been 

Past (or Passive) Participle. 
ete, been 
Indicative. 



Perfect Infinitive. 
avoir ete, to have been 



Present. 

je suis, lam 
tu es 
il est 

nous sommes 
vous etes 
ils sont 

Imperfect. 

j'etais, I was, used to be, etc. 
tu etais 
il etait 
nous etions 
vous etiez 
ils etaient 
Preterit. 

je fus, I was 
tu fus 
ilfut 

nous fumes 
vous futes 
ils furent 



Perfect. 

j'ai ete, / have been 

tu as ete 

il a ete 

nous avons ete 

vous avez ete 

ils ont ete 

Pluperfect. 
j'avais ete, Iliad been 
tu avais ete 
il avait ete 
nous avions ete 
vous aviez ete 
ils avaient ete 

Past Anterior. 

j'eus ete, I had been 
tu eus ete 
il eut ete 
nous eumes ete 
vous eutes ete 
ils eurent ete 



COHJUGATioH of etre. 



63 



Future. 

je serai, I shall be 
tu seras 
il sera 
nous serons 
vous serez 
ils seront 

Conditional. 

je serais, I should be 
tu serais 
il serait 
nous serions 
vous seriez 
ils seraient 



Future Perfect. 

j'aurai ete, I shall have 
tu auras ete 
il aura ete 
nous aurons ete 
vous aurez ete 
ils auront ete 



Conditional Perfect. 

j'aurais ete, I should have 

tu aurais ete 

il aurait ete 

nous aurions ete 

vous auriez ete 

ils auraient ete 



Imperative. 

soyons, let us be 
soyez, be, be ye 

Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 

que j'aie ete, that I may have been 

que tu aies ete 

qu'il ait ete 

que nous ayons ete 

que vous ayez ete 

qu'ils aient ete 

Pluperfect. 

que j'eusse ete, that I might have 



sois, be, be thou 

Present. 

que je sois, that I may be 

que tu sois 

qu'il soit 

que nous soyons 

que vous soyez 

qu'ils soient 

Imperfect. 

que je fusse, that I might be 

que tu fusses 
qu'il fut 

que nous fussions 
que vous fussiez 
qu'ils fussent 

a. Etre corresponds only in part to the Latin esse etc.; the infinitive (dis- 
puted), participles, and imperfect come from the corresponding forms of stare 
stand ; the future and conditional are formed in the usual way (V. 5c) from 
essere, made by adding the usual infinitive-ending re to esse. 

2. To express the indefinite subject it of it is, it ivas, 
etc., the French generally uses ce, literally this (XXIV. 2), 
but sometimes also il it 



que tu eusses ete 
qu'il eut ete 
que nous eussions ete 
que vous eussiez ete 
qu'ils eussent ete 



64 LESSON XI. 

a. II is used in statements of time, particularly of the 
time of day ; and ce in most other cases. Thus : 

il est quatre heures, it is 4 o'clock il etait midi, it teas noon 

il sera dix heures, it will be 10 il est minuit, it is midnight 

o'clock 

il est tard, it is late il est temps de partir, it is time to 

go 

e'est Men, it is well e'etait en vain, it was in tain 

e'est moi, it is I e'etait nous, it was we 

e'est a vous que je parle, it is to you that I speak 

b. If the verb after ce is followed by a plural noun, or a plural 
pronoun of the third person, it is itself made plural : thus, 

ce furent elles, il was they ce seront mes amis, it will be my 

friends 
ce sont nos livres que je vois, it is our books that I see 

VOCABULARY. 

malade, sick, ill faible, feeble, weak 

paresseux, idle, lazy content, contented, happy 

a la campagne, in lite country l'heure f., the hour, o'clock 

a present, at present, now toujours, always 

Exercise 11. 

1 Votre ami est-il riche ? 2 Man ami est pauvre a pre- 
sent, mais il a etc tres riche. 3 lis seraient heureux, s'ils 
avaient etc honnetes et laborieux. 4 Nous avons etc a 
l'ecole, et nous serons a l'eglise avec nos soeurs. 6 Vous 
auriez eu de tres bon vin, si vous aviez ete chez mon oncle. 
6 L'homme a-t-il etc malade ? 7 II a etc tres faible, et il 
sera malade. 8 Quoique les jeunes filles soient tres con- 
tentes a la campagne, elles seront malheureuses a la ville. 
9 Sois bon et sage, et tu seras heureux. 10 Yous etes jeune 
et belle ; soyez contente. u II est trois heures a present ; il 
sera quatre heures. 12 Ce sont les enfants de mon frcre. 
13 lis auraient eu de belles fleurs et des fruits, mais ils ont 
6te tres mauvais. 14 II est deux heures, et elle sera a 
l'eglise. 15 C'etait l'homme le plus paresseux du monde. 
16 Quoique le garcon fut a l'ecole, il etait toujours pares- 






NEGATIVE CONJUGATION, 65 

seux. "Ayant ete malade, la femme est tres faible. 

18 Quoiqu'il f ut riche, il etait plus malheureux qu'un homrae 
pauvre. 19 II aura ete chez mon pere une heure.- 20 C'etait 
du vin d'Espagne. 

Theme 11. 
1 It is my children. 2 They have been very bad, but they 
will be good now. 3 It is three o'clock. 4 My sisters will 
have been at school two hours. 5 Although they are very 
young, they are very idle. 6 If the man has been sick, he 
will be feeble. 7 Although we have been poor, we were 
always contented. 8 1 should have been at school, if we 
had had a new master. 9 The boy had been at church dur- 
ing three hours. 10 Although the girls had beautiful hands, 
they were ugly. " Be good and active, and you will be 
happy. 12 Let us be lazy and happy. 13 It will be three 
o'clock, and the boys will be at school. H I should have 
been at Paris, but my father is in England. 1& If we had 
been in the country, we should have had fruit and flowers 
enough. 16 It was one o'clock, and Henry was in his room. 
17 My sister had been very rich, and she was in Rome with 
my mother. 18 Having been in Italy, she is very happy. 

19 It is a good man, but it is a bad merchant. 20 It is a 
wooden table. 



LESSON XII. 

NEGATIVE CONJUGATION. 

1. A verb is made negative by putting ne before and 
pas after it — in a compound tense, before and after the 
auxiliary. 

a. It must always be borne in mind that in any compound form 
it is the auxiliary that is the real verb, the added participle being 
only a verbal adjective. All rules, therefore, as to the place of 
negative words, subject and object pronouns, and so on, given 
with reference to the verb, apply to the auxiliary and not to the 
participle in compound forms. 
5 



66 LESSOH XII. 

b. The ne comes after the subject, but precedes a pronoun-ob- 
ject (XXII. 7). It is abbreviated always to n' before a vowel or 
h mute (26c). 

2. Examples of tenses inflected negatively are : 

je ne suis pas, I am not je n'avais pas eu, Iliad not 7iad 

tu n'es pas, thou art not tu n'avais pas eu, thou hadst not liad 

il n'est pas, he is not il n'avait pas eu, he had not had 

nous ne sommes pas, we are not nous n'avions pas eu, ire had not had 

vous n'etes pas, you are not vous n'aviez pas eu, you had not had 

ils ne sont pas, they are not ils n'avaient pas eu, they had not liad 

3. Instead of pas is sometimes used point, wiiich makes a 
stronger or more emphatic negative : thus, 

il n'est point, he is not (at all) je n'avais point eu, I (certainly) 

had not had. 

a. Pas and point are really nouns, meaning step and point, used adverbially 
to strengthen the negation, like English not a bit and the like. 

b. With some verbs, ne is usually or always used alone, the pas 
being omitted : see Second Part, § 166. 

4. For never, nobody, and nothing, the French say 
ne . . . jamais (literally, not ever), ne . . . personne (liter- 
ally, not a person) and ne . . . rien (literally, not a thing), 
respectively, the two words being separated, and the ne 
put always before the verb (or auxiliary) : thus, 

je ne suis jamais malade, I am never ill 

il n'avait jamais ete chez nous, he had never been at our liouse 

je n'ai vu personne, I have seen nobody 

personne n'a eu mon livre, no one has had my book 

n'avez-vous rien, have you nothing? 

rien ne serait plus cruel, nothing would be more cruel 

5. A verb made negative by ne is also followed by 
ni . . . ni, to give the sense of neither . . . nor ; by guere, 
to give the sense of scarcely, hut little • very often by 
que (literally than : i.e. else than), to give the sense of 
only ; and by plus, to give the sense of no longer: thus, 

il n'est ni jeune ni beau, lie is neither young nor handsome 
il n'a guere d'argent, lie lias hardly any money 
je n'ai que trois livres, I have only three books 
elle n'est plus ici, she is no longer here 



NEGATIVE CONJUGATION. 67 

6. The negative ne belongs strictly to the verb, and 
can never be used except with a verb expressed. If the 
verb, then, is omitted (for example, in answers), the ne 
is also omitted, and the other word has by itself a nega- 
tive sense : thus, 

avez-vous des livres, have you books f pas un, not one 

qu'avez-vous, what hate you t rien, nothing 

qui est, ici, who is here ? personne, nobody 

7. After a negative verb, the partitive sense of a noun 
is expressed by de alone, without the article : thus, 

je n'ai pas de pain, I have no bread 

nous n'avions guere de vin, we had scarcely any wine 

vous n'aurez plus de patience, you will no longer have patience 

a. After ni . . . ni, both preposition and article are omitted, 
and the partitive sense is left unexpressed, as in English : thus, 

je n'ai ni pain ni beurre, I have neither bread nor butter 

b. On the other hand, after ne . . . que only both preposition 
and article are used : thus, 

nous ne voyons que des ennemis, we see only enem'es 

8. When a negative verb is made interrogative, the 
subject-pronoun is put, as usual, immediately after the 
verb (and joined to it by a hyphen), while everything 
else remains unchanged. An example of a tense used 
both negatively and interrogatively is as follows : 

n'aurai-je pas ete, shall I not have been? 

n'auras-tu pas ete, wilt thou not have been ? 

n'aura-t-il pas ete, will he not have been ? 

n'aurons-nous pas ete, shall we not have been? 

n'aurez-vous pas ete, will you not have been? 

n'auront-ils pas ete, will they not have been ? 
a. N'est-ce pas is a much-used phrase, meaning is it not so ? 
or corresponding to English repeated questions like is Tie not f do 
they not f and the like : thus, il est encore malade, n'est-ce pas 
he is still ill, is he not f vous avez mon livre, n'est-ce pas you 
have my book, have you not f 

VOCABULARY. 

No new words are given with this Lesson, but all the negative expressions given 
above are to be well learned. 



68 LESSOR XII. 

Exercise 12. 

1 N'avez-vous pas ete chez votre oncle ? a Non, il n'etait 
pas a la maison. 3 Avez-vous du pain ? 4 Non, nous n'a- 
vons pas de pain, nous n'avons que du bearre et du fro- 
mage. 5 Le marchand a-t-il du fruit ou du vin ? 6 II n'a 
ni fruit ni vin. 7 Le pauvre paysan n'a-t-il pas ete ma- 
lade? b Il n'a jamais ete malade, mais sa femme est tres 
faible, et il n'a rien pour ses enfants. 8 Quoiqu'elles 
ne soient pas riches, elles ne sont jamais malheureuses. 

10 Votre frere ne sera-t-il pas a Paris avec ses amis ? 

11 Non, il ne sera ni a Paris ni a Londres ; il est en Italic 

12 Personne n'a ete chez mon pere. 13 N'avez-vous rien 
pour mes pauvres petits enfants ? M Vous n'avez jamais 
eu d'enfants ; vous n'avez que des freres et des soeurs. 
1& J'ai eu de bon papier rouge et de l'encre excellente, mais 
je n'ai plus rien. 16 Les garcons n'avaient-ils pas un tres 
mauvais maitre? l7 Non, le maitre n'etait point mauvais; 
il n'a ete que faible et malade. 18 Nous avons assez d'eau, 
mais nous n'avons guere de vin. lQ Je n'aurais jamais ete 
a l'ecole, si mon pere n'avait pas eu une maison a Paris. 
20 Elle n'a ete chez personne. 

Theme 12. 

1 Had you not a sister ? 2 No, I had neither sister nor 
brother, but I had many good friends. 3 Is not your father 
at Paris ? 4 No, he has never been in Paris. 5 The young 
girls will not be either at the house or at the school ; they 
will be at the church. ° The poor woman is not happy ; 
she has been ill, and she has only a bit of bread in the 
house. 7 Has not the peasant many children ? 8 No, he 
has no children ; he has only a wife and a niece. 9 The 
school was not in the city. 10 Although the master was 
old, he was not (at all) ugly. " He had good scholars, 
and he was never unhappy. 12 He would not have been 
unhappy, if his pupils had not been very bad. i3 We have 



DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVES. 69 

been ill, but no one is ill any longer. 14 If he had never 
been idle, he would not be poor now. lb I have only one 
friend, and he has neither books nor paper. 16 Are you not 
happier than your friend ? 17 1 shall not have had any wine 
in my glass. 18 If the girls had not had new hats, they 
would not have been at the church. 10 The children were 
in the garden, but they had no fruit. 20 No one had any 
fruit. 21 He is no longer at my father's. 



LESSON XIII. 

DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVES. 

1. In French is made a fuller distinction than in English be- 
tween pronominal adjectives, accompanying an expressed noun 
which they qualify, and pronominal substantives, or pronouns 
proper, standing for a noun not expressed. The pronoun forms 
will be given in later Lessons (XXIV. -XXVII.) ; the adjective 
forms, here and in the next Lesson. The pronominal adjectives 
always qualify a following noun, and are of the same gender and 
number with it. 

2. The demonstrative adjectives, meaning this or 
that and these or those, are as follows : 

cet or ce m., cette f. ; ces m.f. plural. 

Cet m. is used when the following word begins with a 
vowel (or h mute) ; otherwise, ce. Thus : 

ce cbapeau, this (or that) hat ces chapeaux, these (or those) hats 

cette robe, this (etc.) dress ces robes, these (etc.) dresses 

cet arbre, this (etc.) tree cet homme, this (etc.) man 

cet bonnete bomme, this (etc.) honest fellow 

3. When the demonstrative is meant to be emphatic, 
or when this and that are to be distinguished from one 
another, the adverbs ci here and la there are added re- 
spectively to the qualified noun ; and they are joined to 
it in writing by a hyphen : thus, 



70 LESSOR XIII. 

ce chapeau-ci, this hat (literally, this hat here) 

ces robes-la, those dresses (literally, those dresses there) 

cet homme-ci et cette femme-la, this man and that woman 

4. The interrogative adjective, meaning which or 
what, is : 

Sing, quel m. , quelle f . ; plur. quels m. , quelles f . 

Thus : 

quel livre avez-vous, which (or what) book have you ? 
quelles fleurs sont sur la table, what flowers are on the table? 

5. a. The interrogative adjective is also used in ex- 
clamation : thus, 

quelle bonte, what goodness ! quels beaux livres, what beautiful books! 

b. It is likewise used as relative : thus, 

je ne sais quel livre il a, I don't know which book he has 

c. The indefinite artiele, sometimes added in English after ichat, 
is not expressed in French : thus, quel bel homme, what a hand- 
some man ! 

VERB-LESSON. 

6. In phrases signifying bodily conditions which one 
feels or is conscious of, avoir with a noun is used in 
French, where the English has the verb be with an adjec- 
tive: thus, 

j'ai faim, I am hungry (literally, I have hunger) 
il a soif, he is thirsty (literally, he has thirst) 
n'avez vous pas sommeil, are you not sleepy f 
nous avons froid, we are cold vous avez chaud, you are warm 

tu avais peur, thou wast afraid ils auront honte, they will be ashamed 

a. Similar phrases are avoir mal a have a pain or ache in, 
avoir raison be right or in the right, avoir tort be wrong or in 
the wrong : thus, 

j'ai mal a la tete, I have the headache 

vous avez raison et j'ai tort, you are right and I am wrong 

b. In a corresponding manner, questions as to one's personal 
condition are asked and answered with avoir: thus, qu'avez- 
vous what is the matter with you f (literally, what have you f) 
and avez-vous quelque chose is anything the matter with you f 
(literally, have you anything f) and je n'ai rien nothing is the 
matter with me (literally, I have nothing). 



DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVES. 71 
VOCABULARY. 

la bibliotheque, the library le conte, the story, tale 

le roman, the romance, novel l'histoire f., the history 

la tete, the head la dent, the tooth 

autre, other ennuyeux, dull, tedious 

pourquoi, ichy ? parce que (XXXIV. da), because 

Exercise 13. 

1 Quels enfants ont ete a l'ecole ? 2 Ces bons petits gar- 

cons-ci sont tou jours a l'ecole, mais ces filles-la n'ont jamais 

ete a l'ecole. 3 Quels livres avez-vous dans la main ? 4 Ce 

livre-ci est un roman, et cet autre livre est une histoire. 

5 C'etaient des livres de la bibliotheque de mon oncle. 

6 Ces livres-la sont-ils interessants ? 7 Ces romans-la sont 
tres interessants, mais cette histoire-ci est trop ennuyeuse. 
8 Les contes et les romans sont tou jours plus interessants 
que les histoires. 9 Quelles histoires avaient-ils eues (X. 5b) ? 
10 Us avaient eu l'histoire de France ; cet autre livre est une 
histoire d'Angleterre. u Cet homme est-il l'ami de votre 
fils ? 12 Non, madame, c'est son cousin. 13 Quel maitre vos 
enfants avaient-ils ? 14 Je n'ai pas d'enfants ; ce garcon-ci 
est mon neveu, et cette jolie fille-la est ma niece ; ils 
avaient un maitre tres bon, mais tres ennuyeux. lb Cette 
femme a beaucoup de cousins ; mais elle n'a que ces deux 
enfants. " Quels jolis petits enfants ! 17 Dans quelle mai- 
son avez-vous ete ? lb J'ai ete a Paris chez ma cousine. 
19 Quoique cette femme-ci soit tres pauvre, elle n'est pas 
plus malheureuse que cet homme-la. 20 Pourquoi cette 
femme est-elle malheureuse ? 21 Elle est malheureuse, parce 
qu'elle est toujours malade. 

Theme 13. 

This young girl has been in the country with her father. 
: What dresses has she had (X. 5b) ? 3 She has had these 
dresses and that hat. 4 These histories are longer and less 
interesting than those novels, 6 What book have you in 



72 LESSOR XIV. 

the hand ? 6 This book is a dull little story. 7 This woman 
is the mother of this little girl, and the aunt of that big 
boy. 8 These young girls are not her daughters. 9 She 
has many cousins, but she has only this child. 10 These 
books belong (III. 6) to my uncle's library. " What beau- 
tiful books, and what a large library ! 12 If this man had 
not been ill, these children would have had enough bread. 
13 Although this man and this woman are honest and in- 
dustrious, they have always been poor. " lie had the bot- 
tle in this hand, and the glass in that hand. 15 In what 
cities have you been ? 1G I have been in this city, but I 
have never been in that village. 17 This old man is very 
dull. I8 Why is he so dull ? 13 He is dull because he has 
always been idle, and because he has never been at school, 
20 What an interesting story ! 

VERB-EXERCISE. 

Are you cold ? I am cold, but he is warm. Will he be 
hungry? He will be hungry and thirsty. What is the 
matter with him ? He is sleepy. Is anything the matter 
with you ? No, nothing is the matter with me. They 
have the headache. I am right and you are wrong. I am 
always right ; I am never wrong. Nothing is the matter 
with us. Has she not the toothache ? No, nothing is the 
matter with her. We were afraid. They are ashamed. 



LESSON XIY. 

POSSESSIVE AND INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 

1. The possessive adjectives are : 

Sing, mon m., ma f.; plur. mes m.f., my 

ton m., ta 1; tes m.f., thy 

son m., sa f. ; ses m.f., his, her, its 

notre m.f; nos m.f., our 

votre m.f.; vos m.f., your 

leur m.f.; Jems m.i, their 






POSSESSIVE AND INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 73 

a. There is no distinction made in French between his and her 
and its ; son etc. has all these meanings, and, like the other ad- 
jectives, is varied only to agree with the noun which it qualifies. 

2. But the feminine singular forms ma, ta, sa are not 
allowed before a word, beginning with a vowel (or h 
mute) ; instead are used mon, ton, son : thus, 

mon amie, my (female) fiend ton epouse, thy spouse 

son ame, his soul son histoire, her history 

mon aveugle sceur, my blind sister ton aimable fille, thy lovely daughter 

3. The possess! ves are repeated before every noun 

that thej qualify : thus, 

my father and mother, mon pere et ma mere 
her friends and relatives, ses amis et ses parents 

4. Titles of respect or politeness, used both in ad- 
dressing and in speaking of persons, are the following : 

*monsieur, sir, Mr. , the gentleman 
*messieurs, gentlemen, Messrs. 

madame, madam, my lady, the lady, Mrs. 

mesdames, my ladies, the -ladies 

mademoiselle, Miss, the young lady 

mesdemoiselles, Misses, the young ladies 

a. These words are compounds with the possessive mon my, and both parts of 
the compounds are inflected. 

b. In speaking to any one of his or her relatives, politeness often 
requires these titles to be put before the possessive : thus, 

your mother, madame votre mere 

your brotJiers, messieurs vos freres 

your son and daughter, monsieur votre fils et mademoiselle votre fille 

c. When these titles are used with a surname, they are written 
with a capital, thus, Monsieur Guizot; or, by abbreviation, M. 
Guizot. 

5. The possessive is often used in French, especially in address, 
where it is omitted in English : thus, bonjour, ma sceur good- 
day, sister, oui, mon general yes, General. 

a. On the other hand, the definite article is often used in 
French instead of the possessive, where the connection shows 
clearly what is meant : thus, il l'avait dans la poche he had it 
in his pocket, fermez les yeux shut your eyes. 

6, The commonest indefinite adjectives are : 



74 LESSOR XIV. 

chaque, each, every nul, not any, no 

tout, every, all aucun, not any, no 

quelque, some plusieurs, several 

a. Of these words, chaque is only singular, and plusieurs only 
plural ; nul and aucun form feminines, nulle and aucune, but no 
plural ; quelque has the plural quelques ; tout makes the femi- 
nine toute, and the plurals tous m. , toutes f . 

b. Tout means all when followed by an article or possessive or 
demonstrative : thus, 

toute la ville, all the city (t/ie toute ville, every city 

whole city) 

tous ses enfants, all his children tout enfant, each child 

tout ce temps, all this time a tout temps, at every lime 

c. Quelque signifies a more limited some than the partitive (IV. 
1, 2), and is usually better rendered by a little, a few: thus, 

des pommes, some apples quelques pommes, a few apples 

de l'argent, money quelque argent, some little money 

d. Nul and aucun both alike require ne with the verb : thus, 

nul homme nest parfait, no man is perfect 
il n a aucune faute, lie has not any fault 

VOCABULARY. 

le boeuf, the ox la vache, Hie cow 

la brebis, the sheep le champ, the field 

la pomme, the apple la pomme de terre, the potato 

la poire, the pear la peche, the peach 

le panier, the basket le vase, the vase 

le legume, the vegetable le parent, the relative, parent 

Exercise 14. 

1 Monsieur B. a-t-il des enfants ? 2 Oui, madame, ce gar- 
con-ci est son fils, mais la petite fille est sa niece. 3 Ces 
demoiselles avec Mademoiselle B. sont ses cousines. 4 Ces 
messieurs s"ont-ils les amis de monsieur votre pere ? 5 Non, 
ce sont ses freres. 6 Mon amie a un grand vase d'argent. 
7 Quelles fleurs a-t-elle dans la main ? 8 Elle n'a point de 



POSSESSIVE AND INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 75 

fleurs ; elle n'a qu'un livre dans la main, et une pomme 
dans la poche. 9 Mademoiselle votre soaur n'a-t-elle pas 
ete en Allemagne ? 10 Non, elle a ete en Angleterre avec 
madame votre tante. 1J As-tu des amis, mon enfant ? 

12 Oui, madame, j'ai plusieurs amis et quelques parents. 

13 Cette f emme-ci est-elle ta mere ? u Non, madame, elle 
est ma tante. 15 Yoici mon pere et ma mere. 16 Ces pay- 
sans ont-ils des vaches et des *boeufs ? 17 Non, mon oncle, 
chaque paysan a une vache et quelques brebis, mais aucun 
paysan n'a de boeufs. 18 Toutes leurs brebis sont dans les 
champs. 19 Quels fruits avez-vous dans votre panier? 
20 J'ai quelques pommes et plusieurs poires. 21 N'avez-vous 
pas aussi des pommes de terre ? 22 Je n'ai aucune pomme 
de terre, mais j'ai des peches. 

Theme 14. 

1 Is your mother at the house ? 2 No, she is in Paris, 
with her cousin, Miss B. 3 Are these boys your friends? 
4 No, cousin ; they are the children of my teacher. 5 They 
have been in all the schools of this whole city. 6 Every 
friend of my son is my friend also. 7 All these peasants 
have been in the fields, and each woman has a basket on 
her head. 8 Several women have vegetables in their baskets. 
9 Have you peaches and pears, my good woman ? 10 1 have 
a few pears, sir, but I have no peaches. !I Do all these 
animals belong to your son ? 12 No, sir, the sheep belong 
to my son, but he has no horse, and we have only three 
cows. 13 What vegetables have we, Mary ? H We have a 
few potatoes in the house, and several apples. I5 Each 
child will have an apple, but no child will have a peach. 
18 1 had some little money in my pocket, but my brother 
had nothing. 17 1 never have potatoes in my pocket. 
18 They had some flowers, but they had no vase. 19 This 
poor old woman had a basket on her head. 20 My friend 
(f.) had her history in her hand ; she is now at school. 



76 



LESSON XV. 



LESSON XV. 



CARDINAL NUMERALS. 



1. 

1 un 

2 deux 

3 trois 

4 quatre 

5 *cinq 

6 *six 

7 *sept 

8 *huit 

9 neuf 

10 *dix 

11 *onze 

12 douze 

13 treize 

14 quatorze 

15 quinze 

16 seize 

17 *dix-sept 

18 *dix-huit 

19 *dix-neuf 

20 vingt 

2 



The names of numbers are as follows 



10 dix 

20 vingt 

30 trente 

40 quarante 

50 cinquante 

60 *soixante 

70 soixante-dix 

80 quatre-vingts 

90 quatre vingt -dix 

100 cent 

101 cent un 

102 cent deux 

103 cent trois 

200 deux cents 

201 deux cent un 
206 deux cent six 

1000 mille, mil 
2000 



61 soixante et un 

62 soixante-deux 

63 soixante-trois 

64 soixante-quatre 

65 soixante-cinq 

66 soixante-six 

67 soixante-sept 

68 soixantehuit 

69 soixante-neuf 

70 soixante-dix 

71 soixante et onze 

72 soixante-douze 

73 soixante-treize 

74 soixante-quatorze 

75 soixante-quinze 

76 soixante-seize 

77 soixante-dix sept 

78 soixante-dix huit 

79 soixante-dix-neuf 

80 quatre-vingts 



deux mille 
1,000,000 un million 
2,000,000 deux millions 

a. Un is masculine only, and forms the feminine 
une ; no other numeral makes a distinction of gender. 

b. Vingt twenty, score, and cent hundred, are the only 
numerals (below million) that make a plural : thus, vingts, 
cents. This plural form is nsed when score or hundred 
is multiplied by a preceding numeral — not, however, if 
an added numeral follows : thus, 

cinq cents, five hundred cinq cent dix, five hundred and ten 

quatre-vingts, fourscore quatre-vingt-un, eighty-one 



en 



CAKDIKAL NUMERALS. 77 

3. The French has now no separate names for seventy, eighty, 
ninety, but after sixty-nine (as shown in the table) it counts 
sixty-ten, sixty-eleven, etc. , up to sixty -nineteen ; and so in like 
manner fourscore-ten, fourscore-eleven, etc., up to fourscore- 
nineteen or ninety-nine. 

a. But the older septante seventy, octante eighty, and nonante 
ninety, are still occasionally met with. 

4. The other odd numbers between the tens are made 
in the same way as those for 61 to 69 in the table. 

Thus, vingt et un 21, *vingt-deux 22, trente-trois 33, qua- 
rante-cinq 45, cinquante-huit 58, and so on. 

a. Vingt-un 21, trente-un 31, etc., are sometimes used; also 
cent et un 101, soixante et dix 70, soixante-onze 71 ; but only 
quatre- vingt-un 81, quatre-vingt-dix 90, quatre- vingt-onze 91. 

5. A hyphen is always inserted between a ten and a 
unit immediately following, but not when et stands be- 
tween ; and it is not used after cent or mille. 

6. Un is not used before cent or mille in counting : that is, the 
French says simply hundred, thousand, not one hundred or a 
thousand and so on. 

7. In giving dates, the briefer form mil is used in- 
stead of mille: thus, 

mil sept cent soixante-seize, 1776 
mil huit cent quatre vingt-cinq, 1885 
a. The French never says, in dates or elsewhere, eighteen hun- 
dred and so on, but always (a) thousand eight hundred etc. 

8. Still higher numbers are used than those given in the table : 
thus, un milliard or un billion a thousand million, un trillion 
a mill ion millions, etc. 

9. After plus more and moins less, before a numeral, 
than is expressed by de : thus, plus de trois ans more than 
three years, moins de dix minutes less than ten minutes. 

VOCABULARY. 

l'an m., l'annee f., the year le mois, the month 

la semaine, the week le jour, the day 

la minute, the minute la seconde, tfie second 

combien, how much f how many f (V. 4) la chose, the thing 

la fois, the time font, make (XXXII. 86) 



78 LESSON XV. 

Exercise 15. 

(The figures are to be read into words.) 

1 5 ; IV ; 23 ; 44 ; 72 ; 98 ; 117 ; 361 ; 1492 ; 1776 ; 1886. 
2 Ce paysan-ci a 3 chevaux, 4 bceufs, .13 vaches, et 219 
brebis. 3 L'annee a 365 jours. 4 Chaque jour a 24 heures. 

5 L'heure a 60 minutes et 360 secondes. 6 L'annee a 12 mois. 
7 Le mois a 29, ou 30, ou 31 jours. 8 Combien de minutes 
le jour a-t-il ? 9 60 fois 24 font 1440 ; le jour a 1440 min- 
utes. 10 Combien de livres avez-vous sur la table ? " J'ai 
plus de 7 livres. 12 Mon oncle a plus de 565 livres dans sa 
bibliothdque. 13 Combien de fruits a-t-il dans son panier? 
14 II a 11 pommes, 7 poires, et plus de 10 peches. 16 J'ai 
ete en Angleterre 6 mois et 3 semaines. 16 Combien 
d'heures la semaine a-t-elle ? " La semaine a 168 heures : 
7 fois 24 font 168. 18 5 fois 9 font 45. 

Theme 15. 
1 Have you many books ? 2 1 have less than a hundred 
books, but my father has more than a thousand in his 
library. 3 How many peasants are in this village ? 4 Nine- 
ty-six ; and each peasant has a wife and several children. 

6 How many animals have you, my good friend ? 6 1 have 
nine cows, twelve oxen, and a hundred and twenty-one 
sheep. 7 Charles, how many weeks has a year ? * A year 
has fifty-two weeks and one day. 9 Three times four make 
twelve. 10 Five times two make ten. " Seven times nine 
make sixty-three. 12 Eleven times twelve make a hundred 
and thirty-two. l3 Where is your mother, sir ? 14 She has 
been more than four days in the country, but she is at home 
now. 15 These boys have had 41 apples ; they will be sick. 

16 We shall have been in London less than three weeks. 

17 A month has thirty or thirty-one days. 






ORDINAL NUMERALS. 79 

LESSON XVI. 

ORDINAL NTTMEKALS. 

1. The ordinals are mostly formed from the cardi- 
nals, whether simple or compound, by adding the ending 
-ieme, before which a final e of the cardinal is omitted. 
But— 

a. First is premier, and second is either *second or the 
regular deuxieme — except in compound numbers, where 
first is unieme, and second is deuxieme only. 

1. Cinq makes cinquieme, with inserted u ; and neuf 
makes neuvieme, with change of f to v. 

2. Examples of the ordinals are : 

«* ^ \ vingt-unieme 
1st premier 21st i . 

r ( vingt et unieme 

2d-!* SeC ° n .. 22d vingt-deuxieme 

( deuxieme 

3d troisieme 43d quarante-troisieme 

4th quatrieme 56th cinquante-sixieme 

5th cinquieme 67th soixante-septieme 

6th sixieme 77th soixante-dix-septieme 

7th septieme 99th quatre-vingt-dix-neuvieme 

8th huitieme 100th centieme 

9th neuvieme 101st cent unieme 

11th onzieme 713th sept cent treizieme 

18th dix-huitieme 1000th millieme 

20th vingtieme 1248th mille deux cent quarante-huitieme 

a. An ordinal is generally preceded by the definite 
article, le or la or les ; and premier and second have a 
special feminine form : thus, la premiere, la seconde. 

b. Second and deuxieme are used somewhat indifferently ; but 
second is rather preferred where there are only two objects (no 
third, fourth, etc., to follow): thus, le second tome the second 
(and last) volume, or le deuxieme tome, the second volume (of a. 
series). 

3. The cardinal numeral sometimes stands in French 
where in English we use the ordinal : namely — 



80 LESSON XVI. 

a. In giving the day of the month, except the first : 
thus, 

le deux Janvier, the second of January 

le quatre ou le cinq avril, the fourth or ffth of April . 

du douze au vingt-trois mai, from the 12th to the 23d of May 

le dix du mois, the tenth of Uie month 
but 

le premier mai, the first of May 

h. In giving the title of a sovereign, except the first 
and sometimes the second : thus, 

Guillaume trois, William III. 
Henri quatre, Henry IV. 
Louis quatorze, Louis XIV. 

but 

Henri premier, Henry I. 
Charles deux or Charles second, Charles H. 
c. In other numerations also, where the number follows the 
thing enumerated : thus, 

tome deux, volume second chapitre quatre, chapter fourth 

page vingt-cinq, page twenty-fifth article quarante-neuf, article 49 

4. As in English, the ordinals are used also as frac- 
tional? — hut only from ffth upward : thus, 
un cinquieme, a fifth part trois vingtiemes, three twentieths 

a. For half the French lias two words, moitie f. as 
noun, and demi (demie f.) as adjective. But demi before 
a noun is joined to it with a hyphen, and is not varied 
for gender. Thus : 

la moitie du temps, half of the time 

un demi pied, a half -fool, half a foot 

une demi-heure, a half -hour, half an hour 

un pied et demi, afoot and a half 

une heure et demie, an hour and a half 

b. The words for third arid fourth or quarter are tiers 
and quart respectively : thus, 

trois et un tiers, three and a third 

un quart d'heure, quarter of an hour 

une aune et trois quarts, a yard and three quarters 

c. Quint is also rarely used for fifth part, instead of cinquieme, 



ORDIKAL NUMEKALS. 81 



VOCABULARY. 



le grand-pere, the grandfather le petit-fils, the grandson 

le roi, the king la reine, ilie queen 

le siecle, the century le tome, the volume 

le chapitre, the chapter la page, the page 

dernier, last (VIII. 5c) prochain, next 

Edouard, Edward Elisabeth, Elizabeth 

Exercise 16. 

(The figures are to be read into words.) 

1 Le l r , le 5 me , le 14 me , le 23 me , le 34 me , le 57 me , le 72 me , le 
96 me , le 151 me , le 4004 me . 2 Henri etait le quatrieme fils et 
le septieme enfant de ses parents. 3 Louis XV. fut petit- 
fils de Louis XIV., et grand-pere de Louis XVI. et de 
Charles X. 4 Les deux fils de Charles I. etaient Charles 
II. et Jacques II. 5 Henri VIII. avait 7 f emmes ; la 
premiere avait une fille, Marie. 6 Quel livre avez-vous 
dans la main ? 7 J'ai le 3 me tome d'une histoire de France. 
b Combien de pages ce livre a-t-il ? 9 II a 387 pages ; mais 
le 2 me tome a 419 pages, et le l r n'a que 278 pages. 10 Com- 
bien de mois avez-vous ete en Italie ? " J'ai ete a Rome 
deux mois et demi, et a Florence une semaine et demie. 
J2 J'etais a Londres le 15 du mois, et j'avais ete a Paris du 
18 au 29 du mois dernier. 13 Quel tome avez-vous ? 14 J'ai 
tome trois, chapitre quarante-deux, page trois cent cinq. 
15 Ce garcon a ete une demi-heure a l'ecole ; il sera a l'eglise 
deux heures et un quart. 16 Ce mois est le 12 me de l'annee. 
17 Avez-vous du pain ? 18 Non, monsieur, nous avons trois 
livres et demie de sucre, et une livre et quart de beurre ; 
mais nous n'avons pas de pain. 19 J'ai ete ici trois quarts 
d'heure, et je n'ai rien eu. 20 Nous sommes enfants du 
19 me siecle. 

Theme 16. 

1 She is the fifth daughter of her parents. 2 George III. 
was grandson of George II. , and father of William IV. 
3 Were you in Paris the 13th of last month ? 4 No, I was 



82 LESSON XVII. 

at Paris the 18th, and I shall be in London from the 12th 
to the 27th of the next month. & What history have you? 
6 1 have volume fifth of the history of Henry VII. 7 Henry 
VIII. was son of Henry VII., and father of Edward VI., 
Mary, and Elizabeth. 8 Elizabeth was the second queen of 
England ; Victoria is the fifth. 9 Have you been in Ger- 
many ? 10 1 was in Germany a year and three quarters. 
11 1 shall have been in school two hours and a half. 1S Six 
months are (the) half of the year. 13 Each child had a 
half -cup of tea and a bit of bread. " They had a pound 
and a quarter of cheese, and three pounds and a half of 
sugar. i5 These (ce) are the children of my fourth son. 
1G The first, the fourth, and the sixth of the children are 
boys. I7 The second, the third, and the fifth are girls. 
18 My grandfather is now in his 83d year; he has many 
grandsons. 19 You are the 14th grandson of your grand- 
father. 20 The France of our days is not the France of the 
17th century. 



LESSON XVII. 

NUMERALS CONTINUED — MONTHS AND WEEK-DAYS. 

1. The names of the months are as follows : 
Janvier, January mai, May septembre, September 
fevrier, February juin, June octobre. October 
*mars, March juillet, July novembre, November 
*avril, April *a<mt, August decembre, December 

2. The names of the days of the week are as follows : 
dimanche, Sunday mercredi, Wednesday vendredi, Friday 
lundi, Monday jeudi, Thursday samedi, Saturday 
mardi, Tuesday 

a. The names of months and of week-days are not written with 
capitals, as in English, but are treated like common nouns. 

3. In giving a date, the number (generally cardinal : 
XVI. Za) of the month-day stands before the month- 



NUMERALS : MONTHS AND WEEK-DATS. 83 

name, and is not usually followed by de of * before it 
stands the article le (in old style, ce this, and in mercan- 
tile style au on the) : thus, 

lundi le premier avril (rarely d'avril), Monday, April 1st 

mardi le quatre juillet, Tuesday, July Uh 

au trente juin, payez etc. , on June 30th, pay etc. 

Paris, ce dix sept aout, mil huit cents, Paris, Aug. 17. 1800. 

a. In asking the day of the month, various expressions are 
used : e.g. quel jour du mois (or quel quantieme) sommes-nous 
(or avons-nous, or est-il) aujourd'hui what day of the month is 
it to-day? nous sommes (etc.) le treize it is the lMh. 

4. In giving the time of day, o'clock is expressed by 
heures, literally hours, and the parts of hours, as in the 
following examples : 

one o'clock, une heure five o'clock, cinq heures 

what o'clock is it, quelle heure est-il ? 

it will soon be eleven, il sera bientot onze heures 

half past three, trois heures et demie 

quarter past four, quatre heures et quart (or et un quart) 

at a quarter to seven, a six heures et trois quarts or 

a sept heures moins un quart 
twenty three minutes past eight, huit heures et vingt-trois minutes 
at twelve minutes before ten,' si dix heures moins douze minutes 
a. As the examples show, heures is not to be omitted. 
o. But douze heures is not used for twelve tf clock ; in- 
stead of it is said midi (literally midday) for twelve at 
noon, and minuit (literally midnight) for twelve at night : 
thus, 

half past twelve o'clock, midi (or minuit) et demie 

twenty minutes to twelve, midi (or minuit) moins vingt minutes 

5. One's age is thus expressed : 

how old are you, quel age avez-vous 1 (literally, what age have you) 
lam fifteen years old, j'ai quinze ans (literally, I have 15 years) 
my sister is five and a half, ma soeur a cinq ans et demi 

6. Measure is expressed as follows : 

he is 6 feet high, il est haut de six pieds (literally, high by 6 feet) 
this house is 45 feet long, cette maison est longue de quarante-oinq pied8 
or a quarante-cinq pieds de longueur 



84 LESSOR XVII. 

7. For times with a numeral is used fois: thus, deux fois 
twice, cinq fois sept font trente-cinq five times seven are (lit- 
erally, make) thirty-five. 

8. For other numeral derivatives, see the Second Part, §§ 67 etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

longueur, length largeur, breadth 

aujourd'hui, to-day souvent, often 

ici, here la, there 

demain, to-morrow apres-demain, day after to-morrow 

hier, yesterday avant-hier, day before yesterday 

Exercise 17. 

1 Paris, le 23 Avril, 1886. 2 Quel jour du mois avons- 
nous aujourd'hui? 3 Aujourd'hui est le 19 ou le 20 ; de- 
main sera le 21. 4 Fevrier est le 2me, et decembre le 12me 
mois de l'annee. 5 Dimanche est le ler et vendrcdi le 6me 
jour de la semaine. 6 Nous avons mercredi aujourd'hui ; 
avant-hier a ete lundi, et apres-demain sera vendredi. 7 A 
quelle heure seras-tu chez mon pere demain ? 8 Je serai a 
l'eglise a dix heures et demie, et je serai chez ton pere a 
midi et quart. ° Quelle heure est-il ? 10 II est onze heures 
moins dix minutes, et nous avons ete a l'ecole pendant deux 
heures et trois quarts. M Quel age votre fils a-t-il, madame ? 
12 Mon fils a dix-neuf ans et demi, et il est haut de six 
pieds. 13 Notre maison a quarante-deux pieds de largeur, 
et elle est haute de trente-cinq pieds. 14 lis ont ete ici de 
dix heures a midi. 15 Les enf ants ont ete a l'ecole deux 
fois aujourd'hui, a neuf heures moins un quart, et a deux 
heures et demie. 16 A midi ils auront ete a l'ecole trois 
heures et un quart. 1? Trois fois quatre font douze. 18 Sept 
et huit font quinze. 

Theme 17. 

1 London, Sunday, Nov. 5, 1773. 2 Washington, July 4, 
1776. 3 What day of the week is it to-day ? 4 It is Thurs- 
day, the 9th of June. 5 What day were you in Paris ? 6 1 
was at Paris Tuesday or Wednesday of last week, 7 Satur- 



FIRST REGULAR CONJUGATION". 85 

day, Aug. 12fch, I shall be in the country. 8 At what hour 
was my father here yesterday ? 9 He was here at half past 
six or a quarter to seven. 10 He will be at the house to- 
morrow at a quarter past twelve. " Is this gentleman often 
ill ? 12 He was ill yesterday, but he is not ill to-day. 13 He 
has been here a year and nine months. 14 How old is he ? 
15 He is 67 years old, and he is 5 J feet high. 16 1 have been 
three times at the school, but the master was not there. 
17 Yesterday we were at church an hour and a half. 18 Our 
garden was 150 feet long, and 200 feet wide. 19 7 times 9 
are 63. 20 10 times 11 are 110. 21 7 and 9 are 16. 



LESSON XVIII. 

REGULAR VERBS ; FLRST CONJUGATION. 

1. There are three regular conjugations of French 

verbs ; their infinitives end respectively in 1. er ; 2. ir; 

3. re : thus, donner, finir, vendre. 

a. There are also many irregular verbs having these same end- 
ings in the infinitive, and others having oir. Half-a-dozen of 
those ending in oir in the infinitive are in many grammars called 
another regular conjugation (the third, those in re being reckoned 
as the fourth). The irregular verbs will be given further on. 

2. All the forms of regular verbs (and also most of 
those of irregular verbs) may be inferred from five lead- 
ing forms, which are therefore called the principal parts 
of the verb. These are 1. the infinitive ; 2. the pres- 
ent participle; 3. the past or passive participle; 4. the 
present indicative ; 5. the preterit indicative. 

a. In learning a French verb, then, regular or irregular, the 
first thing is to learn and make familiar the principal parts. 

3. From the infinitive are made the future and con- 
ditional, by adding respectively ai and ais (the e of the 
infinitive ending re being lost) : thus, 



86 LESSOR XVIII. 

Infinitive donner finir vendre 

Future donnerai finirai vendrai 

Conditional donnerais finirais vendrais 

a. This is the only case of a real derivation : see V. 5c, VI. 6&. 

4. From the present participle may be found the im- 
perfect indicative and the present subjunctive, by chang- 
ing ant into ais and e respectively : thus, 

Pres. pple donnant finissant vendant 

Impp. indic. donnais finissais vendais 

Prks. subj. donne finisse vende 

a. In many verbs, the plural persons of the present indicative 
need also to be inferred from the present participle : thus, finis- 
sons etc. from finissant ; see XXIV. 5c. 

5. From the past participle are made, with the aux- 
iliary verb avoir or etre (see XXVIII. 5-7), the various 
compound forms — the perfect infinitive, perfect indica- 
tive, and so on : thus, 

Past pple donne fini vendu 

Perp. inpin. avoir donne avoir fini avoir vendu 

Perp. indic. j'ai donne j'ai fini j'ai vendu 

etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. 

6. From the present indicative may be found the im- 
perative : thus, 

Pres. indic. donne finis vends 

Impv. donne finis vends 

a. In general, the three persons of the imperative are the same 
with the corresponding persons of the present indicative ; only, 
in the first conjugation, the final s of the 2d sing. impv. is usu- 
ally (see below, 10a) lost, so that its form agrees with that of the 
1st sing, indicative. 

7. From the preterit indicative may be made the im- 
perfect subjunctive, by changing final s (in the first con- 
jugation, that of the 2d sing.) into sse : thus, 

Pret. indic. donnai, donnas finis vendis 

Impp. subj. donnasse finisse vendisse 

a. Verbs of the first conjugation are the only ones in the lan- 
guage that do not end in s in the 1st sing, preterit. 



' 



FIRST REGULAR CONJUGATION. 87 

First Kegular Conjugation. 

8. The first regular conjugation, with infinitive end- 
ing in er, contains the great majority of all the verbs in 
the language. 

a. They are principally the verbs of the first Latin conjugation, in are, but 
also a few of those of the second and third conjugations, now come to be inflected 
like them, and many borrowed and new-made verbs. 

9. As a model of its inflection may be taken the verb 
donner give {donate ; Lat. donare). 

a. The synopsis of its principal parts and the parts 
derived from them is as follows : \ [ m AW-**- 

donner donnant donne donne donnai 

donnerai donnais avoir donne donne donnasse 

donnerais donne etc - etc " 

h. The complete inflection of the simple tenses is (with 
infinitive and participles prefixed) : 

Infinitive, give, to give. 

donner (a donner, de donner) 

Present Participle, giving Past Participle, given 

donnant donne 

Indicative. 
Present, I give, do give, am giving, etc. 

je donne nous donnons 

tu donnes vous donnez 

il donne ils donnent 

Imperfect, I gave, was giving, etc. 

je donnais nous donnions 

tu donnais vous donniez 

il donnait ils donnaient 

Preterit, I gave, did give, etc. 

je donnai nous donnames 

tu donnas vous donnates 

il donna ils donnerent 

Future, I shall or will give, etc. 

je donnerai nous donner ons 

tu donneras vous donnerez 

il donnera ils donneront 



88 LESSON XVIII. 

Conditional, I should or would give, etc. 

je donnerais nous donnerions 

tu donnerais vous donneriez 

il donnerait ils donneraient 

Imperative, give, give thou, etc. 
donnons 
donne donnez 

Subjunctive. 
Present, that I may give, etc. 

que je donne que nous donnions 

que tu donnes que vous donniez 

qu'il donne qu'ils donnent 

Imperfect, that I might give, etc. 

que je donnasse que nous donnassions 

que tu donnasses que vous donnassiez 

qu'il donnat qu'ils donnassent 

c. Of the compound forms, made with the auxiliary 
avoir, it will be sufficient to give the synopsis, the in- 
flection of the auxiliary being already familiar (X.) : thus f 

Perfect Infinitive, to have given 

avoir donne 

Perfect Participle, having given 

ayant donne 

Indicativf. Perfect, I have given, etc. 

j'ai donne etc. 

Pluperfect, I had given, etc. 

j'avais donne etc. 

Past Anterior, I had given, etc. 

j'eus donne etc. 

Future Perfect, I shall have given, etc. 

j'aurai donne etc. 

Conditional Perfect, I should have given, etc. 

j'aurais donne etc. 

Subjunctive Perfect, that I may have given, etc. 

que j'aie donne etc. 

Pluperfect, that I might have given, etc 

que j'eusse donne etc. 






10. a. The 2d sing, imp v. of the first conj. adds an s when' 
followed by the object-pronouns en or y (XXIII. 5-7). 



FIRST REGULAR CONJUGATION. 89 

b. As in all verbs (I. 10c), the 3d sing, present, preterit, and fu- 
ture add -t when followed by the subject-pronouns il, elle, or on : 
thus, donne-t-il, donna-t-elle, donnera-t-on. 

c. If the 1st sing, present indicative or imperfect subjunctive 
(the latter, of any conjugation) comes to be followed by its sub- 
ject, it takes an acute accent on its final e (21c) : thus, donne-je 
do I give f donnasse-je should I give. 

VOCABULARY. 

donner, give apporter, bring 

chercher, seek, look far trouver, find 

aimer, love, like travailler, work, labor 

le jouet, the plaything, toy la lettre, the letter 

Exercise 18. 
1 J'ai donne un joli cheval a mon cousin. a Aimez-vous 
votre cousin ? 3 Non, madame, je n'aime point ce cousin-la, 
mais j'aime beaucoup ses f reres et ses scaurs. 4 Ces 
jeunes filles cherchaient des fleurs, mais elles n'ont rien 
trouve. 5 Quelles fleurs ont-elles cherchees ? 6 Elles aiment 
toutes les fleurs. 7 Donnez du pain a ce petit garcon ; il a 
faim. 8 Quoiqu'il ait travaille toute la semaine, il n'a pas 
d'argent. 9 Pourquoi le marchand ne donna-t-il pas d'ar- 
gent au garcon hier? 10 II aurait donne de Pargent, s'il 
n'avait pas ete malade. " N'avez-vous pas trouve le maitre ? 
12 Nous trouvames le maitre a l'ecole a dix heures. 13 Ce 
bon paysan apportait chaque jour du lait a mon oncle. 
14 Hier il ne trouva pas ses vaches, et il n'apporta pas de 
lait. 15 S'il cherchait trois jours, il ne trouverait pas ses 
vaches. 16 Marie, apporte la lettre de ta tante. 17 Pour- 
quoi madame votre soeur ne donne-t-elle pas de jouets 
aux enfants ? 18 Si elle avait trouve de beaux livres chez 
le marchand, elle aurait donne un livre a chaque enfant. 
19 Quoique nous ayons cherche dans toute la ville, nous 
n'avons trouve que de mauvais livres. 20 Cherchons des 
fruits, et donnons une pomme ou une poire a chaque garcon, 
et une fleur a chaque fille. 



90 LESSOR XIX. 

Theme 18. 
1 Do you love your friends ? 2 1 love all my friends and 
relations. 3 What plaything shall I give to your brother ? 
4 Let us give a book to her brother. B What cows was the 
peasant looking for? 6 He was seeking his cows, but he 
has found nothing. 7 If he does not find his cows, he will 
not bring milk to the city. 8 Although he had not found 
his cows, he brought milk enough yesterday. 9 The peas- 
ants work all day. 10 They love the country ; we love the 
city. " What letter did Louisa give to this man? 12 She 
had not found her father's letter, but she gave to the man 
her uncle's two letters. 13 1 often give handsome things 
to my friends. I4 My uncle will bring from (de) Rome 
some beautiful pictures for (pour) his nieces. 16 Children, 
let us give some wine to this poor woman. 16 She has 
worked ten hours, and she is very unhappy. " Give your 
old black coat to this man ; he is cold. 18 Did these young 
girls look for flowers? 19 Yes, sir ; they had been seeking 
flowers an hour in the garden. 20 Why have they not 
brought flowers to their mother? 21 They have found no 
flowers ; they have found only leaves in the garden. 



LESSON XIX. 

SECOND REGULAR CONJUGATION. 

1. The verbs of the second conjugation, with infini- 
tive ending in ir, are much fewer than those of the first. 

a. They are principally verbs of the Latin fourth conjugation, in ire, but mixed 
with a few of the second and third conjugations, and with denominative verbs, 
made from adjectives and nouns. The forms showing -iss- are of inceptive ori- 
gin, as if from finisco beside finio. 

2. As model of the second conjugation, we will take 
the verb Unii finish. 



SECOND EEGULAE CONJUGATION. 



91 



a. The synopsis of principal and derived parts is : 



finir 


finissant 


fini 


finis 


finis 


finirai 


finissais 


avoir fini 


finis 


finisse 


finirais 


finisse 


etc. 







b. The full inflection of the simple tenses is : 

Infinitive, finish, to finish 
finir (a finir, de finir) 

Present Participle, finishing Past Participle, finished 



finissant 



fini 





Indicative. 




Present, I finish, etc. 


je finis 


nous finissons 


tu finis 


vous finissez 


il finit 


ils finissent 




Imperfect, I was finishing, etc. 


je finissais 


nous finissions 


tu finissais 


vous finissiez 


il finissait 


ils finissaient 




Preterit, I finished, etc. 


je finis 


nous finimes 


tu finis 


vous finites 


il finit 


ils finirent 




Future, I shall finish, etc. 


je finirai 


nous finirons 


tu finiras 


vous finirez 


il finira 


ils finiront 




Conditional, I should finish, etc. 


je finirais 


nous finirions 


tu finirais 


vous finiriez 


il finirait 


ils finiraient 




Imperative, finish, etc. 




finissons 


finis 


finissez 



Subjunctive. 
Present, that I may finish, etc. 

que je finisse que nous finissions 

que tu finisses que vous finissiez 

qu'il finisse qu'ils finissent 



92 LESSON XIX. 

Imperfect, that I might finish, etc 
que je finisse que nous finissions 

que tu finisses que vous finissiez 

qu'il finit qu'ils flnissent 

c. Of the compound tenses, the brief synopsis is : 

Perf. Infin. avoir fini, to have finished 

Perf. Part. ayant fini, having finished 

Indic. Perf. j'ai fini, I have finished 

Plupf. j'avais fini, I had finished 

Past Ant. j' eus fini, / had finished 

Fut. Perf. j'aurai fini, I shall have finished 

Cond. Perf. j'aurais fini, I slwuld have finished 

Subj. Perf. que j'aie fini, that I may have finished 

Plupf. que j'eusse fini, that I might have finished 

d. Note that, of the simple tenses, the present and preterit in- 
dicative are alike in the singular, but different in the plural ; also, 
that the present and imperfect subjunctive are alike throughout, 
except in the 3d singular. 

3. Two or three verbs of this conjugation have slight irregulari- 
ties, which may be pointed out here : 

a. The verb hair hate loses its diaeresis (that is, has its a and i 
united into a diphthong) in the singular persons of the present 
indicative and of the imperative. These two tenses are thus in- 
flected : 

Present Indicative. Imperative. 

je hais nous halssons halssons 

tu hais vous haissez hais haissez 

il hait ils halssent 

b. The verb fleurir flourish, otherwise regular, has a second 
present participle and imperfect indicative, florissant, je floris- 
sais etc. , from the old verb-form florir. The forms with o are 
used only in a figurative sense. 

c. The verb benir bless has a second past participle be*nit, used 
as adjective, consecrated : thus, du pain benit consecrated bread, 
1'eau benite holy water. 

VOCABULARY, 

finir, finish batir, build 

punir, punish 'hair, hate 

choisir, choose saisir, seize 

benir, bless fleurir, flourish 

la tache, the task la chose, the 

le pretre, the priest les gens pi. , the people 

bien, well mal, ill 



SECOND EEGULAE CONJUGATION. 93 

Exercise 19. 

1 Ces enf ants n'ont-ils pas fini leur tache ? a Le maitre 
punira les enf ants, s'ils ne finissent pas leur tache. 3 Le 
mauvais homme n'a point d'amis ; il hait les hommes, et 
les hommes hai'ssent le mauvais homme. 4 Le pretre a beni 
le pain et le vin. 5 II donnera aux gens le pain benit, mais 
il ne donnera le vin a personne. 6 Ces hommes ont bati 
une nouvelle eglise pour le vieux pretre. 7 lis finiront 
l'eglise le mois prochain. 8 Quoiqu'ils batissent l'eglise, ils 
ne batiront pas l'ecole. 9 Mon oncle batissait une tres-jolie 
maison pour sa fille. 10 Nous choisissions de beaux ta- 
bleaux pour cette maison. " Le fruit fleurit-il dans votre 
jardin, monsieur ? 12 Oui, madame ; tous les fruits et toutes 
les fleurs fleurissent dans ce pays-ci. 13 Pourquoi punissez- 
vous ces enf ants ? u Parce qu'ils ont saisi les fleurs de ce 
pauvre garcon. 15 Mes enfants, ne saisissez jamais les choses 
des autres. 16 Je choisirai beaucoup de tres jolies fleurs, 
et je donnerai les fleurs a ma mere. 17 Edouard, finis ta 
tache. 18 Le maitre ne punira pas Edouard, quoiqu'il ne 
finisse pas sa tache. 19 II ne hait pas la tache, mais il a ete 
malade. 

Theme 19. 

1 Have you finished your task, Edward ? 2 No, sir ; but 
I shall have finished this task to-morrow. 3 Although you 
have not finished this book, choose another book. 4 1 will 
choose a history. 5 My sister chose a novel yesterday ; 
she does not like a history. 6 We hate histories, but we 
like stories and novels. T My uncle built the last year a 
library for the people of the village, and he will build a 
pretty house for the priest. 8 Why does he not build a 
church also ? 9 Were you choosing a picture for your 
room ? 10 1 should have chosen a picture, if I had had 
money. " Charles, choose a present for thy sister, but do 
not seize the things. 12 Good children never seize other 



94 LESSON XX. 

people's things. 13 Why did you punish the dog? "I 
punished the dog, because he seized this poor boy's meat. 
15 Do the flowers flourish in your garden ? I6 1 have many 
flowers, and they flourish well in my garden. 17 Although 
these children hate their tasks, they love books. 18 They 
did not choose good books ; they chose bad novels. 
19 Their master will punish the children. 20 If you have 
finished your history, give the book to your brother. 



LESSON XX. 

THIRD REGULAR CONJUGATION. 

1. The verbs of the third conjugation, with infinitive 
ending in re, are but few in number. 

a. They are certain verbs of the Latin third conjugation. 

2. As model of their conjugation may be taken the 
verb vendre sell (Lat. vendere). 

a. The synopsis of principal and derived parts is : 



vendant 


vendu 


vends 


vendis 


i vendais 


avoir vendu 


vends 


vendisse 


is vende 


etc. etc. 







h. The full inflection of the simple tenses is : 

Infinitive, sell, to sell. 
vendre (a vendre, de vendre) 
Present Participle, selling Past Participle, sold 

vendant vendu 





Indicative. 






Present, / sell, etc. 




je vends 




nous vendons 


tu vends 




vous vendez 


il vend 




ils vendent 




Imperfect, I was selling 


etc. 


je vendais 




nous vendions 


tu vendais 




vous vendiez 


il vendait 




ils vendaient 



THIE1) REGULAR CONJUGATION. 



95 





Preterit, I sold, etc. 


je vendis 


nous vendimes 


tu vendis 


vous vendites 


il vendit 


ils vendirent 




Future, I shall sell, etc. 


je vendrai 


nous vendrons 


tu vendras 


vous vendrez 


il vendra 


ils vendront 




Conditional, I should sell, etc. 


je vendrais 


nous vendrions 


tu vendrais 


vous vendriez 


il vendrait 


ils vendraient 




Imperative, sell, etc. 




vendons 


vends 


vendez 



Subjunctive. 
Present, that I may sell, etc. 

que je vende que nous vendions 

que tu vendes que vous vendiez 

qu'il vende qu'ils vendent 

Imperfect, that I might sell, etc. 



que je vendisse 
que tu vendisses 
qu'il vendit 



que nous vendiseions 
que vous vendissiez 
qu'ils vendissent 



c. Of the compound tenses, the brief synopsis is : 

Perp. Tnfin. avoir vendu, to have sold 

Perf. Part. ayant vendu, having sold 

Indic. Perf. j'ai vendu, I have sold 

Plupf. j'avais vendu, I had sold 

Past Ant. j'eus vendu, I had sold 

Fut. Perf. j'aurai vendu, I shall haw sold 

Cond. Perf. j'aurais vendu, I should have sold 

Subj. Perf. que j'aie vendu, that I may have sold 

Plupf. que j'eusse vendu, that I might have sold 

d. Notice that the verbs of this conjugation have different 
vowels in the endings of the preterit and of the past participle : 
thus, vendis, vendu. In nearly all other verbs, regular and 
irregular, these two forms agree in vowel. • 

3. Two or three verbs of this conjugation have slight irregu- 
larities, which are best pointed out here. 



96 LESSON XX. 

a. Vaincre conquer (Lat. vincere) is perfectly regular to the 
ear, but is necessarily spelt with qu instead of c before e and i 
(72a), and then also before a and o; the c remaining only before 
u, before a consonant, and as final. The synopsis of principal 
and derived parts is as follows : 



vaincre 


vainquant 


vaincn 


vaincs 


vainquis 


vaincrai 
vaincrais 


vainquais 
vainqne 


avoir vaincu 

etc. etc. 


vaincs 


vainqnisse 



The pres. indicative and imperative (in which alone any change 
of spelling occurs in inflection) are as follows : 

Present Indicative. Imperative. 

je vaincs nous vainqnons vainquons 

tu vaincs vous vainquez vaincs vainquez 

il vainc ils vainquent 

The compound convaincre convince is conjugated in the same 
manner. 

b. Rompre break (Lat. rumpere) adds a t in the 3d sing, indie, 
present : thus il rompt (not romp) ; in all other respects it is 
regular. 

c. Battre beat (Lat. battuere) loses one of its two t's in the 
singular of the pres. indicative and of the imperative, which are 
thus inflected : 

Present Indicative. Imperative. 

je bats nous battons battons 

tu bats vous battez bats battez 

il bat ils battent 

The rest is regular. 

VOCABULARY, 
vendre, sell perdre, lose 

attendre, wait rompre, break 

battre, beat vaincre, conquer 

le gateau, the cake la voix, the voice 

l'oiseau m., the bird l'ennemi m., the enemy 

Exercise 20. 

1 Ce boulanger vend du pain et des gateaux. 2 Pourquoi 
n'a-t-il pas vendu de pain a cet homme-ci ? 3 II n'a pas 
vendu de pain a l'homme, parce qu'il n'avait pas d'argent. 
4 II perdit hier tout son argent. 5 Entendez-vous les oiseaux 
dans le jardin? 6 Non, madame ; je n'ai point en tend u les 



THIKD KEGULAR CONJUGATION. §1 

oiseaux, mais j'entends la voix d'une jeune fille. 7 Ma soeur 
a ete malade, et elle a perdu sa belle voix. 8 Quel livre 
avez-vous perdu ? 9 J'ai perdu l'histoire d'Angleterre. 10 Je 
perds souvent mon histoire. " Les mauvais garcons bat- 
tent les pauvres chiens. I2 Henri ne bat jamais son chien. 
13 Le roi Louis XIV. a vaincu tous ses ennemis. 14 II vainc 
toujours. 15 Avez-vous attendu une lettre ? 16 Oui, j'attends 
des lettres chaque jour. 17 Quoique ce boulanger vende 
beaucoup de pain, il perd toujours de l'argent. 18 Le pretre 
rompt et benit le pain, et donne les morceaux aux hommes. 

19 S'il vendait tout le fruit, il n'aurait plus de cerises pour 
les enfants. 20 II n'aurait rien perdu. 21 Rompez le pain, 
et donnez un morceau a ce pauvre enfant. 

Theme 20. 

1 1 hear a voice in the house. 2 What voice did you hear ? 
3 1 heard yesterday the voice of this young girl in the gar- 
den. 4 Did you expect nobody day before yesterday ? 
6 Yes, I expected my brother. 6 1 shall expect many friends 
to-morrow. 7 This poor man has lost his wife, and he will 
lose his daughter. 8 This man does not beat his horses. 

9 He does not sell his horses, though they are very old. 

10 If we sold our horse to this man, he would beat the horse. 

11 A good boy never beats his dog. 12 Why does your cousin 
not break the big cake ? 13 Let us break the cake, and let 
us give a piece to this little girl. 14 Have you sold your 
bird ? 15 No, we did not sell the bird ; we lost the bird. 
16 If I had not lost all our birds, I should give a bird to this 
boy. 17 Have the enemies conquered ? 18 No, our king has 
conquered the enemies. 19 He always conquers his enemies. 

20 This bad baker often sells bread to our enemy. 21 He 
will sell bread to all the people, if they have money. 

7 



96 LESSON XXI. 

LESSON XXL 

IRREGULAR VEEBS I FIRST CONJUGATION. 

1. Besides the verbs of the three regular conjuga- 
tions, the French has a large number (near a hundred) 
that are more or less irregularly inflected. Of all these, 
the inflection has to be separately learned, and it will be 
given in the lessons following. 

2. a. Of the first conjugation, or with infinitives ending in er, 
there are but two really irregular verbs, aller go, and envoyer 
send (for which, see XXVII. 8, and XLIL 11). 

b. But many verbs of the first conjugation, otherwise 
regular, have to undergo in inflection certain changes of 
spelling, in accordance with the general rules of the lan- 
guage (laid down above, in the Lesson on Pronunciation). 
Thus : 

3. Since (21a) no word in French may end in two silent syllables, 
and their occurrence anywhere in a word is generally avoided — 
therefore 

a. Verbs having in the infinitive a mute syllable be- 
fore the final syllable have to give the former a full pro- 
nunciation whenever in inflection the syllable after it 
becomes mute. 

1). This is usually done by putting a grave accent upon 

the e of the syllable in question. 

Thus, from the infinitive mener lead, we have je mene, tu 
meneras, il menerait, mene, qu'ils menent, etc. ; but nous me- 
nons, je menais, tu menas, qu'il menat, etc. Also, from acheter 
buy, we have il achete, nous acheterons, que tu achetes, etc. ; 
but vous achetez, il acheta, achetons, que nous achetions, etc. 

c. But a few verbs double instead the consonant (t or 

1) following the e. 

Thus, from jeter throw, we have je jette, tu jetteras, il jette- 
rait, jette, qu'ils jettent, etc. ; and from appeler call, we have 
il appelle, nous appellerons, que tu appelles, etc. 



IRREGULAR YERBS : FIRST CONJUGATION. 99 

The verbs thus doubling the consonant are jeter (and its com- 
pounds) and cacheter; appeler, chanceler, etinceler, renou- 
veler, and ensorceler. 

d. The synopsis of principal and derived forms of mener is as 
follows : 



mener 


menant 


mene 


mene 


menai 


menerai 
menerais 


menais 
mene 


avoir mene 

etc. etc. 


mene 


menasse 



The only tenses that show the difference of spelling in their 
tense-inflection are the pres. indicative, the imperative, and the 
pres. subjunctive ; they are : 

Present Indicative. Imperative. Present Subjunctive. 

mene menons menons mene menions 

menes menez mene menez menes meniez 

mene menent mene menent 

And in like manner with the other verbs. 

4. Since the accent on an e followed by a silent syllable is regu- 
larly and usually the grave (20a) — therefore 

a. Yerbs having in the infinitive an acute e before the 
final syllable change the accent to grave (e) when the 
next syllable becomes mute — except, however, in the 
future and conditional, where the acute is retained. 

Thus, of the verb ceder cede, for example, 

b. The synopsis of principal and derived forms is : 

ceder cedant cede cede cedai 

cederai cedais avoir cede cede cedasse 

cederais cede etc " etc> 

And the inflection of the tenses that show a change of accent is : 

Present Indicative. Imperative. Present Subjunctive. 

cede cedons cedons cede cedions 

cedes cedez cede cedez cedes cediez 

cede cedent cede cedent 

c. But the yerb creer create retains the acute throughout : 
thus, je cree, ils creent, etc. ; also, in general usage hitherto, the 
verbs ending in the infinitive in eger : thus, from proteger pro- 
tect, je protege, ils protegent, etc. (but now better je protege, 
ils protegent, etc.: 20c). • 

5. Verbs having c or g (pronounced soft) before final 
er of the infinitive retain the soft sound of these letters 
through their whole conjugation ; and this is signified by 



100 LESSON XXI. 

writing a cedilla under the c (thus, 9), and by keeping an 
e after the g (62#), wherever in conjugation those letters 
come to be followed by a or 0. 

Thus, from placer place, and manger eat, we have 
je place, and nous placons ; je mange, and nous mangeons 
je placais, and nous placions ; je mangeais, and nous mangions 
nous placames and ils placerent; nous mangeames, and ils 

mangerent 
and so on. 

6. Since y ( = double i) does not usually stand before a mute e 
(376j— therefore 

a. Verbs having a y before the final er of the infinitive 
change it to i when in conjugation it comes to be fol- 
lowed by a mute e. 

6. Thus, for example, of the verb payer pay the synopsis of 
principal and derived forms is : 

payer payant paye paie payai 

paierai payais avoir paye paie payasse 

etc. etc. 

paierais paie 

And the present indicative is thus inflected : 
paie payons 

paies payez 

paie paient 

And in like manner with employer employ, appuyer support, 
and so on. 

c. But verbs in eyer preserve the y throughout : thus, je 
grasseye (not grasseie), etc. And some writers retain the y 
after a : thus, je paye, etc. 

7. When the i of a verb ending in ier comes to be followed by 
i in inflection (namely, in 1st and 2d plur/ 'jmpf . indie, and pres. 
subj.), the two i's remain unchanged (do-not become y). Thus, 
from prier pray, oublier forget, we have nous priions, vous 
priiez ; que nous oubliions, que vous oubliiez. 

VOCABULARY, 

appeler, call acheter, buy 

mener, take, lead proteger, protect 

manger, eat commencer, begin 

employer, employ nettoyer, clean 

creer, create oublier, forget 

la domestique, servant, maid le berger, the shepherd 

le monde, the world le temps, the time 



IRREGULAR VERBS : FIRST CONJUGATION. 101 



Exercise 81. 

J Appelle la domestique, Helene. 2 Je l'ai appelee, ma 
mere, ruais elle n'etait pas ici ; elle nettoyait les chambres. 
3 Elle nettoiera votre chambre deniain. 4 Ce petit gar9on-ci 
mene aux champs les vaches et les brebis de son pere. 5 Le 
berger et son cbien protegent toujours les brebis. 6 Si le 
berger n'etait pas ici, ce vieux chien inenerait et protegerait 
les brebis. ' Quel fruit mangez-vous, mes enfants ? 8 Nous 
mangeons des cerises ; hier nous mangeames des pommes, 
et demain nous inangerons des poires. 9 Achetez-vous 
beaucoup de fruit ? 10 J'achete du fruit tous les jours de 
cette Tieille femme. " Si nous donnons de l'argent a ce 
gallon, il achetera du pain pour sa mere malade. ,2 Quoi- 
qu'il ait achete du pain pour sa mere, elle ne mangera rien. 
13 Elle acheta du fruit et du vin pour cet homme, mais il ne 
mangea rien. 14 Charles, avez-vous commence ce livre-ci ? 
15 Je conimencais hier, mais j'avais perdu le livre. l6 Nous 
commencons l'ecole aujourd'hui, et je menerai tous les en- 
fants a leur maitre. 1T Ont-ils oublie le mattre ? 18 Quoique 
nous oubliions le maitre, il n'oublie jamais ses eleves. 
19 Emploie bien le temps, mon enfant, et n'oublie point ta 
tache. ~° Dieu a cree le monde, et il protege toujours les 
hommes. 31 II cree les arbres et leui's fruits. 

Theme 21. 

1 Edward is hungry, but he does not eat any bread. 
2 Let us buy some fruit, and let us eat two apples. 3 You 
ate (pret.) too many peaches yesterday. 4 If they buy 
bread to-day, they will buy wine to-morrow. 5 The ser- 
vant was cleaning the windows yesterday ; to-day she will 
clean the rooms of the house. 6 Did the school begin yes- 
terday ? 7 It would have begun, but the master was ill. 
8 Let us be 2f in the school to-morrow. 9 The servant will 



102 LESSON XXII. 

take all the children to the school. 10 Call Mary ; I called 
her, but she was not there. " The shepherd takes the sheep 
to the fields. 12 At five o'clock he will take the cows to 
the water. " He took the sheep to the water yesterday at 
two o'clock. H If they call the boy, he will protect the 
sheep. 15 My cousins build houses, and they employ many 
men. 36 We only employ one servant. 17 Let us begin 
this pretty story. 18 1 have forgotten the book. 19 We 
were at the school, and you always forgot the books. 
20 These children were employing their time well. 21 They 
had finished the history, and they were beginning a new 
story. 22 God created all men, he created also the sheep 
and the cows. 



LESSON XXII. 

CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

1. Many pronouns in French, especially the personal 
pronouns, have a different form according as they are 
used conjunctively or disjunctively. 

2. A conjunctive pronoun is one that is immediately 
connected with a verb, as either its subject or its direct 
or indirect object ; any other is disjunctive. 

3. The subject-pronouns are already familiar ; they 
are: 

1ST PERS. 2D PERS. 3D PERS. 

Sing, je, / tu, thou il, he; elle, she 

Plur. nous, we vous, you ils m., elles f., they 

a. In rare instances, however, even the subject-pronoun is 
obliged to take the disjunctive form : see Second Part, §§ 74a, 76. 

4. The subject -pronoun stands in general immedi- 
diately before the personal verb, only the negative ne 
and the object-pronouns being allowed to come in be- 
tween the two. 



CONJUNCTIVE PEKSONAL PRONOUNS. 103 

a. But, as in English, the subject-pronoun follows the 
verb in questions, and in interjected phrases like dit-il 
said he, and occasionally in other cases : see Second Part, 
§ 224 etc. 

h. In a question, only the subject-pronoun changes its 
place, everything else remaining as it would be if the 
sentence were an assertion. 

5. Of the object-pronouns, direct and indirect object, 
all the forms are these : 

Singular. Plural. 

1st pers. me, moi, me, to me nous, us, to us 

2d " te, toi, thee, to the vous, you, to you 

3d " le, Mm ; la, her ; lui, to him or her les, them ; leur, to them 

6. The uses of the object-pronouns are as follows : 

a. Nous and vous are unvaried, standing in every con- 
struction and position — as conjunctive pronouns and as 
disjunctive, as subject and as object, as direct and as in- 
direct object, before the verb and after it. 

b. Me and moi, and te and toi, are used either as direct 
or as indirect object, me and te before the verb, and moi 
and toi after it (for one exception, see XXIII. 65). Thus: 

tu m'aimes, thou lovest me aime moi, love me 

tu te donnes, fwu givest thyself donne-toi, give Hiyse 7 f 

vous me donnez, you give to me donnez-moi, give to me 

c. Le, la, and les are used as direct object only, le be- 
ing masculine, la feminine, and les of either gender ; lui 
and leur are used only as indirect object, both being of 
either gender : thus, 

il l'aime, he loves her aimez-la, love her 

elle l'aime, she loves him aime-le, love him 

je lui donne, I give to him or her donnez lui, give to him or Tier 

nous les vendons, we sell them vendons-les, let us sell them 

vous leur vendez, you sell to them vendez leur, sell to them 



104 LESSOR XXII. 

d. Thus it is seen that the object-pronouns of the 1st and 2d 
sing, vary in form according to their position before or after the 
verb, and for that only ; while, on the contrary, those of the 3d 
pers. vary according to their character as direct or indirect object, 
and the direct object in the singular also for gender, but they have 
the same form before and after the verb. 

e. Notice that the direct-object pronouns le la les have the 
same form, and the same distinctions of gender and number, with 
the definite article. Le and la also have their vowels cut oft" be- 
fore a following vowel (or h mute,), just as when they are articles. 

7. An object-pronoun, whether direct or indirect ob- 
ject, stands in general immediately before the governing 
verb — in the compound tenses, immediately before the 
auxiliary: but with this exception, that if the verb is an 
imperative affirmative, the pronoun stands instead direct- 
ly after it (and is joined to it by a hyphen). 

For examples, sec above, 66, c. 

a. Nothing is allowed to come between the verb and 
its pronoun-object; the subject, and the negative ne, 
when used, are placed outside of them : thus, 

je ne vous donne pas le livre, I do not give you the book 
mon ami ne t'a pas vu, wy friend has iwt seen thee 
ne les aimez vous pas, do you not love them f 
ne l'aura-t-il pas fini, icill he not have finished it? 

b. If the verb is an imperative negative, the object- 
pronoun precedes instead of following it : thus, 

ne lui donnez pas le livre, do not give him the book 
ne les aimez pas, do not love them 

8. When a verb governs two object-pronouns, one 

direct and the other indirect, they are both together 

placed either before or after it, according to the rules 

just given — that is, after it in the imperative affirmative, 

otherwise before it. 

a. A verb in French does not have two direct objects; and al- 
most never two indirect, unless one be en or y (Second Part, 
§ 158). 



CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 105 

9. As regards their position relative to one another : 

a. When both come before the verb, the indirect stands 
first, unless it be of the third person (lui or leur), in which 
case it follows the direct : thus, 

je te le donne, I give it to thee 

vous nous le donnerez, you will give it to us 

je le lui ai donne, I have given it to him (or to her) 

vous le leur aviez donne, you had given it to them 

il ne me les vendra pas, he will not sell them to me 

il ne nous les a pas vendus, he has not sold them to us 

ne me les donne pas, do not give them to me 

ne vous la vendra-t il pas, will he not sell it to youf 

b. When both come after the verb, the indirect always 
stands last : thus, 

donnez les-moi, give them to me 
vendons-le-leur, let us sell it to them 

c. As the last examples show, both object-pronouns, when they 
follow the verb, are joined to it by hyphens. Some, however, 
prefer to omit the second hyphen : thus donnez-les moi. 

d. A brief rule, covering all cases of the relative position of 
direct and indirect object-pronoun, objects of the same verb, is as 
follows : 

Before the verb, the indirect-object pronoun, unless of the third 
person, precedes the direct. 

VOCABULARY. 

No new words, except the pronoun-forms above, are given to be learned with this 

Lesson. 



RCISE 22. 

1 Le maitre n'aime-t-il pas ces enf ants ? 2 II ne les aime 
pas ; il les punit toujours. 3 Donnez-moi ces gateaux. 
4 Non, mon enfant, je ne te les donnerai pas ; tu ne les 
mangeras pas. 6 Avez-vous bati votre maison a Paris ? 6 Je 
l'ai batie dans la ville. 7 Le boulanger vous a-t-il vendu ce 
pain-ci? 8 II ne nous Pa pas vendu, il nous Fa donne. 
• Les enf ants ont beaucoup de gateaux ; le boulanger les 



106 LESSON XXII. 

leur a donnes. 10 Si vous avez dc bons li/res, donnez-les- 
moi. u Apportes-tu cette fleur a ma sceur? ia Oui, mon 
ami ; je ia lui apporte. 13 Apportez-moi aussi des fleurs. 
14 Ne lui apportez pas de fruit. 15 Si j'avais du pain, je 
vous le donnerais. 16 II a faim ; je le lui donnerai. n Avez- 
vous votre livre, ou l'avez-vous perdu ? 18 Je l'ai perdu, 
monsieur ; je le cherche, mais je ne le trouve pas. 19 Cher- 
chez-le toujours ; vous le trouverez. 20 Ne me donnerez- 
vous pas ces jolies fleurs? 21 Je ne vous les donnerai pas ; 
je les ai achetees pour ma mere, et je les lui donnerai. 
22 Si vous ne me l'aviez pas donne, je ne vous aurais pas 
aime. 23 Tu as les pommes de ces enfants ; donne-les-leur. 
24 Si tu ne les leur donnes pas, je te punirai. 

Theme 22. 

1 1 give you the book ; you give me the book ; they give 
her the book ; we give them the book ; he gives us the 
book ; thou givest him the book. a I give it to my friend ; 
thou givest them to thy brother ; we give it to our father. 
3 1 give it to you ; you give it to me ; they give it to her ; 
we give it to them ; he gives it to us ; thou givest it to 
him ; give it to them ; do not give it to her. 4 Will you 
not give me this apple ? 5 1 shall not give it to you ; I 
shall give it to this boy. 6 Do not give it to him ; give it 
to me. 7 Did not the baker sell the bread to this woman ? 
8 Yes ; he sold it to her ; he did not give it to her. 9 Will 
she give it to her children ? 10 She will not give it to them ; 
she is eating it. " Give it to me ; do not eat it. 12 Eat it ; 
do not sell it to them. 13 Bring me the book, and I will 
buy it. 14 If she had brought me cherries, I should have 
eaten them. 15 The shepherd had sheep, but he has lost 
them. 16 He is seeking them, and if he finds them, he will 
lead them to us. 17 Find me the book, and bring it to me. 
18 Does the baker sell bread to the poor people ? 19 He does 
not sell it to them, because they have no money. 20 Let us 



DISJUNCTIVE AND CONJUNCTIVE PKONOUNS. 107 

buy a piece of bread, and let us give it to tbem. 21 Although 
we have bread enough, we will not eat it ; we will give it 
to you. 



LESSON XXIII. 

DISJUNCTIVE AND CONJUNCTIVE PEONOUNS. 

1. Personal pronouns not immediately connected with 
a verb, as either its subject or its direct or indirect ob- 
ject, are called disjunctive, or are said to be used disjunc- 
tively. 

2. The disjunctive forms of the personal pronouns 
are : 





1st pees. 


2d pers. 


3d pers. 


Sing. 


moi, me 


toi, thee 


lui, him ; elle, Tier 


Plur. 


nous, us 


vous, you 


eux m., elles 1, them 



a. Note that in the first and second persons these pronouns 
have the same form with some of the conjunctives, while in the 
third person eux is new, and lui, which as conjunctive pronoun 
(indirect object) is of either gender, as disjunctive is masculine 
only. 

3. The ordinary constructions of the disjunctive pro- 
noun are these : 

a. With a preposition. 

Thus, a moi to me, de toi of thee, avec lui with him, sans elle 
without her, pour eux for them (m.), entre elles between them 
(f.). 

h. Used absolutely — that is, without any verb expressed 
with which they should be immediately connected : thus, 

qui a dit cela, who has said that moi, /(for je l'ai dit) 

qui avez-vous vu, whom ham you lui, him (for je l'ai vu) 

seen ? 

elle est plus grande que toi, she is taller than ilwn {art) 

faites eomme moi, do as I (do) 



108 LESSON XXIII. 

c. In combination with meme self, to form emphatic 
pronouns corresponding to our myself, thyself, etc. : thus, 

moi-meme, myself nous-memes, ourselves 

toi-meme, thyself vous-memes, yourselves 

lui meme, himself eux memes, themselves (m.) 

elle-meme, herself elles-memes, themselves (f.) 

But nous-m§me ourself and vous-m§me yourself, when used of 
a single person (VII. lb). 

These pronouns admit of being used as subject : thus, lui- 
meme me l'a dit himself has said it to me. 

d. As predicates after the impersonal c'est, ce sont, it is : thus, 
c'est moi it is I, c'est vous it Is you, est-ce lui, is it he f but 
(XL 2b) ce sont eux, ce sont elles, it is they. 

e. But after personal forms of etre be, the conjunctive pronoun 
of the direct object is used as predicate, especially in the sense of 
it or so, standing for an adjective or noun already expressed : 
thus, dtes-vous heureux ? nous le sommes, are you happy f ire 
are so ; la reine ? je la suis, the queen f I am she (see Second 
Part, § 81). 

/. When more than one pronoun, or a pronoun and noun, are 
subjects of the same verb, the pronoun has the disjunctive form ; 
and if the two are not of the same person, the compound subject 
is usually represented by a suitable pronoun before the verb : thus, 

vous et moi (nous) sommes amis, you and rare friends 
lui et son oncle sont partis, he and his uncle are gone 

The same is necessary in the case of a compound object : thus, 
je vous ecoute toi et lui et elle, / listen to thee and him and her. 

g. If a subject-pronoun is separated from the verb by anything 
but the negative ne and object-pronouns, it has to take the dis- 
junctive form : thus, lui, saisissant un crayon, ecrivit he, seizing 
a pencil, wrote; eux seuls sont venus they alone have come. 

4. Besides the personal pronouns already given, there 
is another, a reflexive pronoun of the 3d person, having 
the conjunctive form se and the disjunctive soi (like me 
moi, te toi). 

Se is used in the inflection of reflexive verbs (XXIX.), both as 
direct and as indirect object, both as singular and as plural ; soi 
is only singular, and usually relates to an indefinite subject : thus, 

chacun pense a soi, every one thinks of himself 
n'aimer que soi, to love only one's self 



DISJUNCTIVE AND CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 109 

5. There are also two words, en and y, which have the 
value of genitive and dative cases, respectively, of per- 
sonal pronouns of the third person. They are used chief- 
ly of things, not of persons (except of unspecified persons 
in the plural). 

a. En means of it, of them, and so on ; it is the equiva- 
lent of a pronoun with the preposition de (de lui, d'elle, 
d'eux, d'elles). 

o. Y means to it, to them, and so on ; it is the equiva- 
lent of a pronoun with the preposition a (a lui, a elle, a 
eux, a elles). 

c. Hence they are often used with verbs to represent nouns 
which, if expressed, would have to be connected with the verbs 
by de and a respectively : thus, s'en approcher to approach it 
(because one says s'approcher de quelque chose to approach 
something) ; je vous en remercie I thank you for it (because re- 
mercier de quelque chose) ; j'en ris Ilatigh at it (because rire 
de quelque chose) ; y arracher to wrest from them (because ar- 
racher a quelqu'un wrest from any one), j'y pense I think of it 
(because penser a quelque chose think of something) — and so on. 

6. En and y are treated as conjunctive pronouns, be- 
ing always joined with the verb in the sentence, whatever 
their logical connection, and being put before or after 
the verb according to the same rules as other object-pro- 
nouns (XXII. 7) : thus, 

j'en suis certain, lam certain of it 

il en connait les lois, he knows the laws of it (its laws) 

vous y etes obeissant, you are obedient to it 

a. When used along with other object-pronouns, they stand 
last, whether before or after the governing verb : thus, 

je l'y conduirai, I will conduct him to it 

conduisez-1'y, conduct him to it 

donnez-lui-en, give Mm of it (some) 

je ne vous en donnerai pas, I will not give you of it (any) 

b. After the verb as well as before it, me and "ie are used 
instead of moi and toi before en, and usually before y: thus, 
donnez-m'en give me of it (or some), rends-t'y betake thyself to 
it (but sometimes rends-y-toi). 



110 LESSOK XXIII. 

c. When y and en are used together, en follows y : thus, il y 
en a there are some. 

7. En is often used partitively, standing for a noun 
with the partitive preposition de. 

Thus, avez-vous du pain ? have you oread f j'en ai ; je vous en 
donnerai, I have some; I will give you some. 

a. Where the noun would have an adjective qualifying it, the 
adjective takes the partitive preposition : thus, j'en ai de bon 1 
have some {that is) good (equivalent to j'ai de bon pain) ; voulez- 
vous des fleurs ? je vous en donnerai de belles do you want 
floivers? I will give you some handsome ones. 

8. En and y are originally adverbs, and are, especially y there, 
not seldom used with that value. They have many idiomatic 
uses, for which see the Second Part, § 85. 

VOCABULARY. 

le bal, the ball, dance le theatre, the theatre 

le plaisir, the pleasure seul, alone 

penser (a) think (of) parler, speak 

Exercise 23. 

1 Es-tu plus grand que ton frere, ou est-il plus grand que 
toi ? 2 II est plus beau que moi, mais je suis plus grand 
que lui. 3 Le plus grand, c'est moi ; et le plus beau, c'est 
lui. 4 As-tu ton livre avec toi ? 5 Non, je l'ai perdu. 
6 Toi et moi, nous le chercherons. 7 Moi-meme l'ai trouve, 
sans vous. 8 Le boulanger donne-t-il des gateaux a ces 
enfants ? 9 II en a, mais il ne leur en donne pas. 10 Moi, 
j'en acheterai pour eux ; il en a de bons. " Toi et lui, 
avez-vous ete au bal hier ? 12 Moi seul y ai ete* ; il etait au 
theatre avec eux. 13 Ce tableau n'est-il pas tree beau ? 
14 II l'est ; mais j'en ai de plus beaux. 15 Cet homme parle 
beaucoup de ses amis ; mais il n'y pense pas ; il ne pense 
jamais qu'a soi-meme. 16 Les garcons sont-ils au theatre ? 
17 lis y ont ete avec moi, mais ils n'y sont plus. 18 lis y ont 
eu beaucoup de plaisir, mais ils n'en auront plus ; ils sont 
a l'ecole a present. 19 Menez-m'y, je cherche leur maitre. 
20 C'est moi, monsieur ; je le suis moi-meme. 21 Aviez-vous 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. Ill 

parle de ce livre ? 22 Nous y avions pense, mais nous n'en 
avions pas parle. 23 Lui et elle en parleront. 

Theme 23. 

1 These children are hungry ; give me bread for them. 
2 1 haven't any ; but I will buy some. 3 No, I will buy 
some myself. 4 They are poorer than I, but I am smaller 
than they. 6 They alone are unhappy ; we are not so. 
6 The most unhappy of men — it is I. 7 1 have lost my 
friend, and I am unhappy without him. 8 1 do not speak 
of him, but I think always of him. 9 1 was happy, but I 
never shall be so again. 10 This good man never thinks of 
himself. " He has much money, and he gives some to these 
poor people. 12 Are these men the peasants of the village ? 
1B It is they. u If you have money, give me some for them. 
15 Have you been at the ball ? 16 No, I have not been at it. 
17 1 shall be at the theatre with her to-morrow. 18 My friend 
and I were at the ball. 19 These books are very handsome, 
but I have handsomer ones in my library. 20 1 will give 
you some for yourself. 21 What book have you ? 22 1 have 
forgotten the name of it. 23 1 shall be at the house ; wait 
for me at it. 24 1 shall not be there (at it) ; I shall be at 
my uncle's. 



LESSON XXIV. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. The demonstrative pronouns are : 

ce, this, that, it (indefinite and neuter) : 

celui m., celle 1, this or that one; ceux m., celles i, these, those 

a. To all of them may be added the demonstrative ad- 
verbs -ci and -1& (as to the noun following a demonstra- 
tive adjective : XIII. 3). 



112 LESSON XXIV. 

2. Ce has the value of a pronoun as subject of etre be 
in its various tenses, and as antecedent of the relative 
pronouns qui, que, etc. 

a. In the former case, it is generally to be rendered 
by it in English : thus, c'est moi it is I, ce fut son devoir 
it was his duty, c/a ete lui it was (has been) he, c'aurait 
ete dommage it would have been a pity. 

b. Ce is much more often used than il with the 3d persons of 
§tre in the sense of it is, it was, etc. This is especially the case 
when something already described or intimated is referred to, so 
that the ce would admit of being rendered by that ; but it is not 
limited to such cases. In fact, il is hardly used except in ex- 
pressions of time (XI. 2a), before an adjective followed by a logi- 
cally subject-clause (infinitive or relative) which the il anticipates, 
and in the parenthetic il est vrai, meaning to be sure. 

Thus, il est temps de partir it is time to leave, il est tard it 
is late, il est six heures it is 6 o'clock, il est difficile de vous 
plaire it is hard to please you (i.e. to please you is hard), il est 
evident que vous avez tort it is plain that you are wrong t 
cherement, il est vrai, mais fort loin at a dear rate, to be sure, 
but very far off; — but vous avez tort, c'est evident you are 
wrong, it {that) is plain ; faites cela, ce n'est pas difficile do 
that, it is not hard, ce fut ma faute it was my fault, c'est votre 
ami qui est parti it is your friend I hut has left. 

c. Ce is also sometimes used with pouvoir and devoir as aux- 
iliaries of etre, and in a few phrases witli sembler seem : thus, 
ce pouvait etre lui it might be he, ce doit §tre it must be, ce me 
semble it seems to me. 

d. For ce as antecedent of a relative, see XXVI. 10. 

3. The compounds of ce with the demonstrative ad- 
verbs are written ceci and cela (without grave accent ; it 
is often contracted colloquially to 9a) ; they mean this 
and that in an indefinite way, without reference to any 
particular object expressed. They are used in all con- 
structions. Thus : 

cela ne me plait pas, that does not please me 

je ne veux pas ceci ; donnez-moi cela, I don't want this ; give me that 

que dites-vous de cela, what do you say about that? 

a. In a question, ceci (rarely used) and cela are divided into 
ce ci and ce la: thus, est-ce la votre livre is that your book? 
sont-ce ci vos gants are these your gloves f 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 113 

4. The other demonstratives, celui etc., distinguish 
gender and number, and are used of persons and of 
things, with more direct reference to something already 
expressed or distinctly understood. They are used either 
alone or with ci and Ik added to them by a hyphen : thus, 
cslui this or that one, celui-ci this one, celui-l& that one. 

a. The simple celui celle ceux celles are used only as 
antecedents of a following relative, and before the prepo- 
sition de in possessive phrases : thus, 

celui qui est mon ami, he who is my friend 

mes amis et ceux de mon frere, my friends and my broiler's 

(literally, and those of my brother) 
ma robe et celle de ma soeur, my dress and my sister's 

h. In all other constructions, the compounds celui-ci, 
celui-la, etc., are used — as subject, as object, after prepo- 
sitions, and so on : thus, 

voici deux fleurs ; voulez vous celle-ci ou celle-la, here are two flowers ; 

will you have this one or that one? 
ce livre-ci est a moi ; je ne sais rien de celui-la, this book belongs to me; 

I know nothing of that one 

c. As the last example shows, the demonstrative adjective is to 
be used when there is a noun with it for it to qualify, but the 
demonstrative pronoun to represent the noun, when the latter is 
omitted. 

d. Celui-ci etc. often mean the latter, and celui-la etc. the 
former. 

VERB-LESSON. 
Irregular Verbs— Vouloir. 

5. a. Those verbs in French which are inflected 
throughout like one or other of the three — donner, finir, 
vendre — already given, are called regular verbs. But 
there are also many others in the language deviating 
more or less from these models, and they are called ir- 
regular verbs. 

8 



114 LESSON XXIV. 

b. The irregular verbs are one of the principal difficulties of 
French Grammar. They are of various degrees of irregularity: 
some are irregular only in their principal parts, all the derived 
parts coming from them precisely as in the verbs of the three 
regular conjugations; others are irregular also in the formation 
of the derived parts (only the impf. subj. coming without any 
exception regularly from the pret. indie.)- But, in all of them, 
irregularities of tense-inflection are confined to the three present 
tenses — the present indicative, the imperative, and the present 
subjunctive. Of the other tenses, when the first person is known, 
the rest follow from it with certainty. 

c. The only rules for the formation of the derived 
parts are those already given for regular verbs (XVIII. 
1-7). 

Of more special importance among the irregular verbs is the 
rule for finding the plural persons of the present from the present 
participle (XVIII. 4a). 

d. In learning an irregular verb, the principal parts should 
first be mastered and made familiar, then the synopsis, then the 
inflection of the present tenses when this is in any way irregular. 
The synopsis of principal and derived parts will be given in this 
grammar for every irregular verb, and the inflection of the 
present tenses when called for. In the synopsis, those derived 
parts which do not come regularly from the principal parts will 
have attention called to them by being printed with spaced or 
open letters. 

6. The very common verb vouloir wish, desire, will 
(Lat. veiie), is also a specially irregular and difficult one. 
a. Its synopsis is as follows : 

veux voulus 
voulusse 



vouloir 


voulant 


voulu 


voudrai 


voulais 


avoir voulu 


voudrais 


veuille 


etc. etc. 



b. Its pres. indie, and subj. are thus inflected : 

Present Indicative. Present Subjunctive. 

veux voulons veuille voulions 

veux voulez veuilles vouliez 

veut veulent veuille veuillent 

c. The regular imperative veux voulons voulez is very rarely 
used ; instead of it, the 2d pers. sing, and plur. veuille veuillez 
are used, but only with a following infinitive, and in the sense of 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 115 

please to, he good enough to : thus, veuillez vous asseoir please 
sit down. 

d. In vouloir, as in a number of other verbs, the vowel of the root is changed 
(here, from ou to eu) wherever the radical syllable is accenred, not being fol- 
lowed by another of full tone. These forms with changed vowel are sometimes 
called the strong forms (veux, veulent, veuillent, etc.). 

e. Vouloir is used with the infinitive of another verb almost as 
an auxiliary, and must stand for our will whenever a wish or 
request is implied : thus, voulez-vous diner chez nous wUl you 
dine with us? It also signifies wish to have, want: as, voulez- 
vous du lait will you hare some milk f 

f. En vouloir, followed by a, means have a grudge at, be vexed 
or angry at, be hostile to, etc. : thus, il en voulait a ce pauvre 
homme he bore a grudge against this poor man. 

VOCABULARY. 

le portrait, the portrait la peinture, the painting 

le peintre, the painter l'atelier m., the studio 

vrai, true mieux adv., belter 

Exercise 24. 
1 Est-ce la votre pere ? 2 Xon, monsieur, c'est mon oncle. 
3 II est vrai que nous ne l'aimons pas, mais c'est parce qu'il 
est mauvais homme. 4 Ce sont les trois freres de notre 
ami ; celui-ci travaille tou jours, maix ceux-la sont paresseux 
et ne travaillent jamais. 5 Cherchez-vous ceci ? 6 Je ne 
cherche point cela ; je cherche mes livres et ceux de mon 
frere. 7 Voila les portraits de ma famille ; celui-ci est tres 
bon, mais ceux-la sont mauvais. h Ce peintre a beaucoup 
de beaux tableaux dans son atelier. 9 Acheterez-vous cette 
peinture-ci ou celle-la? ,0 Celle-ci est le portrait de Louis 
XIV"., et celle-la de Louis XV. jl C'etaient deux rois de 
France ; celui-la etait un tres grand roi ; celui-ci etait un 
tres mauvais homme. :2 Xe me donnez pas cela ; je ne 
l'aime pas ; j'aime mieux ceci. 13 Ceci est trop cher ; je ne 
vous l'acheterai pas. 14 C'est cher, il est vrai ; mais c'est 
tres beau. 15 Si j'avais assez d'argent, j'acheterais tout 
ceci. 16 Sont-ce la vos livres ou ceux du maitre ? 17 Ce 
sont mes livres ; ceux de mon maitre sont a l'ecole. 
18 Quoique nous fussions tres riches, nous n'acheterions pas 



116 LESSON XXIV. 

ces tableaux-ci ; ceux-la sont beaucoup plus beaux. 19 Cet 
homme n'est pas tres rieke, inais celui-la est tres pauvre. 
20 J'ai beaucoup de robes, et je vous donnerai celle-ci. 21 Je 
lui donnerai aussi celle de ma soeur. 22 Donnez-moi celle- 
la ; je l'aime mieux. 

Theme 24. 
1 Is that your house ? 2 Yes, it is my house, and it is a 
very good house. 3 We have prettier ones in our village ; 
but this one is larger than my father's. 4 This picture is 
handsome ; I do not like that one. 5 Are you the painter 
of it ? 6 1 am the painter of this one, and I have many 
pictures in my studio. 7 Do you like this one better, or 
that one ? 8 1 like this one, but those are also very pretty. 
9 Which portrait have you bought ? 10 I have bought that 
of the king of England. u Have you brought me this? 
12 Yes ; but if you do not like this, I will give you that. 
13 1 have lost your present and your brother's, but I will 
look for them. 14 1 have found this in the garden, and I 
will give it to you. 15 It is seven o'clock, and I am hungry ; 
give me bread. 16 1 have some, but it is not for you. 
17 You had some fruit, and you did not give me any ; now 
I do not give you this. 1R These men do not work, but 
those work always. l9 We have lost our horse, but we have 
my brother's. 20 If we had not had these flowers, we should 
have bought the old woman's. 21 These flowers are not 
handsome ; I like those better. 

VERB-LESSON. 

1 Voulez-vous du pain ? 2 Je n'en veux pas ; je n'ai pas 
faim. 3 Ne voudriez-vous pas manger ce fruit ? 4 Veuillez 
m'en donner. 5 lis ne veulent pas travailler. 6 II voulait 
manger. 7 II ne veut pas me le donner. 6 Quoiqu'il voulut 
manger, il n'avait rien. 

9 1 will ; they do not wish ; will you ? we shall have 
wished ; you will wish ; that I might have wished ; that 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 117 

she might wish ; that we may wish ; they wished ; we 
were wishing ; they would have wished. 10 Will you have 
some milk ? 21 No, I do not want any ; I want some water. 
12 1 want to give her a present. 13 Give her a new dress ; 
she wants it. u Will you buy a dress for her ? 



LESSOJST XXV. 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 



1. The interrogative pronouns are : 

qui, who ? whom ? what ? quoi, what ? 

que, what? lequel etc., which 

2. Qui is hardly used except of persons. It stands 
for all genders and numbers, and in all constructions — 
as subject, object, predicate, after a preposition, etc. 
Thus : 

qui est la, who is there? 

qui cherchent-ils, whom do they seek ? 

qui etes- vous, who are you ? 

pour qui ce crayon est-il, /or whom is this pencil? 

a qui est ce livre-la, to whom does that book belong ? 

3. Qui is sometimes, but only rarely, used as subject in the 
sense of what f Generally, the phrase qu'est-ce qui what is that 
which or what is it that is employed instead. Thus : 

qui vous amene, what brings you here ? 
qu'est-ce qui vous trouble, what troubles you? (literally, 
what is it that troubles you ?) 

4. Que and quoi what f are also without distinction of 
gender or number, but are used only of things ; que is 
conjunctive (XXII. 2), and quoi is disjunctive (like me 
moi, etc.). 



118 LESSON XXV. 

a. Que is only object of a verb, or predicate with an 
intransitive verb : thus, 

que voulez-vous, what do you wish? 

que nous dit cet homme, what does this man say to us? 

qu'est-ce (or qu'est-ce que c'est), what is it? 

que sert-il, of what use is it? 

que deviendra-t il, what will he become? (i.e. what will become of him?) 

b. Quoi is used absolutely, and with a preposition: 

thus, 

elle vous a donne— quoi, sfie has given you — what? 
de quoi parle-t il, of what is lie speaking? 

c. Both que and quoi are frequent in exclamation : thus, 

que de services il m'a rendus, what services he has rendered me! 

quoi de plus heureux, what more fortunate ! 

quoi ! vous y etes encore, wlmt! you are here still? 

d. Que is often also an adverb, meaning how f why ? : thus, 

que vous etes belle, how handsome you are ! 

que parlez-vous si haut, why do you speak so loud? 

5. Lequel is made up of the interrogative adjective 
quel (XIII. 4) and the definite article; it is written as if 
one word, but both its parts are inflected for gender and 
number: thus, 

Sing, lequel m., laquelle f. Plur. lesquels m., lesquelles f. 
They are used in all constructions, in the sense of 
which f which one f what one f Thus : 

voici deux livres : lequel choisissez vous, here are two books: 

which do you choose ? 
laquelle de ses soeurs est mariee, which of his sisters is married? 
par lequel de ces chemins, by which one of these roads ? 

a. The article in lequel etc. also combines with the prepositions 
de and a just as when it stands alone, making duquel, desquels, 
desquelles; auquel, auxquels, auxquelles: thus, duquel de 
vos amis parlez-vous of which of your friends do you speak ? 
auxquelles de ces ecolieres les a-t-il dorines to which of these 
scholars has he given them ? 

6. After some interrogative words — the pronouns qui and que, 
the adjective quel, and the adverbs oil where ? quand when ? com- 



OTTEKK0GATIVE PKONOTOS. 119 

ment how? combien how much, how many ■? - a subject-noun is 
allowed to be itself put after the verb in asking a question (com- 
pare 1. 11) : thus, que veut cette femme what does this woman 
want? ou est notre ami where is our friend? quel livre a, 
l'ecolier what book has the scholar ? 

7. It is common in French to use paraphrases in asking ques- 
tions: thus, qu'est-ce que vous avez what is it that you have? 
for qu'avez-vous what have you ? qui est-ce qui vend who is it 
that sells ? for qui vend who sells ? and the like; also est-ce que 
vous avez is it [the case] that you have ? for avez- vous have you ? 
and especially est-ce que j'aime instead of aiine-je, and the like. 

VERB-LESSON. 

8. The verb pouvoir he able, can, is, like vouloir 
(XXIY. 6), a very common and very irregular verb, 
used somewhat in the manner of an auxiliary of mode. 

a. Its synopsis of principal and derived forms is : 
pouvoir pouvant pu peux or puis pus 

p o u r r a i pouvais avoir pu pusse 

pourrais puisse etc. etc. 

b. This verb has no imperative. Its pres. sub], is entirely regu- 
lar in inflection. The pres. indie, is as follows : 

peux, puis pouvons 

peux pouvez 

peut peuvent 

c. In this tense is seen the same exchange of ou and eu as in vouloir. The 
impf. indie, comes regularly from another form of the pres. pple, puissant, 
now used only as ordinary adjective, meaning powerful, puissant. 

d. Puis and peux are equally common as 1st sing. In ques- 
tions, however, only puis-je is used. 

e. When this verb is made negative before an infinitive, the pas 
is often omitted : thus, cela ne peut tarder that cannot delay. 
The omission is more usual with puis than with peux in 1st sing, 
present. 

/. Pouvoir sometimes expresses general possibility, and is to 
be rendered by may, might, etc. : thus, cela peut §tre that may 
be, il pouvait avoir vingt ans he might {perhaps) be 20 years 
old. It is sometimes used reflexively, in the sense of be possible : 
thus, cela se peut that is possible. 

g. Pouvoir often takes an object directly where in English we 
have to use another verb : thus, peut-il attendre can he wait, 
il le peut lie can (do) it. 



120 LESSON XXV. 

VOCABULARY. 

la serviette, the napkin la nappe, the table-cloth 

l'assiette, the plate la *cuiller, the spoon 

le couteau, the knife la fourchette, the fork 

diner, dine dejeuner, breakfast 

maintenant, now alors, then 

Exercise 25. 

1 Qui est ce jeune bornme ? a C'est Monsieur B.,' mon 
ami. 3 Lequel de vos amis aimez-vous. 4 Je les aime tous. 
& Qui veut diner avec moi ? 6 Moi, je le veux ; je n'ai pas 
encore dine, et j'ai faim. 7 Laquelle des deux nappes 
voulez-vous employer ? 8 Nous emploierons la rouge ; 
nous voulons nettoyer la blanche. 9 A qui est cette assi- 
ette-ci ? 10 C'est a mon fils, mais il n'est pas encore ici. 
11 Qu'avez-vous a manger ? 12 Yeuillez manger de la viande 
et des legumes. 13 Voila une cuiller et une fourchette ; 
laquelle voulez-vous ? 14 Donnez-rnoi la fourchette, et un 
couteau aussi. 1D Que veut-il ? 16 II veut du sel et du 
poivre. 17 Que lui donnez-vous maintenant? is Je lui 
donne une assiette. J9 Lequel de vos freres est ici, et que 
veut-il ? 20 II veut dejeuner avec moi. 21 De quoi vous a- 
t-il parle ? 22 II m'a parle du concert ; qu'en pensez-vous ? 
23 A quoi pensiez-vous alors ? 24 Je pensais a ma tache. 
"Auxquelles des jeunes filles pensez-vous maintenant? 
26 Je pense a ma niece. 

Theme 25. 

1 Who has been in my room ? 2 It was I, madam. 
3 What did you want ? 4 I wanted to find the table-cloth 
and napkins. 5 Which did you find ? 6 1 found the white 
ones. 7 At what hour do you wish to dine ? * I will dine 
now, because I have not breakfasted to-day. 9 What have 
you on the table ? 10 We have butter and cheese ; which 
do you wish ? "I wish cheese with my bread ; give me a 
knife and a plate. 12 Here is a blue and a white plate ; 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 121 

which do you want ? 13 Please to give me that large knife. 
14 Which of the knives is the largest? 15 This knife is 
larger than that. 16 Of what are you thinking ? I7 Why 
do you not bring me the meat and the vegetables ? 
'"Who is this woman, and what has she in her basket? 
29 She has potatoes ; and I will buy you some. 20 To which 
of the children did he give the cake ? 21 He gave it to 
nobody then ; he will give it now to this good child. 22 Of 
whom have you bought this picture ? 23 1 bought it of the 
painter for my sister. 24 Of what were you speaking? 
* a We were speaking of this portrait. 

VERB-LESSON. 

1 II peut travailler. 2 II ne pouvait pas travailler. 3 II 
ne pourra pas travailler, s'il est malade. 4 II pourrait tra- 
vailler, s'il n'etait pas malade. 5 II veut travailler, mais il 
ne le ]>eut pas. 6 Nous le pouvons, mais nous ne le voulons 
pas. 7 A-t-il attendu ? 8 II ne l'a pas pu. 

9 Can I ? you can ; we were able ; they will be able ; she 
has been able ; though he cannot ; if thou couldst ; that 
he might be able. 10 We can if we will ; he could if he 
would ; he will be able if you shall be able. " This one 
would work if he could ; those can (it) and will not (it). 
12 1 should have been able to love you, if you had been 
willing to love me. 13 1 cannot love you, but I have not 
been able to hate you. 



LESSON XXVI. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



1. All the interrogative pronouns are used also as 
relatives, but with some notable differences from their 
use as interrogatives. 



122 • LESSON XXVI. 

2. By far the commonest relatives are qui and que — 
qui standing as subject, and que as direct object of a 
verb. Both of them signify either persons or things, of 
any gender or number. Thus, 

l'enfant qui pleure, the child that cries 

des oiseaux qui volent, birds that fly 

le livre que vous avez, the book which you have 

les amis que nous aimons, the friends whom we love 

a. Que is also sometimes predicate with an intransitive, espec- 
ially §tre : thus, imbecile que vous etes fool that you are, ce 
que e'est that which it is, ce que vous devenez that which you 
become, ce qu'il nous faut what we lack. 

b. The participle of a compound tense following que agrees in 
gender and number (X. 56) with the word to which que relates : 
thus, les gants qu'il a achetes the gloves that he has bought, les 
fleurs que nous avions vues the flowers which we had seen. 

c. A verb having qui as subject is of the person of its ante- 
cedent : thus, moi qui suis I wJto am, toi qui as thou that hast, 
etc. 

3. Qui is also used with prepositions, but generally 
only of persons : thus, 

l'homme a qui je l'ai donne, the man to whom I ham given it 
les amis chez qui vous demeurez, the friends with whom you live 

4. Lequel etc. is iised with prepositions of objects 
other than persons : thus, 

le chien auquel j'ai donne a manger, the dog to which I have 

given {something) to eat 
les maisons dans lesquelles vous demeurez, the houses in which 
you dwell 
a. After parmi among, lesquels (or lesquelles) is always used, 
and not qui. 

5. But lequel etc. is also used as subject or direct 
object of a verb, in place of qui or que — generally, how- 
ever, only when there is special reason for distinguishing 
the gender and number of the person or thing referred 
to : thus, 

voila l'ami de ma mere, lequel vient me voir, here is my mother 's friend, 
who comes to see me (where qui, if used, might seem to refer to 
mere mother) 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 123 

6. Quoi, when used as relative, is more often a com- 
pound relative (or relative implying also its antecedent), 
and taken in a general or indefinite sense : thus, 

des choses a quoi on fait attention, things to which one pays attention 

apres quoi, il s'en alia, after which, he went off 

je ne sais quoi, I don't know what 

vous me direz a quoi me fier, you will tell me on what to rely 

a. De quoi, before an infinitive, means wherewith : thus, j'ai 
de quoi vous amuser I have wherewith to amuse you (the means 
of amusing you). 

7. Instead of qui or lequel with preceding de is often 

used dont, meaning of whom, of which, whose : thus, 

l'homme dont vous parlez, the man of whom you speak 
notre ami, dont le fils est ici, our friend, whose son is here 

a. If the word on which dont is dependent is object of a verb, 
it takes its regular place after the verb, however far separated 
from the relative : thus, la femme dont vous avez recu la lettre 
the woman whose letter you have received, le livre dont je ne 
connais pas le titre the hook of which I do not know the title. 

b. Dont is originally an adverb ( = Lat. de uncle), meaning 
whence, from whence, and it is often best so rendered : thus, 
l'esprit retourne au ciel, dont il est descendu the spirit returns 
to heaven, whence it descended. 

8. The adverb ou where is also often used almost as a relative 
pronoun, meaning to or at or in which, and the like : thus, les 
honneurs ou vous aspirez the honors to which you aspire, la 
doulear ou je suis plonge the grief into which I am plunged. 
And d'ou means from which or whence, and par ou by which, 
by which route, etc. 

9. Quiconque whoever, anyone who, is an indefinite relative, 
generally without antecedent expressed : thus, quiconque ment, 
sera puni whoever lies shall be punished. 

10. The pronoun used as antecedent of a relative (as 
already pointed out, XXIY. 2, kd) is not the personal, 
as in English he who, they who, and so on, but the de- 
monstrative, ce or celui etc. 

a. Ce qui and ce que answer to English what or that 
which, the one as subject, the other as object (or some- 
times predicate) of a verb : thus, 



124 LESSON XXVI. 

dites-moi ce qui vous trouble, tell me what troubles you 
dites moi ce que vous voulez, tell me iclwt you wish 
dites moi ce que vous etes, tell me what you are 
faites tout ce que je vous dis, do all that I tell you 

b. Ce dont means of what or that of which : thus, dites-moi 
ce dont vous avez a vous plaindre tell me of what you have to 
complain. 

c. Celui qui or que etc. means in like manner he who, 
the one which, and so on : thus, 

celui qui est dans les cieux, he who is in the heavens 
celle que vous aimez, she whom you love 

11. Note that the relative, often omitted in English, 
must always be expressed in French: thus, 

the friends Hove, les amis que j'aime 

the books he has bought, les livres qu'il a achetes 

VERB-LESSON. 

12. The irregular verb devoir owe, ought etc. is con- 
jugated as follows : 

a. Synopsis of principal and derived parts : 

devoir devant du dois dus 

d e v r a i devais avoir du dois dusse 

devrais doive 

6. Inflection of the present tenses : 

Present Indicative. Imperative. Present Subjunctive. 

dois devons devons doive devions 

dois devez dois devez doives deviez 

doit doivent doive doivent 

c. Note that in the accented or strong forms the root-vowel changes from e to 



in. 



d. Several other verbs (recevoir etc.) are conjugated like devoir, and in 
some grammars form with it the third regular conjugation (XVHI. la.) 

e. The past participle has the circumflex only in the masc. sing, 
(to distinguish it from du = de lej ; the other forms are due, dus, 
dues. 

/. Doit etc. very often signifies is to, is planned ox destined to: 
thus, il doit venir chez nous demain lie is to come to us to- 
morrow, je savais ce que je devais faire / knew what I was to 
do. In many cases it has the sense of must, have to, etc. : thus, 
elle a du §tre belle dans sa jeunesse she must have been beauti- 
ful in her youth. The meaning ought belongs especially to the 
conditional : thus, quand devrais-je revenir when ought I to 
come back f il aurait du le faire he ought to have done it. 



RELATIVE PROXOUN"S. 125 



VOCABULARY. 

la cuisine, the kitchen la cuisiniere, the cook 

l'oeuf m., the egg les pois m., the peas 

la rue, the street demander, ask 

preparer, prepare demeurer, live, dwell 

Exercise 26. 

1 Qui est-ce qui vous cherche ? 2 C'est rna cuisiniere qui 
me cherche. 3 Qu'est-ce qu'elle vent ? 4 Elle clemande a 
quelle heure je veux dejeuner. 5 Elle preparera tout ce 
que vous voudrez. 6 Youlez-vous de la viande qu'elle a 
preparee, ou des *ceufs qui sont dans la cuisine ? 7 Je man- 
gerai les pois que j'ai sur mon assiette. 8 La femme dont 
je vous ai parle est dans la cuisine. 9 C'est la femme a qui 
j'ai donne de l'argent. 10 Que veut-elle ? " Elle veut vous 
vendre ce qu'elle a dans son panier. 12 Qu'est-ce que c'est ? 

13 Ce sont des ceufs qu'elle a apportes de la campagne. 

14 Ou cherchez-vous les brebis ? 15 Je les chercherai dans 
les champs ou je les ai perdues. 16 Oil demeurent ces 
pauvres gens ? :7 lis demeurent dans la vieille maison ou 
je vous ai mene hier. 18 Quiconque donne aux pauvres sera 
beni. 13 Celle qui vous aime vous donnera ce que vous 
voulez. 20 Donnez a celle que vous aimez ce qu'elle veut. 
21 Voila la maison ou nous demeurons. 

Theme 26. 
1 Whom do you love ? 2 1 love those who love me ; but 
I do not hate, him who hates me. 3 Speak to me of her of 
whom I was thinking. 4 1 looked for the house in which 
he lived, but I had forgotten in which of the two streets 
it was. 5 The house is in the street in which my brother 
lives. 6 If I had found him whom I sought, I should have 
given him all that I had. ' My cook bought all the eggs 
which he had brought in his basket. 8 Does she not want 
dlso the peas which are in the basket ? 9 No, we have pota- 



126 LESSON- XXVII. 

toes still. 10 The friend at whose house I wish to dine is 
he of whom you spoke to me. n He is a handsome man 
whom I love, and whose mother was my friend. 12 The 
books of which you spoke to me are in the library. 13 These 
houses are those to which we bring milk and eggs. 14 The 
man to whom we sold the eggs lives in that house. ia Who- 
ever wishes to be good can be so. 1C I will love him who 
finds me what I have lost. 17 Give me what is in your 
pocket, and I will give you what I have in my hand. 
18 What is that which you are eating ? 19 There is the man 
to whom I sold my book. 20 Where is the little boy whose 
father lives in our street ? 

VERB-LESSON. 

1 Je ne vous dois rien. 2 II me doit beaucoup d'argent. 
3 II me donna ce qu'il me devait. 4 Ces enfants devraient 
etre punis. 5 Nous devions l'apporter hier, mais nous ne 
le pouvions pas. 6 J'ai du etre ici a cinq heures. 

7 He owes; they were owing; we owed (pret.) ; they 
will owe ; she would owe ; that you may owe ; that he 
might owe. 8 We are to dine at four o'clock. 9 He was 
to be here at noon. 10 You must be hungry. u You ought 
(cond.) not to forget w r hat I have told you. ia They must 
have forgotten it. 



LESSON XXVII. 

POSSESSIVE ANT> INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

1. When used substantively, or without an accom- 
panying noun expressed, the possessives have a special 
form (different from that of the possessive adjectives : 
XIV.), and are always preceded by the definite article : 
thus. 



Singular. 


le mien 


la mienne 


le tien 


la tienne 


le sien 


la sienne 


le notre 


la notre 


le votre 


la votre 


le leur 


la leur 



POSSESSIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 127 

Pltjral. 

les miens les miennes, mine 
les tiens les tiennes, thine 
les siens les siennes, his, Jiers, its 
les notres, ours 
les votres, yours 
les leurs, theirs 

a. The feminines and plurals are made regularly, according to 
the rules for adjectives (VII., VIII.), except that leur has the 
same form for masculine and feminine. 

2. These possessive pronouns (as they may be called) 
take the gender and number of the object possessed, and 
must be used whenever the noun expressing that object 
does not immediately follow them : thus, 

nion chapeau et le sien, my hat and his (or hers) 
son chapeau et le mien, his (or her) hat and mine 
nous avons nos chapeaux et ils ont les leurs, ice have our hats 
and they have theirs 

3. A few other words, more or less akin with pro- 
nouns in value, call for mention and explanation. 

4. As an indefinite subject, on is used in the sense of 
one, they, people, and the like : thus, 

on dit, one says, they say, 'people say, etc. 

a. Instead of on simply, Ton (with the article prefixed) is often 
used after a vowel sound, especially after et, ou, on, que, si : thus, 
si Ton voit if one sees. 

b. This is the inclusive article (IV. 5), saved in order to prevent hiatus ; since 
on is by origin an abbreviation of homme. 

c. It is very often convenient to substitute in English a passive 
expression for an active with on : thus, it is said for on dit. 

5. Compounds of un with the pronominal adjectives 
(XIV. 6) chaque each and quelque some are 

chacun m., chacune 1, each, each one, every one 
quelqu'un m., quelqu'une f., some one, somebody 
quelques uns m., quelques unes f., some, some people 

a. Something, anything is expressed by quelque chose, 






128 LESSON XXVII. 

and everything by tout or by toute chose (not chaque 
chose). 

6. Some words used as pronominal adjectives (XIV. 

6) may stand also substantively, or as pronouns : such are 

aucun m., aucune f. (with ne before the verb), not one, no 

one, none ; un autre another, l'autre the other, d'autrcs 

others, etc.; plusieurs several; tout all, everything; le 

meme the same. 

a. From autre comes the pronoun autrui another, other people, 
others than one's self; it is never used as subject. 

7. Un one and autre other are combined into certain 
phrases : thus, Tun et l'autre the one and the other, i.e. 
loth ; Tun ou l'autre the one or the other, i.e. either ; ni 
Tun ni l'autre (with ne before the verb) neither the one 
nor the other, i.e. neither ; l'un l'autre the one the other, 
i.e. one another, each other. 

a. Both is also expressed by tous deux or tous les deux 
(literally, all the two). 

o. Tout le monde (literally, all the world) is a very com- 
mon expression for everybody : thus, tout le monde l'aime 
everybody loves him. 

VERB-LESSON. 

8. The verb aller go is extremely irregular, being 
made up in its conjugation of parts derived from three 
different verbs. It takes etre as auxiliary (XXVIII. 6a). 

a. Its synopsis of principal and derived parts is : 

aller allant alle vais allai 

i r a i allais etre alle v a allasse 

. , i etc. etc. 

irais aille 

b. Its three present tenses are inflected thus : 

Present Indicative. Imperative. Present Subjunctive. 

vais allons allons 

vas allez va allez 
va vont 



aille 


allions 


ailles 


al!ie2 


aille 


aillent 



POSSESSIVE AND INDEFINITE PEONOUNS. 129 

9. a. Va 2d sing. impv. becomes vas before en and y (com- 
pare XVIII. 10a). 

b. Vais etc. come from Lat. vadere walk; irai etc., from Lat. ire go; the 
Lat. original of aller etc. is obscure and disputed. 

c. The present and imperfect indie, of aller are used 
before an infinitive (without infinitive-sign), precisely 
like I am going, I was going in English, as a sort of im- 
mediate future tense, or to denote something just about 
to take place : thus, il va partir he is going to leave, 
j'allais lui repondre I was going to answer him. 

d. Allons let us go is used in the sense of come, come on. 
Aller voir, aller chercher correspond to our visit, and look for 
or fetch. For the reflexive s'en aller go off, see XXIX. 7c. 

VOCABULARY. 

le salon, the saloon, dining-room le ragoiit, the stew, ragout 

le convert, the cover {place at table) le plat, the dish 

la soupe, tlie soup la sonpiere, the tureen 

le poisson, the fish la confiture, the sweetmeat 

casser, break oter, remove, take off or away 

Exercise 27. 
1 Est-ce que votre oncle et le mien sont ici ? 2 Oui, ma- 
dame, ils sont tous les deux ici. 3 Si tout le monde est ici, 
nous pouvons diner. 4 Votre salon est plus grand que le 
mien. 5 Oui, monsieur, le mien est plus grand, mais le 
votre est plus joli. 6 Ce sont toutes les deux de tres belles 
chambres. 7 Yoici votre couvert, et voila les leurs. 8 Marie, 
apporte de la soupe a monsieur. 9 Youlez-vous de ce plat- 
ci ou de Pautre ? 10 Je ne veux ni de Pun ni de Pautre ; don- 
nez-moi le ragout et quelques legumes. " Ne voulez-vous 
pas de pommes de terre ? 12 J'en ai deja mange plusieurs ; 
mais j'en mangerai encore quelques unes. 13 Dois-je don- 
ner des confitures aux enfants ? 14 Non, aucun des enfants 
ne doit manger de confitures. "On a donne aux enfants 
du poisson et de la viande, et ils ont mange de Pun et de 
Pautre. 16 Ou est la soupiere ? 17 On Pa cassee. " On ne 
doit jamais casser les choses d'autrui. I9 Si Pon casse une 
9 



130 LESSOR XXVJI. 

chose, on devrait en acheter une autre. 20 Ces messieurs 
ont 6te leurs chapeaux ; ote aussi le tien. 21 On 6te tou- 
jours son chapeau dans la maison. 22 J'aime toutes les 
choses que vous aimez. 

Theme 27. 

1 Are you looking for my brother or hers ? 2 1 have 
looked for both, but I have found neither ; they have dined 
already. 3 Several of my friends are here ; let us dine 
without the others. 4 Each one ought to have a cover. 
& We have eight places, and we can have others. 6 You 
have not plates enough ; some one has broken several. 7 If 
one looks in the kitchen, one will find some. 8 We have 
several dishes ; which will you (have) ? 9 Will you (have) 
fish or meat ? 10 We will (have) neither ; give me some 
stew. " I am not hungry ; give me only very little of the 
meat ; I ought to eat something. " Remove these sweet- 
meats, and bring me others. 13 Your sweetmeats are much 
better than mine. I4 Ours are good, but theirs are very 
bad. '"Everybody is hungry, but no one of us eats stew. 
16 1 am poor ; but I have never eaten the bread of others. 
17 My children are much more amiable than hers, but his 
are prettier than yours. 18 Every one loves his children 
better than those of other people. 1U If one has good chil- 
dren, one is always happy. 20 What do you think of (de) 
this book? 2I Each of us thinks something of it, but no 
one thinks the same of it. 

VERB-LESSON. 

1 Ou allez-vous ? 2 Je vais a la ville. 3 Ces enf ants iront 
chercher leurs amis. 4 lis vont a l'ecole. 5 Va chercher 
des confitures, nous allons en manger. 6 Je vais les appor- 
ter. 7 Allons, parlons d'autre chose. 

8 Thou goest ; they were going ; she went ; did you go ? 
we shall go ; he would go ; that I may go ; that he might 
go. 9 We are going to eat. 10 He was going to be hungry. 



PASSIVE VERBS. 131 

11 I shall go to-morrow. 12 Did they go to look for the dog ? 
13 My friends are going to the city. 14 Come, let us find 
them. 



LESSON XXYIII. 



1. The forms of the passive conjugation of a verb 
are made in French precisely as in English : namely, by 
prefixing the auxiliary etre he to a past participle. 

a. To make, then, any given passive form of a verb, 
add to the corresponding form, of etre the past or passive 
participle of that verb : thus, 

he was praised, il etait loue 
he would have been praised, il aurait ete loue 
h. The participle agrees in gender and number with 
the subject of the verb : thus, 
she was praised, elle etait louee 

they (m.) would hate been praised, ils auraient ete loues 
c. Note, however, that (VII. 16) if vous is used to represent a 
single person, the participle agrees with it only in gender : thus, 
you (sing, f.) ivill be praised, vous serez louee. 

2. a. Taking as an example the verb louer praise, the 
synopsis of simple passive tenses is as follows: 

Infinitive. 
etre loue (louee, loues, louees), be praised 
Present Participle. 
etant loue (etc. ), being praised 
Indicative Present, je suis loue (etc.), I am praised 
Imperfect, j'etais loue (etc.), I was praised 
Preterit, je fus loue (etc.), I was praised 
Future, je serai loue (etc.), I shall be praised 
Conditional je serais loue (etc.), I should b.e praised 

Imperative sois loue (etc.), be praised 

Subjunctive Present, que je sois loue (etc.), that I may be praised 

Imperfect, que je fusse loue (etc.), that I might be praised 



132 LESSON XXVIII. 

h. The synopsis of compound passive tenses is : 

Perfect Infinitive, avoir ete loue (etc.), to have been praised 
Perfect Participle, ayant ete loue (etc.), having been praised 
Indicative Perfect, j'ai ete loue (etc.), I have been praised 

Pluperfect, j'avais ete loue (etc.), I had been praised 
Past Ant., j'eus ete loue (etc.), I had been praised 
Fut. Perf. j'aurai ete loue (etc.), I shall have been pro n& < 7 
Conditional Perfect, jamais ete loue (etc.), / should have been 

praised 
Subjunctive Perfect, que j'aie ete loue (etc.), that I may have been 

praised 
Pluperfect, que j'eusse ete loue (etc.), that I might have 
been praised 

3. After a passive verb, hy is generally represented 
by par ; but sometimes also by de, if the verb expresses 
a mental action or feeling: thus, 

il est aime de tout le monde, he is loved by everybody 
il fut trouve par le chien, Tie was found by the dog 

4. The passive is less used in French than in English; instead 
of it often stand active verbs with the indefinite subject on 
(XXVII. 4), or reflexive verbs (XXIX.). 

Avoir or etre as auxiliaries. 

5. Avoir is the auxiliary used in forming the com- 
pound tenses of all transitive verbs, and of the great ma- 
jority of intransitive or neuter verbs (including etre he 
itself) a 

6. Etre is used to make the compound forms of * all 
passives (above, 1) and reflexives (XXIX. 3), and also of 
a few intransitives. 

a. The commonest intransitives taking always etre as 
auxiliary are : 

aller, go eclore, open, hatch 

venir, come (with its compounds devenir, mourir, die 

parvenir, etc.) deceder, decease 

arriver, arrive, happen tomber, /a££ 

entrer, enter choir, fall 
naitre, be born 



AUXILIAKIES. 133 

7. A number of intransitives take sometimes avoir 
and sometimes etre — avoir when there is had in view es- 
pecially the performance of an act, but etre when the re- 
sulting condition : thus, 

il a passe a quatre heures, he went by at four o'clock 
il est passe et disparu, he has gone by and disappeared 

a. Such verbs are especially those that signify a distinct change 
of place or condition. The most frequent of them are partir, 
sortir, retourner (these three almost always with etre), passer, 
rester, monter, descendre, accourir, changer, cesser, echapper ; 
and croitre, grandir, vieillir, degenerer, disparaitre, perir, 
and so on. 

8. When an intransitive has etre as auxiliary, its par- 
ticiple in the compound tenses agrees in gender and 
number with the subject of the verb ; but the participle 
with avoir remains unchanged (i.e. has the masc. sing, 
form, whatever the character of the subject). 

VOCABULARY. 

le royaume, the kingdom, realm la republique, tlie republic 

la patrie, the {one's) country la loi, the law 

le citoyen, the citizen Tennemi m., the enemy 

chasser, drive off or away rappeler, recall, call back 

arriver, arrive rester, remain, stay 

passer, pass retourner, return 

vieillir, age, grow old obeir a, obey 

inviter, invite louer, praise 

Exercise 28. 

1 Le roi est-il aime de ses sujets ? 2 Non, le roi n'est aime 
de personne, mais la reine est aimee de tout le monde. 
3 La patrie doit etre aimee de tous les citoyens. 4 Les 
citoyens sont proteges par les lois. 5 Ceux qui n'obeis- 
sent pas aux lois seront punis. 6 Le roi a ete chasse de son 
royaume par ses ennemis. 7 II a passe en Angleterre, et il 
y est reste pendant deux ans. 8 II a ete rappele par les ci- 
toyens, et il est retourne en France. 9 Charles est-il reste 



134 LESSON" XXVIII. 

chez vous ? 10 Non, monsieur, il n'est pas encore arrive. 

11 Votre mere a beaucoup vieilli pendant l'annee dernierc. 

12 Cette femme est beaucoup vieillie, mais elle est encore 
tres belle. 13 Est-ce que votre amie est arrivee, madame? 

14 Non, je suis allee la chercher, mais je ne l'ai pas trouvee. 

15 Etes-vous invite au bal ? 1C Non, madame; je ne suis 
pas invite, mais vous et votre sceur etes invitees. 17 N'est- 
elle pas allee a sa chambre ? 1H Oui, mais nous l'avons rap- 
pelee, et elle est retournee au salon. 19 Mon ami veut ven- 
dre sa maison ; la mienne est deja vendue. "Elle a ete 
achetee par mon riche voisin. 

Theme 28. 

3 The republic is loved and praised by everybody. 2 The 
country ought to be protected by its citizens. 3 Where is 
the king of France ? 4 He has gone to England, but the 
queen has stayed here. 5 Has he never returned ? 6 Yes, 
he returned last year. 7 The citizens are praised because 
they obey the laws. 8 Many of the enemies of the republic 
have been driven away, but some have remained. 9 Has 
not Helen been here? 10 No, she went by at six o'clock, 
but she did not stay. ]1 She has not yet returned. 12 At 
what hour did you arrive? 13 I arrived at ten o'clock. 
14 We arrived at half past eight. lb You (pi.) did not stay 
long in Paris. 16 Where has Mary gone ? 17 She had gone 
to her room, but I called her, and she has returned to the 
dining-room. 18 Is she not invited to the concert to-day ? 
19 No ; we are invited, but she and her sister are not in- 
vited. 20 She is still very handsome, although she has aged 
very much. 9A The enemy passed into Germany last week. 



KEFLEXIVE VEKBS. 135 



LESSOR XXIX. 

REFLEXIVE VEKBS. 

1. A reflexive verb, or verb used reflexively, de- 
scribes the subject as acting upon itself. 

a. Reflexive verbs are a much more marked and important class 
in French than in English. Some verbs are reflexive exclusively, 
or nearly so ; others are often such ; and almost any transitive 
verb, and some intransitives, may upon occasion be used reflex- 
ively ; but the conjugation of them all is the same. 

2. A verb is made reflexive, as in English, by adding 
to it an object-pronoun corresponding in person and num- 
ber to the subject. 

a. The reflexive pronouns of the first and second per- 
sons are the same with the ordinary object-pronouns : 
namely, me and te (or toi) in the singular, nous and vous 
in the plural. For the third person there is a special re- 
flexive pronoun, se ; it is the same in singular and plural. 

b. The place of the reflexive pronoun is the same with 
that of any other object-pronoun (XXII. 7) : namely, in 
general before the verb, but after it in the imperative 
affirmative (when te becomes toi : XXII. 65). 

3. The auxiliary of a verb used reflexively is always 
and only etre. 

4. In accordance with the general rule (X. 5b), if the 
reflexive object is a direct one, the participle in the com- 
pound tenses agrees with it in gender and number ; if it 
is indirect, the participle is invariable. 

Thus, from se blesser wound one's self, 
il s'est blesse, elle s'est blessee, nous nous sommes blesses, 
but from s'imaginer imagine to one's self, 

il s'est imagine, elle s'est imagine, nous nous sommes imagine 



136 LESSON XXIX. 

5. As a model of reflexive conjugation may be taken 
the verb se r£jouir delight one's self, rejoice. 

It is a regular verb of the second conjugation, inflected like 
finir (XIX.). 

a. The full inflection of the present indicative and im- 
perative, with the synopsis of the other simple tenses, 
is: 

Infinitive. 
se (or te, me etc.) rejouir, rejoice 
Present Participle. 
se (etc.) rejouissant, rejoicing 
Indicative. 
Present. 
je me rejouis, I rejoice nous nous rejouissons, we rejoice 

tu te rejouis, thou rejoicest vous vous rejouissez, you rejoice 

il se rejouit, he rejoices ils se rejouissent, tliey rejoice 

imperfect, je me rejouissais, I was rejoicing 
preterit, je me rejouis, I rejoiced 
future, je me rejouirai, I shall rejoice 
conditional, je me rejouirais, I should rejoice 
Imperative. 

rejouissons-nous, let us rejoice 
rejouis-toi, rejoice {thou) rejouissez-vous, rejoice (ye) 

Subjunctive, 
present, que je me rejouisse, that I may rejoice 
imperfect, que je me rejouisse, that I might rejoice 

b. The full inflection of the perfect indicative, with 
the synopsis of the other compound forms, next follows. 

To save burdensome repetition, the various forms of the reflex- 
ive pronoun (in infin. and pple), and of the past participle (which 
in this verb mast agree in gender and number with the object) 
are not given. 

Perfect Infinitive. Perfect Participle. 

s'etre rejoui, (to) have rejoiced s'etant rejoui, having rejoiced 

Indicative. 
Perfect. 

je me suis rejoui I have rejoiced nous nous sommes rejouis, we have 



tu t'es rejoui, thou hast rejoiced vous vous etes rejouis, you have re- 
joiced 
il s'est rejoui, he has rejoiced ils se sont rejouis, they have rejoiced 



KEFLEXIVE VERBS. 137 

pluperfect, je m'etais rejoui, Iliad rejoiced 

past anterior, je me fus rejoui, Iliad rejoiced 

Future perfect, je me serai rejoui, I shall have rejoiced 

conditional perfect, je me serais rejoui, I should have rejoiced 

subjunctive perfect, que je me sois rejoui, that I may have rejoiced 

pluperfect, que je me fusse rejoui, that I might have rejoiced 

c. Note the form (VII. 16) vous vous etes rejoui you have re- 
joiced {yourself), when referring to a single individual. 

6. The negative and interrogative forms are made in 
the same manner as those of any other verb taking ob- 
ject-pronouns. Examples are : 

je ne me rejouis pas, I do not rejoice 

ne se rejouit-il pas, did he not rejoice? 

vous rejouissez-vous, do you rejoice? 

ne nous rejouissons pas, let us not rejoice 

vous ne vous serez pas rejouis, you (pi.) will not have rejoiced 

qu'elle ne se fut pas rejouie, that she might not have rejoiced 

ne se sont-elles pas rejouies, have they (f.) not rejoiced? 

7. a. Many reflexive verbs (like se rejouir itself) have to be 
rendered with simple verbs in English. A few of the commonest 
of these are as follows : 

s'arreter, stop se lever, arise, get up 

s'asseoir, sit down se plaindre, lament 

se coucher, go to bed se porter, be {in respect to health) 

se depecher, make haste se promener, take a walk 

se hater, hasten se retirer, retire 

s'ecrier, exclaim, cry out se souvenir, remember 

a'ennuyer, be bored se taire, be silent 

se facher, be angry se tromper, be mistaken 

b. A number of reflexive verbs followed by certain prepositions 
form transitive expressions of special meaning. Those most fre- 
quently occurring are : 

s'approcher de, approach, go near se fier a, trust 
s'attendre a, await se mettre a, begin (set one's self at) 

se defier de, distrust se moquer de, ridicule, mock 

se douter de, suspect se passer de, do or go without 

s'cntendre a, be a judge of se servir de, use, make use of 

Thus, il s'approcha du feu he approached the fire, ils se mi- 
pent a ecrire they began to write, elle ne peut se servir de ses 
•mains she cannot use her hands. 



138 LESSON XXIX. 

<?. Of the intransitives used reflexively, the most noteworthy is 
s'en aller go away, clear out, be off with one's self (literally, go 
one's self from it). The indirect pronoun-object en always fol- 
lows the other pronoun. Thus : je m'en vais I go off, il s'en est 
alle he has gone away, va-t'en be off! ne nous en allons pas let 
us not go away, qu'il ne s'en fut pas alle that he might not have 
gone away, etc. 

8. Plural reflexive forms are often used in a reciprocal sense : 
thus, aimons-nous let us love one another, ils s'aiment they Iwx 
each other, and so on. 

VOCABULARY. 

The vocabulary of this Lesson consists of the examples of reflexive verbs given 
above in the Lesson (except, of course, irregular verbs not yet explained). 

Exercise 29. 
1 A quelle heure vous etes-vous couche hier ? 2 Je me 
suis couche a dix heures, et je me suis leve a six heures. 

3 Pourquoi n'etes vous pas alle a Paris la semaine derniere ? 

4 Je ne me portais pas bien, et je me suis arrete a Rouen. 

5 Ces jeunes lilies oil se promenaient-elles ? c Elles se sont 
promenees dans la ville. 7 Pourquoi s'en allerent-ils ? b Ils 
se facherent, et ils ne voulurent plus rester. 9 Ne vous 
rejouissez-vous pas ? 10 Non, nous nous sommes beaucoup 
ennuyes. J1 Nous irons chercher quel que chose de nouveau. 
12 Approche-toi, mon enfant, ne te defie pas de moi. 13 Cet 
enfant se doute de tout, et ne se fie plus a personne. 14 Elle 
se serait beaucoup rejouie si vous vous etiez approche d'elle. 
1& Nous ne nous serions jamais arretes a Paris, si nous nous 
etions doutes de cela. 1C Pourquoi ces jeunes gens se hatent- 
ils tant ? 17 Ils s'en vont chez eux ; ils veulent se coucher. 
18 Yous vous porteriez mieux si vous vous passiez de votre 
diner. 19 Arretez-vous ; je veux vous parler. 20 Je ne peux 
m'arreter a present; je me hate de me coucher. 21 Ne vous 
fiez pas au roi ; il se moque de vous. 22 Nous ne pouvons 
nous passer de lui. 

Theme 29. 
1 Let us rejoice ; I rejoice and you rejoice ; that they 
might rejoice ; thou didst rejoice j she will rejoice. 2 Have 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 139 

you rejoiced ? had she not rejoiced ? I should have rejoiced 
if you had rejoiced ; though they rejoiced, we did not re- 
joice. 3 Go to bed ; has he not gone to bed ? we should not 
have gone to bed ; you would go to bed ; that they may 
have gone to bed. 4 Get up ; I have got up ; she would 
have got up ; will you not get up ? he had not yet got up ; 
I have gone to bed, but I will get up ; let us not go to bed, 
though he has got up. 5 Have your children gone to bed ? 
mine are getting up. ° Make haste, children ; get up, we 
are going to take a walk. 7 Helen will not go to walk, be- 
cause she is not well. 8 1 shall be bored, if I cannot take 
a walk. 9 Let us not take a walk ; it is two o'clock, and 
we shall dine soon. 10 The dog did not approach the chil- 
dren ; he did not trust them. "I cannot do without the 
book that I have lost. 12 Take a walk with the dog, and I 
will look for your book. 13 We are going away, because 
we distrust these men. 14 He who distrusts everybody will 
never be happy. 15 Why did not the little boy come with 
you? 16 He stopped at the baker's. 17 He is not well ; he 
ought not to go near the baker. 18 If he does not go with- 
out cakes, he will be ill. 19 Go away ; we can do without 
you. 20 The king cannot return to France, because the 
citizens distrust him. 21 Do not be angry ; we will retire. 
22 If you trust this man, you will be mistaken. 



LESSON XXX. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



1. A few verbs in French, as in other languages, are 
used only in the 3d singular, Avith the indefinite or im- 
personal subject il it, and are therefore called impersonal 
verbs. Those oftenest so used are : 



140 LESSON XXX. 

geler, freeze (il gele it freezes, il a, gele, etc.) 
degeler, thaw (il degele, il a degele, etc.) 
greler, hail (il grele, il a grele, etc.) 
neiger, snow (il neige, il a neige, etc.) 
plcuvoir, rain (il pleut, il a plu, etc.) 
tonner, thunder (il tonne, il a tonne, etc.) 

a. These verbs are conjugated like any others (always with the 
auxiliary avoir), except that only the 3d sing, is in use. Pleuvoir 
is irregular : see XLI. 6. 

2. Many other verbs are used in great part imperson- 
ally, with il as subject, and often in a somewhat special 
meaning. Examples are : 

il importe (etc.), it is of consequence (etc.) 

il convient, it is suitable or proper 

il semble, it seems 

il arrive, it happens 

il suffit, it is sufficient 

il vaut mieux, it is better 

il s'agit, the question is 

3. Almost any verb may take the impersonal subject il repre- 
senting by anticipation its real subject, staled later : thus, il vient 
un autre there comes (mother, il parait qu'elle n'y etait pas it 
appears that she was not there. 

4. The English expression' there is, there are, etc., is 
represented in French by the verb avoir, used imperson- 
ally with the adverb y there before it : thus, 

il y a, there is or are (literally, it has there) 

il n'y a pas, there is not 

y a-t il eu, has there been ? 

il n'y aura pas, there will not be 

n'y aurait il pas eu, would there not have been? 

qu'il n'y ait pas, that there may not be 

qu'il y eut eu, that there might have been 

a. Since the following noun is in French grammatically the ob- 
ject of the verb, and not its subject as in English, there is of 
course no change of number in the verb when the noun becomes 
plural : thus, il y avait un oiseau there was a bird, and il y 
avait quatre oiseaux there were four birds (literally, it had there 
one bird, four birds). 

b. Even the infinitive, y avoir, is used, along with certain verbs 



IMPEESONAL VEKBS. 141 

having the value of auxiliaries : thus, il peut y avoir there may 
be. il ne doit pas y avoir eu there ought not to have been. 

e. II y a etc. is often used, elliptically, in expressing extent or 
distance of time reckoned backward from the present : thus, il y 
a huit jours qu'il est malade he has been ill {these) eight days 
(literally, there are eight days that he [has been and] is ill), je le 
vis il y a deux mois I saw him two months ago (literally, 1 saw 
him, there are two months [since]). 

d. II est etc. is also used impersonally, especially in poetry, in- 
stead of il y a etc. 

5. In speaking of the conditions of the weather, the French uses 
il fait etc., it makes etc., with a noun or adjective, where the 
English uses it is : see XXXII. 9a. 

6. To express English must, the French uses the im- 
personal verb falloir he necessary. 

a. Falloir is an irregular verb ; its synopsis of princi- 
pal and derived parts (the tenses in 3d sing.) is as fol- 
lows : 

faut fallut 

fairat 



falloir 


(fallant) 


fallu 


faudra 


fallait 


a fallu 


f audrait 


faille 


etc. etc. 



7. Since falloir is impersonal only, while the equiva- 
lent English expressions, must, have to, he ohliged to, etc., 
admit subjects of all persons and numbers, the sentence 
has to be cast into a quite different form in French. 

a. II faut etc. is oftenest followed by que that before 
the verb which in English takes must as its auxiliary. 
This verb must in French always be in the subjunctive : 
present if the tense of falloir is present or future, other- 
wise imperfect. Thus : 

he must work, il faut qu'il travaille (literally, it is necessary that 

he icork) 
you must read, il faut que vous lisiez 
the boy had to go, il fallait que le garcon allat 
the army will be obliged to retreat, il faudra que l'armee se retire 
the books woidd have had to be sold, il aurait fallu que les livres 

fussent vendus 



142 LESSON XXX. 

b. But if the subject be a pronoun, a briefer expres- 
sion is more often used, the subject being made indirect 
object of the tense of falloir, which is then followed by 
the infinitive of the other verb : thus, 

he must work, il lui faut travailler (literally, it is necessary to him 

to work) 
you must read, il vous faut lire 
she had to go, il lui fallait aller 

they will be obliged to withdraw, il leur faudra se retirer 
8. II faut etc. is also used with a following subject-noun to ex- 
press that something is lacking or desired : thus, il me faut un 
chapeau I want a hat (literally, there is wanting to me a 7iat), 
vous fallait-il des livres did you want some books ? 

VOCABULARY. 

The vocabulary for this Lesson is the impersonal verbs given above in the 
Lesson (except those that are irregular). 

Exercise 30. 
1 Est-ce que vous etes alle a la ville ? 2 Non, monsieur ; 
il a neige toute la journee, et il me fallait rester a la maison. 
3 Nous devions aller a Paris ; mais il gele, et nous resterons 
chez nous. 4 S'il degele, nous irons demain. 5 Y a-t-il 
de jolies villes en Angleterre ? e II y en a de tres jolies ; 
mais la plupart des villes ne sont point jolies. 7 Nous y 
avons ete, il y a deux ans. 8 N'y a-t-il pas eu un bal chez 
madame votre mere ? ° Non, il n'y avait pas de bal, mais 
il y avait plusieurs de nos amis qui dinaient chez nous. 
10 II arrive tres souvent que nous avons des amis chez nous. 
11 II me faut aller a l'ecole, et il faut que mon cousin y aille 
avec moi. 12 Est-ce qu'il y aura un beau concert au theatre ? 
13 II me faudra entendre ce qu'il y a. ,4 Vous faut-il quelque 
chose ? 15 II me faut quelques livres que je ne rmis trouver 
a la bibliotheque. 16 II m'a fallu les chercher chez mon 
oncle. 17 II fallait que les pauvres paysans vendissent toutes 
leurs brebis. 16 Leur faudra-t-il vendre leurs vaches aussi ? 
19 Quoiqu'il leur ait fallu vendre leurs brebis, ils ont encore 
beaucoup de vaches et de chevaux. 20 Que vous faut-il ? 
21 II nous faut de l'argent, nous en avons trop peu. 



ADVEEBS FROM ADJECTIVES. 143 



Theme 30. 

1 It snows and hails, and I shall not go to the school. 
2 If it freezes, do not go there to-morrow. 3 1 shall have 
to go there to-morrow, if it does not thunder. 4 It thawed 
yesterday, and it will not freeze to-morrow. 5 There was 
no concert yesterday, because it was snowing. 6 Will there 
not be a ball in the toAvn to-morrow ? 7 There would have 
been a ball, if it had not snowed. 8 What does he need ? 
9 He needs some new pictures for his room. 10 She must 
buy a new dress and a hat. " This man must buy another 
horse ; the one which he has is very old. I2 It seems to me 
that you are never at home. 13 It happens often that I am 
in the city. ]4 1 dined with your aunt three days ago. 15 1 
should have been there, if it had not snowed. 16 Are there 
not fine things in this book ? 17 1 must buy it. le It seems 
to me that everybody is talking of it. 19 1 had to go to 
England to (pour) buy English books for the library. 
20 Are there not many fine castles in England ? 21 There 
may be some, but I have not found them. 22 Although it 
had snowed all day, I should have had to go to the city. 

23 My sister was expecting me, and I had to speak to her. 

24 If you go, you will be bored. 25 1 must go, and my sister 
must return with me. 



LESSON XXXI. 

ADVEEBS FROM ADJECTIVES. 

1. Most adjectives, in French as in English, have ad- 
verbs made from them by adding an adverbial suffix. 

The adverb-making suffix in French is ment, and 
it is in general added to the feminine form of the adjec- 
tive — vet with not a few exceptions. 



144 LESSON XXXI. 

a. The suffix ment comes from Latin mente, ablative of mens mind, a 
feminine noun, and hence taking before it a feminine adjective : thus, vivement = 
viva uiente with lively mind, etc. 

3. Most adjectives ending in a consonant in the mas- 
culine add ment to their feminine form : thus, 

'haut, high 'hautement, highly 

grand, great grandement, greatly 

plein, full pleinement, fully 

certain, certain certainement, certainly 

seul, sole seulement, only, solely 

cruel, cruel cruellement, cruelly 

ancien, ancient anciennement, anciently 

vif, lively vivement, in a lively manner 

heureux, happy heureusement, happily 

cher, dear cherement, dearly 

franc, frank franchement, frankly 

long, long longuement, lengthily 

doux, sweet doucement, sweetly, softly 

Exceptions to this rule are the following: 

4. a. Adjecti ves ending in ant and ent for the most part 
change their nt into m, and add ment directly to it ; thus, 

constant, constant constamment constantly 

prudent, prudent *prudemment, prudently 

But lentement slowly, presentement presently, vehemente- 
ment vehemently, by the general rule. 

b. A few adjectives change e of the feminine to e before ment : 
thus, communement, confusement, diffusement, expressement, 
importunement, obscurement, profondement, precisement. 

c. Gentil forms gentiment nicely. 

5. Most adjectives ending in a vowel add ment to 
their masculine form : thus, 

facile, easy facilement, easily 

joli, pretty joliment, prettily 

absolu, absolute absolument, absolutely 

modere, moderate moderement, moderately 

vrai, true vraiment, truly 

6. Exceptions to this rule are as follows : 

a. Beau, nouveau, fou, and mou add ment to their femi- 
nine form (VII. 7) : thus, nouvellement, follement, etc. 



ADVERBS FKOM ADJECTIVES. 145 

b. A few adjectives change their final e to e before ment : thus, 
aveuglement, commodement, conformement, enormement, im- 
mensement (and. one or two others, little used). 

c. A few adjectives change final u to u before ment : thus, as- 
sidtiment, continiiment, crument, nument ; and gai gay makes 
either gaiement or gaiment. 

d. Impuni forms impunement with impunity. 

7. Adverbs derived from adjectives (and a few oth- 
ers, as souvent often) have a comparative and superlative, 
made by prefixing plus and le plus respectively (as in the 
comparison of adjectives : IX. 1): thus, 

facilement, plus facilement, le plus facilement, easily, more easily, etc. 
souvent, plus souvent, le plus souvent, often, oftener, oftenest 

8. Four original adverbs have special comparative 
forms, which are made superlative by prefixing le : thus, 

bien, mieux, le mieux, well, letter, best 
mal, pis, le pis, badly or ill, worse, worst 
peu, moins, le moins, little, less, least 
beaucoup, plus, le plus, much, more, most 

9. Many adjectives are, either commonly or in cer- 
tain phrases, used directly as adverbs, without any change 
of form. Some of the commonest of them are : 

bas, in a loio tone fort, wry 

'baut, loud, aloud juste, correctly 

clair, clearly tout, quite 

droit, straight soudain, suddenly 

expres, expressly vite, quickly, fast 

a. Most of these form also adverbs in ment for certain uses. 

VERB-LESSON. 

10. The very irregular verb venir come is also one of 
the commonest in the language, and has many idiomatic 
uses. 

a. Its synopsis of principal and derived forms is (it takes the 
auxiliary etre: XXVIII. 6a): 



venir 


venant 


venu 


viens 


vins 


viendrai 
viendrais 


venais 
vienne 


etre venu 

etc. etc. 


viens 


vinsse 


10 











146 LESSON XXXI. 

h. The inflection of the present tenses is: 

Phes. Indic. IMI'V. Prks. Subj. 

viens venons venons vienne venions 

viens venez viens venez viennes veniez 

vient viennent vienne viennent 

c. Note the change of e to ie in all the accented or strong forms 
(in this verb, also in future and conditional). 

d. The preterit is regularly inflected : thus, vins, vins, vint, 
vinmes, v'intes, vinrent. It (with the pret. of tenir) is the only 
preterit in the language having a nasal vowel. 

e. The common verb tenir hold is conjugated throughout pre- 
cisely like venir (except that it takes avoir as auxiliary). 

/. Venir and tenir are Lat venire and tenere. 

11. a. Venir is followed by an infinitive directly (without a 
or de), when it means come in order to do anything : thus il est 
venu me voir he came to see me, venez diner chez nous come and 
dine with us. 

b. The present and imperfect indicative of venir followed by de 
are used before an infinitive to signify time just past: thus, je 
viens de le voir 1 have just seen Mm, il venait de diner he had 
just dined. 

Such phrases mean literally I am coming from, he was coming 
from etc., and are the exact opposite of I am going to (e.g. je 
vais le voir 1 am going to see him), he was going to (il allait 
diner he was going to dine), etc. 

VOCABULARY. 
(Besides the adverbs given above in the Lesson.) 
amuser, amuse se fatiguer, be tired 

marcher, walk pleurer, weep, weep for 

chanter, sing la musique, music 

extremement, extremely parfaitement, perfectly 

dernierement, lately, recently continuellement, continually 

Exercise 31. 

1 Qu'est-ce que vous aimez le mieux, mon enfant ? 2 J'aime 
mon pere rnieux que tout le monde. 3 Mon oncle a vieilli 
tres vite ; malheureusement il a perdu sa fille. 4 Est-ce 
que vous allez plus souvent au theatre qu'au concert? 
6 J'y vais constaniment, mais je ne m'y amuse que modere- 
ment. 6 Moi, je m'y amuse toujours extremement. 7 Cette 
jeune femme a-t-elle perdu son mari dernierement ? 8 Oui ; 



ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES. 147 

quoiqu'il fut absolument mauvais, et qu'il la battit cruelle- 
ment, elle l'a aime aveuglement, et elle le pleure continuelle- 
ment 9 De quoi cet homme vous a-t-il parle si longuement ? 
10 II a parle trop bas, et je n'ai absolument rien entendu. 
11 Cette jeune fille chante parfaitement; elle a une voix vrai- 
ment belle. 12 Elle ne chante pas toujours juste. 13 Vous 
marchez trop vite, monsieur; vous vous fatiguerez certaine- 
ment. 14 Non, madame ; je marcbe constamment, et je ne 
me fatigue pas facilement. 15 Marcher, c'est ce que j'aime 
le plus. 16 Malheureusement, je ne dois marcher que tres 
rarement. 17 Pourquoi parlez-vous si haut ? 18 Je parlerai 
plus doucement, si vous le voulez. 

Theme 31. 

1 Do you love music, sir ? 2 1 love it extremely, but un- 
fortunately I cannot sing. 3 Frankly, I do not love music, 
but it amuses me greatly at the theatre. 4 You go there 
often, but I go there oftenest. 5 Can I find easily the 
house of your uncle ? 6 You will find it more easily if you 
walk straight to the village. 7 If you walk too fast, you 
will certainly tire yourself. 8 Walk slowly, we shall easily 
arrive in an hour. 9 We ought to take a walk constantly. 

10 If you love blindly, you will be extremely unhappy. 

11 They love her dearly, but she absolutely does not love 
them. 12 If you wish to be well, you must eat moderately. 
13 Speak softly, but do not speak too low, or I shall not 
understand you perfectly. 14 Why does this woman weep 
so cruelly? 15 She is extremely unhappy, because she has 
lately lost a child that she loved dearly. 16 1 trusted my 
friend fully, but unfortunately I was mistaken in him. 
17 No one is constantly happy. 

VERB-LESSON. 

1 Venez-vous chez nous ? 2 Pourquoi ne vient-il pas ? 
8 lis ne sont pas encore venus. 4 Vint-il hier ? 5 Non, il ne 



148 LESSON XXXII. 

viendra que domain. 6 Quoiqu'il vienne, elles Tie viendront 
pas. 7 Je suis venu vous trouver. 8 II vient de trouver les 
livres que vous aviez perdus. ° Viens ici. je veux te parler. 
10 Je viendrai a quatre heures. u II serait venu, si vous 
l'aviez appele. ia Nous venions d'arriver, et il nous fallait 
nous en aller encore. 13 Venez diner chez moi. ''Elles 
sont venues il y a trois heures. 

15 Will she come? they would not come ; be came ; you 
were coming ; they come ; come ! that I may come ; that 
you may not come. lfl Has he not come? they would have 
come ; will she not have come? though he had not come ; 
you had come ; will they have come? 17 1 have come to 
speak to you. iB Will you come to dine with us? ,9 1 
have just dined with my friend. 20 He had just dined, 
when we invited him. 21 They are going to come to- 
morrow. 22 She had just gone to Paris, but she is going 
to return to-morrow. 



LESSON XXXII. 

VARIOUS ADVERBS. 

1. Of adverbs and adverb-phrases there are in French, of 
course, a great many, which it belongs to the dictionary to give. 
Only a few of those most used will be presented here ; some of 
them have been already given, and used in the Exercises. 

2. Some of the commonest adverbs of place are : 
ici, Tiere la, there 

ou where? where jusque, as far as 

pres, aupres, near loin, far 

ailleurs, elsewhere partout, everywhere 

alentour, roundabout ensemble, together 

*dessus, above *dessous, beneath 

dedans, within, inside dehors, outside, without 

a. The conjunctive adverbs y and en were explained at XXIII. 
5-8 ; the relative adverbs dont and ou, at XXVI. 7. 






VAEIOUS ADVEKBS. 149 

b. Some of these adverbs (as well as others) make phrases with 
prepositions : thus, d'ici hence, par la that way, d'ou, whence f 
par ou by what road f jusqu'ou how far f etc. 

3. Some of the commonest adverbs of time are : 
maintenant, now alors, then 

quand, when t when longtemps, long 

souvent, often toujours, always 

quelquefois, sometimes autrefois, formerly 

tot, bientot, soon tard, late 

encore, yet, still, again deja, already 

aujourd'hui, to-day desormais, henceforth 

demain, to-morrow *hier, yesterday 

4. Some of the commonest adverbs of degree, com- 
parison, etc., are : 

ainsi, thus aussi, as 

comment, how f how si, so 

tres, bien, fort, very surtout, especially 

plutot, sooner, rather davantage, still more 

presque, almost meme, even 

a. The most often used adverbs of quantity — as beaucoup, 
plus, peu, moins, assez, trop, tant, autant, combien — were given, 
and their uses with nouns explained, at V. 4. 

5. Of the very numerous compound adverbs and ad- 
verb-phrases, a few of the commonest are : 

a present, at present, now sur le cbamp, directly, at once 

tout de suite, immediately tout a coup, suddenly 

tout a fait, entirely du tout, at all 

a peu pres, nearly, almost a peine, hardly, scarcely 

quelque part, somewhere nulle part, nowhere 

en haut, aloft, upstairs en bas, below, down-stairs 

la-bas, yonder en attendant, meanwhile 

peut-etre, may be, perhaps en effet, in fact, really 

de bonne beure, in good time, early a bon marche, cheaply, cheap 

6. a. The interrogative adverbs — ou, quand, combien, com- 
ment — are, like the interrogative pronouns, also used as relative, 
in which case their value is rather that of conjunctions. 

6. The negative adverbs, and rules for their use, have already 
been given : see XII. 

c. The responsives, oui yes and non no, are already familiar. 
Instead of oui, si is sometimes used (especially colloquially), in 



150 LESSON XXXII. 

reply to a negative question : thus, vous n'y avez pas e"te" ? si 

you have not been there f yes, I have. 

7. Adverbs have considerable freedom of position in 
the sentence. General rules are : 

a. An adverb is almost never allowed before the verb in 
French : thus, she always cries elle pleure toujours, I often take 
a walk je me promene souvent. 

b. With a verb in a compound tense, the adverbs of most fre- 
quent use ordinarily come between the auxiliary and the parti- 
ciple : thus, elle a toujours pleure she has always cried, je 
m'etais souvent promene 1 had often taken a walk. But such 
may for special reasons come after the participle, as do adverbial 
phrases; and the words for to-day, yesterday, to-morrow, etc., 
always follow the participle. 

VERB-LESSON. 

8. a. Of the very common irregular verb faire make, 
do, the synopsis of principal and derived forms is as fol- 
lows : 

faire faisant fait fais fis 

f e r a i faisais avoir fait fais fisse 

« • «• etc. etc. 

ferais fasse 

b. The inflection of the present indicative and the imperative 
(the pres. subjunctive being regular) is : 

Prks. Indic. Impv. 

fais faisons faisons 

fais faites fais faites 

fait font 

c. Note that in this verb (39c) fai before s of another syllable 
is pronounced as fe. 

d. Note the special irregularities of the plural : the 2d pers. 
ending in tes (found elsewhere only in etes and dites), and the 
3d in ont (elsewhere only in ont, sont, vont). 

9. Faire has many special uses and idioms ; among 
them may be noticed here : 

a. It is used impersonally in describing the conditions 
of the weather. 

Thus, il fait froid it is cold, il faisait chaud it was warm, il 
fera beau temps it will be fine weather ; even il fait du vent it 
is windy, il a fait des eclairs it has lightened; and so on. 



VARIOUS ADVERBS. 151 

b. Faire is much used in the sense of cause to etc. with 
a following infinitive, or as an auxiliary forming a kind 
of causative verb-phrase. 

Thus, je le fais savoir 1 cause to know it (i.e. make it 
known), il les a fait venir he has made them come, vous ferez 
faire un habit you will have a coat made (literally, will cause to 
make a coat). 

If the following infinitive has a direct object, the object of faire 
itself must be made indirect (see Second Part, § 1586) : thus, je 
le fais ecrire / make him write, but je lui fais ecrire une lettre 
I make him write a letter. 

c. Faire is sometimes (but much less often than do in English) 
used to avoid the repetition of a preceding verb : thus, je lui ai 
ecrit, comme je devais le faire I wrote him, as I ought to do. 

VOCABULARY. 
(No new words will be given, besides the adverbs listed above.) 

Exercise 32. 

1 D'oii venez-vous, et ou allez-vous ? 2 J'ai ete a peu 
pres partout. 3 Je viens d'arriver, et je vais aller sur le 
champ a Paris, ou j'acheterai des robes a bon marche. 
4 Alors vous viendrez diner aujourd'hui chez moi, et je vous 
menerai plus tard au theatre. 5 Nous sommes tout a fait 
fatigues a present ; nous pouvons a peine marcher. 6 Ne 
voulez-vous pas venir tout de suite dejeuner avec nous ? 
7 J'ai deja dejeune ; je viendrai demain. 8 J'ai perdu mes 
gants quelque part ; il me faut les chercher ; mais j'irai 
bientot, et j'arriverai de bonne heure. 9 Je les ai cherches 
partout, mais je ne les trouve nulle part. 10 Je les ai eus 
en haut. " Voici votre ami ; menez-le en bas, et allez 
vous promener. 12 Jusqu'oii nous f aut-il aller, et par ou ? 
13 Allez jusqu'a la ville, par le chemin de Paris. 14 La 
petite iille est dedans; je veux qu'elle vienne dehors. 15 I1 
est deja tard; elle viendra bientot. 16 La France etait 
autrefois un royaume ; maintenant c'est une republique. 
17 Elle ne l'a pas ete longtemps. 18 Ou est ton frere ? 
19 II n'est pas ici ; il est peut-etre la-bas. 20 D'oii vient la 



152 LESSON XXXII. 

lettre que vous avez dans la main? 21 Elle vient de mon 
oncle d'Amerique. 

Theme 32. 
1 Where is your brother ? 2 1 do not find him here ; he 
must be elsewhere. 3 Look for him everywhere ; you will 
certainly find him somewhere. 4 He has already arrived, 
but the others have not yet come. 5 He must go imme- 
diately to the city. 6 lie is going to-morrow to England ; 
he will stay there almost two years. 7 1 was there formerly, 
and I should like (vouloir) to be there still. B I have never 
gone so far ; I have always stayed at home ; but you, you 
have been everywhere. a I shall come henceforth often to 
your house. 10 When will the merchant arrive from Paris ? 
11 He has already arrived ; he is within. " He cannot have 
been here long. 13 1 looked for her, but she was far from 
here. li How far had she gone ? 15 She had gone as far as 
to Paris ; but she will return soon. 16 Do you like the 
country as much as the city? 17 1 have always liked the 
city better ; I do not like the country at all. ,8 I go there 
often, but I do not stay there long. 19 Whence do you 
come now, and where have you been to-day and yesterday ? 
20 Formerly I often went to my uncle's, but I no longer go 
there ; he lives too far. 21 1 have been sometimes at his 
house. 

VERB-LESSON. 

1 Que f aites-vous la ? 2 Je ne fais rien. 3 Qu'est-ce qu'ils 
vont faire? 4 lis viennent de faire de jolis cadeaux. 
5 Ferez-vous chercher vos gants ? 6 Je les ai fait chercher 
partout. 7 Que ferez-vous demain ? 8 Je f erais venir la 
servante, si elle etait a la maison. 9 Si vous ne l'avez deja 
fait, il f aut que vous le f assiez tout de suite. 10 II fait beau 
temps aujourd'hui, mais il fera tres chaud demain. " Quoi- 
qu'il fit froid hier, j'en etais content. 

12 They make ; will he not make ? let us make ; that you 



PREPOSITIONS. 153 

may make ; she would not make ; I shall do what you do ; 
do what you wish to do. 13 Thou hadst not done ; they 
would have done nothing ; I should have done it if he had 
done it. 14 Is it. cold? it will be warm ; it would be fine 
weather if it was not too cold. 15 1 have made him come ; 
he will make me come. 16 The cook has made bad bread 
to-day ; she must make better to-morrow. 17 1 have just 
made bread, and I am going to make butter. 



LESSON XXXIII. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

1. The prepositions most used in French were given 
in early lessons (III., VI.). Other simple prepositions 
are as follows : 

contre, against moyennant, by means of 

depuis, since outre, 



dies, from, since parmi, among 

durant, during pendant, during, pending 

hors, hormis, out of, except pres, near, next 

malgre, in spite of selon, accoi*ding to 

2. Some prepositions are also used along with a pre- 
ceding preposition or adverb, forming a prepositional 
phrase : thus, 

a travers, across, through par-dessus, over, beyond 

jusqu'a, as far as quant a, as for, as regards 

d'apres, according to d'entre, from among 

d'avec, from with, from de par, by autlwrity of 

3. Many prepositional phrases are made of adverbs 
or adverbial phrases followed by de of ; some of the 
commonest are ; 



154 LESSON XXXIII. 

autour de, around, about lors de, at the time of 

faute de, for lack of le long de, along 

hors de, out of pres de, near 

loin de, far from vis-a-vis de, opposite to 

au-devant de, in front of, to au-dela de, beyond 
meet 

4. A few prepositions are followed by the infinitive 
directly ; they are : 

de, of (to) pour, in order to, to 

a, to sans, witlwut 

apres, after par, by 

a. Of these, par is little used, and apres almost only with the 
perfect infinitive : thus, apres avoir dine after having dined. 

b. The English £oas sign of the infinitive is represented by both 
a and de. Often, the reason for using de, as meaning properly 
of, from, is to be seen : thus, il est temps de partir it is time 
to leave (literally, time of leaving), nous sommes defendus de 
parler we are forbiddi n to speak (literally, kept off from speak- 
ing), il a cesse d'etre he has ceased to be (literally, ceased from 
being), and so on. But in considerable part this is not the case, 
and the distinction has to be learned for each jDhrase. See the 
Second Part, § 171 etc. 

5. Prepositional phrases often followed by the infini- 
tive are : 

afin de, in order to, to loin de, far from 

au lieu de, instead of a moins de, short of, without 

a force de, by dint of de peur (crainte) de, for fear of 

avant de, before plutot que de, rather than 

a. It is the English infinitive in ing that in very many cases 
corresponds to the French infinitive after a preposition or prepo- 
sitional phrase : thus, sans attendre without waiting, avant de 
mourir before dying, de peur de tomber for fear of falling. 

6. Frequent special uses of a and de are : 

a. A is much used before the name of that by which anything 
is characterized (as possessing it, being for it, acting by it, and 
the like) : thus, un horame au cceur tendre a man of tender heart, 
le ver a soie the silk-worm, un bateau a vapeur a steamboat 
(see Part Second, § 36). 

b. De is much used before a numeral to express the measure of 
anything, or that by which one thing differs from another : thus, 






PREPOSITIONS. 155 

agee de seize ans aged 16 years, long de douze pieds twelve feet 
long, plus grand de la moitie larger by a half (see Part Second, 

§ 61c). 

VERB-LESSON. 

7. a. Of the very common irregular verb dire say, 

tell, the synopsis of principal and derived parts is this: 

dire disant dit dis dis 

dirai disais avoir dit dis disse 

, . , . etc. etc. 

dirais dise 

b. The inflection of the present indicative and imperative (the 
impf. subjunctive being quite regular) is: 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

dis disons disons 

dis dites dis dites 

dit disent 

c. Note the 2d plur. ending in tes (like etes, faites). 

d. Common phrases containing dire are : on dit (XXVII. 4) 
or il se dit (XXVIII. 4) it is said; c'est a dire that is to say, 
that is; a dire vrai to tell the truth ; pour ainsi dire so to speak; 
cela va sans dire that does not need to be stated or is a matter of 
course (literally, goes without saying). Vouloir dire (literally, 
wish to say) means signify, mean. 

VOCABULARY. 

(Besides the prepositions and preposition phrases given in the Lesson.) 

le chemin, road le chemin de fer, railroad, raihcay 

le bateau, boat le bateau a vapeur, steamboat 

la gare, station, depot le bateau a voiles, sailboat 

la poste, the post, post-office le voyage, the journey 

le matelot, the sailor la mer, the sea 

le matin, the morning le soir, the evening 

le fleuve, the rimr ordinairement, usually, ordinarily 

Exercise 33. 

1 Par ou allez-vous a la ville ? 2 J'y vais par le chemin 
de fer. 3 Est-ce que la gare est pres de votre maison ? 
4 Non, elle en est tres loin ; elle est hors du village. 5 Plu- 
tot que d'aller par le chemin de fer, je n'irais jamais an 
dehors du village. c Quant a moi, j'aime extremement a, 



156 LESSON XXXIII. 

voyager. 7 Au lieu de rester chez moi, je suis alle autour 
du monde. 8 Je ne peux jamais aller sur la mer, de peur 
d'etre malade. ° Avant de quitter la France, j'en avais 
toujours peur ; mais a force d'avoir voyage, je n'y 
pense plus. 1U Ce raatelot est-il alle a travers la mer ? 
11 Selon lui, il est alle dix fois jusqu'en Amerique. lfl Est-ce 
qu'il va en bateau a vapeur ou en bateau a voiles? 13 II 
voyage ordinairement en bateau a voiles. 14 Mon pere 
vient d'arriver, et je suis alle au-devant de lui. 15 Depuis 
quelle heure ost-il ici ? 16 II est arrive pendant la nuit. 
17 Vous ne me quitterez point, sans faire ce que vous devez 
faire. 18 J'y suis venu pour le faire. 19 Apres avoir dejeune, 
il nous menera sur son grand bateau a vapeur. 80 Je n'ai 
pas le temps d'aller avec vous. 21 Au lieu d'aller au bateau, 
il me faut aller a l'ecole. 

Theme 33. 

1 Where have you been since (the) morning ? 2 1 wont 
to the post in order to find the old sailor. 3 He came to 
meet me, and we dined together on the steamboat. 4 After 
having dined, we went around the boat. 5 It is 300 feet 
long, larger by (the) half than most of the sailboats. 6 Did 
you talk with the sailors ? 7 No, one ought not to speak 
to them ; but, in spite of that, I spoke to one sailor. 8 Be- 
fore arriving here, he had been around the world. 9 He 
had gone three times as far as America. I0 For lack of 
money, I have to remain here, without travelling. 1] In- 
stead of doing nothing, you must work, in order to have 
money. 12 By dint of working, one can have as much 
money as one wants. 13 It is time to go to the station. 
14 The station is opposite the house of my brother. 15 It is 
necessary to go along the river, in order to arrive there. 
16 As for the railroad, I do not like it at all. 17 1 have not 
the time to travel, but I am not content without going often 
to Paris. 18 Rather than travel by the railroad, I go usu- 



CONJUNCTIONS. 157 

ally by the steamer. 19 Far from loving to (a) travel, I 
hate it. 20 1 can never travel without being sick. 

VERB-LESSON. 

1 Que dites-vous ? 2 Je n'ai rien dit. 3 Qu'en dira-t-on ? 
4 On dira que nous ne faisons rien. 6 Dis-moi ce que tu as 
fait. 6 Je n'en dirai rien a personne. 7 Qu'est-ce qu'ils 
vous disaient ? 8 lis m'ont dit de m'en aller. 9 Qu'est-ce 
que cela veut dire ? 10 Cela veut dire qu'ils ne m'aiment 
pas. " Dites-lui de venir ici. 12 II viendra tout de suite : 
c'est a dire, a six heures et demie. 

13 Tell it to me ; I shall tell you nothing ; he told it to 
her ; will she not tell it to them ? we should tell it to you, 
if they had told it to us. 14 What were you saying? i5 1 
was going to say that I do not like her. 16 That is a matter 
of course. 17 What does that mean? 18 It means that she 
bores everybody. 19 It is said that the queen is in London : 
that is, she will arrive there soon. 20 Don't tell me that. 



LESSON XXXIY. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 



1. The conjunctions most used in French are : 

et, and ou, or 

mais, but car, for 

que, that lorsque, when, as 

puisque, since, because, as quoique, although, though 

si, if, wliether comme, as 

a. Of these conjunctions, quoique although requires 
the following verb to be always in the subjunctive : thus, 

although he is ill, quoiqu'il soit malade 

though we had nothing, quoique nous n'eussions rien 

b. The conjunction si if (which in English especially 



158 



>N 



:iv. 



requires the subjunctive) is in French almost always fol- 
lowed by the indicative (pres. or impf.): thus, 

if lie come, s'il vient if they were here, s'ils etaient ici 

But the subjunctive pluperfect is also allowed after si: thus, if 
he had been here is s'il eut ete ici (or s'il avait ete ici). 

Si may be followed by the future (or conditional) when used 
in the sense of whether : thus, qui sait s'il viendra ivho knows 
whether he will come f 

Note the abbreviation of si before il or ils (296). 

c. The conjunction que that (as well as the relative : XXVI. 
11), though often omitted in EnglisE, must always be expressed 
in French : thus, I believe you are right je crois que vous avez 
raison. 

2. The interrogative adverbs, in their relative sense (XXXII. 
6a), have the value of conjunctions : thus, quand je le vis, je ne 
savais pas d'ou il etait venu when I saw him, 1 did not know 
whence he had come. 

3. Correlative conjunctions, used in successive clauses, 



are: 
et . . 
ni . . . 
plus . . 

autant 



et, both . . . and 
ni, neither . . . nor 
. plus, the more . . . the more 
autant, as much . . . us 
4. Connectives of sentences, having the character 
rather of adverbs than of conjunctions, are : 



ou . . . ou, either . . . or 
soit . . . soit, whether . . 
moins . . . moins, the less . 
tantot . . . tantot, now . 



, the I 
now 



aussi, also, too, accordingly 

or, now 

puis, tJwn, next 

neanmoins, nevertheless 

cependant, meanwhile, however 

autrement, otherwise 



ainsi, thus, so 

done, then, consequently 

alors, then 

toutefois, yet, hoicever 

pourtant, yet, still 

dailleurs, besides, moreover 



5. Many phrases having a conjunctional value are 
made by adding the conjunction que that to a preposition 
or adverb or adverbial phrase. 

a. Some of those most commonly used are : 
apres que, after that, after depuis que, since (the lime that) 

aussitot que, as soon as des que, when, as soon as 

pendant que, while tandis que, while, whereas 

parce que, because ainsi que, as 

tant que, so long as autant que, as much as 



COtfJUtfCTlOtfS. 159 

b. Some such phrases require the following verb to he 

in the subjunctive ; examples are : 

afin que, in order that pour que, in order that 

avant que, before jusqu a ce que, until 

bien que, although pourvu que, provided that 

sans que, without that au cas que, in case that 

After sans que, the verb can hardly be rendered except by our 
infinitive in ing: thus, sans que personne s'en apercoive without 
any one ] s perceiving it. 

c. One or two require the following subjunctive to be preceded 
by the negative ne : they are a moins que unless, de crainte (or 
peur) que for fear that, lest : thus, a moins qu'il ne vienne un- 
less he come. 

VERB-LESSON. 

. 6. a. Of the irregular verb savoir know (Lat. sapere) 
the synopsis of principal and derived parts is : 

savoir sachant su sais sus 

saurai savais avoir su sache susse 

s a u r a i s sache ete ' ete ' 

b. The inflection of the_present indicative and imperative (the 
pres. subj. being quite regular) is as follows: 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

sais savons sachons 

sais savez sache sachez 

sait savent 

c. The irapf. indic. comes from another form of the pres. pple, savant, now 
used only as an adjective, meaning learned. 

7. a. With an object and a predicate relating to it, savoir 
means know to be : thus, je le sais modeste I know him to be 
modest; with a following infinitive, it means know how : thus, il 
sait se taire he knows how to hold his tongue. 

b. The pres. subj. je sache etc. is in certain phrases used like 
an indicative : thus, je ne sache personne qui / know no one who 
etc. ; que je sache so far as I know. The conditional saurais 
is used (negatively) in the sense of can, be able: thus, ils ne 
sauraient servir they are unable to be of use. 

c. The phrase je ne sais quoi (or qui, quel, etc.) is much used 
in the sense of something, I can't tell what etc. 

d. Savoir is very often conjugated negatively with ne alone 
(pas being omitted). 



160 LESSON XXXIV. 

VOCABULARY. 
(Besides the conjunctions given in the lists above.) 
la fabrique, the factory le fabricant, the manufacturer 

le magasin, the sliop, store se marier, marry, be married 

l'ouvrier m., the workman l'ouvriere f., the workwoman 

Exercise 34. 

1 II va geler ; allez-vous done a Paris ? 2 Bien qu'il gele, 
ii faut que j'y aille. 3 D'ailleurs je ne veux pas rester chez 
moi toute la journee. 4 Que ferez-vous pendant que vous 
y serez ? 5 Je vais chercher un cadeau pour mon amie, 
parce qu'elle vient de se marier. 6 Des que je suis arrive, 
j'ai cherche partout des cuillers d'argent ; mais je n'en ai 
trouve de jolios, ni au magasin ni a la fabrique. 7 Pour- 
tant on m'a dit que ce marcliand en a de tres belles. 8 II 
me les a montrees ; mais plus je les regardais, plus je les 
trouvais laides. 9 Alors que me faut-il faire, afin que j'aie 
quelque chose pour elle? 10 II faut attendre jusqu'a ce 
qu'on en fasse de plus jolies. " Est-ce qu'on aura le temps 
de les faire avant qu'elle se marie ? ia Depuis que je vous 
ai parle, je suis alle a la fabrique. 13 Pourvu qu'il y ait 
assez de temps, le fabricant va me les faire. 14 II ne 
pourrait les faire, sans qu'il etit de bons ouvriers. 15 II 
en aura, des qu'il voudra en avoir. JC S'il eut eu de bons 
ouvriers, il aurait deja de jolies choses. 

Theme 34. 
1 Have you been at the shop since you left me ? 2 1 have 
been both at the shop and at the factory. 3 Then you have 
bought something. 4 1 wanted to buy either forks or 
spoons ; but I have bought neither forks nor spoons. 5 If 
you had found some, should you not have bought them ? 
6 Although I have found some, nevertheless they were not 
pretty. 7 Moreover, the manufacturer wishes that I wait 
(subj.) until he shall make some new ones. 8 Provided 
that he makes them at once, we can wait ; otherwise we 



CONJUXCTIOKS. 161 

shall go elsewhere. 9 1 wish to give them to my friend, 
before she is married. 10 The workmen go to the factory 
early, in order that they may work longer. " Although 
she is ill, this poor workwoman works the whole day. 
12 Unless she works ten hours, the merchant will not give 
her money. 13 So long as she shall work, she will be ill. 
14 However, she must work, in order that he may give her 
bread for her children. 15 She cannot work much, because 
she is ill. 16 She had to work, lest he should give her noth- 
ing. 1T As soon as she shall be better, she will work more. 
18 The more she works (fut.), the more he will give her 
money. 19 You must stay at home, since you are not well. 
20 While you are working, I shall go to the school. 

VEKB-LESSON. 

Sais-tu quelle heure il est ? 2 Je ne sais pas. 3 lis n'en 
savent rien. 4 Je ne saurais vous le dire. 5 II sait tra- 
vailler. 6 II n'y a personne ici, que je sache. 7 Charles 
vous savait malade, et il n'est pas venu. 8 Savez-vous s'il 
viendra demain ? 9 Personne ne saurait dire ou il sera de- 
main. 10 Je saurai le trouver. 

11 Does he know ? you know ; she knew ; they were know- 
ing ; we shall know ; that he might know. 12 Has he known 
it ? we know what you know ; I knew, but I do not know 
now ; she knew and she had always known ; you would 
not have known it, if I had not told it to you. 13 Did you 
know that he was ill ? 14 1 had known it, but I had forgotten 
it. 15 You know how to work. 10 1 could not tell how he 
loves her. 17 1 do not know whether he is going to Paris. 
11 



162 LESSON XXXV. 

LESSON XXXY. 

IEREGULAK VERBS ENDING IN ire. 

1. a. The general account of the irregular verbs was 
given above, at XXIV. 5, and some of the commonest 
among them have been explained in full. 

Those so explained are as follows : avoir have, X., §tre be, XL, 
vouloir wish at XXIV. 6 etc., pouvoir be able at XXV. 8 etc., 
devoir owe at XXVI. 12 etc., aller go at XXVII. 8 etc., falloir 
must at XXX. 6 etc. , venir come at XXXI. 10 etc. , faire do at 
XXXII. 8 etc., dire say at XXXIII. 7 etc., and savoir know at 
XXXIV. 6 etc. 

1). It remains now to give the rest of the irregular 

verbs, and to explain their inflection. 

2. The verbs conduire conduct etc., instruire instruct 
etc., and cuire cook, are conjugated alike, having past 
participles ending in it, and preterits in isis. Their de- 
rived parts are all made regularly. Thus : 

a. 1. conduire conduisant conduit conduis conduisis 

conduirai conduisais avoir conduit conduis conduisisse 
conduirais conduise etc ' etc ' 

b. The present indicative and imperative (the pres. subj. being 
entirely regular) arc inflected thus : 

Pres. Indic. Imi-v. 

conduis conduisons conduisons 

conduis conduisez conduis conduisez 

conduit conduisent 

c. Like conduire are conjugated the other compounds of -duire 
(Lat. ducere) : namely, 

deduire, deduce introduire, introduce seduire, seduce 

econduire, remove produire, produce traduire, translate 

enduire, do over reconduire, reconduct 

induire, indues reduire, reduce 

The simple verb, duire suit, is used only in the 3d sing, present. 
Of the other two verbs, it will be enough to give the principal 
parts only. 

d. 2. instruire instruisant instruit instruis instruisis 



IEREGULAR VERBS EXDIXG 1^ ire. 163 

e. Like instruire are conjugated the other compounds of -struire 
(lar. struere): namely. 

construire, construct detruire, destroy reconstruire, reconstruct 

f. 3. cuire cuisant cuit cuis cuisis 

g. Like cuire (Lat. coquere) is conjugated its compound : 

recuire, cook again 

3. The verbs liuire injure and luire shine are conju- 
gated in the same way, except that their past participle 
ends in i instead of it. Thus : 

a. r/. nuire nuisant nui nuis nuisis 
5. luire luisant lui luis 

b. The pret. indie, and impf. subj. of luire are not in use. Like 
it is conjugated its compound : 

rehiire, shine, glisten 
c. These verbs are Lat. nocere and lucere respectively. 

4. The verbs suffire suffice, confire preserve, and cir- 
concire circumcise, are conjugated alike, except the past 
participles, which end respectively in i, it, and is. Their 
preterit ends in is simply, like the present (not in isis, 
like the preceding verbs). Thus: 

a. 6\ suffire suffisant suffi suffis suffis 
/. confire confisant confit confis confis 
8. circoncire circoncisant circoncis circoncis circoncis 

b. These verbs are respectively Lat. sufflcere, conficere, and circumcid- 
ere. 

c. Like confire is conjugated its compound : 

deconfire, discomfit 

5. The very common verb dire say, tell differs from 
confire only by having in the 2d plural pres. indie, and 
impv. dites (instead of disez). Its principal parts are : 

0. dire disant dit dis dis 

The complete inflection of this verb was given above, at XXXIII. 
7 etc. 

a. Of the compounds of dire (Lat. dicere), only 
redire, say again 
is conjugated precisely like it. Most of the others — namely. 

contredire, contradict interdire, interdict predire, predict 

dedire, disown medire, slander 

—are like confire, having -disez (instead of -dites) in the 2d 



164 LESSON XXXV. 

plural. But maudire curse (Lat. maledicere) is much more ir- 
regular, having double ss in the present participle and in all the 
forms that follow its analogy. Thus : 

10. maudire maudissant maudit maudis maudis 
maudirai maudissais avoir maudit maudis maudisse 
maudirais maudisse 

The inflection of the pres. indie, and imp v. is : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

maudis maudissons maudissons 

maudis maudissez maudis maudissez 

maudit maudissent 

6. Lire read forms its past participle in u and its pret- 
erit in us. The other parts and their inflection are like 
those of conduire, above (2). Tims : 

11. lire lisant lu lis lus 
lirai lisais avoir lu lis lusse 
lirais Use etc ' ete ' 

a. Like lire (Lat. legere) are conjugated its compounds 
elire, elect relire, read again reelire, re- elect 

7. The verb ecrire write is in the main like conduire ; 
but it has everywhere v instead of s after i in the full 
forms of the root. Thus : 

a. 



. ecrire 


ecrivant 


ecrit 


ecris 


ecrivis 


ecrirai 


ecrivais 


avoir ecrit 


ecris 


ecrivisse 


ecrirais 


ecrive 


etc. etc. 







6. The inflection of the pres. indic. and impv. is as follows : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

ecris ecrivons ecrivons 

ecris ecrivez ecris ecrivez 

ecrit ecrivent 

c. Like ecrire (Lat. scribere) are conjugated the compounds : 
circonscrire, circumscribe prescrire, prescribe souscrire, subscribe 
decrire, describe proscrire, proscribe transcrire, transcribe 

inscrire, inscribe recrire, rewrite 

8. The verb rire laugh is still more unlike the above 
verbs. Thus : 
a. 13. rire riant ri ris ris 

avoir ri ris risse 

etc. etc. 



13. rire 


riant 


rirai 


riais 


rirais 


rie 



IEEEGULAR VERBS ENDING IN ire. 165 

b. The inflection of the present tenses is : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. Pres. Sutj. 

ris rions rions rie riions 

ris riez ris riez ries riiez 

rit rient rie rient 

c. Like lire (Lat. ridere) is inflected its compound : 

sourire, smile 

9. The verb frire fry is like rire, except that its past 
participle ends in it, and that it lacks the present parti- 
ciple and all forms following its analogy — namely, the 
itnpf. indic, the pres. subj., and the plural of the pres. 
indicative. Thus : 

14. frire — frit fris fris 

VOCABULARY. 
(Besides the verbs in the Lesson.) 
le poete, the poet la poesie, poetry 

la tragedie, the tragedy la comedie, the comedy 

l'ouvrage m., tlie work la maniere, the manner 

le journal, the journal, newspaper le redacteur, the editor 
francais, French anglais, English 

Exercise 35. 
1 Avez-vous lu les ouvrages de ce poete, madame ? 2 Je 
lis toujours de la poesie, mais je ne sais ce que cet homme 
a ecrit. 3 Je lus l'annee derniere une de ses comedies, qui 
me fit beaucoup rire, 4 Nous lisons les tragedies, et nous 
ne rions jamais. 6 Vous ecrivez beaucoup pour les jour- 
naux, n'est-ce pas ? 6 Ce sont les redacteurs qui ecrivent 
pour les journaux ; moi, je n'ecris que de la poesie. 7 Qu'e- 
criviez-vous hier ? 8 Nous traduisions les comedies de Mo- 
liere. ' Les avez-vous lues ? 10 Si vous les avez traduites. 
je les lirai certainement. ll Vous en rirez ; elles sont tres 
amusantes. 12 Nous en avons beaucoup ri, quand nous les 
lisions. 13 Pourquoi le poete maudissait-il le redacteur? 
14 Parce que celui-ci lui a nui. 15 II a decrit sa derniere 
tragedie d'une maniere amusante, et tout le monde en rit. 
16 J'ai lu ce qu'il en a ecrit, et je n'ai pas meme souri en le 



166 LESSON XXXVI. 

lisant. 17 Que faites-vous avec ces jeunes filles ? ,8 Nous 
les conduisons au theatre, afin qu'elles s'y amusent. 19 Les 
bonnes comedies instruisent beaucoup les jeunes gens. 20 Si 
vous voulez ecrire de la poesie, il faut que vous lisiez les 
poetes francais. 

Theme 35. 

1 He will conduct ; I have conducted ; we were conduct- 
ing ; conduct him ! they would conduct her, if she wished 
to go there. a Read your letter ; I have read it ; we shall 
read it to you ; let us not read it to her. 3 They were 
writing ; she would write ; we had written ; you will never 
have written ; I shall write to nobody ; nobody has written 
to me. 4 Has he read the letter that she has written him? 
write him a letter, in order that he may read it. 5 He has 
laughed ; she will laugh ; they were laughing while I was 
reading ; do not laugh at (de) the books which you read. 
6 1 read much poetry ; but I have not read the works of all 
the poets. 7 Do you write nothing? 8 Yes, I have always 
written a great deal for the newspapers. 9 I translate many 
comedies, but I do not write any. 1(l I was reading a tragedy, 
and I did not laugh at it. J1 Why do you not read the 
newspapers? 12 Because they do not instruct me. 13 My 
daughters write poetry, and my son has written a tragedy. 
14 They have always read the best works of the French 
poets, and they have translated English poetry. 



LESSON XXXVI. 

irregular verbs in aindre etc., and aitre etc. 

1. Among the other irregular verbs ending in re, there 
are two important groups which may be taken up first. 

2, A considerable number of mucb-used verbs have 



irregular yerbs in aindre etc., and aitre etc. 16? 



tbeir infinitive in ndre preceded by one of the three di- 
graphs ai, ei, oi — verbs in aindre, eindre, and oindre. 
They are conjugated precisely alike, and their derived 
parts are made with entire regularity from the principal 
parts — which, however, are quite irregular in their rela- 
tions to one another. 

3. As examples may be taken craindre fear, peindre 
paint, j oindre join. Thus : 



a. 15. craindre 
craindrai 
craindrais 



craint 



avoir craint 

etc. etc. 



crains 
crains 



craigms • 
craignisse 



craignant 
craignais 
craigne 

b. The inflection of the pres. indie, and impv. (the pres.> subj. 
being quite regular) is as follows : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

crains craignons craignons 

crains craignez crains craignez 

craint craignent 

c. Of the other two verbs, it will be enough to give the princi- 
pal parts. Thus : 

10. peindre peignant peint 

1 7. joindre joignant joint 

d. Like these verbs are conjugated : 



peint 
joins 



peignis 
joignis 



geindre, groan 
ratteindre, re-attain 
repeindre, paint again 
restreindre, restrain 
reteindre, dye over 
teindre, 



plaindre, pity 

astreindre, constrain 
atteindre, attain 
ceindre, gird 
depeindre, depict 
deteindre, fade 
empreindre, imprint 

conj oindre, conjoin 

dej oindre, disjoin 

disj oindre, disjoin 

e. These verbs end in Latin mostly in -ngere : thus, plaindre, Lat plangere ; 
peindre, Lat. pingere; joindre, Lat. jungere; eteindre, Lat. extin- 
truere ; and so on. Hence the gn in many of their forms. But -preindre and 
geindre are Lat. -premere, gemere. 

4. A number of verbs in aitre and oitre, some of them 
very common ones, are conjugated nearly alike. They, 



contraindre, constrain 

enceindre, gird 
enfreindre, infringe 
epreindre, squeeze out 
eteindre, extinguish 
etreindre, draw tight 
feindre, feign 

enj oindre, enjoin 
oindre, anoint 



poindre, puncture 
rej oindre, rejoin 



168 LESSON XXXVI. 

too, make their derived parts quite regularly from an 
irregular set of principal parts. 

5. As models may be taken paraitre appear and croitre 
grow. Thus : 

a. 18. paraitre paraissant paru parais parus 

paraitrai paraissais avoir paru parais parusse 

paraitrais paraisse 

o. The inflection of pres. indie, and imp v. is : 

Pres. In dic. Impv. 

parais paraissons paraissons 

parais paraissez parais paraissez 

parait paraissent 

Note that the circumflex of the infinitive appears here in the 
3d sing. , but not elsewhere. 

c. Like paraitre are conjugated its compounds : 
apparaitre, appear comparaitre, appear disparaitre, disappear 

also connaitre know, be acquainted with, and its compounds : 

meconnaitre, fail to recognize reconnaitre, recognize 
also paitre graze and its compound : 

repaitre, feed 
But of paitre the pret. indie, and impf. subj. are not in use. 

d. Old infinitive forms are apparoir and comparoir, for ap- 
paraitre and comparaitre ; from apparoir is made also the im- 
personal 3d sing, il appert it appears. 

6. Of croitre grow the principal and derived parts are : 

10. croitre croissant era crois eras 

croitrai croissais avoir cru crois crosse 

croitrais croisse 

a. The inflection of the pres. indie, and impv. is : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

crois croissons croissons 

crois croissez crois croissez 

croit croissent 

Note that the circumflex of the infinitive appears here through 
the whole singular. The circumflex in past pple and pret. is 
chiefly for the purpose of distinguishing the forms from those of 
croire believe (below, XXXVII. 5). 



ikkegulae verbs in aindre etc., and aitre etc. 169 

b. Like croitre are conjugated its compounds : 
accroitre, increase decroitre, decrease recroitre, grow again 

surcroitre, overgrow 
These, however, have no circumflex in the past pple : thus, accru 
etc. ; and some authorities omit it in the impf . subj. throughout : 
thus, crusse, accrusse, etc. 

7. The verb naitre be bom is in part inflected like 
paraitre etc., but is very peculiar in its past participle and 
in its preterit. It takes the auxiliary etre (XXVIII. 6a). 
Thus: 

20. naitre naissant ne nais naquis 

naitrai naissais etre ne nais naquisse 

*. . . etc. etc. 

naitrais naisse 

a. The inflection of the pres. indie, and the impv. is precisely 
as in paraitre : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

nais naissons naissons 

nais naissez nais naissez 

nait naissent 

b. Like naitre is conjugated its compound : 

renaitre, be born again 

c. In the sense of was born is used the perfect, suis ne etc. , if 

the person spoken of is living. 

8. These verbs come, with some anomalous changes, from Latin verbs in 
-scere : thus, paraitre is Lat. parescere ; comialtre, Lat. cognoscere ; 
croitre, Lat. crescere ; naitre, Lat. nasci. 

VOCABULARY. 
(Besides the verbs given in the Lesson.) 
le general, the general le soldat, the soldier 

larmee f., the army la guerre, the war 

le bonheur, happiness, good for- le malheur, ujihappiness, mis- 

tune fortune 

Exercise 36. 
1 Ne plaignez-vous pas cette pauvre f emme ? 2 Je la 
plains beaucoup, car elle est tres malheureuse. 3 Elle a eu 
un bon mari ; mais il joignit l'armee l'annee derniere, et il 
a tout a fait disparu. 4 Elle n'a pas de pain pour son pauvre 
enfant, qui est ne il y a quelques mois. & Connaissez-vous 
le vieux general ? 6 Nous l'avons connu autrefois, mais je 



170 LESSON XXXYI. 

ne pense pas qu'il nous reconnaitra a present. 7 Nous avons 
beaucoup crii, depuis qu'il nous a connus. 8 Les enfants 
croissent tresvite, etapres peu de temps on neles reconnait 
plus. 9 II parait que nous allons avoir une guerre avec 
l'Allemagne. 10 Tous les malheurs de la patrie naissent de 
la guerre. " Aussitot que la guerre commencera, le bonheur 
des citoyens aura disparu. 12 Qui est-ce que vous plaigniez V 
13 Nous plaignions les pauvres soldats, qui doivent aller a 
la guerre. " Qui est-ce que cet liomme veut peindre ? 
11 II a peint beaucoup de generaux de France; maintenant 
il va peindre ce soldat-ci. 1G Napoleon naquit en Corse 
le 15 aout, 1709. 17 La plupart de nos grands hommes 
sont nes en France. 18 Donnons-nous la main, et soyons 
bons amis. 10 Mon pere naquit en 1796, et moi, je suis ne 
en 1853. 20 Nous ne craignons pas le malheur ; pourquoi 
le craindrions-nous ? 

Theme 36. 

1 They fear ; we shall fear ; that he may not fear ; fear 
nothing ; did he never fear? he would have feared it. 2 1 
had recognized her ; do you not recognize me ? we should 
recognize him ; he will recognize them ; she recognized 
him as he was entering. 3 Will he not appear? if he ap- 
pears, we shall disappear ; although he had not yet appeared, 
we went away ; do they not appear ? he appeared yester- 
day ; we appear to-day ; they will appear to-mor*ow. 
4 You paint ; was he not painting ? I will paint it, if you 
wish ; give me what you have painted. 6 What was the 
man painting ? 6 He has painted the beautiful flowers 
which grow in our garden. 7 Does he never paint men ? 
8 Those painters always paint animals. 9 Do you not recog- 
nize this picture ? 10 Yes, I recognize it well ; it is the 
portrait of the young general. " Did you know him? 
12 1 knew him very well, and we have always known his 
family. 13 Where is he now ? )4 He disappeared last year. 
15 It appears that his family has had many misfortunes. 



FURTHER IRREGULAR VERBS IK re. 171 

16 Yes, we pity them very much. 17 When was your son 
born? 18 He was born in 1878. 19 He has grown a good 
deal since I went away. 20 Yes, he grows very fast ; all 
the children are growing ; he will still grow a little. 



LESSON XXXVII. 

FURTHER IRREGULAR VERBS IN re. 

1. The verb traire draw, milk lacks the preterit and 
the imperfect subjunctive. 

a. Its principal and derived parts are as follows : 

21, traire tray ant trait trais 

trairai trayais avoir trait trais 

trairais traie etc ' etc ' 

b. The inflection of pres. indie, and impv. is : 

Pres. Indio. Impv. 

trais trayons trayons 

trais trayez trais trayez 

trait traient 

c. Like traire (Lat. trahere) are conjugated its compounds : 
abstraire, abstract distraire, distract rentraire, darn 
attraire, attract extraire, extract retraire, milk again 

soustraire, subtract 

2. The verb braire bray is conjugated like traire, but is hardly 
used except in the infinitive and the 3d sing, and pi. of pres. in- 
die. , f ut. , and conditional. 

22, braire brait braira brairait 

braient brairont brairaient 

a. This verb is from late Latin bragire, from Celtic. 

3. The very common verb faire make, do, which is 
also very irregular, has been given in full above: see 
XXXII. 8. 

a. 23. Like faire (Lat. facere) are conjugated its compounds : 
contrefaire, counterfeit malfaire, do ill refaire, remake 

defaire, undo mefaire, do harm satisfaire, satisfy 

forfaire, offend parfaire, complete surfaire, overdo 



112 LESSOR XXXVII. 

4. The verbs plaire please and taire keep silent are 
conjugated alike, except that plaire lias an irregular cir- 
cumllex in the 3d sing. pres. indicative. Thus: 

a. 24. plaire plaisant plu plais plus 

plairai plaisais avoir plu plais plusse 
plairais plaise etc- etc " 

b. The inflection of the pres. indie, and impv. is : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

plais plaisons plaisons 

plais plaisez plais plaisez 
plait plaisent 

c. Like plaire (Lat. placere) are conjugated its compounds : 

complaire, be complaisant deplaire, displease 

d. Plaire is much used impersonally, especially in the phrase 
s'il vous plait if you please. 

e. Of taire, it is enough to give the principal parts : 

25. taire taisant tu tais tus 

The 3d sing. pres. indic. is il tait. 

/. Taire (Lat. tacere) is much used rcflcxively, in the sense be 
silent, hold one's peace : thus, tais-toi or taisez-vous be silent ! 

5. There are two verbs in oire— namely, croire think, 
believe, and boire, drink — of which the former is regu- 
lar in the formation of its derived parts and in its 
tense-inflection, while the latter is irregular in both. 
Thus : 

a. 20. croire croyant cru crois crus 

croirai croyais avoir cru crois crusse 

croirais croie etc - etc ' 

Inflection of the three present tenses : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. Pres. Subj. 

crois croyons croyons croie croyions 

crois croyez crois croyez croies croyiez 

croit croient croie croient 

b. A compound of croire (Lat. credere), accroire (in faire 
accroire deceive into believing), is used only in the infinitive ; 
another, decroire disbelieve, only in the 1st sing, present. 

c. Croire in French is followed by an infinitive without 
infinitive-sign, where in English we use instead a dependent 
clause, or insert a reflexive pronoun : thus, je crois l'avoir dit / 
think (myself) to have said it, or I think that I have said it. 



FURTHER IRREGULAR VERBS IK re. 173 

d. 27* boire buvant bu bois bus 

boirai buvais avoir bu bois busse 

, . , etc. etc. 

boirais b o 1 v e 

Inflection of the three present tenses : 

Prks. Indic. Impv. Pres. Subj. 

bois buvons buvons boive buvions 

bois buvez bois buvez boives buviez 

boit boivent boive boivent 

e. Like boire (Lat. bibere) are conjugated its compounds : 
emboire, imbibe imboire, imbibe, imbue reboire, drink again 

6. There is one verb in ore, namely clore close, with 
its compound 6clore open, hatch (taking etre as auxiliary : 
XXVIII. 6a). Their conjugation is as follows (only a 
few of the forms being in actual use) : 

a. 28. clore [closant] clos clos 

clorai avoir clos 

clorais close (etre eclos) 

b. The 3d sing. pres. indic. is clot (and eclot) ; of the plural 
only the 3d pers. eclosent is in use. The fut. and cond. of eclore 
are more usually written with the circumflex : ecldra etc. (only 
the 3d persons are in use). 

c. Of clore (Lat. claudere) there are other compounds : 
declore, unclose enclore, enclose forclore, foreclose 

but they are rarely used, and only in a few forms. 

7. There is also a single verb ending in ure, namely 
-dure in conclure conclude etc. The conjugation is as 
follows : 

a. 29. conclure concluant conclu conclus conclus 

conclurai concluais avoir conclu conclus conclusse 
conclurais conclue etc ' etc ' 

b. Inflection of the present tenses : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. Pres. Subj. 

conclus concluons concluons conclue concluions 

conclus concluez conclus concluez conclues concluiez 
conclut concluent conclue concluent 

c. Like conclure are conjugated also the other compounds of 
-dure (Lat. -cludere) : namely, 



174 LESSON XXXVII. 

exclure, exclude reclure, shut up 

but of reclure only a few forms are in use. 

VOCABULARY. 
(Besides the verbs given in the Lesson.) 
la ferme, the farm la fermiere, the farmer's wife 

le lis, tlte lily la violette, the molet 

le matin, the morning le soir, the evening 

Exercise 37. 

1 Que buvez-vous ? 2 Je bois du lait frais ; voulez-vous 
en boire ? 3 Ou l'avez-vous trouve ? 4 La fermiere trayait 
ses vaches, et elle m'en a donne. h Croyez-vous que je 
puisse en avoir aussi? 6 Elle les a deja traites, mais elle les 
traira encore ce soir. 7 Alors j'en boirai ce soir. 8 Voila 
de jolies fleurs ; elles sont ecloses ce matin. 9 Les roses 
ecloront demain, je crois. 10 J'en veux quelques unes. " Je 
crois vous avoir dit que j'aime extreraement toutes les fleurs. 
12 Est-ce que ces petites filles ne vous plaisent pas? 13 Elles 
m'ont beaucoup deplu, parce qu'elles ne se taisent jamais. 
14 II faut qu'un enfant se taise lorsque les autres veulent 
parler. 15 Avant de m'en aller, il faut que je boive un peu 
de vin. 16 Vous en avez deja bu, et nous ne croyons point 
qu'il vous en faille encore. 17 Mais le lait ne me plait pas. 
18 Taisez-vous, et buvez ce qu'on vous donne. 19 Je me tai- 
rai, mais je ne boirai pas ce qui me deplait. 20 Ne croient- 
ils pas ce que je leur ai dit ? 21 lis n'en ont rien cru. 

Theme 37. 

1 He believes ; does she not believe ? they will believe ; 
believe what I say ; I have believed what she has said to 
me. 2 Will he drink ? do you drink ? they would have 
drunk ; drink, and go away ; let us drink water ; he would 
drink wine, if he had some. 3 Does she please you ? that 
would never please me ; they have pleased me. * She spoke 



THE REMAINING VERBS IN re. 175 

and I was silent ; be silent while your mother speaks ; if 
you do not keep silence, I shall say nothing. 5 1 want to 
go to the farm this morning, if you please. 6 1 will con- 
duct you there; but you must be silent while I speak to 
the farmer's wife. 7 Do you believe that she will milk the 
cows while we are there ? 8 If she milks them, she will 
give you some milk. 9 1 drank some fresh milk formerly, 
and I shall drink some to-day. 10 We drink milk often, but 
we have never drunk wine. " Do you think that the lilies 
have opened? 12 They have not yet opened, but they will 
open this evening. 13 These violets please me much ; give 
me some, if you please. 14 Be silent, my child ; you have 
displeased me. 15 We thought that we had pleased you. 

16 Since you are silent, we conclude that we displease you. 

17 Although we drink much milk, we are always thirsty. 



LESSON XXXVIII. 

THE REMAINING VERBS IN re. 

i. The remaining verbs ending in the infinitive in re 
have a consonant next before the r. They are quite dis- 
cordant, and in part very irregular, in their conjugation, 
and must be taken up one by one. 

a. We will begin with two that are extremely common in use. 

2. The verb prendre take is thus conjugated : 

30. prendre prenant 

prendrai prenais 

prendrais prenne 

Inflection of the present tenses : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

prends prenons 
prends prenez prends 

prend prennent 
a. For the doubling of the n in prenne etc. 



pris 


prends 


pris 


avoir pris 

etc. etc. 


prends 


prisse 




Pres. 


SURJ. 


prenons 


prenne 


prenions 


prenez 


prennes 


preniez 




prenne 


prennent 


►renne etc. 


, see 2L 





176 LESSON XXXVIII. 

b. Like prendre (Lat. prehendere) are conjugated its numerous 
compounds (some of them very much used) : 

apprendre, learn rapprendre, releam meprendre, mistake 

desapprendre, unlearn comprendre, understand reprendre, resume 
eprendre, seize entreprendre, undertake surprendre, surprise 

3. The verb mettre put is thus conjugated : 

31. mettre mettant mis mets mis 

mettrai mettais avoir mis mets misse 

mettrais mette ete ' etc - 

Inflection of the pres. indie, and impv. : 

TltES. INDIC. IMPV. 

mets mettons mettons 

mets mettez mets mettez 

met mettent 

a. Like mettre (Lat. mittere) are conjugated its numerous and 
much-used compounds : 

admettre, admit omettre, omit remettre, remit 

commettre, commit permettre, perm it soumettre, submit 

demettre, put out promettre, promise transmettre, transmit 

emettre, emit compromettre, compromise 

b. For the phrnse se mettre a begin (literally, set one's self at), 
see above, XXIX. 76. 

4. The verb vivre live is very irregular in its preterit 
and past participle : thus, 



32. vivre vivant 


vecu 




vis vecus 


vivrai vivais 
vivrais vive 


avoir vecu 

etc. etc. 




vis vecusse 


Inflection of the pres. indie. 


and impv. : 






Pres. Indic. 




Impv. 




vis vivons 






vivons 


vis vivez 


vis 




vivez 



a. Like vivre (Lat. vivere) are conjugated its compounds : 

revivre, revive survivre, survive 

b. The pres. subj. is used in good wishes for English long live: 
thus, vive le roi long live the king. In the expression qui vive 
who goes there f (literally, who is alive or stirring) it is treated 
as an indicative. 



THE REMAINING VERBS IK re. 



m 



5. The verb suivre follow is quite nearly regular, 
is conjugated as follows : 



It 



33. 



suivre 
suivrai 
suivrais 



suivi 



avoir suivi 

etc. etc. 



SUIS 

suis 



SU1V1S 

suivisse 



IMPV. 



suivons 
suivez 



cousu 


couds 


COUS1S 


avoir cousu 


couds 


cousisse 


etc. etc. 







IMPV. 



cousons 



suivant 
suivais 
suive 
Inflection of the pres. indie, and impv. : 

Pres. Indic. 

suis suivons 

suis suivez suis 

suit suivent 

a. Notice the identity of je suis I follow with je suis / am. 

b. Like suivre (Lat. sequi) are conjugated its compounds : 

ensuivre, ensue poursuivre, pursue 

6. The verb coudre sew is thus conjugated : 

34. coudre cousant 
coudrai cousais 
coudrais couse 

Inflection of the pres. indic. and impv. : 

Pres. Indic. 

couds cousons 

couds cousez couds 

coud cousent 

a. Notice the unusual difference in the final vowel-sound of the 
pple cousu and pret. cousis. Such difference is found only in 
coudre, v§tir (XXXIX. 11), and voir (XLI. 4>. 

b. Like coudre (Lat. consuere) are conjugated its compounds : 

decoudre, unsew, rip recoudre, sew over again 

7. The verb moudre grind is thus conjugated : 

35. moudre moulant moulu mouds moulus 
moudrai moulais avoir moulu mouds moulusse 
moudrais moule etc ' etc ' 

Inflection of the pres. indic. and impv. : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

mouds moulons moulons 

mouds moulez mouds moulez 
moud moulent 
a. Like moudre (Lat. molere) are conjugated its compounds : 

emoudre, whet remoudre, grind over 

8. The very irregular verb r6soudre resolve is thus 
conjugated : 

12 



178 LESSON XXXVIII. 

3ft. resoudre resolvant resolu resouds resolus 

resoudrai resolvais avoir resolu resouds resolusse 

resoudrais resolve ete ' etc ' 

Inflection of the pres. indie, and impv. : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

resouds resolvons resolvons 

resouds resolvez resouds resolvez 

resoud resolvent 

a. Nearly like resoudre are conjugated the other compounds 
of -soudre (Lat. solvere) : namely, 

absoudre, absolve dissoudre, dissolve 

except that their past participles are absous and dissous (fern. 
-soute). And resous (only masc.) is also a rarely used participle 
of resoudre, in the sense of dissolved. 

9. Of sourdre (Lat. surgere) rise forth are used only the in- 
finitive and the 3d persons pres. indicative : thus, 

37* sourdre sourd, sourdent. 

VOCARULAIIY. 
(Besides the verbs given in the Lesson.) 
la malle, the trunk le mouehoir, the handkerchief 

le col, the collar la manchette, the cuff 

la lec,on, the lesson le theme, the exercise, theme 

anglais, English allemand, German 

Exercise 38. 

1 Qu'avez-vous appris de votre frere ? 2 J'apprends qu'il 
va entreprendre un long voyage. 3 Permettez-vous qu'il 
s'en aille ? 4 II l'a resolu, et il faut que je le lui permette. 
6 Est-ce qu'il prendra toutes ces malles avec lui ? 6 II ne 
prend jamais qu'une malle. 7 Voila la malle qu'il a prise 
l'annee derniere. 8 Prenez ces mouchoirs et mettez-les 
dans la malle. 9 Est-ce que vous y avez mis les manchettes 
et les cols ? 10 II faut que je les couse avant de les y mettre. 
11 Ne les cousez pas, il en achetera d'autres. 12 Si votre 
frere va en Angleterre, il lui faudra apprendre l'Anglais. 
13 II a resolu de l'apprendre, et il prend des le9ons d'An- 
glais depuis un an. u Maintenant il l'aura appris tres 
bien, je crois. 15 Comprenez-vous l'Allemand, mademoi- 



THE REMAINING VERBS IK re. 179 

selle ? 16 Non, monsieur; mais je me suis mise a l'apprendre. 

17 Ce qu'on a resolu d'apprendre, on l'apprend toujours. 

18 Est-ce que votre chien vous suit ? 19 II m'a toujours 
suivi ; mais il devient vieux, et je ne crois pas qu'il me 
suivra plus longtemps. 20 Les chiens ne vivent pas aussi 
longtemps que les hommes. 21 Bien que celui-ci n'ait vecu 
que dix ans, il est deja vieux, et il faut que je me resolve a 
en acheter un autre. M Nous vivrons desormais dans la ville. 

Theme 38. 

1 You will take ; they have taken ; take it ; we took it ; 
will she not take it? I wish that you may take it ; thou 
wast taking ; I have taken nothing. 2 We would put ; that 
they may put ; let us put it there ; he put it in his pocket; 
will he not put it there ? I shall put it where I wish ; he 
will have put it on the table ; I never put them there. 3 They 
were living ; he lived ; do we not live ? live ! I wish that 
the king may live long ; you would have lived. 4 She sews ; 
they were sewing ; I did not sew ; if you sew, we shall sew 
also ; that he might sew ; let us sew. 5 That he may re- 
solve ; I have resolved ; we shall resolve ; would he not 
resolve ? they were resolving ; let us resolve ; she would 
not have resolved. 6 What have you done with (de) the 
handkerchiefs which I was sewing ? 7 1 put them in your 
trunk. 8 1 did not permit you to (de) put them there. 9 If 
I had not put them there, my brother would not have been 
able to go away. 10 Which trunk has he taken ? " He has 
taken the old black trunk which he took last year. 12 Have 
you learned why he leaves ? 13 My father permits him to 
leave, in order that he may learn English 14 Does he not 
understand English ? 15 He does not understand it yet, 
but he is beginning to learn it, and he will understand it 
soon. 16 You take English lessons also, I believe. 17 No, 
sir ; but I take German lessons. 18 This child must under- 
stand German, if he is going to Germany. 19 Where have 



180 LESSON XXXIX. 

you put your little dog ? ™ It is dead ; it lived only three 
months. 21 1 took your pencil, and put it on the table ; but 
it is no longer there. aa Put your book where you will be 
able to find it again. 



LESSON XXXIX. 

IRREGULAR VERBS IN IT. 

1. A number of verbs ending in the infinitive in ir 

are conjugated alike, and quite regularly. 

Such are partir set out, leave, depart, sortir go out, sentir 
feel, mentir lie, tell a lie, repentir (reflexive) repent, dormir 
sleep, servir serve. 

a. These verbs are more properly regular than the so-called regular verbs of 
the second conjugation (like finir), since they do not, like the latter, mix togeth- 
er simple and inceptive tonus. But the verbs like iinir are much the more nu- 
merous. 

2. The verb partir is thus conjugated : 

38. partir partant parti pars partis 

partirai partais etre parti pars partisse 

, . . etc. etc. 

partirais parte 

Inflection of the pros, indie, and impv. : 

Tkes. In dic. Impv. 

pars partons partons 

pars partez pars partez 

part partent 

3. Of the others in tir, it will be enough to give the 
principal parts : 



39. 


sortir 


sortant 


sorti 


sors 


sortis 


40. 


sentir 


sentant 


senti 


sens 


sentis 


41. 


mentir 


mentant 


menti 


mens 


mentis 


42. 


repentir 


repentant 


repenti 


repens 


repentis 



a. Like these verbs (Lat. partiri, sortiri, sentire, mentiri, 

-poenitere) are conjugated their compounds : 

departir, distribute repartir, set out again 

ressortir, go out again 

consentir, consent pressentir, foresee ressentir, feel, resent 
dementir, give the lie to 



IRREGULAR VERBS EN" ir. 181 

6. But repartir distribute is like finir ; and so also ressortir 
when it means resort; and assortir assort is not a compound of 
sortir, and is regular. 

c. As to the auxiliary with partir and sortir, see XXVIII. 7. 

4. Of the two verbs in mir and vir, the principal parts 
are as follows : 

43, dormir dormant dormi dors dormis 

44, servir servant servi sers servis 

Their pres. indie, (with which the imperative persons, as usual, 
agree) are these : 

Pres. Indic. Pees. Indic. 

dors dormons sers servons 

dors dormez sers servez 

dort dorment sert servent 

a. Like these verbs (Lat. dormire, servire) are conjugated 
their compounds : 

endormir, put to sleep redormir, sleep again rendormir, put to 
desservir, clear {a table) sleep again 

But asservir subjugate is regular (like finir). 

b. The phrase se servir de use, make use of, was given at 
XXIX. 76. 

5. Somewhat less regular is assaillir assail, which has 
a present indicative like a verb of the first conjugation. 

a. The principal parts are : 

45, assaillir assaillant assailli assaille assaillis 
The pres. indic. and impv. are : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

assaille assaillons assaillons 

assailles assaillez assaille assaillez 

assaille assaillent 

6. Like assaillir is conjugated another compound of saillir, 

tressaillir, be startled 
but the simple saillir (Lat. salire) gush forth is like finir; in 
the sense of jut out, project, it has the 3d persons pres. indic. 
like assaillir. 

6. The verb cueillir gather is still further irregular, in 
having also the future and conditional made after the 
manner of the first conjugation : thus, 



182 LESSON XXXIX. 

4(>. cueillir cueillant cueilli cueille cueillis 

cueillerai cueillais avoir cueilli cueille cueillisse 
cueillerais cueille, ett- ' e ' 

The present tenses are like those of assaillir. 

a. Like cueillir (Lat. colligere) are conjugated its compounds : 
accueillir, receive recueillir, collect 

7. The verb fuir flee, shun has a very regular conju- 
gation : thus, 

47, fuir fuyant fui fuis fuis 
fuirai fuyais avoir fui fuis fuisse 
luirais fuie etc ' etc ' 

The pres. indie, and impv. are : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

fuis fuyons fuyons 

fuis fuyez fuis fuyez 

fuit fuient 

a. Like fuir (Lat. fugere) is conjugated its compound: 
s'enfuir, run away, fly 

8. Of the verb bruire (probably Lat. rug-ire) roar, be noisy, 
the few forms that occur may best be put here, on account of 
their analogy with those of fuir. They are only 

48, bruire bruyant il bruit il bruyait 

ils bruyaient 

9. The verb ouir hear (Lat. audi re) is now hardly used except 
in the infinitive and past participle, with the compound tenses. 
Its full conjugation is as follows : 

49, ouir oyant oui ois ouis 

o i r a i oyais avoir oul ois ouisse 

etc. etc. 

o i r a i s oie 

10. The verb faillir miss, fall short is also very defective, being 
used at present only in the infinitive, future, and conditional, 
and in the compound tenses : thus, 

50, faillir [faillant] failli [faux] [faillis] 
faillirai [faillais] avoir failli 

faillirais [faille] etc " etc ' 

a. Other forms of this verb are met with in older use, and 
sometimes agreeing in form with those of falloir (originally the 
same word : Lat. fallere). As meaning fail {in business), it is 
sometimes conjugated like finir. 

b. The perfect j'ai failli etc. is used with a following infinitive 
in the sense come near, just escape : thus, j'ai failli tomber 1 
came within an ace of falling. 



IEEEGULAR VERBS IK ir. 183 

e. The compound defaillir fail is also used only in a part of 
its forms, and with somewhat varying conjugation. 

11. The verb vetir clothe differs from the preceding 
in having u as ending of its past participle. It is thus 
conjugated : 

51, vetir vetant vetu vets vetis 

vetirai vetais avoir vetu vets vetisse 

*,. . ~, etc. etc. 

vetirais vete 

Inflection of pres. indie, and impv. : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

vets vetons vetons 

vets vetez vets vetez 

vet vetent 

a. But this verb is also sometimes conjugated like finir. 

b. Like v§tir (Lat. vestire) are also conjugated its compounds : 

devetir, unclothe revetir, reclothe, dress 

VOCABULARY. 
(Besides the verbs given in the Lesson.) 
le coeur, the heart l'amitie f., the friendship 

la voiture, the carriage adieu, farewell, adieu 

le mari, the husband le beau-frere, the brother-in-law 

Exercise 39. 
1 Pourquoi sortiez-vous de bonne heure aujourd'hui ? 2 Je 
suis sorti avec inon ami, qui partait pour l'Angleterre. 
3 On m'avait dit qu'il ne partirait pas avant ce soir. 4 On a 
menti, monsieur; il est parti ce matin. 5 S'il n'etait pas parti 
de si bonne heure, nous nous serions leves pour lui dire 
adieu ; mais nous dormions encore. 6 Moi, je n'ai point 
dormi ; je me sentais trop malheureux. 7 Ressentez-vous 
tant d'amitie pour lui ? 8 Je ne mens pas; je l'aime de tout 
mon cceur. 9 Est-ce que les enf ants sont partis ? 10 lis sor- 
tirent il y a deux heures. Qu'est-ce qu'ils font? 12 lis 
vont donner aux pauvres soldats malades les fleurs qu'ils 
ont cueillies. 13 lis sont sortis ce matin, et ils ont cueilli 
les fleurs dans les champs. 14 De quoi se sont-ils servis pour 
aller aux champs ? 15 Ils se sont servis de notre grande voi- 



184 LESSON XXXIX. 

ture. 16 Qui est cette femme, qui est vetue de noir ? " C'est 
ma tante ; depuis la mort de son enfant elle se vet tou- 
jours ainsi. 18 Elle a failli perdre aussi son raari. 18 J'ai 
oui dire que les soldats avaient fui devant l'ennemi. 20 On 
a menti ; les soldats fran^ais ne fuient jamais. 21 Celui qui 
ment doit etre puni. " Ne sortez pas, mon ami ; il fait 
trop froid. 

Theme 39. 

1 Let us set out ; they were setting out ; she would de- 
part ; shall you not set out? that he might depart; she 
has departed ; you would have departed. 2 Is he not sleep- 
ing ? she slept ; if he had slept ; sleep ! that you may 
sleep ; if we had not slept. 3 You clothe ; they had not 
clothed; do I not clothe? that you might clothe; let us 
clothe. * She gathers flowers ; we will gather flowers for 
her ; she has gathered them for us ; why have you not 
gathered any flowers ? 5 Go out of this room ; he will not 
go out of it ; we have gone out of the town ; he went out 
by the door ; you will go out by the window. 6 Why does 
this woman always dress herself in black ? 7 She dresses 
herself in black because she has lost her husband. 8 Let us 
gather some violets in order to give to her. 9 Where have 
you gathered these beautiful flowers ? i0 We went out of 
the house and gathered them in the garden. " Did your 
cousins go away in the large carriage ? i2 No, they made 
use of the small carriage. 13 Where have they gone ? 
' 4 They did not sleep at all here. 15 1 go to sleep very early, 
when I am in (a) the country. J6 We shall sleep before 
going out. 17 Has the teacher gone away without saying 
farewell to us ? 18 Although he has lied to us, we still feel 
friendship for him. 19 Why do these women dress them- 
selves so badly ? 20 They are very poor, and they use old 
dresses, which some one has given them. 21 Let us flee > 
while our enemies sleep. 



IRREGULAR YEKBS IN ir. 185 

LESSOR XL. 

OTHER IRREGULAR VERBS IN" ir. 

1. In this Lesson will be given the rest of the irregu- 
lar verbs having the infinitive ending in ir. 

2. The verb courir run is thus conjugated : 

52. courir courant couru cours conrus 

courrai courais avoir couru cours courusse 

etc. etc. 

courrais coure 

The pres. indie, and impv. are : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

cours courons courons 

cours courez cours courez 

court courent 

a. Note the double pronunciation of the rr in the (abbreviated) 
fut. and cond. of this verb (73cZj. 

b. Like courir (Lat. currere) are conjugated its compounds : 
accourir, run up encourir, incur recourir, recur 
concourir, concur parcourir, traverse secourir, succor 
discourir, discourse 

c. An old form of the infinitive, courre, is sometimes used as a 
hunting term. 

3. Four verbs — namely, offrir offer, souffrir suffer, 
ouvrir open, and couvrir cover — have ert as ending of 
the past participle, and e of the present indicative : thus, 

a. 53. offrir offrant offert offre offris 

offrirai offrais avoir offert offre 

offrirais offre etc- et0. 

The pres. indie, and impv. are : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

offre offrons offroas 

offres offrez offre 

offre offrent 



186 LESSOR XL. 

b. Of the others, it will be enough to give the principal parts : 

54. souflrir souffrant souffert souffre souffris 

55. ouvrir ouvrant ouvert ouvre ouvris 

56. couvrir couvrant couvert couvre couvris 

c. Of offrir (Lat. offerre) and souffrir (Lat. suflferre), there are 
no compounds ; like ouvrir (Lat. aperirej and couvrir (Lat. 
cooperire) are conjugated their compounds : 

rouvrir, reopen entrouvrir, half open 

decouvrir, discover recouvrir, cover again 

4. Certain verbs in ir are used in only a few forms : 

a. 57* Ferir strike (Lat. ferire) occurs only in the infinitive 
(and, very rarely, the past participle feru). 

b. 58. Issir issue (Lat. exire) has only the past participle 
issu (and, according to some, also the present participle issant). 

c. Gesir lie (Lat. jacere) has only the following parts : 

59. gesir gisant gis 

gisais 

And of the pres. indie. , only the 3d. sing, and the plural per- 
sons are in use : thus, 

gisons 
gisez 
git gisent 

especially in the phrase ci git here lies, on a tombstone. As to 
the pronunciation of s in this verb, see 74c. 

5. The remaining verbs in ir change the root-vowel 
in a part of their forms — namely, in those persons of the 
three present tenses which are accented on the root, being 
either monosyllables or followed only by a mute syllable. 

6. The verbs venir come and tenir hold are conjugated 
precisely alike. They change their e to ie in the accented 
persons ; and also in the future and conditional, which 
are irregularly formed. 

a. Of venir the whole conjugation has been already 
given (XXXI. 10) ; it takes (XXVIII. 6) etre as auxili- 
ary. Only its principal parts will be repeated here : 

60. venir venant venu viens vine 



b. The verb tenir is thus conjugated 






IRREGULAR VERBS IX ir. 187 



61. tenir 


tenant tenu tiens tins 


tiendrai 


tenais avoir tenu tiens tinsse 


tiendrais 


♦ ,•«„„« etc - etc - 
tienne 


The inflection of the present tenses is as follows : 


Pees. Ixdic, 


IilPT. Pres. Subj, 


tiens tenons 


tenons tienne tenions 


tiens tenez 


tiens tenez tiennes teniez 


tient tiennent 


tienne tiennent 



e. Like venir | Lat. venire) and tenir (Lat. tenere) are conju- 
gated their numerous and much-used compounds : 

advenir, happen parvenir, arrive ressouvenir, remind 

again 
avenir, happen intervenir, intervene 

circonvenir, <^>c urn- prevenir, anticipate 

vent 
contrevenir, contra- pro venir, proceed 

vene 
convenir, agree redevenir, become again se souvenir, remember 

devenir, become revenir, return, come subvenir, assist 

back 
disconvenir, disagree survenir, come in addi- 

tion 
abstenir, abstain detenir, detain obtenir, obtain 

appartenir, belong entretenir, entertain retenir, retain 

contenir, contain maintenir, maintain soutenir, sustain 

d. For the auxiliary used with venir and most of its com- 
pounds, see XXVIII. 6a. 

7. The verb mourir die changes its on to eu in the ac- 
cented forms, and is also irregular in the future and con- 
ditional. It is conjugated thus : 

62. mourir mourant mort meurs mourns 

in o u r r a i mourais etre mort meurs mourusse 

• eto etc 

mourrais meure 
The inflection of the three present tenses is : 

Pees. Indic. Impv. Pees. Scbj. 

meurs mourons mourons meure mourions 

meurs mourez meurs mourez meures mouriez 

meurt meurent meure meurent 



188 LESSON XL. 

With mourir (Lat. mori) are formed no compounds. 

a. For the pronunciation of rr in the f ut. and cond. , see 73c?. 

8. Of the simple verb qu6rir seek, only the infinitive 

is in use ; but its compounds are fully conjugated. 

As example may be taken acquerir acquire. The change of 
the root- vowel e is to ie (as in venir) ; the future is made as in 
mourir and courir. 

03. acquerir acquerant acquis acquiers acquis 

acquerrai acquerais avoir acquis acquiers acquisse 
. «. etc. etc. 

acquerrais acquiere 
The inflection of the three present tenses is : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. tpres. Subj. 

acquiers acquerons acquerons acquiere acquerions 

acquiers acquerez acquiers acquerez acquieres acqueriez 

acquiert acquierent acquiere acquierent 

a. In the same manner are conjugated the other compounds of 
-querir (Lat. quserere) : 

conquerir, conquer s'enquerir, inquire reconquerir, reconquer 

requerir, require 

9. The verb bouillir boil is conjugated nearly like partir 
(XXXIX. 2), being irregular only in the singular of the present 
indicative and imperative. Thus : 

04. bouillir bouillant bouilli bous bouillis 
bouillirai bouillais avoir bouilli i>ous bouillisse 
bouillirais bouille etc " etc ' 

Inflection of the pres. indic. and impv. : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

bous bouillons bouillons 

bous bouillez bous bouille? 

bout bouillent 

a. Like bouillir (Lat. bullire) are conjugated its compounds : 
ebouillir, boil away rebouillir, boil again 

VOCABULARY. 

(Besides the verbs given in the Lesson.) 
l'air m., the air le pied, the foot 

le bas, the stocking le Soulier, the shoe 

la poule, the fowl, hen la basse-cour, the poultry -yard 

froid, cold chaud, warm 



IKREGULAE VEKBS IN" ir. 189 



Exercise 40. 

x Est-ce que vous ne vous sentez pas bien, mon enfant? 
8 J'ai mal a la tete, et je souffre beaucoup. 3 II vous faut 
de Pair frais ; j'ouvrirai la fenetre. 4 Si vous ouvrez la 
fenetre, j'aurai froid. 5 Alors sortez, et courez dans le jar- 
din. 6 Nous avons beaucoup couru ce matin, et nous avons 
mal aux pieds. 7 Nous courrons ce soir, si vous voulez. 
8 Que f aites-vous la ? 9 Je f ais bouillir de l'eau ; nous allons 
avoir du the. 10 II faut que l'eau bouille, pour faire de bon 
the. " Lorsque j'aurai fait le the, je vous en offrirai. 
12 Pourquoi ne m'avez-vous pas off ert aussi des oeuf s ? 13 Les 
o?uf s ne m'appartiennent pas ; aussi je ne vous les offre pas. 
14 Qu'est-ce que vous tenez dans la main ? 15 Un livre qui 
appartient a mon frere ; il a appartenu autrefois a Mon- 
sieur B. 16 Mon ami mourut l'annee derniere. l7 II etait de- 
venu tres pauvre, et depuis qu'il est mort, on a du vendre 
tout ce qui lui appartenait. I8 Mon pere a acquis beaucoup 
de biens en travaillaut ; si vous travaillez, vous en acquer- 
rez aussi. 19 Je n'ai pas ouvert ce livre-la. 20 Que quelqu'un 
ouvre la porte, ou je mourrai. 21 On vient d'ouvrir la porte 
de la basse-cour, et toutes les poules courent dans le jardin. 
22 Si nous avions des bas et des souliers, nous ne souffririons 
pas du froid aux pieds. 

Theme 40. 

1 They run ; we were running ; you ran ; he will run ; 
she would run ; let us run ; that I may run ; that thou 
might est run. 2 Offer ! we shall offer it to him ; they would 
have offered them to me ; I offered her nothing ; thou 
never offerest anything to anybody. 3 He holds ; will you 
not hold ? hold ! they were holding ; that she might hold ; 
we should have held ; do not hold it ; that he may hold 
them. 4 Why do not these children run ? 5 Their feet have 
become cold, and they cannot run any more. 6 If you run 



190 LESSON XLI. 

very fast, your feet will become warm. 7 These poor chil- 
dren have been able to obtain neither shoes nor stockings. 
fi Their father has died, and they have become very poor. 

9 He died six months ago ; and now their mother is dying. 

10 We have offered her a fowl, but she suffers so much that 
she cannot eat. " They are suffering from headache. 12 If 
they opened the window, they would have more air, and 
they would suffer less. 13 Where does he acquire all his 
money ? M He has sold all that which belonged to him, 
but he has not acquired much. 15 If he works well, he will 
acquire more. 1C This dress belongs to me, and I will offer 
it to her. 17 Let us offer to the children the old shoes which 
have belonged to us. l8 The water boils ; make the tea. 
19 Give me some boiling water, and I will make it. 20 If my 
uncle does not come back to-day, he will come back cer- 
tainly to-morrow. 



LESSON XLI. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN Oir. 



1. The verbs ending in oir are much less numerous 

than the irregular ones in ir and in re, but some of them 

are very common and important. 

"We may take up first among them a little group ending in the 
infinitive in evoir, which in many grammars are treated as a 
separate regular conjugation — called the third, the verbs in re 
being reckoned as the fourth. 

2. The verb recevoir receive is thus conjugated : 

05, recevoir recevant recu recois recus 

recevrai recevais avoir recu recois recusse 

etc. etc. 

recevrais receive 

The inflection of the present tenses is : 



IKKEGULAR VEKES IK Oir. 191 

Pres. Indic. Impv. Pres. Subj. 

re^ois recevons recevons receive recevions 

re9ois recevez re9ois recevez re^oives receviez 

reooit re9oivent re9oive recoivent 

a. Like recevoir are conjugated the other compounds of -cevoir 
(Lat. -cipere) ; namely, 

concevoir, conceive decevoir, deceive percevoir, receive 

apercevoir, perceive 

3. In the same manner is conjugated also the verb 
devoir owe, which has been given in full above (XX VL 
12 etc.) ; its principal parts are : 

66, devoir devant du dois dus 

a. Like devoir (Lat. det>ere) is conjugated its compound : 
redevoir, owe again 

4. The verb voir see is thus conjugated : 

67* voir voyant 

v e r r a i voyais 

v e r r a i s voie 

The present tenses are thus inflected 

Pres. Indic. Impv. 

vois voyons 

vois voyez vois 

voit voient 

a. Like voir (Lat. videre) are conjugated two of its com- 
pounds : 

revoir, see again entrevoir, see partly 

b. But two other compounds, prevoir foresee and pourvoir 
provide, make regular futures and conditionals, and the latter 
also has the preterit in us instead of is : thus, 

68, prevoir prevoyant prevu prevois previs 
prevoirai prevoyais avoir prevu prevois previsse 
prevoirais prevoie ete " ete ' 

c. Of pourvoir it will be enough to give the principal parts : 

69, pourvoir pourvoyant pourvu pourvois pourvrs 

d. Like pourvoir is conjugated its compound 

depourvoir, deprive 

5. Of the verb choir fall, only the infinitive and ine 
past participle chu are now in use. 



vu 


vois 


vis 


avoir vu 


vois 


visse 


etc. etc. 






ed: 


Pres. 


SUKT. 


>yons 


voie 


voyions 


>yez 


voies 


voyiez 




voie 


voient 



192 LESSON XLI. 

But its compound dechoir fall, decay is still conju- 
gated in full. 

70. dechoir [dechoyant] dechu dechois dechus 

decherrai dechoyais avoir dechu dechois dechusse 

decherrais dechoie e c etc * 

The pres. indie, and impv. are thus inflected : 

Pres. Indic, Impv. 

dechois dechoyons dechoyons 

dechois dechoyez dechois dechoyez 

dechoit dechoient 

a. The pres. pple is not in use, and in its value as gerund after 
en (X. 3c, d) is found decheant. 

6. The other compound of choir (Lat cadere), namely 
echoir, fall in 
is conjugated in the same way, but is used in only a few of its 
forms, chiefly the 3d persons singular : thus, pres. echoit (some- 
times echet), pret. echut, gerund echeant, etc. 

6. The verb pleuvoir rain is impersonal, or used only 
in the third persons singular (XXX. 1) ; it is thus con- 
jugated : 

71' pleuvoir pleuvant plu pleut plut 

p 1 e u v r a pleuvait avoir plu plut 

pleuvrait pleuve 

a. Of pleuvoir (Lat. plu ere) there are no compounds. 

7. For apparoir and comparoir, see XXXVI. 5d. 

VOCABULARY. 

(Besides the verbs given in the Lesson.) 
le projet, the plan, preyed le paquet, the package 

le besoin, the need, requirement la difficulty the difficulty 

le pouvoir, the power peut-etre, perhaps, maybe 

Exercise 41. 

1 J'ai recu une lettre de mon ami. 2 Qu'est-ce qu'il vous 
ecrit ? 3 II me dit qu'il me verra demain, s'il ne pleut pas. 
4 II pleuvra certainement, et je ne le reverrai jamais. 5 I1 
faut que vous le voyiez avant de partir. 6 Je ne concois 
point pourquoi vous voulez partir. 7 II a concu un projet, 



IRREGULAR VERBS IK oir. 193 

dont il n'aperc^it pas encore toutes les difficultes. 8 N'a- 
vez-vous pas re<?u le petit paquet dont je vous ai parle ? 

9 Nous ne l'avions pas trouve, mais nous le voyons mainte- 
nant. 10 Est-ce que vous etes pourvu d'argent pour tous 
vos besoins ? " Oui, et nous en recevrons encore le mois 
procbain. 12 Avez-vous vu le roi depuis qu'il est dechu du 
pouvoir? 13 I1 partit pour l'Angleterre, et il n'a jamais 
revu la France. 14 Avez-vous vu les soldats qui partaient 
pour la guerre ? 15 Je ne les ai pas vus ; il pleuvait, et je 
n'ai pas pu sortir. 16 Nous les reverrons dans quelques 
jours. 17 Avez-vous re<ju des lettres du general B. ? 18 Les 
lettres ne sont pas encore venues ; il faut qu'il les revive 
demain. 19 Pourquoi n'etes vous pas venu me voir bier ? 
20 Parce qu'il a tant plu. 21 Des que je vous verrai cbez 
nous, je vous montrerai le cadeau que je viens de recevoir 
de lui. 

Theme 41. 

1 They will receive ; let us receive ; be received ; sbe was 
receiving ; you receive ; tbat sbe migbt receive ; we bave 
received tbem ; tbey bad received it ; tbat I may bave re- 
ceived ber. 2 Do you see ? I bave seen nothing ; be will 
see wbat I saw ; let us see ; did you not see bim ? tbey 
will bave seen us ; tbougb be bad not seen tbem, tbey saw 
him. 3 It rained ; it would bave rained if it bad not been 
too cold ; it bas not rained to-day, but it will rain to-mor- 
row ; if it rains to-day, it will not snow. 4 Have you seen 
the general to-day ? 5 No, but I saw bim yesterday, and I 
sball perhaps see bim to-morrow. 6 You will not see him 
again ; he has gone off to the war. 7 You have received 
a letter ; is it not so ? 8 Here is the letter which we have 
received this morning ; we shall receive a package this 
evening. 9 1 shall receive money from my father next week. 

10 He must receive many letters from us. " Do you not 
perceive the difficulties of the plan which you have con- 



194 LESSON XLII. 

ceived ? 12 1 perceive all the difficulties, but I must provide 
for (a) the needs of ray family. Vi Although I have seen 
ray father, I have received no money from him. 14 Whom 
did you see in Paris ? 15 1 saw no one of my friends. 16 It 
rained so much that nobody came to see me. 17 Although 
it rained a good deal, I went to the shops, but I saw noth- 
ing there. 18 If it had not rained, I should have seen you 
there. 19 Does it not rain ? 20 1 do not think that it rains 
now ; but it will perhaps rain this evening. ai We could 
see nothing, for it was night. 



LESSON XLII. 

THE REMAINING IRREGULAR VERBS (iN Oir AOT) er). 

1. The remaining verbs in oir are more irregular in 
their conjugation, and for the most part show changes of 
radical vowel in the inflection of their present tenses. 

2. Of the extremely common verb vouloir wish, be 
willing, will, the conjugation has already (XXIV. 6 etc.) 
been given in full. The principal parts are here re- 
peated : 

72. vouloir voulant voulu veux voulus 

a. Of vouloir (Lat. velle) there are no compounds. 

3. The verb valoir be viorth, have the value of is con- 
jugated nearly like vouloir. Thus : 



73. valoir 


valant valu 


vaux 


valus 


vaudrai 


valais avoir valu 


vaux 


valusse 


vaudr ais 


. , , etc. etc. 

vai 1 1 e 






The inflection of the present tenses is : 






Pres. Indic. 


IMPV. 


Pres. 


SlJBJ. 


vaux valons 


valons 


vaille 


valious 


vaux valez 


vaux valez 


vailles 


valiez 


vaut valent 




vaille 


vaillent 



ikkegulae yeebs rtf oir and er. 195 

a. Like valoir (Lat, valere) are conjugated its compounds : 
equivaloir, be equivalent prevaloir, prevail revaloir, pay back 

except that prevaloir makes the pres. subj. pre vale etc. 

b. Be worth more is valoir mieux ; be worth the trouble or be 
worth while is valoir la peine. 

4. The impersonal verb falloir he necessary r , must has 
been conjugated in full above (XXX. 6 etc.). Its forms 
closely correspond with those of valoir. The principal 
parts may be repeated here : 

74. falloir fallant fallu faut fallut 

a. This verb and faillir (XXXIX. 9) are by origin one (Lat. 
fallere). 

5. The extremely common verb pouvoir he able, can 
has been given in full above (XX Y. 8 etc.). Its princi- 
pal parts may be repeated here : 

7o. pouvoir pouvant pu peux, puis pus 

6. The verb mouvoir move is thus conjugated : 

76, mouvoir mouvant mu meus mus 
mouvrai mouvais avoir mu meus musse 

etc. etc. 

mouvrais meuve 

The circumflex is taken only by the singular masculine of the 
participle. The inflection of the present tenses is : 

Pees. Indic. Impv. Pres. Subj. 

meus mouvons mouvons meuve mouvions 

meus mouvez meus mouvez meuves mouviez 

meut meuvent meuve meuvent 

a. Like mouvoir (Lat. movere) are conjugated its compounds : 
emouvoir, agitate, move promouvoir, promote 

but they take no circumflex in the participle : thus, emu, promu. 

7. Of the common verb savoir know, know how the 
full conjugation has been already given (XXXIY. 6 etc.). 
The principal parts only are here repeated : 

77. savoir sachant su sais sus 
a. Savoir (Lat. sapere) has no compounds. 

8. The verb seoir sit is defective as a simple verb. 
But its compound asseoir — chiefly used reflexively, s'as- 



196 LESSON XLII. 

seoir seat one's self, sit down — is conjugated in full. 
Thus : 

78. asseoir asseyant assis assieds 

assierai asseyais avoir assis assieds 

. - . etc. etc. 

assierais asseye 
The usual inflection of the present tenses is this : 

Pres. Indic. Impv. Pkes. Subj. 

assieds asseyons asseyons asseye asseyons 

assieds asseyez assieds asseyez asseyes asseyez 

assied asseyent asseye asseyent 

a. The above are the more usual and accepted forms. But a 
variety of others are occasionally met with : thus, pres. indic. and 
impv. assois, assoyons, etc.; impf. assoyais; pres. subj. assoie; 
fut. assoirai, or asseyerai. The compound rasseoir seat again 
is conjugated like asseoir. 

h. Of the simple verb seoir (Lat. sedere) in the sense of sit are 
used almost only the infinitive and the two participles (seyant and 
sis); but in the sense of sit on, fit (said of clothes and the like), 
the 3d persons sied sieent, seyait seyaient, siera sieront, siee 
sieent, are also met with. The compound messeoir fit badly, 
misfit is used in the same forms, except the infinitive. 

c. Another compound of seoir — namely surseoir supersede — 
lacks the pres. participle and the parts made from it, and has the 
pres. indic. sursois and the fut. surseoirai. 

9. 79. Of the old verb souloir be accustomed (Lat. solere) is 
left in use only the imperfect soulait, itself antiquated and rare. 

10. 80. Of the common auxiliary avoir have the com- 
plete conjugation was given above (X.). 

a. The sole compound of avoir (Lat.. habere), namely ravoir 
have again, is used only in the infinitive. 

11. There are only two irregular verbs having the 
infinitive ending in er. 

One of these, envoyer send, is irregular only in the 
future and conditional (which are like those from voir). 
It is thus conjugated : 

81. envoyer envoyant envoye envoie envoyai 

enverrai envoyais avoir envoye envoie envoyasse 

etc. etc. 

enverrais envoie 
a. Like envoyer is conjugated its compound : 
renvoyer, send lack 



ibbegulab veebs ik oir and er. 197 

12. The other irregular verb in er — namely, aller gd 
— has been conjugated in full above (XXY11. 8 etc.). 
Its principal parts are repeated here : 

82, aller allant alle vais allai 

13. 83, The common auxiliary etre he is, like aller, 
made up of the forms of more than one root. Its com- 
plete conjugation was given above (XL). 

a. Of §tre (Lat. esse, stare) there is no compound. 

VOCABULARY. 

le tailleur, the tailor la couturiere, the dressmaker 

le cordonnier, the shoemaker la botte, the boot 

le manteau, the cloak le recit, the tale, story 

le franc, the franc le feu, the fire 

pres de, near to, near autour de, around, about 

Exercise 42. 
1 Qui vous a envoye cet habit ? 2 Mon tailleur me l'en- 
voya il y a deux jours ; mais il ne me sied pas bien. 3 Vous 
le lui renverrez, n'est-ce pas ? 4 II vaut mieux en acheter 
un autre. 5 Allons, nous irons chez la couturiere acheter 
un manteau. 6 Celui que vous portiez l'hiver dernier vous 
seyait trop nral. 7 Je vous en donnerai un qui vous siera 
mieux. 6 Asseyez-vous pendant que je le cherche. 9 Est-ce 
que celui -oi vous plait ? 10 Combien vaut-il ? " II vaut cent 
vingt-cinq francs ; mais ce manteau-la vaudra deux cents 
francs. 12 Mon vieux manteau ne valait que quatre-vingts 
francs. 1S Pourquoi le cordonnier ne m'a-t-il pas envoye 
mes bottes ? 14 Le pauvre homme est malade ; il les en- 
verra des qu'il se portera mieux. ]5 I1 m'a fait le recit de 
ses malheurs ; et j'en suis tout emu. 16 Les malheurs des 
pauvres emeuvent tons les coeurs. " Assieds-toi, mon en- 
fant. 18 J'ai tres froid, madame ; il ne faut pas que je 
m'asseye. 19 Tu t'assieras pres du feu, n'est-ce pas ? 20 Pen- 
dant que tu y seras assis, nous enverrons chercher des ga- 
teaux pour toi et ta petite soeur. 21 Cela ne vaut pas la 
peine, madame ; nous n'avons pas faim. 



198 LESSON XLII. 



Theme 42. 

1 They have sat down ; sit down ; do not sit down there; 

I will sit down ; we sat down ; that she may sit down ; he 
sits down. 2 What is that worth ? it is worth nothing ; 
they were worth ten francs last month ; they will be worth 
twelve francs to-morrow. 3 That is not worth the trouble. 
4 Those books are worth more than these. 5 Will the dress- 
maker send you anything to-day ? 6 She has already sent 
me a cloak. 7 Does it fit you ? 8 No, the things that she 
sends me never fit me ; I shall send it back to her to-mor- 
row. 9 Are you going to take the coat which the tailor has 
sent you ? 10 That one was worth a hundred francs, and I 
shall buy one which is worth (fut.) only seventy-five francs. 

II Who makes your boots ? 12 An English shoemaker makes 
them, and they fit me always well. I3 1 must send [and] 
buy some. " How much are they worth ? 15 They are very 
dear ; they are worth fifty francs. lfi It is not worth the 
trouble to (de) show them to me ; I shall not buy them. 
17 It will be better to buy our boots from this poor French 
shoemaker. 18 Why have you seated yourselves about the 
fire ? and what has moved you so much ? 19 Charles is tell- 
ing (faire) the tale of the poor king. 20 Sit down also, and 
hear the tale. 21 This tale does not move me, and I do not 
wish to sit down. 22 The tale is finished ; let us go away. 






INDEX OF IRREGULAR VERBS, SIMPLE AND 
COMPOUND. 

The references are to the number in the series of verbs, and to the page where 
the conjugation is explained. 





No. 


p. 




No. 


p. 




No. 


p. 


absoudre 


36 


178 


comparoir 


18 


168 


decrire 


12 


164 


abstenir 


61 


187 


complaire 


24 


172 


decroire 


26 


172 


abstraire 


21 


171 


comprendre 


30 


176 


decroitre 


19 


168 


accourir 


52 


185 


compromettre 


31 


176 


dedire 


9 


163 


accroire 


26 


172 


concevoir 


65 


191 


deduire 


1 


162 


accroitre 


19 


168 


conclure 


29 


173 


defaillir 


50 


183 


accueillir 


46 


182 


concourir 


52 


185 


defaire 


23 


171 


acquerir 


63 


188 


conduire 


1 


162 


dejoindre 


17 


167 


admettre 


31 


176 


confire 


7 


163 


demencir 


41 


180 


advenir 


60 


187 


conjoindre 


17 


167 


demettre 


31 


176 


aller 


82 


128 


connaitre 


18 


168 


departir 


38 


180 


apercevoir 


65 


191 


conquerir 


63 


188 


depeindre 


16 


167 


apparaitre 


18 


168 


consentir 


40 


180 


deplaire 


24 


172 


apparoir 


18 


168 


construire 


2 


163 


depourvoir 


69 


191 


appartenir 


61 


187 


contenir 


61 


187 


desapprendre 


30 


176 


apprendre 


30 


176 


contraindre 


15 


167 


desservir 


44 


181 


assaillir 


45 


181 


contredire 


9 


163 


deteindre 


16 


167 


asseoir 


78 


196 


contrefaire 


23 


171 


detenir 


61 


187 


astreindre 


16 


167 


contrevenir 


60 


187 


detruire 


2 


163 


atteindre 


16 


167 


convaincre 




96 


devenir 


60 


187 


attraire 


21 


171 


convenir 


60 


187 


devetir 


51 


183 


avenir 


60 


187 


coudre 


34 


177 


devoir 


66 


124 


avoir 


80 


58 


courir 


52 


185 


dire 


9 


155 


benir 




92 


courre 


52 


185 


disconvenir 


60 


187 


boire 


27 


173 


couvrir 


56 


186 


discourir 


52 


185 


bouillir 


64 


188 


craindre 


15 


167 


disjoindre 


17 


167 


braire 


22 


171 


croire 


26 


172 


disparaitre 


18 


168 


bruire 


48 


182 


croitre 


19 


168 


dissoudre 


36 


178 


ceindre 


16 


167 


cueillir 


46 


182 


dormir 


43 


181 


choir 


70 


191 


cuire 


3 


163 


distraire 


21 


171 


circoncire 


8 


163 


decevoir 


65 


191 


duire 


1 


162 


circonscrire 


12 


164 


dechoir 


70 


192 


ebouillir 


64 


188 


circonvenir 


60 


187 


declore 


28 


173 


echoir 


70 


192 


clore 


28 


173 


deconfire 


7 


163 


eclore 


28 


173 


commettre 


31 


176 


decoudre 


34 


177 


econduire 


1 


162 


comparaitre 


18 


168 


decouvrir 


56 


186 


ecrire 


12 


164 



200 



IKDEX OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 





No. 


p- 




No. 


p. 


elire 


11 


164 


lire 


11 


164 


emboire 


27 


173 


luire 


5 


163 


emettre 


31 


176 


maintenir 


61 


187 


emoudre 


35 


177 


malfaire 


23 


171 


emouvoir 


76 


195 


maudire 


10 


164 


empreindre 


16 


167 


meconnaitre 


18 


168 


enceindre 


16 


167 


medire 


9 


163 


enclore 


28 


173 


mefaire 


23 


171 


encourir 


52 


185 


mentir 


41 


180 


endormir 


43 


181 


meprendre 


30 


176 


enduire 


1 


162 


messeoir 


78 


196 


enfreindre 


16 


167 


mettre 


31 


176 


enfuir 


47 


182 


moudre 


35 


177 


enjoindre 


17 


167 


mourir 


62 


187 


enquerir 


63 


188 


mouvoir 


76 


195 


ensuivre 


33 


177 


naitre 


20 


169 


entreprendre 


30 


176 


nuire 


4 


163 


entretenir 


61 


187 


obtenir 


61 


187 


entrevoir 


67 


191 


offrir 


53 


185 


entr'ouvrir 


55 


186 


oindre 


17 


167 


envoyer 


81 


196 


omettre 


31 


176 


epreindre 


16 


167 


ouir 


49 


182 


eprendre 


30 


176 


ouvrir 


55 


186 


equivaloir 


73 


195 


paitre 


18 


168 


eteindre 


16 


167 


paraitre 


18 


168 


etre 


83 


62 


parcourir 


52 


185 


etreindre 


16 


167 


parfaire 


23 


171 


exclure 


29 


174 


partir 


38 


180 


extraire 


21 


171 


parvenir 


60 


187 


faillir 


50 


182 


peindre 


16 


167 


faire 


23 


150 


percevoir 


65 


191 


falloir 


74 


141 


permettre 


31 


176 


feindre 


16 


167 


plaindre 


15 


167 


ferir 


57 


186 


plaire 


24 


172 


fleurir, florir 




92 


pleuvoir 


71 


192 


forclore 


28 


173 


poindre 


17 


167 


forfaire 


23 


171 


poursuivre 


33 


177 


frire 


14 


165 


pourvoir 


69 


191 


fuir 


47 


182 


pouvoir 


75 


119 


geindre 


16 


167 


predire 


9 


163 


gesir 


59 


186 


prendre 


30 


175 


hair 




92 


prescrire 


12 


164 


imboire 


27 


173 


pressentir 


40 


180 


induire 


1 


162 


prevaloir 


73 


195 


inscrire 


12 


164 


prevenir 


60 


187 


instruire 


2 


162 


prevoir 


68 


191 


interdire 


9 


163 


produire 


1 


162 


intervenir 


60 


187 


promettre 


31 


176 


introduire 


1 


162 


promouvoir 


76 


195 


issir 


58 


186 


proscrire 


12 


164 


joindre 


17 


167 


provenir 


60 


187 



querir 

rapprendre 

rasseoir 

ratteindre 

ravoir 

reboire 

rebouillir 

recevoir 

reclure 

reconduire 

reconnaitre 

reconquerir 

reconstruire 

recoudre 

recourir 

recouvrir 

recrire 

recroitre 

recueillir 

recuire 

redevenir 

redevoir 

redire 

redormir 

reduire 

reelire 

refaire 

rej oindre 

relire 

remettre 

reluire 

remoudre 

rendormir 

renaitre 

rentraire 

renvoyer 

repaitre 

repartir 

repeindre 

repentir 

reprendre 

requerir 

resoudre 

ressentir 

ressortir 

ressouvenir 

restreindre 

reteindre 

retenir 

retraire 

revaloir 



No. p. 

63 188 
30 176 
78 196 
16 167 
80 196 
27 173 

64 188 

65 190 
29 174 

1 162 

18 168 
63 188 

2 163 

34 177 
52 185 
56 186 
12 164 

19 168 
46 182 

3 163 
60 187 

66 191 
9 163 

43 181 

1 162 

11 164 

23 171 

17 167 
11 164 
31 176 

5 163 

35 177 
43 181 

20 169 

21 171 
81 196 

18 168 

38 180 
16 167 
42 180 
30 176 
63 188 

36 178 
40 180 

39 180 

60 187 
16 167 
16 167 

61 187 
21 171 
73 195 



INDEX OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



201 





No. 


p. 




No. 


p- 




No. 


p. 


revenir 


60 


187 


souloir 


79 


196 


survivre 


32 


176 


revetir 


51 


183 


soumettre 


31 


176 


taire 


25 


172 


revivre 


32 


176 


sourdre 


37 


178 


teindre 


16 


167 


revoir 


67 


191 


sourire 


13 


165 


tenir 


61 


187 


rire 


13 


164 


souscrire 


12 


164 


traduire 


1 


162 


rouvrir 


55 


186 


soustraire 


21 


171 


traire 


21 


171 


saillir 


45 


181 


soutenir 


61 


187 


transcrire 


12 


164 


satisfaire 


23 


171 


souvenir 


60 


187 


transmettre 


31 


176 


savoir 


77 


159 


subvenir 


60 


187 


tressaillir 


45 


181 


secourir 


52 


185 


suffire 


6 


163 


vaincre 




96 


seduire 


1 


162 


suivre 


33 


177 


valoir 


73 


194 


sentir 


40 


180 


surcroitre 


19 


168 


venir 


60 


145 


seoir 


78 


196 


surfaire 


23 


171 


vetir 


51 


183 


servir 


44 


181 


surprendre 


30 


176 


vivre 


32 


176 


sortir 


39 


180 


surseoir 


78 


196 


voir 


67 


191 


souffrir 


54 


186 


survenir 


60 


187 


vouloir 


72 


114 



INFINITIVE CONSTRUCTIONS. 



WITHOUT A PREPOSITION, OR WITH a OR de, AFTER VERBS. 

The following list gives in alphabetical order the verbs which 
are followed by a dependent infinitive (X. 26), either with a or 
with de, or without either (in the latter case the verb has after 
it in the list) : e.g. j'aime a lire / like to read, il acheve de 
parler he finishes speaking, accourez m'aider run to help me. 
A prefixed se shows that the verb is used reflexively ; a le or lui, 
that it has an object, direct or indirect : e.g. il s'amuse a le 
faire he amuses himself by doing it, il le pria de venir lie 
begged him to come, je lui ai dit de venir I told him to come. 

The list does not include verbs having a grammatical subject 
anticipating an infinitive which is the real or logical subject : e.g. 
il m'appartient de rester it is my part to remain here, il depend 
de vous d'y reussir it depends upon you to succeed in it. 

For details and illustrations, see the Second Part, §§ 175-83. 



l'abaisser a, stoop. 

s'abstenir de, abstain. 

aboutir a, result (in). 

s'accommoder de, be pleased (with). 

s'accorder a, agree. 

accourir 0, run. 

accoutumer (intr.) de, accustom. 

1', s'accoutumer a, accustom. 

l'accuser de, accuse. 

s'acharner a, strive. 

achever de, finish. 

l'admettre a, admit. 

affecter de, affect. 

affirmer 0, affirm. 

s'affiiger de, be afflicted. 

s'agir (imps.) de, be the question. 

1', s'aguerrir a, become inured. 

le or lui aider a, help. 

aimer a, love, like. 

aimer mieux 0, prefer. 



aimer autant 0, like as well, 
aller (p. 129) 0, go. 
ambitionner de, aspire. 
l'amener a, lead, 
s'amuser a, be amused, 
s'animer a, be animated, 
l'apercevoir 0, perceive. 
1', s'applaudir de, praise, 
s'appliquer a, endeavor, 
apprebender de, apprehend, 
apprendre a, learn, 
lui apprendre a, teach, 
s'appreter a, make ready. 
1', s'arreter a or de, stop, 
arriver a, arrive, 
aspirer a, aspire, 
l'assigner a, summon, 
s'assujettir a, subject one's self, 
assurer 0, assure. 
1', s'astreindre a, subject, compel. 



IXFIKITIYE CO^STKUCTIOKS. 



203 



s'attacber a, apply. 

s'attendre a, expect. 

attendre de or a, await, defer. 

augmenter a, augment. 

l'autoriser a, authorize. 

l'avertir de, inform. 

s'avilir a, debase one's self. 

s'aviser de, bethink one's self. 

avouer 0, confess. 

avoir a, have to. 

avoir beau 0, try in vain. 

avoir raison, tort, etc. . de, be right, 
wrong, etc. 

avoir peine, etc. , a, be sorry; etc. 

balancer a, hesitate. 

le, se blamer de, blame. 

le, se borner a, limit. 

bruler de, wish ardently. 

cesser de, cease. 

se cbagriner de, grieve. 

le, se cbarger de, charge, under- 
take. 

cbercher a, seek. 

choisir de, choose. 

citer a, summon. 

lui commander de, order. 

commencer de or a, begin. 

se complaire a, delight (in), acqui- 
esce. 

compter 0, intend. 

conclure de, conclude- decide. 

concourir a, concur, cooperate. 

le, se condamner a, condemn. 

condescendre a, condescend. 

le conjurer de, beseech. 

lui conseiller de, advise. 

consentir a, or de, consent. 

consister a, consist (in). 

le, se consoler de, console. 

conspirer a, conspire. 

se consumer a, wear out. 



se contenter de, content. 

continuer de or a, continue. 

le contraindre de or a, compel. 

contribuer a, contribute. 

le convaincre de, convince. 

convenir de, agree, suit. 

le convier a or de, invite. 

courir 0, run. 

craindre de, fear. 

croire (p. 172), believe. 

daigner 0, deign. 

decider de, decide. 

le, se decider de, determine. 

declarer 0, declare. 

dedaigner de, disdain. 

lui defendre de, forbid. 

le defier de, defy. 

deliberer de, deliberate. 

demander a, ask. 

lui demander de, ask. 

demeurer a, linger, delay. 

se depecber de, hurry. 

le, se desaccoutumer de, lose the 

habit, 
desirer or de, desire, 
se desoler de, grieve, 
le destiner a, destine, 
determiner de, determine, 
le, se determiner a, determine, 
lui devoir de, owe it to any one 
devoir (p. 124), ought, be to. 
differ er de. defer, 
dire 0. say. 
lui dire de, tell. 
discontinuer de, stop, 
le, se dispenser de, exempt, 
le, se disposer a, dispose, 
le dissuader de, dissuade, 
se divertir a. amuse, 
lui donner a. give 
douter de. doubt. 



204 



INFIKITIVE COKSTRUCTIOKS. 



eclater de (rire), burst out (laugh- 
ing). 

l'ecouter 0, bear. 

lui ecrire de, write. 

s'edifier de, edify. 

s'efforcer de or a, endeavor. 

s'effrayer de, be afraid. 

s'emerveiller de, be astonished. 

1', s'empecher de, prevent. 

1', s'employer a, employ. 

B'empresser a or de, hasten. 

1', s'encourager a, encourage. 

s'endurcir a, harden. 

1', s'engager a or de, recommend, 
take upon one's self. 

s'enhardir a, grow bold. 

lui enjoindre de, charge. 

s'ennuyer de, be bored. 

s'enorgueillir de, be proud. 

enrager de, Le vexed. 

lui enseigner a, teach. 

l'entendre 0, hear. 

s'entendre a, understand. 

s'enteter a, be obstinate. 

l'entrainer a, drag. 

entreprendre de, undertake. 

l'envoyer 0, send. 

s'epuiser a, exhaust one's self. 

esperer or de, hope. 

essayer a or de, try. 

s'etonner de, be astonished. 

etre a, be occupied with, be to be. 

etre 0, go. 

s'etudier a, endeavor. 

eviter de, avoid. 

exceller a, excel. 

1', s 'exciter a, excite. 

1', s'excuser de, excuse. 

I', s'exercer, a practise. 

l'exhorter a, exhort. 

s'exposer a, expose. 



se facher de, be angry, be sorry, 
faillir or de, just miss, 
faire (p. 151), make, cause, 
faire bien, etc., de, do well, 
falloir (p. 141), be necessary, 

must. 
se fatiguer a, weary one's self, 
feindre de, feign, 
le, se feliciter de, congratulate, 
finir de, finish. 

se flatter de, flatter one's self, 
le, se forcer a or de, force, 
fremir de, shudder, 
gagner a, gain, win. 
se garder de, take care not (to). 
gemir de, lament, 
se glorifier de, pride one's self (on), 
le gronder de, scold. 
1', s'habituer a, habituate, 
hair a, hate, 
ne pas hair de, not hate, 
hasarder de, venture, 
se hasarder a, venture, 
se hater de, hasten, 
hesiter a or de, hesitate, 
s'imaginer 0, imagine, 
lui imputer de, impute, 
l'inciter a, incite, 
incliner a, incline, 
s'indigner de, be indignant, 
l'induire a, induce, 
s'ingerer de, meddle, 
s'inquieter de, be anxious, 
lui inspirer de. inspire, 
l'instruire a, instruct, 
lui interdire de, forbid. 
1', s'interesser a, interest. 
I', s'inviter a, invite, 
juger necessaire, etc., de, think 

necessary, 
jurer de or 0, swear. 



IKFISTITIVE COKSTKUCTIONS. 



205 



le, se justifier de, justify. 

laisser 0, let, cause. 

laisser de, cease. 

lui laisser a, leave. 

se lasser a or de, be tired. 

le, se limiter a, limit. 

le, se loner de, praise. 

lui mander de, send, order. 

manquer a or de, miss. 

mediter de, think, intend. 

se meler de, meddle. 

menacer de, threaten. 

le mener 0, lead. 

meriter de, deserve. 

le, se mettre a, set (about) . 

lui montrer a, show. 

mourir de, long (to). 

negliger de, neglect. 

nier de or 0, deny. 

l'obliger de or a, oblige. 

s'obstiner a, persist. 

obtenir de, obtain. 

1', s'occuper de or a, occupy. 

offrir de, offer. 

s'offrir a, propose one's self. 

omettre de, omit. 

s'opiniatrer a, be obstinate. 

lui ordonner de, order. 

oser 0, dare. 

oublier de or a, forget. 

oulr 0, hear. 

paraitre 0, appear. 

lui pardonner de, pardon. 

parler de, speak. 

parvenir a, arrive (at). 

passer a, pass (time). 

se passer de, do without. 

pencher a, lean, incline. 

penser 0, intend, plan. 

penser a, think. 

lui permettre de, permit. 



perseverer a, persevere, 
persister a, persist, 
lui persuader de, persuade, 
se piquer de, plume one's self, 
le, se plaindre de, pity, 
se plaire a, take pleasure, 
le porter a, lead, 
le pousser a, impel, 
pouvoir (p. 119), be able, 
preferer or de, prefer, 
le, se preparer a, prepare, 
lui prescrire de, prescribe, 
le, se presser de, urge, hurry, 
presumer de, presume, 
pretendre or a, intend, aspire, 
prier de, pray, beg. 
professer de, profess, 
profiter de, profit, 
projeter de, plan, 
promettre de, promise, 
proposer de, propose, 
protester de, protest, 
le provoquer a, incite, 
le punir de, punish, 
lui rappeler de, remind, 
se rappeler or de, remember, 
se rassasier de, satisfy one's self, 
le, se rebuter de, forbid, be reluc- 
tant, 
lui recommander de, recommend, 
le recompenser de, reward, 
reconnaitre de or 0, recognize, 
redouter de, dread, 
le reduire a, reduce, 
refuser de, refuse, 
se refuser a, refuse, 
le regarder 0, watch, 
regretter de, regret, 
se rejouir de, rejoice, 
le remercier de, thank, 
renoncer a, give up. 



206 



INFINITIVE CONSTRUCTIONS. 



rentrer 0, come in. 
se repentir de, repent, 
le reprendre de, censure. 
le reprimander de, censure, 
lui reprocher de, reproach (for), 
le requerir de, require, 
se resigner a, be resigned, 
resoudre de, resolve, 
se resoudre a, make up one's mind, 
se ressouvenir de, remember, 
rester a, be left. 
le retenir de, restrain, 
retourner 0, return, 
reussir a, succeed, 
revenir 0, come back (to do), 
revenir de, come back (from do- 
ing), 
rever de, dream, 
rever a, imagine, 
rire de, laugh, 
risquer a, risk, 
rougir de, blush, 
savoir (p. 159), know how. 
se scandaliser de, be scandalized, 
sembler 0, seem, 
le, se sentir 0, perceive, 
sentir de, feel, 
servir a, be useful. 
le solliciter de or a, urge, beg. 
le sominer de, summon, 
songer a, think. 



se soucier de, care. 

souffrir de or a, suffer. 

souhaiter de or a, wish. 

le soup9onner de, suspect. 

soutenir 0, assert. 

se souvenir de, remember. 

suffire a, be sufficient. 

lui suggerer de, suggest. 

le supplier de, beg. 

le surprendre a, surprise. 

tacher a or de, try. 

tarder a or de, be late. 

tendre a, tend, aim. 

tenir a, hold on, wish. 

se tenir de, keep (from). 

tenter de, try. 

travailler a, work. 

trembler de or a, tremble. 

trouver a, find. 

le trouver 0, think. 

trouver bon or mal de, think well 

or ill. 
se tuer a, kill one's self, 
se vanter de, boast, 
venir (p. 146), come, 
venir a, happen, 
venir de (p. 146), have just, 
viser a, aim. 
le voir 0, see. 
se vouer a, devote, 
vouloir (p. 115), wish. 



VOCABULARIES TO THE EXERCISES, 



I.— FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



adj. 
adv. 
art. 
conj. 

/■ 
F. 
fr. 
G. 
Gr. 



adjective. 

adverb. 

article. 

conjunction. 

feminine noun. 

French. 

from, derived from. 

German, Germanic. 

Greek. 



impeis. impersonal, 
infinitive, 
interjection. 



inf. 

interj. 



irr. 


irregular (the list-no. added). 


It. 


Italian. 


L. 


Latin. 


LL. 


Low or late Latin. 


num. 


numeral. 


m. 


masculine noun. 


OF. 


Old French. 


pple. 


participle. 


prep. 


preposition. 


pron. 


pronoun. 


refl 


reflexive. 


v. 


verb. 



Words irregularly pronounced have * prefixed, and reference to the Rules of 
Pronunciation added immediately after them. 
A ' before initial h shows it to be aspirate (64a-d). 
References are made in the same manner as above in the text. 
Phrases are given and explained under their principal words. 



a prep, to, toward, unto ; at, in ; 
of, for, with, etc. (characterized 
by) ; about, in respect or refer- 
ence to ; on, by ; from ; belong 
ing to. [L. ad.] 

absorament adv. absolutely, [fr. 
absolu, L. absolutus.] 

acheter v. buy, purchase. [LL. 
adcaptare.] 

acquerir v. {irr. 63) acquire, gain. 
[L. acquirere.~] 

adieu m. adieu, farewell, good-by. 
[a Dieu, (I commend you) to 
God.] y ' 

afin adv. to end : afin de, for the 
purpose of, in order to, to ; afin 
que, in order that, that, [a fin.] 

Afrique/. Africa. 

age m. age. [L. mtaticum.] 

age adj. (as if pple. of ager) aged, 
old, on in years, [fr. age.] 



agir v. act, behave, proceed, ex- 
ert one's self : s'agir de impers. 
concern, be question of, be the 
matter in hand. [L. agere.] 

*aiguille (62/) /. needle, spire. 
[L. acuculam.] 

ailleurs adv. elsewhere, some or 
anywhere else : d'ailleurs, other- 
wise, besides, moreover. [L. 
aliors'/m.] 

aimer v. love, like, be fond of or 
attached to : aimer mieux, like 
better, prefer. [L. amare.~\ 

ainsi ado. thus, so, in this or that 
way, likewise : ainsi que, as, so 
as, as well as, as also. [L. 
ceqne sic or in sic] 

air m. air (atmosphere) ; air, look, 
mien, aspect : avoir l'air, have 
the look or aspect ; appear, seem 
to be. [L. aerem.] 



208 



FKENCH-ENGLISH 



alentour adv. around, roundabout, 
[a l'entour, in the neighbor- 
hood.] 

allemand adj. German. [OG. ale- 
man, Allemamri ] 

Allemagne /. Germany. 

aller v. (irr. 82 ; p. 128) go, be go- 
ing : allons, come, come on ; 
s'en aller (XXIX. 7c), go off or 
away, be going ; y aller de im- 
pels, concern. [See XXVII. 9b.] 

alors adv. then, at that time ; in 
that case : alors que, at the time 
that, when. [L. ad Mam korant, 
at that hour. ] 

Alpes /. Alps (mountains of Switz- 
erland). 

amener v. bring, lead ; draw on, 
induce, [fr. mener.] 

*amer (73£) adj. bitter, sharp. [L. 
amarum.~\ 

Amerique/. America 

ami m. amie /. friend. [L. ami- 
cum, amicam.] 

amitie /. friendship. [L. amici- 
tiam.] 

amour m. f. love : amour propre, 
self-love. [L. amor em. ~\ 

amoureux adj. amorous, enam 
oured, in love (with, de). [fr. 
amour.] 

amuser v. amuse, divert, entertain, 
[a and muser, stare.] 

an m. year (esp'ly in definitions of 
length of time). [L. annum.'] 

ancien adj. ancient, old, former. 
[LL. antianum.] 

anciennement adv. anciently, of 
old. [fr. ancien.] 

anglais adj. English, [fr. angli, 
Angles.] 

Angleterre /. England. 

animal m. animal, living being. 
[L. animal.'] 

annee/. year (esp'ly as a continu- 
ous space of time), [fr. an.] 

*aout (14) m. August. [L. augus- 
tum.~\ 

apercevoii v. {irr. 65) perceive, no- 
tice, observe. [L. ad-percipere.] 

appartenir v. {irr. 61) appertain, 
belong. [L. ad-pertinere.] 



appeler v. (XXI. 3c) call, summon, 
appeal to. [L. appellare.] 

apporter v. bring, convey, procure. 
[L. apportare.] 

apprendre v. {irr. 30) apprehend, 
learn ; teach, make known, in 
form. [L. apprehendere.] 

approcher v. bring near, draw near, 
approach (to, de) ; s' . . ., ap 
proach, draw near (to, de). [fr 
proche, near.] 

apres prep, after, next following • 
adv. afterward, later; further, 
proceed . d'apres, according to , 
apres que, after that, after (conj.). 
[L. ad-pressum.] 

apres-demain adv. day after to- 
morrow. 

apres-midi m. afternoon. 

arbre m tree. [L. arborem. ] 

argent m. silver ; money, treasure. 
[L. argentum.] 

armee/. army. [L. armatam.] 

arreter v. arrest, bring to rest, stop, 
check ; stay, (of a dog) point, set . 
s' . . ., arrest one's self, stop, 
stay. [fr. rester, stay.] 

arriver v. arrive : arrive, person 
arrived, arrival. [L. ad-ripare, 
fr. ad ripam, to the shore.] 

Asie/. Asia. 

*aspect (70a) m. aspect, appear 
ance. [L. asvectum.] 

asseoir v. {irr. 78) sit down, take 
a seat : s' . . ., sit down. [L. ad- 
sidere.] 

assez adv. (V. 4a) enough, suffi- 
ciently ; tolerably, fairly, rather. 
[L. ad satift.] 

assiette /. plate, [fr. L. ad and 
nit us, site.] 

atelier m. workshop, studio. [LL. 
hastellarimn (?).] 

attendre v. wait for, await ; wait, 
stay : s' . . . a, await, expect, be 
prepared for; en attendant, while 
waiting, meanwhile, in the mean 
time. [L. attendere.] 

aucun pron. not any, none, no. 
[L. aliquem unum.] 

au-dela adv. beyond ; . . . de, beyond 
( prep.), [au (a le), de, and la.j 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



209 



au-dessous adv. below : , . . de, be- 
low, beneath {prep.), [au (a 

le), de, and sous.] 
au-dessus adv. above : . . . de, above 

(prep.), [au (ale), de, and sus, 

sur.] 
au-devant adv. in front : . . . de, 

in front of, to meet, [au (a le) 

and devant.] 
Auguste m. Augustus (first empe- 
ror of Rome), 
aujourd'hui adv. to-day, nowadays. 

[au (a le) jour, de, and hui, L. 

hodie, to-day.] 
aupres adv. near, at hand : . . . de, 

near to, in presence of, in the 

eyes of, before, [au (a le) and 

pres, near.] 
aussi adv. also, too ; as ; as much, 

equally; accordingly. [L. aliud 

sic, else so.] 
aussitot adv. as soon : . . . que, as 

soon as (conj.). [aussi and tot, 

soon.] 
autant adv. as much or many : . . . 

que, as much as (conj.). [L. 

aliud tantum.] 
*automne (69a) m. autumn. [L.] 
autour adv. around, roundabout : 

. . . de, around, about ( prep.). 

[au (a le) and tour, turn.] 
autre pron. other (XXVII. 6, 7). 

[L. alterum.] 
autrefois adv. formerly, of old. 

[autre and fois, time.] 
autrement adv. otherwise, differ- 
ently, [fr. autre.] 
Autriche/. Austria, 
autrui pron. others than one's self, 

other people, [fr. autre.] 
avant prep, before, previous to : 

. . . de (with inf.), before ; . . . 

que, before that, before (conj.). 

[L. ab ante.] 
avant-hier adv. day before yester- 
day, 
avec prep, with, along with, by : 

d'avec, from with, from. [L. 

apud hoc.] 
aveugle adj. blind. [LL.aboculum.] 
aveuglement adv. blindly. [fr. 

aveugle.] 

14 



avoir v. (irr. 80 *, p. 58) have : y 
avoir (XXX. 4), there is, etc.; 
en avoir a, have to deal with ; 
as auxil, see XXVIII. 5-7 ; for 
phrases, see the nouns used : cf. 
XIII. 6. [L. habere.] 

*avril (68(2) m. April. [L. apri- 
lem.~] 

bal m. ball, dance, [fr. L. ballare, 
dance.] 

*bapteme (71a) m. baptism, [fr. 
Gr.] 

*baptiser (71a) v. baptize, [fr. Gr.] 

bas adj. low, base, mean : a bas, 
downward, down ; en bas, be- 
low, down-stairs. [LL. bassum.] 

bas adv. (XXXI. 9) low, in a low 
tone. 

bas m. stocking, hose. [fr. bas 
adj.] 

basse-cour /. poultry yard, [lit'ly 
lower yard.] 

bateau m. boat : . . . a vapeur, steam- 
boat, steamer ; . . . a voiles, sail- 
boat, sailing vessel. [LL. batum, 
fr. G.] 

batir v. build, [fr. bat, LL. bas- 
tum.~\ 

battre v. (XX. 3c) beat, strike : 
se . . ., fight, fence. [L. bat u ere.] 

beau, bel (VII. 7) adj. beautiful, 
handsome, fine : avoir beau, do 
or try in vain, make useless 
effort to. [L. bellurn.] 

beaucoup adv. (V. 4) much, a good 
deal, many ; very much, very, 
[beau and coup, stroke.] 

beau-frere m. brother-in-law. [beau 
and frere.] 

bel, see beau. 

Belgique/. Belgium. 

benir v. bless. [L. benedicere.] 

berger m. shepherd. [LL. berbi- 
carium, fr. berbex, ram.] 

besoin m. need, necessity, require- 
ment : avoir besoin, have need, 
be in need or want, need. [?] 

beurre m. butter. [L. bitty rum, 
fr. Gr.] 

bibliotheque / library. [Gr.] 

bien adv. well, rightly ; all right, 



210 



FEENCH-ENGLISH 



very well ; quite, indeed, truly, 
surely ; very ; much, many (v. 
4&) : bien que, though, although. 
[L. bene.] 
bien m. what is well wgood, good 
thing, good ; wealth, fortune : 
homme (or femme or gens) de bien, 
honest or excellent person. 
[= bien adv.] 
bientot adv. very soon, soon, [bien 

and tot, soon.] 
blanc adj. (VII. 6b) white, [fr. G.] 
boeuf m. (*boeufs pi. 61a) ox. [L. 

bovem.~\ 
boire v. (irr. 27) drink. [L. bibere.] 
bois m. wood, timber; wood, forest. 

[LL. boscum, fr. G.] 
bon adj. good (for, a), excellent ; 
right ; kind : a quoi bon, good 
for what ? of what use ? what 
avails it ? de bonne heure, in 
good time, early ; a bon marche, 
bon marche, cheap. [L. bohvm.] 
bonheur m. happiness, good for- 
tune, felicity, blessing. [L. bo- 
na m augurium.] 
bonjour m. good day, good morn- 
ing, one's greeting or compli- 
ments, [bon and jour, day.] 
botte.f. boot. [fr. G.j 
bouche/. mouth. [L. buccam.~\ 
bouillir v. (irr. 64) boil. [L. bul- 

hre.] 
boulanger m. baker, [fr. boule, 

ball, loaf.] 
bouteille/. bottle. [L. buticnlam .] 
bras m. arm. [L. brachium.] 
brebis/. sheep. [L, berbicem.] 
brun adj. brown, [fr. G.] 
*Bruxeiles (81c)/. Brussels. 

ca pron. (XXIV. 3) that, that 

thing (or person), [fr. cela.] 
cadeau m. gift, present. [L. ca- 

tellum, chainlet.] 
cafe m. coffee, [fr. Arabic] 
campagne /. field ; fields, country 

(as distinguished from city). 

[LL. campaniam, fr. campus.] 
*cap [11a] m. cape, headland. [L. 

caput.] 
car conj. for. [L. quare.] 



cas m. case, hap, event : en tout 
cas, in any case, at any rate ; en 
or au cas que (conj.), in case that, 
supposing. [L. casvm.] 

casser v. break ; quash, [fr. L. 
cassus.] 

ce, cet pron. (XI. 2 ; XIII. 2, 3 ; 
XXIV.) this, that ; it (they, 
these, those) : ce qui or que, that 
which, what ; jusqu'a ce que, 
until, till. [fr. L. ecce hoc, ecce 
istum.] 

ceci pron. this, [ce and ci.] 

cela pron. that, [ce and la : XXIV. 
3-1 

celui, celle, etc. (XXIV. 4) this 
or that one. [L. ecceillnm, etc.] 

cent num. hundred (XV.). [L. 
ceutvm.] 

centaine /. century, five score, a 
hundred or so. [fr. cent.] 

centieme nam. hundredth, hun- 
dredth part* [fr. cent.] 

centre m. centre. [L. centrum.] 

cependant adv. pending or during 
this, meanwhile ; however, nev- 
ertheless, [ce and pendant.] 

certain adj certain, sure ; certain, 
some, sundry (VIII. 5c). [fr. 
L. certiiH.] 

certainement(7(Z«. certainly, surely, 
[fr. certain.] 

cet, see ce. 

chacun pron. each one, each, every 
one. [L. qaemque unit in.] 

chaise /. chair, seat. [L. cathe- 
dra m, fr. Gr.] 

chambre /. chamber, room : femme 
de chambre, lady's maid. [L. 
cameram. ] 

champ m. field : sur le champ, on 
the spot, at once, directly. [L. 
campum.] 

chanters, sing. [L. cantare.] 

chapeau m. hat. [fr. OF. chape, 
cape, cape] 

chapitre m. chapter. [L. capitu- 
lum.] 

chaque pron. (XIV. 6) each, every, 
[abbrvn. of chacun.] 

Charles m. Charles. 

chasser v. chase, hunt ; chase 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



211 



away, drive off, expel ; dismiss 

(as a servant). [L. capture.] 
chat in. cat. [L. cattum.] 
chateau m. castle, cliateau. [L. 

caxtellum ] 
chaud adj. warm : avoir chaud 

(XIII. 6), be warm, feel warm (of 

persons) ; faire chaud (XXXII. 

9(0, be warm (of weather). [L. 

calidum.] 
chemin m. road, way : chemin de 

fer, railroad, railway. [LL. 

caminum, fr. Celtic ?] 
cher adj. (VIII. b.c) dear, costly, 

precious, loved, valued. [L. 

carum.] 
chercher v. seek, look for, try to 

find . aller chercher, go for, 

fetch. |L. circure, run about.] 
cherement adv. dearly, at much 

cost, at a high price. [fr. 

cher.] 
cheval in. horse : a cheval, on 

horseback. [L. caballum.] 
cheveu m. (gen'ly pi.) hair. [L. 

capillum.] 
chez prep, at or to the house of, 

where (one) lives, with, among. 

[L. cam, in the house.] 
chien m. dog. [L. canem.] 
Chine /. China, 
choisir v. choose, select, cull : 

choisi, select, [fr. G.] 
chose /. thing, object, matter, af- 
fair : quelque chose, something ; 

toute chose, everything ; autre 

chose, some or any thing else. 

[L. causa m.] 
ci adv. (XIII. 3, XXIV.) here. 

[L. ecce hie.] 
ciel m. (II. 5) heaven, sky, clime ; 

canopy, awning ; Heaven. [L. 

ccelum.] 
*cinq (72c) num. five. [L. quin- 

que.] 
cinquante num. fifty. [L. quin- 

quaginta.] 
cinquieme num. fifth, [fr. cinq.] 
citoyen m. citizen, [fr, cite, city.] 
coBur m. heart ; courage, resolu- 
tion : a coeur ouvert, with open 

heart, openly, frankly ; de bon 



coeur, with all one's heart, heart- 
ily, sincerely. [L. cor.] 

col in. collar. [L. colluin, neck.] 

combien adv. how much or many ? 
how much or many (relative), 
how, in what measure or degree - 
combien que, however much, 
[comme and bien.] 

comedie /. comedy ; Comedie fran- 
chise, name of a certain company 
of actors at Paris. [L., fr. Gr.] 

comme adv. covj. as, just as, like ; 
in character of, as being. [L. 
quomodo.] 

commencer v. commence, begin. 
[L. cum-initiart >.] 

comment adv. how ? how ! how 
(relative), [fr. comme (-ment, 
XXXI. 2) ] 

comprendre v. (irr. SO) comprehend, 
include ; understand : y compris, 
being included, with inclusion 
of. [L. comprehendere.] 

*compte (71a) m. account, com- 
putation, reckoning, [fr. comp- 
ter.] 

-compter (71a) v. compute, count, 
reckon [L. computare.) 

conclure v. (err. 29) conclude ; in- 
fer. [L. concludere.] 

conduire v. (irr. 1) conduct, lead, 
guide, manage, drive. [L. con- 
ducere.] 

confiture /. sweetmeat, preserve, 
jam. [fr. confire, L. conjicere, 
put together.] 

connaitre v. (irr. 18) know, have 
knowledge of, be acquainted 
with, be informed of, have cog- 
nizance of. [L. cognoscere.] 

constamment adv. constantly, [fr. 
constant, L. (XXXI. 4a).] 

conte in. story, tale. | fr. conter.] 

content adj. content, satisfied, glad, 
happy. [L. contentum.] 

continuellement adv. continually 
[fr. .continuel, fr. continues] 

contre prep, against, in opposition 
to; in exchange for. [L. contra.] 

cordonnier m. shoemaker, [lit'ly, 
worker in Cordovan leather.] 

corps in. body; corpse. \L.corpw.] 



212 



FREKCH-ENGLISH 



cote /. side, part. [fr. L. costa, 
rib.] 

coucher v. lay down, put to rest or 
to bed : se . . ., retire to rest, go 
to bed. [L. collocate.] 

coudre v. (irr. 34) sew. [L. con- 
suere.] 

coup m. blow, stroke, bit ; dis- 
charge, shot : tout-a-coup, sud- 
denly, all at once ; a coup sur, 
assuredly, to a certainty, with- 
out fail ; coup d'oeil, glance, sud 
den look ; and compare beau- 
coup. [L. colaphum, fr. Gr.] 

cour /. court ; courtyard, yard. 
[L. chortem.] 

courir v. (irr. 52) run ; be current, 
circulate ; run after, hunt. [L. 
currere.~] 

court adj. short, brief, curt. [L. 
curium. ~\ 

cousin m. cousine /. cousin. [L. 
consobrinum.] 

couteau m. knife. [L. cultcllum.] 

couturiere/. seamstress, dressmak- 
er, [fr. couture, L. consuturam, 
sewing.] 

couvert m. cover, plate etc. for 
eating, seat at table, [pple of 
couvrir. ] 

couvrir v. (irr. 56) cover, envelop ; 
fill. [L. cooperire.] 

craindre v. {irr. 15) fear, be afraid ; 
be afraid of, dread. [L. tre- 
mere, tremble.] 

crayon m. pencil, [fr. L. cretam, 
chalk.] 

creer v. create. [L. creare.] 

croire v. (irr. 26) believe, think, be 
of opinion, suppose ; believe to 
belong, credit ; with in fin. think 
one's self. [L. credere.'] 

croitre v. (irr. 19) grow, increase. 
[L. crescere.~\ 

cruel adj. cruel. [L. crudelem.] 

cruellement adv. cruelly, [fr. 
cruel.] 

cueillir v. (irr. 46) collect, gather, 
pick, cull. [L. colligereT] 

*cuiller (73&) /. spoon. [L. coch- 
leare.] 

cuisine/, kitchen. [L. coquinam.] 



cuisiniere/. cook. [fr. cuisine.] 

dame/, lady. [L. dominant.] 

Danemark m. Denmark. 

dans prep, in, into, to. [L. de 

intus.] 
davantage adv. yet more, more, 

further, in addition, [de and 

avantage.] 
deprep. (III.-V.) of ; from; about, 

respecting ; out of, because of, 

on account of, for ; with, by, 

through ; at, in, on ; to ; some 

or any (IV.) ; than (XV. 9) ; as. 

[L. de.] 
debout adv. on end, in upright 

position, erect, standing, not 

thrown down, [de and bout, 

end.] 
decembre m. December. [L.] 
dechoir v. (irr. 70) fall, sink, de- 
cay. [L. decider e.] 
dedans adv. within, [de and 

dans.] 
defier v. defy : se . . . de, distrust, 

doubt. [L. diffidere.] 
degeler v. thaw, melt, [de- (L. dis) 

and geler.] 
dehors adv. without, outside, [de 

and hors, without.] 
deja adv. already, [des and ja, 

L jam, now.] 
dejeuner m. breakfast. [LL. di«je- 

junare, relieve of hunger.] 
demander v. ask, request. [L. de- 

mandare.] 
demain adv. to-morrow: apres-de- 

main, day after to-morrow. [L. 

de and mane, in the morning.] 
demeurer v. continue, abide, dwell, 

live. [L. demorari.] 
demi adj. half : demi-heure, half- 
hour ; demi-savant, half-learned, 

sciolist. [L. dimidium.] 
dent/, tooth. [L. dentem.] 
depecher v. despatch : se . . ., make 

haste, hasten. [LL. dispedicare, 

dis impede.] 
deplaire v. (irr. 24) displease, be 

disagreeable to. [de- (L. di*) and 

plaire.] 
depuis prep, from, since, during 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



213 



. , . past, for, ago : depuis que, 
since (conj.). [de and puis, then.] 

dernier adj. (VIII. 5c) last, con- 
cluding ; last past, next preced- 
ing the present, [fr. OF. der- 
rain, fr. L. de retro.'] 

dernierement adv. lastly ; lately, 
recently, [fr. dernier.] 

derriere prep, behind, [fr. L. de 
retro.] 

des prep, from, starting from, be- 
ginning with, since : des que, 
from the time that, as soon as. 
[L. de ex ?] 

descendre v. descend, come down, 
fall. [L. descend ere.] 

desir m. desire, wish. [fr. desirer, 
L. demlerare.] 

desormais adv. henceforth. [L. de 
ipsa Itora, magis.] 

*dessous (IBd)adv, prep, under, be- 
neath, [de and sous, L. subtus.] 

*dessus (ISd) ndv.prep.&bove,\ipon, 
on. [de and sus, L. susum.] 

deux num. two. [L. duo.] 

deuxieme (81c) num. second, [fr. 
deux.] 

devant prep. adv. before, in front 
of. in front au-devant de, to 
the front of, so as to meet, to 
meet, [de and avant (L. ab 
ante).] 

devenir v. (irr. 60) become, come 
to be, turn. [L. devenir e.] 

devoir v. (irr. 66) owe, be under 
obligation, be required, have to, 
be appointed or intended or des- 
tined, be to (with infin.: XXVI. 
12/*) , be sure to. [L. debere.] 

devoir m. duty. [inf. of devoir.] 

Dieu m. God. [L. deum.] 

difficile adj difficult, hard. [L. 
d ffici/em ] 

difficult* /. difficulty. [L.] 

dimanche m. Lord's day, Sunday 
[L, dominicam, of the Lord ] 

diner v. dine, [ ?] 

diner m. dinner, [inf. of diner.] 

dire v. (irr 9 ; p. 155) say, tell ; 
name, appoint. [L. dicere.] 

disparaitre v. (irr. 18) disappear, 
vanish, [dis and paraitre.] 



divers adj. diverse, different, vari- 
ous. [L. diver sum.] 

*dix (816, 85c) num. ten. [L. de- 
cern.] 

*dix-huit (816) num. eighteen, 
[dix and huit.] 

*dix-huitieme (816) num. eigh- 
teenth, [fr. dix-huit.] 

*dixieme (81c) num. tenth, [fr. 
dix.] 

*dix-neuf (816) num. nineteen, 
[dix and neuf.] 

*dix-sept (816) num. seventeen, 
[dix and sept.] 

domestique adj. domestic : as noun, 
domestic, servant. [L. domes- 
ticum.] 

done adv. then ; therefore, conse- 
quently ; pray, do (with impv.). 
[L. ad tunc] 

donner v. donate, give, bestow. 
[L. donare.] 

dont adv. pron. (XXVI. 7) 
whence ; of whom, whose. [L. 
de unde. ] 

dormir v. (irr. 43) sleep. [L. dor- 
mire. ] 

double adj. double. [L. du- 
plum ] 

doucement adv. sweetly, softly, 
mildly, [fr. doux.] 

douter v. doubt, question (about, 
de): se . . . de, suspect. [L. dubu 
tare.] 

doux adj. (VII. 8) sweet, soft,, 
pleasant. [L. dulccm.] 

douzaine /. dozen, twelve or so. 
[fr. douze.] 

douze num. twelve. [L. duodecim.] 

douzieme num. twelfth, [fr. douze.] 

drap m. cloth. [?] 

droit adj. direct, straight, right : 
adv. (XXXI. 9) straight, direct 
ly. [L. directum.] 

droit m. right. [L. directum.] 

durant prep, during, pending, 
[pple of durer, L. durare.] 

eau/. water. [L. aquam.] 
echauffer v. warm, heat : s' ..., be- 
come warm or hot, grow excited, 
[fr. L. calcfacere.] 



214 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



eclore v. (irr. 28) unclose,open,bud, 

hatch. |L. ex and claudere.] 
ecole f. school. [L. sclwlam, fr. 

Or.] 
ecouter v. listen to, hear. [L. aus- 

cvltare.] 
eerier v. s' . . ., cry out, exclaim. 

[e- (L. ex) and crier, cry.] 
ecrire v. {irr. 12) write. [L. scri- 

bere.] 
Edouard m. Edward, 
effet m. effect, result : en effet, in 

fact, indeed, really, to be sure. 

[L. effectuM.] 
eglise /. church. [L. ecclesiarn, 
, fr. Gr.] 
Egypte/. Egypt. 
eleve m. one brought up, pupil. 

[fr. elever.] 
elever v. raise, elevate ; bring up, 

educate : s' . . ., rise, arise, go 

up. [L. elevare.] 
Elisabeth/. Elizabeth, 
elle pron. she ; it. [L. illam ] 
*emmener (53a) v. lead away, carry 

off. [en (L. inde) and mener.] 
*-emment (26a) adv. ending 
emouvoir v. {irr. 76) touch with 

emotion, move, agitate. [L. 

emovere.] 
empereur in. emperor. [L. impe- 

ratorem.] 
empire m. empire. [L . im perium . ] 
employer v. employ. [L. impli- 

care. ] 
en adv. pron. (XXIII. 5-8) thence, 

away ; of it, of them, of him or 

her ; its, their ; in respect to or 

about it or them ; some or any 

(XXIII. 7); one or ones. [L. 

inde.] 
en prep. (VI. 1") in, at, on ; to, 

into ; in the act or course of, 

while (X. 3c) ; in character of, 

as, like. [L. in.] 
encore (or encor) adv. to this time, 

yet, still ; further, in addition, 

besides, more, again : encore que, 

although, even though. [L. 

lianc horamj] 
encre /. ink. [L. encaustum, en- 
caustic, fr. Gr.] 



endormir v (irr. 43) put to sleep 
s' . . ., fall asleep, go to sleep. 
[L. indormire.] 

enfant m. (and f.) child. [L. in- 
fantem, infant.] 

enfin adv. in fine, at the end, at 
last, finally, [en and fin.] 

ennemi in. ennemie/. enemy. [L. 
inimicum.'] 

*ennuyer (58<7) v. weary, bore : 
s' . . ., be wearied or bored or 
tired, [fr. ennui, L. in odio.] 

*ennuyeux (52a) adj. wearisome, 
tedious, [fr. ennui.] 

enorme adj. enormous, immense. 
[L en or mem.'] 

ensemble adv. together, at the same 
time, in company or union. [L. 
in simul.] 

ensuite adv. in the next place, next, 
afterward, then, [en and suite, 
succession.] 

entendre v. hear ; attend to, under- 
stand : s' . . . a, understand 
about, be a judge of. [L. in- 
tendered] 

entre prep, between, among : d'en- 
tre, from among. [L. inter.] 

entreprendre v. {irr. 30) undertake, 
[entre and prendre, take.] 

envers prep, toward, [en and vers, 
toward.] 

envoyer v. (irr. 81) send, despatch. 
[L. in via re ] 

epaule /. shoulder. [L. spatu- 
lam.] 

Espagne/. Spain. 

esperance/. hope. [fr. esperer.] 

esperer v. hope. [L. sperare.] 

espoir in. hope. [fr. esperer.] 

esprit m. spirit, soul ; mind, in- 
tellect ; wit, cleverness, bright 
ness. [L. spirit vm.] 

essayer v. try, make trial or essay 
of, attempt, [fr. essai, L. ex- 
aqium] 

*est (76a) m. east. [G.] 

*estomac (58//) m. stomach. [L., 
fr. Gr.] 

et (86a) conj. and : et . . . et, both 
. . . and. [L. et.] 

etc, (et csetera) and so forth. [L.] 



YOCABULAKY TO THE EXERCISES. 



215 



ete to. summer. [L. osstatem.'] 
etre v. (irr., p. 62) be ; as auxil., be, 
have (XXVIII. 6-8) ; go : c'est 
que, the thing or fact or reason 
is ; etre a, belong to ; y etre, be 
up to anything, understand ; en 
etre, be with respect to things, 
be at a point. [L. stare, esse. ] 
etre to. being, creature ; exist- 
ence ; essence, characteristic, 
[inf. of etre.] 
Europe/. Europe, 
eux pron. them. [L. illos.~] 
excellent adj. excellent, [fr. ex- 

celler, L. excellere.~\ 
extreme adj. extreme. [L.] 
extremement adv. extremely, [fr. 
extreme.] 

fabricant to. manufacturer, maker, 
[pple of fabriquer, L. fabricari.] 

fabrique/. factory. [L. fabricam, 
workshop.] 

facher v. offend, disturb, fash, 
anger : se . . ., be offended or dis- 
turbed, be angry, [fr. L. fasti- 
dium, aversion.] 

facile adj. easy. [L. facilem.'] 

facilement adv. easily, [fr. facile.] 

faible adj. feeble, weak. [L. fie- 
bilem, pitiful.] 

faillir v. {irr. 50) fail, come short ; 
come just short, be close upon 
or near to, just miss of. [L. 
fallere, deceive.] 

faim to. hunger, famine : avoir 
faim, be hungry (XIII. 6). [L. 
famem.] 

faire v. (irr. 23, p. 150) make, do, 
act ; cause, make (XXXII. 9o) ; 
be (of weather) (XXXII. 9a); 
put in order, fix : se . . . a, ac- 
custom or reconcile one's self 
to ; en etre fait, be all over ; 
bien fait, well shaped, shapely, 
of good figure ; faire voir, show, 
exhibit, [lu.facere.] 

fait (76 ') m. feat, deed, action, ex- 
ploit, [pple of faire.] 

falloir v. (irr. 74, p. 141) imperii. 
be obliged, must, have to ; be 
lacking, need, want- peu s'en 



faut, there is little lacking. [L. 

fallere, deceive, j 
famille /. family, [h. familiam.] 
fatiguer v. fatigue, tire, weary : se 

. . ., be tired or weary. [L. 

fatigare.] 
faute /. lack, deficiency, fault : 

faut de, for lack of, in default 

of. [fr. faillir.] 
*femme (26a)/. woman, wife : . . . 

de cbambre, see chambre. [L. 

femi)iam.~\ 
fenetre/ window. [L.fenestram.] 
ferme/. farm. [fr. fermer, L. fir- 
mare, make firm.] 
fermier to. fermiere/. farmer, [fr. 

ferme, noun.] 
feu w. fire. [L. focum.] 
feuille /. leaf, sheet. [L. folia, 

leaves.] 
fevrier to. February. [L.] 
fier v. confide : se . . . a, trust one's 

self to, trust. [L. fidere.] 
*fil (Q8d) to. thread. [L. filum.~\ 
fille/. daughter, girl. [Jj.filiam.] 
*fils (68c, 74d) to. son. [L. 

filius. ] 
fin /. end, finis : a la fin, in the 

end, at length ; sans fin, without 

end, to all eternity ; afin, see the 

word. [L. finem.~] 
fin adj. fine, delicate, elegant. [L. 

finitum, finished.] 
finir v. finish, bring to an end : en 

finir, make a finish or close. 

[L. finire.] 
fleur/ flower. [L. florem.] 
fleurir v. (XIX. 3£) flourish, [fr. 

fleur.] 
fleuve to. river. [L. fluvium.] 
fois /. time (successive), turn in 

succession : a la fois, at the 

same time, at once. [L. vicem . ] 
force /. force, strength, might, 

power : a force de, by dint or 

means of. [L. fortia, strong.] 

fort adj. strong : adv. strongly, 

atly, much, very much, very. 

'L.fortem.'] 

fourcbette/. fork. [fr. Jj.furca.'] 

frais, fraicbe (VII. 8) adj. fresh. 

[fr. G.] 



s 



216 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



franc, tranche (VII. 6ft) adj. frank, 

free; prepaid, [fr. G.] 
franc in. franc (piece of money). 

[fr. inscription Francorum rex, 

king of the French.] 
francais adj. French, [fr. France.] 
France/. France, 
franchement adv. frankly. [fr. 

franc] 
Francois m. Francis, Frank. 
Fran<joise /. Frances, Fanny. 
Frederic m. Frederick, 
frere in. brother ; holy brother ; 

friar. [L. fratrem.] 
froid adj. cold, cool : avoir froid 

(XIII. 6) be cold (in, a). [L. 

frigidum.] 
fromage rn. cheese. [LL. forma- 

ticum, shaped.] 
fruit m. fruit ; valuable result, 

profit. [L. fructum.] 
fuir v. (trr. 47) flee, fly ; fly from, 

shun. [L. fur/ere.'] 
furieux adj. furious, raging, an- 
gry. [L. furiu8um.~\ 

gai adj. gay. [fr. G.] 

garcon m. boy. lad, fellow, ser- 
vant, waiter, bachelor. [ ?] 

gare /. station, terminus, depot, 
[fr. G. (Eng. ware).] 

gateau m. cake. [fr. G.] 

gauche adj. awkward, clumsy ; 
left (hand or side). [fr. G. 
(Eng. gawk).] 

*gaz (83a) m. gas. 

geler v. solidify, stiffen, freeze. 
[L. gelare.] 

general adj. general : en general, 
in general, ordinarily. [L. J 

general m. general officer, general. 
[= general adj.] 

Geneve/. Geneva. 

gens /. pi. folks, people, persons ; 
servants. [L. gentem] 

*gentil (68c) adj. nice, good, well- 
behaved, pretty. [L. gentilem.] 

gentilhomme (pi. *gentilshommes, 
68c) m. man of good birth or 
breeding, gentleman. [gentil 
and homme.] 

grand adj. great, grand, large, tall: 



grandchose, something or any- 
thing great, matter of impor- 
tance. [L. grandem.] 

grandement adv. greatly, largely, 
grandly, [fr. grand.] 

grand'mere /. grandmother, 
[grand and mere.] 

grand-pere m. grandfather, [grand 
and pere.] 

* gratis (74d) adv. gratis. [L.] 

greler v. impers. hail. [fr. grele, 
gravel-stone, fr. ?] 

gros adj. big, stout, large. [L. 
grosxum.] 

guere adv. (with ne) hardly, scarce- 
ly, but little, [fr. G. weigaro, 
much.] 

guerre/ war. [fr. G., =war.] 

Guillaume in. William. 

habiller v. dress, clothe : s' . . ., 
dress one's self. [fr. habile (?) ] 

habit in. coat, dress. [L. liabi- 
1 a in.] 

'haine / hate, hatred, aversion: 
avoir en haine, regard with hate, 
have an aversion for. [fr. 
hair.] 

'hair v (XIX. 3^)hate, detest, dis- 
like, [fr. G , =Eng. hate.] 

'Hanovre m. Hanover. 

'hater v. se . . ., hurry one's self, 
hasten, [fr. hate, haste, fr. G., 
=Eng. h n Hie.] 

'haut auj. high, tall, lofty, up- 
lifted : en haut, on high, above, 
upstairs. [L. aUum.] 

'haut n dr (XXXI. 9) in a high or 
loud tone, aloud. [=hautadj.] 

'haatement adv. highly, haughtily, 
boldly, loudly, [fr. haut.] 

le 'Havre (VI. 5/), Havre (city of 
France). 

Henri m. Henry. 

Henriette/. Henrietta, Harriet. 

heure/ hour ; time of day, o'clock 
(XVII. 4) : de bonne heure, in, 
good time, early ; a la bonn& 
heure, in good time, very well, 
well done ; tout a lheure, at 
this moment, immediately, just 
now, presently. [L. horam.] 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



217 



heureusement adv. happily, luck- 
ily, [fr. heureux.] 
heureux adj. happy, fortunate, 

lucky, [fr. heur, L. augurium, 

augury.] 
hier (73a) adv. yesterday : avant- 

hier, day before yesterday. [L. 

heri.~\ 
histoire /. history ; story. [L. 

historia?n.] 
*hiver (73&) m. winter. [L. hiber- 

nmn.~\ 
'Hollande /. Holland, 
homme m. man : etre homme a, be 

the right person for, be the one 

to. [L. hominem.] 
honnete adj. (VIII. 5c) honest ; 

worthy, excellent ; respectable, 

creditable. [L. hniestum.'] 
'honte/. shame : avoir honte ( XIII. 

6), feel shame, be ashamed, [fr. 

G-., Saxon honda, dishonor.] 
hormis prep, except, [hors and 

mis, pple of mettre, put.] 
horreur /. horror. [L ] 
'hors adv. prep. out. out of, out- 
side : hors de, outside of, out of. 

[L.foras.] 
*'huit (64c, 76a) num. eight. [L. 

ocio.~\ 
'huitieme num. eighth, [fr. huit.] 

ici adv. here. [L. ecce hie] 
ignorant adj. ignorant, unlearned. 

[L.] 
il, ils (GSd) pron. he, it, they ; 
there ; as indef. subject (XI. 2, 
XXIV. 2), it ; as impers. subject 
(XXX. 1), it. [L. ilium, illos.] 
immense adj. immense. |"L.] 
importer v. be important or of con- 
sequence, matter, signify, con- 
cern : n'importe, it is of no 
consequence, no matter, never 
mind. [L. importare.] 
impossible adj. impossible. [L.] 
impunement adv. with impunity, 
unpunished. [fr. impuni, fr. 
punir, punish.] 
Indes /. pi. the Indies, India, 
indigne adj. unworthy. [L. in- 
dignum.] 



inquiet adj. unquiet, disturbed. 

restless. [L. inquielum.] 
insolent adj. insolent, impertinent. 

[L.] 
instruire v. (irr. 2) instruct. [L. 

instruere.] 
interessant adj. interesting, [pple 

of interesser, fr. L. interesse.] 
interrompre v. (XX. 3b) interrupt, 

break in upon. [L. interrum- 

pere.] 
inviter v. invite. [L. invitare.] 
Italie /. Italy. 

Jacques m. James. 

*jadis (74d) adv. of old, in old 

times, formerly. [L. jam diu.] 
jamais adv. (with ne) never, not 

ever ; ever. [L. jam magis. ] 
jambe/. leg. [LL. gambam.] 
Janvier m. January. [L. janu- 

avium.] 
jardin m. garden, [fr. G., =Eng. 

garden.} 
Japon m. Japan, 
je pron. I. [L. ego.] 
Jean m. John. 

Jeanne /. Jane, Joan, Joanna, 
jeter v. (XXI. 3c) throw, cast, 

hurl ; spread, [fr. jet, jet, L. 

jactum.] 
jeudi m. Thursday. [L. Jovis diem, 

Jupiter's day.] 
jeune adj. young. [L. juvenem.] 
joindre v. {irr. 17) join, unite. [L. 

jungere.] 
joli adj. pretty, nice, pleasing. 

[fr. G., =Eng.>%.] 
joliment adv. prettily, [fr. joli.] 
jouer v. play. [L.jocari.] 
jouet m. plaything, toy. [fr. 

jouer.] 
jour m. day; daylight, light : faire 

jour (XXXII. 9a), be daylight. 

[L. diurnum.] 
journal m. journal, daily paper, 

newspaper. [L. diurnalem.] 
juillet m. July. [L. julium.] 
juin m. June. [L. junium.] 
Jules m. Julius. 
Julie/. Julia, 
jusque adv. as far as, all the way 



218 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



jusqu'a, all the way to, as far as, 
clear to ; jusqu'a ce que, until ; 
jusqu'ou, how far ? [L. de and 
usque.] 

juste adj. just, correct, suitable ; 
exact, precise : au juste, precise- 
ly, exactly. [L. juxt u m . ] 

juste adv. exactly, correctly, in 
tune. [= juste adj : XXXI. 9.] 

la art. pron. the ; her, it. [L. il- 
ium.] 

la adv. (XIII. 3, XXIV.) there : 
de la, from there, thence ; p ar 
la, that way, by that route [L. 
HUie.] 

la-bas "dr. down there, over there. 
yonder ; in the other world [la 
and bas.] 

laborieux adj. laborious, industri- 
ous. [L. labti'ioxifiH ] 

la-dessus adv. thereupon, with re- 
gard to that, in that respect. 
tla and dessus.] 

laid adj. ugly, homely, [fr. G., 
= Eng. loathe.'] 

laine. f. wool. [L. lanam.] 

laisser v leave, quit, abandon ; let, 
leave, allow, permit, cause ; 
leave off (from, de), omit, fail, 
fall short of. [L. laxare.] 

lait m. milk. [L. Lac] 

langue/. tongue; language, speech: 
tirer la langue, thrust out the 
longue, make faces or grimaces. 
[L. linguam.] 

lai_,eur /. breadth, width, [fr. 
1-rge, L. largvm.] 

le art. pron. the ; -him, it ; so 
(XXIII. 3e). [L. ?/lum.] 

lecon /. lesson. [L. leationem.] 

leger adj. light, nimble, lively ; 
frivolous, empty, [fr. L levin.] 

legume m. vegetable, pot-herb. 
IL. leg amen.] 

lendemain m. morrow, following 
day. [le, en, and demain.] 

lent adj. slow, tardy. [L. lentum. 

lentement adv. slowly, [fr. lent. 

lequel pron. (XXV. 5, XXVI. 4-7) 
which one, who, that, [le and 
quel.] 



les art. pron. the ; them. [L. 

Mas, Mas.] 
lettre/. letter. [L. literam.] 
leur pron. to them ; their, theirs 

(XIV. 1, 3, XXVII. 1). [L. illo- 

rum.] 
lever v. raise, lift : se . . ., rise, get 

up. [L. levare.] 
libre adj. free, at liberty. [L. 

Uberum.] 
lieu m. place : avoir lieu, take 

place, happen ; tenir lieu de, 

take the place of, serve as ; au 

lieu de, instead of. [L. lor inn. \ 
lire v. (irr. 11) read, peruse. [L. 

Icgere] 
^lis (74d) m. lily. [L. lilivm.] 
lit m. bed, couch. [L. tectum.'] 
livre m. book. [L. libriim.] 
livre /. pound ; livre (piece or 

amount of money, nearly = 

franc). [L. Ubram. \ 
loi /. law. [L. legem.] 
loin adv. far, to or at a distance : 

loin de, far from ; loin que, far 

from its being the case that. [L. 

longe.] 
Londres m. London, 
long adj. (VII. 6b) long ; a long 

story, lengthy, tedious : le long 

de, the length of, along. [L. 

Ion gum.] 
longtemps adv. for a long time, for 

a great while, long, [long and 

temps.] 
longuement adv. at length, length- 
ily, [fr. long.] 
longueur/, length, [fr. long.] 
lors adv. then : lors de, at the time 

of [L. ilia hora, at that hour.] 
lorsque conj. at the time that, when, 

as. [lors and que.] 

1 louer v. let out, lend, hire. [L. 
I oca re.] 

2 louer v. praise. [L. laudare.] 
Louis m. Lewis, Louis. 

louis m. louis, louis d'or (piece of 
money, of 20 or 24 francs), [fr. 
Louis, name of king.] 

Louise/. Louisa. 

lui pron. him ; to him or her. [L. 
Mi huic] 



Vocabulary to the exekcises. 



219 



luire v. (irr. 5) shine. [L lucere.~\ 

lumiere /. light ; pi. lights, en- 
lightenment, intelligence and 
knowledge. [fr. L. lumen, 
' Hght.] 

lundi m. Monday. [L. lunce diem, 
moon's day.] 

Lyon in. Lyons. 

madame sing, mesdames pi. (XIV. 
4) /. my lady, the lady, madam, 
Mrs. [ma and dame.] 

mademoiselle sing mesdemoiselles 
pi. /. my young lady, the young 
lady, Miss, [ma and demoiselle, 
damsel.] 

magasin m. magazine, store, shop, 
[fr. Arabic] 

mai in. May. [L. malum.] 

main /. hand : a la main, in the 
hand ; entre les mains, between 
or into the hands, into the 
charge. [L. manum.] 

maintenant adv. now, at present, 
[pple of maintenir, maintain, fr. 
main and tenir, keep in hand.] 

mais ronj. but [L. mag in, more.] 

*mais (1M) m. maize, Indian corn. 
[Indian word ] 

maison /. house, mansion : a la 
maison, in the house, at home. 
[L. mansionem.] 

maitre m. master, owner, ruler, 
teacher : maitre chanteur, mas- 
ter or chief singer. [L. magis- 
trum.] 

maitresse /. mistress, owner, di- 
rector, [fern, to maitre.] 

mal adv. badly, ill. [L. male.] 

mal m. evil, ill, harm, hurt, pain, 
disease : avoir mal a (XIII. 6a) 
have pain or ache in. [L. ma- 
lum.] 

malade adj. sick, ill : as noun, 
sick person, patient. [L. male 
apt urn.] 

malgre prep, in spite of, notwith- 
standing, [fr. L. malum gratum.] 

malheur in. unhappiness, misfor- 
tune, [fr. L. malum augurium.] 

maiheureux adj. unfortunate, un- 
happy, [fr. malheur. J 



malle /. trunk, mail. [fr. G.] 

manche m. f. handle ; sleeve, [fr. 
L. man us, hand.] 

manchette /. cuff. [fr. manche.] 

manger v. eat. [L. manducare, 
chew.] 

maniere /. manner, way, method : 
de maniere, in such a way, in 
such wise, so ; de . . . que, so 
that. [fr. L. maims, hand.] 

manteau m. mantle, cloak. [L. 
maniellum.] 

marchand m. dealer, retail mer- 
chant, shopkeeper, [fr. L. mer- 
cari.] 

marche in. market : bon marche 'or 
a bon marche, in a favorable 
market, cheaply, cheap. [L. 
mercatum.] 

marcher v. march, walk, advance, 
get on, make progress. [?] 

mardi m. Tuesday. [L. mariis 
diem, day of Mars.] 

mari m. husband. [L. maritnm.] 

mariage in. marriage, [fr. marier.] 

Marie/. Mary, Maria. 

marier v. marry, give in marriage : 
se . . ., get married, marry. [L. 
maritare. ] 

Marguerite/. Margaret. 

*mars (74rf) m. March. [L. mar- 
tin m.] 

*mat (76'/) adj. dull, dead ; check- 
mated, [fr. G. matt.] 

matelot m. sailor. [?] 

matin m. morning : de grand or 
bon matin, very early. [L. ma- 
tucinum.] 

maudire v. (irr. 10) curse, accurse. 
[L. maledicere.] 

mauvais adj. bad, evil, wicked, 
naughty, wrong [?] 

me pron. me, to me. [L. me.] 

mechant adj. wicked, bad, evil, 
malicious, mischievous. [fr. 
meschoir, L. minus cadere, turn 
out ill.] 

meconnaitre r>. (irr. 18) misunder- 
stand, misappreciate. [me-, mis-, 
and connaitre, know.] 

mecontent adj. ill-content, dissatis- 
fied, [me-, mis-, and content.] 



no 



MEKCH-EKGLISBt 



Mediterranee /. Mediterranean 
(sea). 

meilleur adj. (IX. 3) better : le 
meilleur, best. [L. meliorem.] 

meme adj. self, -self (XXIII. 3c) ; 
self-same, same, very ; as adv. 
even : de meme, in the same man- 
ner, all the same. [fr. L. semet 
ipsissimum, very own self.] 

mener v. lead, conduct, take. [L. 
minar e, drive.] 

-ment adv. ending (XXXI. 2) =-ly. 
[L. mente, with mind.] 

mentir v. (irr. 41) lie, tell a lie, 
speak falsely. [L. mentiri.] 

merf. sea. [L. mare.] 

merci m. gratitude, thanks. [L. 
mercedem, recompense ] 

mercredi m. Wednesday. [L mer- 
curii diem, Mercury's day.] 

mere/, mother. [L. matrem.] 

mesdames, see madame. 

*messieurs, see monsieur. 

metre m. meter, (a little more than 
a) yard. [L. metrvm. fr. Gr.] 

mettre v. (irr. 31) put, place, set : 
mettre a, put in a state of, re- 
duce or drive to ; mettre a la 
porte, turn out of doors ; se . . . 
a, set one's self at, begin, com 
mence. [L. mittere, send.] 

Mexique m. Mexico. 

midi m. midday, noon, twelve 
o'clock. [L. medium diem.] 

mien adj. (XXVII. 1) mine. [fr. 
L. meum.] 

mieux adv. (XXXI. 8) better ; 
more : le mieux, best ; aimer 
mieux, like better, prefer ; de 
son mieux, one's best or utmost, 
the best one can. [L. melius.] 

*mil (68c?), see mille. 

milieu m. middle, midst. [L. 
medium locum, mid place.] 

*mille (68/), *mil (XV. 7) num. 
thousand. [L. mille.] 

*mille (68/) / mile. [L. millia, 
thousand (paces).] 

million m. million, [fr. mille.] 

minuit m. midnight, twelve o'clock 
at night, [fr. L. median noctcm.] 

minute/, minute, moment, sixtieth 



of an hour. [L. minutam, 

small, minute.] 
moderement adv. moderately, [fr. 

modere, pple of moderer.] 
modeste adj. modest. [L.] 
modestement adv. modestly, [fr. 

modeste.] 
moi pron. me, to me, I. [L. me.] 
moindre adj. (IX. 3) less : le moin- 

dre, least. [L. mi nor em.] 
moins adv. (XXXI 8) less, the 

less (XXXIV. 3) : le moins, least; 

au or du moins, at least, at any 

rate ; a moins de, short of, with- 
out ; a moins que, unless. [L. 

minus.] 
mois m. month. [L. mensem.] 
moitie / moiety, half. [L. medi- 

etatem.] 
moment m. moment, instant. [L.] 
mon, ma, mes pron. (XIV. 1) my. 

[L. meum.] 
monde m. world ; company, so- 
ciety, set, audience : tout le 

monde, everybody. [L. mun- 

dmn.] 
*monsieur (18rZ. 73c) sing. *mes- 

sieurs (73c) pi. m. (XIV. 4) the 

gentleman, sir, Mr., Messrs. 

[mon and sieur, L. seniorem.] 
montagne / mountain. [L. mon- 

tan emu] 
monter v. mount, ascend, climb, 

rise ; get on to (a horse, etc.) ; 

go upstairs, [fr. L. mon tern, 

mountain.] 
montrer v. show, set forth, ex- 
hibit. [L. mo i. st rare.] 
moquer v. mock : se . . . de, deride, 

scoff, ridicule, make fun vr 

game of. [?] 
morceau m. bit, morsel, sm.i]l 

piece, extract, [fr. L. morsuin, 

pple of mordere. bite.] 
mort / death. [L. mortem.] 
mort adj. dead ; as noun, dead 

person, corpse [pple of mourir.] 
mot m. word, term, expression, 

utterance. [LL. muttum, fr ?| 
mouchoir m. handkerchief, [fr. 

moucher, fr. LL. muccare, fr. 

mucus, mucus.] 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



221 



moarir v. (irr. 62) die, decease. 
[L. mori.] 

mouvoir v. (irr. 76) move. [L. 
movere.] 

moyenner v. mediate, bring about : 
moyennant, by means of, in con- 
sideration of. [fr. moyen, means, 
fr. L. medianum.] 

music. [L., fr. Gr ] 



naitre v. {irr. 20) be born, come 
into being or existence, spring 
up, arise. [L. nasci.] 

nappe /. table cloth. [L. mappam.~] 

nation/, nation. [L.] 

ne adv. not. [L. non.] 

neanmoins adv. nevertheless, [ne- 
ant, nothing (fr. L. ne ens), and 
moins.] 

*net (76'/) adj. neat, clean, fair. 
[L. nitidum.] 

nettement adv. neatly, clearly, dis- 
tinctly, [fr. net.] 

nettoyer v. make neat or clean, 
clean, put in order, [fr. net.] 

nevLladj. new, fresh [L. novum.] 

neuf (61a, 85c) num. nine. [L. 
novem.] 

neuvieme num. ninth, [fr. neuf 
num.] 

neveu m. nephew. [L. nepotem.] 

nez m. nose. [L. naxum.] 

ni adv. (XII. 5) neither, nor. [L. 
nee.]. 

niece /. niece. [L. neptiam.] 

noir adj. black. [L. nigrum.] 

nom vi. name ; reputation, char 
acter, note. [L. nornen.] 

nombre m. number ; great number 
of, many : sans nombre, num- 
berless, innumerable. [L. nu- 
meric tn.] 

nommer v name, call or mention 
byname. [L= nominare] 

non adv. not , no •. non plus, not 
any more, either. [L. non.] 

nord m. north, [fr. G.] 

Norvege/. Norway. 

notre, nos pron (XIV. 1) our. [L. 
nostrum.] 

notre pron. (XXVII. 1) ours. [L. 
nostrum .1 



nous pron. we, us, to us. [L. 
nos.] 

nouveau, nouvel adj. (VII. 7) new, 
recent, novel, new-fashioned. 
[L. novellum.] 

novembre m. November. [L.] 

nuire v. (irr. 4) injure, harm, do 
hurt (to, a). [L. nocere.] 

nuit /. night. [L. noctem.) 

nul pron. not any, none, no ; no 
one ; null, of no value or effect : 
nulle part, nowhere. [L. nul- 
lum.] 

nullement adv. in no wise, not at 
all. [fr. nul.] 

obeir v. be obedient (to, a), obey. 

[L. obedire.] 
obtenir v. {irr. 61) obtain. [L. ob- 

tinere.] 
octante num. (XV. 3a) eighty. [L. 

octaginta.] 
octobre m. October. [L.] 
oeil 7>i. (yeux pi.) eye. [L. oculum.] 
oeuf m. (*oeufs [61a] pi.) egg. [L. 

ovum.] 
offrir v. (irr. 53) offer, set before, 

present : s' . . ., make offer of 

one's self, offer, [fr. L. offer re.] 
oh inter j. oh ! ah ! 
*oignon (43a) m. onion. [L. unio- 

n em.] 
oiseau m. bird. [LL. avicellum, 

fr. avis, bird.] 
on pron. (XXVII. 4) one, people, 

they. [OF. horn, L. hominern.] 
oncle m uncle. [L. avunculum.] 
onze (64f) num. eleven. [L. un- 

decim.] 
onzieme (64/) num. eleventh, [fr. 

onze.] 
or adv. conj. now. [LJior am, hour.] 
or m. gold. [L. aurum.] 
ordinairement adv. ordinarily, usu- 
ally, [fr. ordinaire, L. ordina- 

num.] 
oreille /. ear. [L. auricula7n ] 
orphelin m. orpheline / orphan, 

orphaned, [fr, L. orphanus.] 
oser v. dare. [fr. L. audere.] 
oter v. take away, take off, remove 

[?, =Eng. oust.] 



m 



FKENCH-ENGLISH 



ou conj. or ; ou . . . ou, either . . . 
or. [L. aut.] 

Ou adv. pron. (XXVI. 8) where ? 
where ; to or at or in which : 
d'oil, from where, whence ; par 
ou, by what way or route ; ou 
que, wherever. [L. ubi.~\ 

oublier v. forget, [fr. L. oMMsti.~\ 

*ouest (76a) m. west. [G.] 

oui (64/) adv. yes. [L. hoc Mud, 
that same.] 

ouir v. (irr. 49) hear. [L. audire.] 

*ours (74d) m. ourse /. bear. [L. 
ursum."] 

*outil (68c) m. tool, instrament. 
[fr. L. uti, use.] 

outre prep, beyond ; besides. |L. 
ultra.] 

ouvrage m. work, labor ; result of 
labor, product, work. [fr. ou- 
vrer, L. operari.] 

ouvrier m. ouvriere /. worker, la- 
borer, workman or workwoman. 
[L. operarium.] 

ouvrir ®. (irr. 55) open ; open the 
door. [L. aperire.] 

page/, page (of a book). [L. pa- 

ginam.\ 
pain m. bread : petit pain, roll, 

biscuit. [L. panem.] 
panier m. basket. [L. panarium, 

for bread.] 
*paon (31a) m. peacock. [L. pavo- 

nem.] 
papier m. paper. [L. papyrum ] 
paquet m. packet, package, parcel. 

[fr. G.] 
par prep, by, through, by means 

of : par ou, by what route or 

way. [L. per. ] 
paraitre (v. irr. 18) appear, be visi- 
ble, show one's self ; seem. [L. 

parescere.] 
parce que conj. because, for the 

reason that, [par ce, by this.] 
par-dessus adv. above, over and 

above, beyond, [par and dessus.] 
pardon m. pardon, forgiveness. 

[fr. pardonner, LL. perdonare ,~\ 
parent m. relative, parent. [L. 

parentem.] 



paresseux adj. idle, lazy. [fr. pa 
resse, L. pigritiaw, laziness.] 

parfaitement adv. perfectly, [fr. 
parfait, L. peifectitm.] 

Paris m. Paris. 

parler v. speak, talk, discourse, 
[fr. parole.] 

parmi prep, among. [L. per me- 
dium, through the midst.] 

parole /. word ; speech, language, 
[fr. L. parabo'am, fr. Gr.] 

part / part, portion, share ; side ; 
concern : a part, aside, apart ; 
de la part de, on the part of, in 
the name of, on behalf of, as 
from ; pour ma (etc.) part, for 
my (etc.) part, so far as I (etc.) 
am concerned ; autre or quelque 
or nulle part, elsewhere or some- 
where or nowhere ; prendre part, 
take a part, share ; se donner 
part, make one's self a sharer, 
assume a share. [L. partem.] 

parti m. division, party, side ; de- 
termination, resolution, [fr. par- 
tir.] 

partant adv. accordingly, hence, 
[par and tant.] 

partie/. part, portion, share, [fr. 
partir.] 

partir v. (irr. 38) set out, start, go 
away, leave, depart. [L. partite, 
divide.] 

partout adv. everywhere, [par and 
tout.] 

parvenir v. (irr. 60) arrive, attain, 
reach one's object, succeed. [L. 
pervenire.] 

pas m. step, pace ; footstep, track. 
[L. pass a m.~\ 

pas adv. (with ne) not (XII. ). [same 
as pas, noun.] 

passer v. pass, go on or by or 
through ; spend : se . . . , take 
place, occur, happen ; se . . . 
de, dispense with, do without, 
forego, [probably fr. pas.] 

patrie /. one's own country, father- 
land. [L. pntriam.] 

pauvre adj. (VIII. 5c) poor, needy, 
pitiful, miserable. [L. pavpe 
rem.] 



VOCABULARY TO THE EX EXCISES. 



n% 



*pays (37 ') in. country, laud : 
Pays-Bas, Low Countries, Neth- 
erlands. [L. pagensem, fr. pa- 
gus, village.] 

*paysan (37a) m. peasant, [fr.pays.] 

peche/. peach, \h.ptidcum, Per- 
sian.] 

peche/. fishing, [fr. pecher, fish, 
L. piscari.] 

peche m. sin, trespass. [L. pecca- 
tnm.] 

peindre v. {lit. 16) paint. [L. 
pingere.] 

peine /. pain, distress, grief, anx- 
iety ; trouble, difficulty ; pen- 
alty : a peine, with difficulty, 
hardly, scarcely, but just. [L. 
pee nam.] 

peintre m. painter. [L. pictor.~\ 

peinture /. painting. [L. pictu- 
ram.] 

pendant prep, during, pending : 
pendant que, during the time 
that, while, [pple of pendre, 
L. pendere, hang.] 

penser v. think : penser a, think 
on or of, turn one's thoughts to ; 
penser de, think about, have an 
opinion of. [L. pensare, fr. 
1-endere, hang.] 

perdre v. lose ; ruin, undo. [L. 
perdere.] 

pere m. father. [L. pat rem. 1 

perir v. perish, go to destruction. 
[L. per ire.] 

pcrmettre v. (in: 31) permit, allow. 
IL. permittere.] 

personne /. person, individual ; 
own self : with ne iXII. 4), no- 
body, no one, not any one. [L. 
personam.] 

persuader v. persuade, convince. 
[L.] 

petit adj. little, small, petty : as 
noun, little one, child, boy or 
girl. [?] 

petit-fils m. grandson, [petit and 
fils.] 

peu adv. (and as noun, m ) little, 
not much, not very ; few : peu a 
peu, little by little, by degrees ; 
a peu pres, within a little, al- 



most nearly; pour peu que, how 
ever little ; tant soit peu, ever so 
little, slightly. [L. paucum.] 

peuple m. people. [L. populum.] 

peur /. fear, fright, terror; avoii 
peur (XIII. 6), feel fear, be 
afraid ; faire peur, cause fear, 
frighten ; de peur de, for fear of ; 
de peur que . . . ne, for fear that 
or lest. [L. pavorem.] 

peut-etre ode. may be, perhaps, 
[fr. il peut (pouvoir) etre.] 

pied m. foot : a pied, on foot. [L. 
pedem.] 

pierre /. stone. [L. petram, fr, 
Gr.] 

pire adj. (IX. 3) worse. [L. pejo- 
rem.] 

pis adv. (XXXI. 8) worse. [L. 
pejus] 

place /. place, room, stead ; forti- 
fied place, stronghold. [L. 
plat earn, fr. Gr.] 

plaindre v. (irr. 15) weep over, la- 
ment, pity : se . . ., complain ; 
lament. [L. plangere.] 

plaire v. (irr. 24) please, be pleas- 
ing or give pleasure : plut a 
Dieu, would to God. [L. pla- 
eere.] 

plaisir m. pleasure : faire plaisir, 
cause or give pleasure, gratify, 
[old inf., =plaire.] 

plat m. dish, plate, [fr. G., 
=flat] 

plein adj. full. [L. plenum.'] 

pleinement adv. fully, [fr. plein.] 

pleurs m. pi. tears, cries, weeping, 
[fr. pleurer.] 

pleurer v. lament, shed tears, weep. 
[L. plorare.] 

pleuvoir v. (Irr. 71) rain. [L. 
phiere.] 

pluie /. rain. [L. pluviam.] 

plume/, feather, pen, plume. [L. 
plumam.] 

plupart /. greater part, majority : 
la plupart de (with art., V. 46), 
most of, most, [plus and part.] 

plus adv. (IX. 1", XXXI. 8) more ; 
the more (XXXIY. 3); {with ne) 
no longer, no further, no more ; 



m 



i-RENCIT-ENULIKll 



de plus, moreover, besides, fur- 
ther. [L. plus.] 
plusieurs pron. pi. several, [fr. 

plus.] 
plutot adv. sooner, rather, by pref- 
erence : plutot que de {with inf.), 
rather than. [plus an d tot. J 
poche /. pocket, [fr. G.] 
poeme in. poem. [L., fr. Gr.] 
poesie/. poesy, poetry. [L., fr. 

Gr.] 
poete in. poet. [L., fr. Gr.] 
point m. point, dot, spot : a point, 
at the right point, in due time ; 
{with ne) not, not at all, by no 
means. [L. punctum.] 
poire /. pear. [L. pirum.] 
pois in. pea. [L. pisum.] 
poisson in. fish. [fr. L. pieces.] 
poivre in. pepper. [L. piper.] 
pomme /. apple : pomme de terre, 

potato. [L. pom inn.] 

porte /. door, gate. [L. portam.] 

porter v. carry, bear, convey ; 

wear ; reach, extend : se . . ., 

carry one's self, be (in respect to 

health). [L. portare.] 

portrait m. portrait, [fr. L. pro- 

trahere.] 
poste /. post, post-office, [fr. L. 

posita.] 
poule /. fowl, hen. [L. pvllain.] 
*pouls (67a) in. pulse. [L. pul- 

sum.] 
pour prep, for, on account of. for 
the sake of, in favor of ; in or- 
der to, to ; as : pour que, in order 
that. [L. pro.] 
pourquoi adv. conj. for what, why. 

[pour and quoi.] 
pouisuivre v. (irr. 33) pursue, fol- 
low, follow out, continue. [L. 
prosequi.] 
pourtant adv. for all that, yet, 
still, nevertheless, [pour and 
tant ] 
pourvoir v. (irr. 69) provide : pour- 
vu que, provided that, provided. 
[L. provider e.] 
pouvoir v. (irr. 75, p. 119) be able, 
have power, can ; may, might 
(XXV. 8/): il se peut, etc. 



(XXV. 8/), it is possible, etc. 

[L. pos.se.] 

pouvoir m. power, [inf. of pou- 
voir.] 

premier adj. first. [L. primarivm ] 

preudre v. (irr. 30) take, take i p, 
seize, take hold of, capture : 
s'y . . ., set one's self about some- 
thing, proceed, manage ; s'en . . . 
a, lay the blame on, impute, find 
fault with, come back upon ; 
prendre garde, beware. [L. pie- 
In ndere ] 

preparer v. prepare, make ready. 
[L.] 

pres adv. prep, near, next : presde, 
near, near by, next to. [L. 
pressum.] 

presence /. presence. [L.] 

present adj. present : a present, at 
present, now. [L.] 

presque adv. almost, nearly, [pres 
and que.] 

pret adj. ready, prepared. [LL. 
praistmn.] 

pretre in. priest. [L. presbyierum , 
fr. Gr.] 

prime adj. first. [L. primxim.] 

probable adj. probable. [L. proba- 

bile in.] 

probablement adv. probably, [fr. 
probable.] 

prochain adj. next, next following 
or to come. [fr. proche.] 

proche adj. near (to, de). [L. pro- 
pi ' u in.] 

profiter v. profit (by, de), take or 
get advantage, [fr. profit, fr. L. 
profectum.] 

projet in. project, plan. [L. pro- 
jection.] 

promener v. lead forth, take <>r 
send about : se . . ., take a walk. 
[L. promiiune.] 

promettre v. (irr. 31) promise. [L. 
promillere.] 

propre adj. own ; very ; suitable ; 
nice, clean : amour propre, self- 
love. [L. propriurn.] 

proteger v protect. [L. protecere.] 

*prudernment (26a) adv prudently, 
[fr. prudent.] 



Vocabulary to the exercises. 



225 



prudence/, prudence. [L.] 
prudent adj. prudent, discreet. [L. 

prudentem.] 
Prusse/. Prussia, 
public adj. public. [L. publi- 
cum.'] 
public m. public, [same as adj ] 
puis adv. then, next, thereafter. 

[L. post.] 
puisque conj. since, because, as. 

[puis and que.] 
punir v. punish. [L. punire.] 
Pyrenees /. Pyrenees (mountains). 

quand adv. conj. when ; if, sup- 
posing that. [L. quando.] 

quant pron. how much or many : 
quant a, as for, as regards, in 
respect to. [L. quantum.] 

quarantaine /. two score, some 
forty, [fr. quarante.] 

quarante num. forty. [L. quad- 
raginta.] 

quart num. fourth : as noun, quar- 
ter, fourth part. [L. quartum.] 

quatorze num. fourteen. [L. qua- 
iuordecim.] 

quatre num. four. [L. quatuor.] 

quatre-vingts num. four twenties, 
four-score, eighty, [quatre and 
vingt.J 

quatrieme num. fourth, [fr. qua- 
tre.] 

que pron. : interrog. (XXV. 4) 
what, which ; relat. (XXVI. 2) 
which, that, whom ; what ; after 
qui, quoi, etc., ever ; sometimes 
expletive; ce que (XXVI. 10), 
that which, what. [L. quern, 
quam, quod, quid.] 

que adv. how, why {interrog., re- 
lat., exclam.). [L. quam, quod.] 

que conj. that ; sign of subj. (VIII. 
76) ; making conj. phrases, 
XXXIV. 5 ; in order that ; que 
. . . ne, unless, until ; que in com- 
parison (IX. 4), than, as ; after 
quelque etc. , ever : ne . . . que 
(XII. 5), only. [L. quod, quam.] 

quel pron. (XIII. 4) what, what a, 
which : quel que, whatever. [L. 
quale?n] 

15 



quelconque pron. whatever, what 
soever, of some sort. [L. qua- 
lemcunque.] 

quelque pron. (XIV. 6) some ; 
about, nearly, some : quelque 
chose, something, anything ; 
quelque . . . que, whatever, how- 
ever ; quelque part, somewhere. 
[L. qualemquam.] 

quelquefois adv. sometimes, [quel- 
que and fois.] 

quelqu'un pron. (XXVII. 5) some 
one, somebody, some people, 
some, [quelque and un.] 

qui pron.: interrog. (XXV.) who, 
whom, what ; relat. (XXVI.) 
who, whom, that, which ; who- 
ever, any one who, what : qui 
que, whoever. [L. qui.] 

quiconque pron. (XXVI. 9) who- 
ever, any one who. [L. quicum- 
que.) 

quint nvm. fifth ; fifth part (XVI. 
4c). [L. quintum.] 

quinze num. fifteen. [L. quinde- 
cim.] 

quinzieme num. fifteenth. [fr. 
quinze.] 

qxLoipron.: interrog. (XXV.) what, 
relat. (XXVI. 6) what, which ; 
exclam. (XXV. 4c) what ! quoi 
que, whatever ; de quoi, where- 
with, the means (XXVI. 6^). 
[L. quid.] 

quoique conj. (XXXIV. 1") 
though, although, [quoi and 
que.] 

ragout m. stew, ragout. [fr. 
re and agouter, fr. gout, taste. J 

raison /. reason, sense ; motive, 
cause ; ratio, proportion ; jus- 
tice, right : a raison, rightly ; 
avoir raison (XIII. 6a), be right, 
have the right of it. [L. ra- 
tionem.] 

ramener v. bring back. [fr. ame- 
ner.] 

rappeler v. (XXI. 3c) recall, call 
back, [re and appeler.] 

recevoir v. (irr. 65) receive. [L. 
recipere.] 



226 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



recit in. recital, narrative, story, 
tale. |fr. rafter, L. redtare.] 

reconnaitre c. {irr. 18) know again, 
recognize, [re and connaitre.] 

redacteur in. editor, [fr. L. re- 
daction, put in shape. | 

reine /. queen : reine-mere, queen- 
mother, king's mother. [L. 
reginam.~\ 

remettre v. {irr. 31) put hack, put 
again, set again ; hand over, 
consign : se . . . a, begin w com 
mence again, [re and mettre.] 

remuer v. move. stir. [L. remu- 
tare.~\ 

rencontrer v. meet, fall in with, 
[re and encontrer, encounter, fr. 
contro, against.] 

rendre v. render, return, give back, 
restore ; make, cause to be ; 
give, pay, do. [L. reddere. ] 

rentrer r. re-enter, go back in. 
[re and entrer.J 

renvoyer n. (irr. 81) send back. 
[re and envoyer.] 

repentir v.: se . . ., repent, [fr. L. 
repmnitere. ] 

repondre v. respond, reply, answer ; 
. . . de, be answerable or respon- 
sible for, warrant. [L. respon- 
dere. ] 

reprendre v. {irr. 30) take again, 
resume, recover ; begin again, 
go on to say. [re and prendre.] 

republique/ republic. [L.] 

resoudre ». (in: 36) resolve. [L. 
resolvere.] 

rester v. remain, be left, stay, con- 
tinue. [L. restored] 

retenir v. {irr. 61) hold back, re 
tain, restrain. [L. retinere. | 

retirer v. draw back, draw, derive : 
se . . ., draw one's self back, 
withdraw, retire, retreat, [re 
and tirer.] 

retourner v. return, turn back or 
the other way : se . . ., turn 
around or back ; sen . . ., go or 
come back, return, [re and 
tourner.] 

retrouver v. find again, [re and 
trouver.] 



reussir v. succeed (in, a), [re and 
ussir, L. ixire.] 

revenir v. {irr. 60) come back, re- 
turn. [L. revenue.'] 

rcvetir v. {irr. 51) put on again, 
clothe one's self in, put on. [re 
and vetir.] 

revoir v. {irr. 67) see again ; re- 
view. [L. render e.] 

Rhin 'in. Rhine (river). 

*rbum (51 b) m. rum. [fr. Eng- 
lish.] 

riche adj. rich. [fr. G.] 

rien pron. (with ne : XII. 4) not 
anything, nothing ; anything : 
rien qu'a or rien que de,,merely 
by, by nothing but. [L. rem.] 

rire v. (irr 13) laugh. [L. ridere.] 

rire m. laugh, [inf. of rire.] 

robe/ dress, frock, [fr. G.] 

roi vi. king. [L. regem.] 

roman m. romance, novel, [fr. L. 
romanvs.] 

rompre r. (XX. Zb) break, burst. 
[L. rumpere.] 

rose/', rose. [L. romm.] 

rouge adj. red. [L. rubenm.~\ 

royaume in. kingdom, realm, [fr. 
roi.] 

ruban in. ribbon. [?] 

rue /. street. [LL. rvgam, fur- 
row.] 

Russie/. Russia. 

saisir v. seize, take hold of. [LL. 
mic ire. fr. G.] 

salle/. hall, room ; fencing -school : 
salle a manger, dining-room, 
[fr. G., =Germ. sn til.] 

salon in. saloon, large room, par- 
lor, [fr. salle. 1 

samedi in. Saturday. [L. sabbaii 
diem, day of sabbath (He- 
brew).] 

sans prep, without ; apart from, 
but for : sans que conj. (XXXIV. 
5b) without that, without, un- 
less. [L. sine.] 

savant adj. knowing, wise, learn- 
ed ; as novn, scientific man, 
scholar, [old pple of savoir.] 

savoir v. (irr. 77 ; p. 159) know ; 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



227 



know as, know to be ; (imtli inf) 
know how. [L. sapere.] 

*sculpter (71a) v. sculpture, cut or 
carve in stone, [fr. L. sculpere.] 

*sculpteur (71a) m. sculptor. [L.] 

^sculpture (71a) f. sculpture. [L.] 

se pron. (XXIII. 4; XXIX. 2) 
one's sell [L. se.] 

*second (58/) num. second. [L. 
secundum.] 

*seconde (58/)/. second, sixtieth of 
a minute, [same as num.] 

*seconder (58/) v. second, stand 
by, support, [fr. second.] 

Seine / Seine (French river run- 
ning through Paris). 

seize num. sixteen. [L. sedecim ] 

sel m. salt. [L. sal.] 

selon prep, according to, on the 
authority of. [L. sub-longum, 
along.] 

semaine/. week. [L septimanam.] 

sembler v. seem, appear. [L. si- 
mulare.] 

"sens (74d) m. sense, intellect, un- 
derstanding ; sense, meaning ; 
way, direction : bon sens, good 
sense, sensibleness. [L. sen- 
sum.] 

sentir v. (irr. 40) feel, be sensible 
or have a sense of, be conscious. 
[L. sentire.] 

seoir v. (irr. 78) sit. [L. seder e.] 

-sept (71a, 76a) num. seven. [L. 
sept em.] 

septante num. (XV. 3a) seventy. 
[L. septuaginla.] 

septembre m. September. [L.] 

*septieme (71a) num. seventh, [fr. 
sept.] 

serviette/ napkin, [fr. servir.] 

servir^ v. (irr. 44) serve ; be of use, 
avail, advantage, help ; serve 
up, put on the taV.e : servir de, 
serve as, take or till the place 
of ; se servir de, serve one's self 
with, make use of, employ. [L. 
servire.] 

seul adj. sole, alone, only, single. 
[L. solum.] 

seulement adv. only, solely, sim- 
ply, [fr. seul.] 



si conj. (XXXIV. lb) if ; whether. 

[L. si.] 
si adv. so, as ; yes : si . . . que, 

however. [L. sic.] 
siecle m. age, century. [L. scecu- 

lum.] 
sien pron. (XXVII. 1) his, hers, 

its. [L. suum.] 
silence m. silence : garder . . ., 

keep silence, be silent. [L.] 
*six (815, 85^) num. six. [L. sex.] 
*sixaine (81c)/ half a dozen, some 

six. [fr. six.] 
' ; sixieme (81c) num. sixth, [fr. 

six.] 
soeur/. sister. [L. soror.] 
soi pron. (XXIII. 4) one's self. 

[same as se.] 
soie/ silk. [L. setam.] 
soif f. thirst : avoir soif, be thirsty 

(XIII. 6). [L. sitim.] 
soir m. evening, latter part of the 

day. [L. serum, late.] 
soit tionj. whether, or ; be it ; be it 

so. [subj. pres. 3d sing, of 

etre.] 
*soixantaine (81c) /. three score, 

some sixty, [fr. soixante.] 
-soixante (81c) num. sixty. [L. 

sexaginta.] 
soldat in. soldier. [LL. soldatum, 

paid.] 
soleil m. sun ; sunshine. [L. soli- 

culum. fr. sol, sun.] 
*solennel (26a) adj. solemn, [fr. 

L. solem?iis.] 
sommeil m. sleep : avoir sommeil, 

be sleepy (XIII. 6). [fr. L. som- 

n us.] 
son, sa, ses pron. (XIV. 1) his, her, 

its. [L. suum ] 
son m. sound. [L. sonum.] 
sortir v. (irr. 39) come or go forth, 

issue, proceed ; go out (from 

room, etc.) : sortir de, quit, 

leave, abandon. [L. sortiri.] 
soudain adj. sudden ; as adv. 

(XXXI. 9) suddenly. [L. subi- 

taneum.] 
souffrir v. (irr. 54) suffer. [L. 

suffer re.] 
Soulier m. shoe. [?] 



228 



FREKCH-EWLISH 



soupe/. soup. [fr. G.l 

soupiere /. soup-dish, tureen, [fr. 
soupe.] 

*sourcil (68c) m. eyebrow. [L. 
superciliuin.] 

sourd adj. low-toned, obscure in 
sound, dull ; deaf. [L. sur- 
dum. ] 

sourire v. {irr. 13) smile. [L. 
subridere, laugh slightly.] 

sourire m. smile, [inf. of sourire.] 

sous prep, under, beneath, below. 
[L. subtus.] 

souvenir v. (irr. 60) come into the 
mind ; have come into the mind, 
remember : se . . ., remember, 
recollect, be reminded (of, de). 
[L. sub venire.] 

souvenir in. remembrance, recol- 
lection ; memorial, memento, 
souvenir, [inf. of souvenir.] 

souvent adv. often, frequently. [L. 
subinde.] 

sucre m. sugar, [fr. Arabic. 

*sud (60a) m. south, [fr. G. 

Suede/. Sweden. 

suffire v. (irr. 6) suffice, be suffi- 
cient or enough. [L. svfficere.] 

Suisse/'. Switzerland. 

suite /. what follows, sequel, 
train ; succession, series, suite : 
tout de suite, at once, immedi- 
ately. [L. secutam.] 

suivre v. (irr. 33) follow. [L. 
segui.] 

sur prep, on, upon ; over, above ; 
about, near to ; on account of, 
on the strength of : sur le champ, 
on the spot, at once, immedi- 
ately. [L. super.] 

sur adj. sure, secure, steady, trust- 
worthy. [L. securum.] 

surprendre v. (irr. 30) take by sur- 
prise, surprise, [sur and pren- 
dre.] 

surprise /. surprise^ astonishment 
[fr. surprendre] 

surtout adv. above all, especially, 
[sur and tout.] 

sus adv. above, upon : en *sus 
(74d), over and above, besides. 
[L. susum, sursum.] 



*tabac (58,y) m. tobacco. [Indiar 
word.] 

table /. table. [L. tabulam.] 

tableau m. picture, painting, [fr. 
table.] 

tacbe /. task. [LL. taxam, fr. L. 
taxare, tax.] 

tailleur m. tailor, [fr. tailler, cut, 
fr. L. taleam, cut branch.] 

taire v. (irr. 25) keep secret or 
silent : se . . ., be silent, keep 
silence, hold one's peace. [L. 
tacere.] 

Tamise/. Thames. 

tandis que conj. whilst, while, 
whereas. [L. tarn diem quod.] 

tant adv. so much or many, as 
much or many : si tant est que, 
if so be that, supposing that ; 
tant soit peu, ever so little, 
slightly, in some measure ; tant 
que, so long as. [L. iantum.] 

tante /. aunt, [ta and ante, L. 
amitarn.] 

tantot adv. presently, soon : tan- 
tot .. . tantot, now . . . now. 
[tant and tot.] 

tard adv. late. [L. tar dum, slow.] 

tasse /. cup. [fr. Arabic. ] 

te pron. thee, to thee. [L. te.] 

tel pron. such (such a, un tel) ; 
such a one, so and so ; one, an- 
other, as ... so : tel que, what- 
ever, any soever ; telle quelle, 
such as it is, in whatever condi- 
tion. [L. talem.] 

temps m. time ; weather. [L. 
tempus.] 

tenir v. {irr. 61) hold, keep : tenez, 
hold, look here, well now ; 
se . . ., keep one's self, stay, 
stand ; tenir lieu de, see lieu ; te- 
nir tete a, see tete. [L. te- 
nere.] 

terre /. earth, ground, land : de 
terre, earthen ; a terre, on the 
ground. [L. ierram.] 

tete /. head : tenir tete a, make 
head against, cope with, resist ; 
perdre la tete, lose one's head or 
wits or presence of mind. [L. 
testam, potsherd. J 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



229 



tete-a-tete m. private interview, 

tete-a-tete, [lit'ly, head to head.] 
tne in. tea. [fr. Chinese.] 
theatre m. theater, stage. [L., fr. 

Gr.] 
theme m. theme, exercise. [Gr.] 
tien pron. thine. [L. tuum.] 
tiers, tierce num. third. [L. ter- 

tiuni.] 
toi pron. thee, to thee. [L. te.] 
tomber v. fall, tumble, [fr. G. (?)] 
tome in. tome, volume. [L., fr. 

Gr.] 
ton, ta, tes pron. thy. [L. tuum ] 
tonner v. impers. thunder. [L. 

tonare] 
tort m. wrong, harm : avoir tort 

(XIII. 6a), be in the wrong, be 

wrong ; a tort, wrongly. [L. 

tortum, twisted. | 
tot adv. soon. [L. tostum, burnt 

(?)] 

toucher v. touch, be in contact 
with, be close upon, approach ; 
lay the hand upon, handle, med- 
dle with ; touch with emotion, 
move : toucher a, be close upon 
or in contact with, meddle 
with [?] 

toujours adv. always, all the time ; 
even now, still, yet, all the same, 
[fr. tous jours, all days.] 

tout (*tous, 74d) pron. (XIV. 6b) 
all, every, whole ; everything, 
everybody, the whole : as adv. 
wholly, entirely, quite, alto- 
gether : toute chose, everything ; 
tous deux or tous les deux 
(XXVII. la), both ; tout le 
monde (XXVII. 7b), everybody ; 
du tout, at all ; tout . . . que, 
however ; tout a coup, all at 
once, suddenly ; tout a fait, 
wholly, entirely ; tout a l'heure, 
just now ; tout de suite, at once, 
immediately. [L. totum.] 

toutefois adv. yet, however, never- 
theless, [toute fois, every time.] 

traduire v. tirr. 1) translate. [L. 
traducere.] 

tragedie /. tragedy. [L., fr. Gr.] 



traire v. (irr: 21) draw, milk. [L. 
trahere.] 

-tranquille (68/) adj. tranquil, 
calm. [L.] 

*tranquillement (QSf) adv tran- 
quilly, calmly, [fr. tranquille.] 

*trans- (746). 

*transit (746, 76a) m. transit. [L.] 

travail m. work, labor, toi\ tra- 
vail, [fr. L. trabr.8, beam (?) ] 

travailler v. work, toil, labor, 
[fr. travail.] 

travers in. oddity, whim, capri c, 
eccentricity : a travers, aoro s, 
athwart, through. [L. l.an- 
verxum. crosswise. | 

traverser v. traverse, cross, pass 
over or through, [fr. travers.] 

treize num. thirteen [L. tre.derim ] 

treizieme num. thirteenth. [fr. 
treize.] 

trentaine /. some thirty. [fr. 
trente.] 

trente num. thirty. [L. triginfa.] 

tres adv. very, very much. [L. 
trans.] 

triste adj. sad, dull, dreary. [L. 
tristem.] 

tristement adv. sadly, [fr. triste.] 

trois num. three. [L. tres.] 

troisieme num. third, [fr. trois.] 

tromper v. deceive, mislead, cheat, 
baffle, disappoint : se . . ., de- 
ceive one's self, be mistaken, 
make a mistake. [?] 

trop adv. too, too much, in excess, 
beyond what is called for : de 
trop, superfluous, not wanted, 
better away ; trop peu, too little. 

[?] 

trouver v. find, discover, come <> • 
hit upon ; find to be, regard as, 
consider, think : se . . ., tmd 
one's self, chance to be, be. [L 
turbare, disturb (?).] 

tu pron. thou. [L. tu.] 

un num. art. one ; an, a. [L. 

unum.] 
utile adj. useful, advantageous. 

[L. utilem.] 



230 



FEENCH-ENGLISH 



vache /. cow. [L. vaccam.] 

vaincre v. (XX. 3a) vanquish, con 
quer. [L. vincere.] 

valoir v. (irr. 73) be worth, have 
the value of ; have as much 
value as, be equal to ; be good 
for, win, procure : valoir mieux, 
be worth more, be bett*er or 
preferable. [L. valere.] 

vapeur f. steam, vapor ; in. steam- 
er. [L.] 

vase in. vase, vessel. [L. vas.] 

vaste adj. vast. [L ] 

velours m. velvet, [fr. L. villosus, 
hairy.] 

vendre v. sell. [L. vendere.] 

vendredi in. Friday. [L. veneris 
diem, Venus's day.] 

venir v (irr. 60 ; p. 145-6) come, 
be coming : venu, one arrived, 
comer ; venir de (with inf., 
XXXI. lib), have just (done 
anything) ; en venir a, come to 
the point of, have recourse to, 
resort to. \h. venire.'] 

Venise /. Venice. 

vent in. wind. [L. venfum.] 

verre m. glass, drinking glass, 
tumbler. [L. vitrum.] 

vers prep, toward ; about. [L. 
versus.] 

vers in. verse. [L. versa m.] 

vetir v. (irr. 51) clothe, dress (in, 
de). [L. vest ire.] 

viande/. meat, flesh ; viand. [L. 
vivenda.] 

vie /. life ; biography : de sa vie, 
in his life, ever. [L. vitam.] 

vieil, see vieux. 

vieillard m. old man. [fr. 
vieux.] 

vieillir v. grow old, become aged, 
age. [fr. vieux.] 

Vienne /. Vienna. 

vieux, vieil (VII. 7) adj. old, not 
young, aged ; as noun, old fel- 
low or friend. [LL. vetalum.] 

vif adj. lively, vivacious, brisk, 
smart. [L. vivum.] 

*vil (6Sd) adj. vile, base, mean. 
LL.] 



^village (68/) m. village, [fr. 

ville.] 
*ville (68/) /. city : a la ville, in 

the city. [L. villain.] 
vin i)i. wine. [L. vinvm.] 
vingt (76'/) num. twenty. [L. 

viginti.] 
vingtaine /. a score, some twenty. 

[fr. vingt.] 
vingtieme num. twentieth, [fr. 

vingt.] 
violette /. violet, [fr. L. viola. ] 
*viril (68tf) adj. virile, manly. [L. 

virilem. ] 
*vis 74d) /. screw. [L. vilem, 

vine.] 
vis m. face : vis-a-vis de, face to 

face with, opposite to, fronting. 

[L. visum.] 
vite adj. quick ; as adv. (XXXI. 

9) quickly, rapidly, fast. [?] 
vivement adj. livelily. [fr. vif.] 



(irr. 32) live. [L. 



VL- 



vivre ®, 

vere.] 
voici inferj. see here, here is or are 

or come, behold, lo. ( vois and 

ci.] 
voila interj see there, there is or 

are or come, behold, lo. [vois 

and la.] 
voile m.f. veil; sail: bateau a voiles, 

sailing vessel. [L. velum.] 
voir v. (irr. 67) see, behold, view, 

look : voyons, let's see, see here, 

come now ; y voir, see things, 

have eyes. [L. videre.] 
voisin adj. neighboring, near (to, 

de) ; as noun, neighbor. [L. 

vicinum.] 
voiture /. carriage, vehicle. [L. 

vectaram.] 
voix / voice. [L. vocem.] 
volontiers adv. willingly, gladly. 

[fr. L. vobi ntarie.] 
volume m. volume. [L] 
votre pron. (XIV.) your. [L. ves- 

tram.] 
votre pron. (XXVII. 1, 2) yours. 

[L. vestrum.] 
vouloir v. (irr. 72 ; p. 114) wish, 

desire, want ; be willing or in 



VOCABULAKY TO THE EXERCISES. 



231 



clined or pleased ; mean, intend : 
vouloir dire, mean, signify ; en 
vouloir a, have a grudge or 
spite against, lay something up 
against, have a design upon, aim 
at. [L. velle.] 
vous pron. you, to you. [L. ws.] 
voyage m. journey. [L. viati- 
cum.] 



vrai adj. true, veracious, real, ac- 
tual, genuine, [fr. L. verus.\ 

vraiment adv. truly, really, indeed, 
in fact. [fr. vrai.] 

y adv. pron. (XXIII. 5-8) there ; 

to it or them, etc. [L. ibi.~\ 
yeux (36a) pi. (II. 5) eyes. [L. 

oculos.] 



II. -ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY. 

Additional Abbreviations : n. noun. intr. intransitive, trans, transitive. 



a, an, un. 

able, capable, bon, habile : be able, 

pouvoir v. (irr. p. 119.) 
about, (round aboift) autour de, 

(nearly) environ, sur, quelque : 

run about, courir {irr. 52). 
above, dessus adv., au-dessus de 

prep. 
absolutely, absolument. 
according to, d'apres, selon. 
accordingly, aussi. 
acquaint : be acquainted with, con- 

naitre. 
acquire, acquerir {irr. 63). 
across prep, a travers. 
active, actif. 
adieu, adieu m. 
admirable, admirable, 
afraid : be afraid, avoir peur or 

crainte (XIII. 6). 
Africa, Afrique /. 
after prep, apres ; conj. apres que : 

after that {conj.), apres que. 
afternoon, apres-midi m. 
afterward, apres, ensuite. 
again, encore, de nouveau. 
against, contre. 
age (grow old), vieillir. 
agitate (move), emouvoir {irr. 76). 
ago, il y a (XXX. 4«). 
air, air m. 
all, tout (XIV. 6) : at all, see at ; 

after all, apres tout, 
allow, permettre {irr. 31). 
almost, presque, a peu pres. 
aloft, en haut. 
alone, seul. 

along prep, le long de. 
aloud, 'haut. 
Alps, Alpes /. 
already, deja. 



also, aussi. 

although, quoique (XXXIV. la), 
bien que, encore que. 

altogether, tout a fait, tout. 

always, toujours. 

America, Amerique /. 

amiable, airaable. 

among, parmi (XXVI. 4a), entra; 
from among, d'entre. 

amount, an infinite, fee infinite. 

amuse, amuser : amuse one's self, 
s'amuser. 

ancient, ancien. 

anciently, anciennement. 

and, et. 

angry, fache (at. contre ; on ac- 
count of, de) : be or get angry, 
se facher. 

animal, animal m. 

another, un autre : one another, 
l'un l'autre, les uns les autres 
(XXVII. 7), se (XXIX. 8). 

answer v. repondre. 

answer n. reponse/. 

anxious, inquiet. 

any, de with art. (IV.), quelque: not 
any, ne . . aucun or nul, ne . . , 
pas de. 

anything, quelque chose : not any- 
thing, ne . . . rien ; anything 
whatever, quoi que ce soit. 

appear, paraitre {irr. 18). 

apple, pomme/. 

approach, {trans.) s'approcher de, 
se rapprocher de, {intr.) s'appro- 
cher. 

April, avril m. 

arise, se lever. 

arm (limb), bras m. 

army, armee/. 

around prep. , autour de. 






VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



233 



arrive, arriver {with etre, XXYIII. 

Qa). 
as adv. (before adj.) aussi, {after 

adj.) que : as much, or many, 

autant ; as much or many as, 

autant que ; as long as, tant que ; 

as soon as, aussitot que, des que ; 

as far as, jusque, jusqu'a {prep.); 

as for, as regards, quant a. 
as conj. comme, ainsi que, de, en ; 

(since) puisque ; (when) lorsque. 
ashamed : be ashamed, avoir 

honte (Xin. 6). 
Asia, Asie . 

ask, ask for, demander (of, a). 
at, a ; en, dans ; de ; par : at all, 

du tout ; not at all, ne . . . point ; 

at once, sur le champ, tout de 

suite ; at present, a present ; at 

the time of, lors de ; at the house 

of, at some one's, chez. 
August, -aout (14) m. 
aunt, tante/. 
Austria, Autriche /. 
await, s'attendre a. 

back : bring back, etc. , see bring, 
etc. 

bad, mauvais : bad weather, mau- 
vais temps. 

baker, boulanger m. 

ball (dance), bal m. 

basket, panier m. 

be, etre {irr. p. 62) ; be (in re- 
spect to health), se porter ; be 
(in respect to weather), faire 

* (XXXII. 9a) : be all over, en 
etre fait ; be off with one's self, 
s'en aller ; be better, se porter 
mieux, se remettre ; be to, de- 
voir (XXVI. 12f). 

beat v. battre (XX. 3c). 

beautiful, beau (VII. 7). 

beauty, beaute/. 

because, parce que, puisque. 

become, devenir {irr. 60). 

bed, lit m.\ go to bed, se coucher, 
aller se coucher. 

before prep, (previous to) avant, 
(in front or in presence of) de- 
vant ; with inf. avant de. 

before conj. avant que, que . . . ne. 



beg, prier. 

begin, commencer, se mettre {irr. 
31) a. 

behind, derriere. 

Belgium, Belgique/. 

believe, croire {irr. 26). 

belong, appartenir, etre (to, a: 
III. 6). 

below adv. en bas. 

beneath prep, sous, au-dessous de ; 
adv. dessous. 

besides prep, outre ; conj. d'ail- 
leurs, 

best adj. le meilleur ; adv. le mieux. 

better adj. meilleur ; adv. mieux : 
be better (in health), se porter 
mieux, se remettre {irr. 31), (be 
preferable) valoir mieux ; love 
better, aimer davantage ; like 
better, aimer mieux ; find it bet- 
ter, trouver meilleur ; get the 
better, l'emporter. 

between prep, entre. 

beyond prep, outre, par-dessus, au- 
dela de. 

big, gros. 

bird, oiseau m. 

bit, morceau m. 

black, noir. 

bless, benir. 

blind adj. aveugle. 

blindly, aveuglement. 

blue, bleu. 

boat, bateau m. 

boil v. bouillir {irr. 64). 

bold, 'hardi. 

bonnet, chapeau m. 

book, livre m. 

boot, botte /. 

Bordeaux, Bordeaux m. 

bore v. ennuyer ; be bored, etre en- 
nuye, s'ennuyer. 

born, ne ; be born, naitre {irr. 20 ; 
with etre, XXVIII. Qa). 

both pron. tous deux, tous les deux, 
1'un et l'autre (XXVII. 7). 

both conj. et (XXXIV. 3); both . . . 
and, et . . et. 

bottle, bouteille /. 

box, boite/. 

boy, garcon m. 

brave, brave (VIII. 5c). 



234 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



bread, pain m. 

breadth, largeur/. 

break, rompre (XX. Zb), (the arm, 
etc.) casser. 

breakfast, dejeuner m. 

bring, apporter ; bring bad*" rap- 
porter. 

brother, frere m. 

brother-in-law, beau-frere m. 

brown, brun. 

Brussels, *Bruxelles (81c)/. 

bnild, batir. 

but conj. mais ; prep, excepte : but 
little (with v.), ne . . . guere. 

butter, beurre rn. 

buy, acbeter (XXI. Zb). 

by (XXVIII. 3), par, de, a: by 
means of, moyennant ; by dint 
of, a force de. 

cake, gateau m. 

call v. appeler (XXI. 3c) ; call 

back, rappeler. 
can, pouvoir (in: p. 119). 
cannot, ne pouvoir (irr. p. 119), ne 

saurais, etc. (XXXIV. lb). 
capital (chief city), capitale /. 
captain, capitaine m. 
carriage, voiture/ 
carry, porter ; carry away, empor- 

ter. 
case, cas m. : in case that, in case, 

au or en cas que. 
cat, chat m, 
cause n. raison/. 
cause v. {with inf., XXXII. 9b) 

faire (in: p. 150). 
century, siecle m. 
certainly, certainement. 
chair, cbaise /, 
chamber, chambre/. 
chapter, chapitre m. 
cheap, cheaply, a bon marche, bon 

marche. 
cheese, fromage m. 
child, enfant m. 
China, Chine/, 
choose, choisir. 
church, eglise /. : to or at church, 

a l'eglise. 
citizen, citoyen m. 
city, *vUle (68/)/. 



clean v. nettoyer. 

clear v.: clear out, s'en aller 
(XXIX. 7c). 

cloak, manteau m. 

close v. fermer. 

cloth, drap m. 

clothe, vetir (irr. 51). 

coat, habit m. 

coffee, cafe m.. 

cold, froid : be cold, feel cold, 
avoir froid (XIII. 6) ; be cold 
(weather), faire froid ; grow cold, 
se refroidir. 

collar, col m. 

come, venir (irr. p. 145 , with etre, 
XXVIII. 6a), (happen) advenir, 
(arrive, get so far as) arriver, 
en venir ; come ! allons (XXVII. 
8'/) ; come back or again, reve- 
nir; come down, descendre come 
in, entrer 

comedy, comedie/. 

coming a. arrivee/. 

conceal, cacher. 

conceive, concevoir (irr. 65). 

conclude, conclure (irr. 29). 

conduct n. conduite/. 

conduct v. conduire (irr. 1) ; con- 
duct one's self, se conduire. 

conquer, vaincre (XX. 3a). 

consequently, done, *consequem- 
ment (26a). 

constantly, constamment. 

constitutional, constitutionnel. 

contented, content. 

continually, continuellement. 

cook, cuisiniere/. 

correctly (in tune), juste. 

Corsica, Corse/. 

country, pays m., (one's or native) 
patrie /. , (as distinguished from 
the city) campagne /. in the 
country, a la campagne. 

cousin, cousin m., cousine/ 

cover u (place at table) couvert m. 

cover v. couvrir (irr 56). 

cow, vache f. 

create, creer. 

cruel, cruel. 

cruelly, cruellement. 

cry v. crier ; cry out, s'ecrier. 

cuff n. manchette /. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



235 



cup, tasse/. 

curse v. maudire (irr. 10). 

dance v. danser. 

Danube, Danube m. 

daughter, fille /. 

day, jour m. : day before yester- 
day, avant-hier m. ; day after to- 
morrow, apres-demain m. 

dead adj. mort. 

deal : a great deal, beaucoup. 

dear, cher (VIII. 5c). 

dearly, cherement. 

decay v. dechoir (irr. 70). 

December, decembre m. 

Denmark, Danemark in. 

depart, partir {irr. 38). 

departure, depart m. 

depend, se fier (upon, a), dependre 
(on or upon, de). 

depot, gare/ 

describe, decrire {irr. 12). 

desire v. vouloir {irr. 72), desirer, 
avoir envie de. 

die, mourir (irr. 62 ; with etre, 
XXVIII. 6a). 

difficult, difficile. 

difficulty, difficulty /• 

dine, diner. 

dining-room, salon m., salle a man- 
ger/. 

dinner, diner m. 

dint : by dint of, a force de. 

directly, sur le champ. 

dish, plat m. 

displease, deplaire (irr. 24). 

dissatisfied, mecontent (with, de). 

distrust, se defter de. 

do, faire (irr. p. 150) : do without, 
se passer de. 

dog, cbien m. 

door, porte /. 

down-stairs, en bas. 

dozen, douzaine/. 

draw, traire (irr. 21) : draw near, 
s'approcher (to, de). 

dress n. robe/. 

dressmaker, couturiere-/. 

drink, boire (irr. 27). 

drive off or away, chasser. 

dull, (tedious) ennuyeux, (stupid) 
lourd d'esprit. 



during, pendant, durant : during 
the past, during . . . past,depuis. 
duty, devoir m. 
dwell, demeurer. 

each, (adj.) chaque, (n.) chacun : 

each one, chacun ; each other, 

l'un lautre (XXVII. 7), se 

(XXIX. 8). 
ear, oreille/. 

earlier, plus tot de meilleure heure. 
early, de bonne heure : so early, de 

si bonne heure ; quite early, de 

bien (or tr§s) bonne heure. 
earth, terre/. 
easily, facilement. 
east, *est (76a) m.; the East, l'Ori- 

ent m. 
easy, aise, facile, 
eat, manger, 
editor, redacteur m. 
Edward, Edouard. 
egg, ceaf (pi. *oeufs: 61a) m. 
eight, *huit (76/0- 
eighteen, *dix-huit (Sib). 
eighth, huitieme. 
eighty, quatre-vingts (XV. 2b). 
either conj. ou . . . . ou, or), (nor 

. . . either) non plus, 
either pron. l'un ou l'autre 

(XXVII. 7). 
eleven, *onze (64/). 
Elizabeth, Elisabeth, 
else : nothing else, rien d'autre ; 

nothing else than, ne . . . rien 

que. 
elsewhere, ailleurs, autre part, 
emperor, empereur m. 
employ, employer, 
empress, imperatrice/ 
enemy, ennemi m. 
England, Angleterre/. 
English, anglais, dAngleterre. 
enough, assez (V. 4a). 
entirely, tout a fait, entierement f 

tout, 
equally, egalement ; equally . . . 

and, aussi . . . que. 
especially, surtout. 
Europe, Europe/, 
even, meme, (not excepting) jus* 

qu'a, (with gerund) tout. 



236 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



evening, soir m., soiree /. : in the 
evening, du soir. 

every, chaque, tout (XIV. 6/;) ; 
every one, chacun ; everybody, 
tout le monde ; everything, tout, 
toute chose ; every day, tous les 
jours ; everywhere, partout. 

evil adj. mauvais. 

evil n. mal m. 

excellent, excellent. 

except, hors, excepte. 

exclaim, s'ecrier. 

exercise n. exercice >/?., theme m. 

extremely, extremement. 

eye, ceil m. (pi. yeux 36a). 

fact : in fact, en effet. 

factory, fabrique /. 

fall, tomber {with etre : XXVIII. 

6a), dechoir (irr. 70) ; fall short, 

faillir. 
family, famille /. 
Fanny, Franchise /. 
far adv. loin : far from, (with inf.) 

loin de, (with v. ) loin que ; as far 

as, see as ; so far as, see so. 
farewell, adieu m, 
farm, ferme/. 
farmer, fermier m. ; farmer's wife, 

fermiere/. 
fast ado vite. 
father, pere m 
fear v. craindre (irr. 15), avoir 

peur. 
fear n. peur/., crainte/.: for fear 

of, de peur or crainte de ; for 

fear that, de peur or crainte que 

. . . ne. 
February, fevrier m. 
feeble, faible. 
feel, sentir (irr. 40). 
few, peu (de : V. 4) ; a few, quel- 

ques (XIV. 6c) ; but few, peu ; 

too few , trop peu ; the few, les 

quelques. 
field, champ m. 
fifteen, quinze. 

fifth, cinquieme, quint (XVI. 4c). 
fifty, cinquante. 
find, trouver : find one's self, se 

trouver ; find again, retrouver. 
fine adj. beau (VII. 7) ; fine weath- 



er, beau, beau temps ; a fine 

thing, beau, 
finish, finir. 
fire, feu m . 

first adj. premier : adv. pour la pre- 
miere fois. 
fish, poisson m. 
five, -cinq (72c). 
flee, fuir (irr. 47). 
flourish, fleurir (XIX. Zb). 
flower, fleur/. 
folks, gens pi. 
follow, suivre (irr. 33). 
foot, pied m. 
for prep, pour, de, (during) depuis : 

as for, quant a. 
for conj. car 
forget, oublier. 
fork, fourchette /. 
former, celui-la (xvbst.), ce . . . -la 

(adj.). 
formerly, autrefois. \ 
forty, quarante. 
four, quatre. 
fourteen, quatorze. 
fourth, quatrieme : fourth part, 

quart m. 
fowl, poule /. 
franc, franc m. 
France, France/. 
Frances, Franchise /. 
Francis, Frank, Francis m. 
frank, franc (VII. 6/;). 
frankly, franchement. 
freeze, geler. 

French, francais, de France. 
Friday, vendredi m. 
friend, ami m., amie /. 
friendship, amitie /'. 
from, de, des, d avec, depuis. 
front : in front of, en face de ; to 

the front of, au-devant de. 
fruit, fruit m. 
full, plein. 
fully, pleinement. 

garden, jardin m. 

gate, porte/. 

gather, (tram.) cueillir (irr. 46), 

(intr.) se reunir. 
general n. general m. 
Geneva, Geneve/. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



237 



gentleman, monsieur (XIV. 4), 
gentilhomme ( pi. *gentils- 
hommes : 68c). 

German, allemand 

Germany, Allemagne/. 

get, obtenir (in-. 61) : get up, se 
lever ; get ready, s'appreter 

gift, cadeau m., present m., don m. 

girl, fille/. 

give, donner : give a present, faire 
(in: 23) un cadeau. 

glass, verre m. 

glory, gloire/. 

go, aller {irr. p. 128), (go away) 
partir {irr. 38) : go away, s'en 
aller (XXIX. 7c), partir (irr. 
38) ; go out, sortir (irr. 39) ; be 
going to (with inf.), aller 
(XXVII. 9c). 

God, Dieu in. 

gold, or m. 

good adj. bon (IX. 3) : good for- 
tune or luck, bonbeur m. ; good 
morning or day, bonjour m. 

gi'and, grand. 

grandfather, grand-pere m. 

grandmother, grand'mere/. 

grandson, petit-fils m. 

great, grand : a great deal, beau- 
coup (V. 4). 

Great Britain, Grande-Bretagne/. 

greatly, beaucoup, grandement. 

grow, croitre (irr. 19) : grow old, 
vieillir ; grow pale, palir ; grow 
cold, se refroidir 

grudire : have a grudge at, en vou- 
loir a (XXIV. V). 

guide, guider, conduire (irr. 1). 

hail v. greler. 

hair, cheveux m. pi. 

half n. moitie. 

half adj. (XVI. la) demi, demi- : 

half an hour, une demi-beure. 
hand n. main f. 
hand v. remettre (/? r. 31). 
handkerchief, moucboir m. 
handsome, beau (VII. 7). 
Hanover, Hanovre m. 
happen, arriver (irith etre : 

XXVIII. Qa), venir a (with inf.). 
happily, beureusement. 



happiness, bonbeur m. 
happy, heureux, content, 
hard, dur, (difficult) difficile, 
hardly, a peine, ne . . . guere : I 

hardly know, je ne sacbe pas. 
Harriet, Henriette/. 
haste : make haste, se hater, se de- 

pecber. 
hasten, se hater, se depecber. 
hat, cbapeau m 
hate v. hair (XIX. 3a). 
have, avoir (irr. p. 58) ; as auxil, 

avoir or etre (XXVIII. 5-8, 

XXIX. 3, XXX. la) ; have to, 

avoir a, etre oblige de, falloir 

(XXX. 7). 
he, il (6Sd), lui. 
head, tetef. 
health, sante/. 
hear, entendre, ouir (irr. 49). 
heart, coeur m. 
heaven, ciel (II. 5) in. 
hen, poule/. 
hence adv. d'ici. 
henceforth, desormais. 
Henrietta, Henriette /. 
Henry, Henri m. 
her pron. (XXII.) la, lui, elle 

(XXIII. 2); poss (XIV. 1-3) son; 

hers, sien (XXVII. 1, 2). 
here, ici; -ci (XIII. 3, XXIV.): 

here is or are, voici. 
high, 'haut. 
highly, 'bautement. 
him (XXII.), le, lui. 
his (XIV. 1-3, XXVII. 1, 2), son, 

sien. 
history, bistoire /. 
hold, tenir (irr. 61). 
Holland, 'Hollande/. 
home : at home, cbez moi (etc.), a 

la maison ; go home, aller a la 

maison. 
hope v. esperer, (wish) soubaiter. 
hope n. espoir m., esperance /. 
horrible, horrible, 
horse, cbeval m. 
hot, cbaud. 
hour, heure/. ; half an hour, une 

demi-heure (XVI. 4a). 
house, maison /. : at the house of, 

cbez. 



238 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



how, comment (interrog., relat., 
exelam.), que (XXV. 4(7) ; how 
many or much, combien, {ex- 
clam. ) que de. 

however adv. quelque . . . que, si 
. . . que, pour . . . que, tout . . . 
que. 

however covj. cependant, toutefois. 

human, humain. 

hundred, cent (XV. 2b, 6). 

hunger, faim /. ; be hungry, avoir 
faim (XIII. 6). 

husband, mari m. 

I, je, moi. 

idle, paresseux. 

if, si {29b ; XXXIV. lb), quand, 

que. 
ignorant, ignorant, 
ill adj. malade ; adv. mal (XXXI. 

8). 
ill n. mal m. 
ill-will : bear ill-will to. en vou- 

loir a. 
immediately, tout de suite, 
impossible, impossible, 
in, en, dans (VI. la), a, (VI. 4, 

XIII. 6 /), de. 
indeed, en effet, (=to be sure) il 

est vrai. 
India, Indes/. pi. 
infinite : an infinite amount, infi- 

niment. 
injure, nuire {irr. 4) a. 
ink, encre/. 
inside adv dedans, 
instead of, au lieu de. 
instruct, instruire {irr. 2). 
interest v. interesser ; interesting, 

interessant. 
interrupt, interrompre (XX. Zb). 
into, en, dans (VI. la, 4). 
introduce one's self, s'introduire 

{irr. 1). 
invite, inviter. 
iron, fer m.\ adj. (=of iron), de 

fer, en fer. 
it, il, elle ; le, la ; as indef. subj. 

(XL 2, XXIV. 2), ce, il. 
Italy, Italie f. 
its, son (XIV.), sien (XXVII. 1, 2), 



James, Jacques m. 

Jane, Jeanne/. 

January, Janvier m. 

Japan, Japon m. 

Joan, Joanna, Jeanne/. 

John, Jean m. 

join, joindre (irr. 17). 

journal, journal m. 

journey, voyage m. 

Julia, Julie/. 

Julius, Jules m. 

July, juillet m. 

June, juin m. 

just adj. juste. 

just adv. -. have or had jus', (done 

anvtbing), viens or venais de 

(XXXI. 116). 

keep, tenir {irr. Gl), garder ; (word 
or a secret) tenir ; keep silent, 
taire {irr. 25) ; keep doing any- 
thing, imp/. (III. 7b). 

kind, adj. bon (to, pour). 

kind n. sorte/, genre m. 

king, roi m. 

kingdom, royaume m. 

kitchen, cuisine/. 

knife, couteau m. 

know, savoir {irr. p. 159), (be ac- 
quainted with) connaitre {irr. 
18) ; know how {with inf.) sa- 
voir (XXXIV. 7^) ; know to be, 
savoir (XXXIV. 7a). 

labor v. travailler. 

laborious, laborieux. 

lack n. : for lack of, faute de. 

lady, dame/ ; my lady, the lady, 
madame (XIV. 4) ; the young 
lady, mademoiselle (XIV. 4). 

lament, se plaindre (irr. 15). 

large, grand. 

last, dernier (VIII. 5c); at last, en- 
fin. 

late, (tardy) tard, (deceased) feu; 
later, plus tard. 

lately, dernierement, *recemment 
(26«). 

latter, celui-ci, ce . . . -ci. 

laugh v. rire (irr. 13). 

laugh u . rire m. 

law, loi/. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



239 



lazy, paresseux. 

lead v. mener, conduire, (induce) 

amener. 
leaf, feuille/ 
learn, apprendre (irr. 30). 
learned adj. savant, 
least, adv. le moins (XXXI. 8) ; at 

least, an moins. 
leave, (trans , abandon) quitter, 

(leave behind) laisser ; (intr. , de- 
part) partir (irr. 38). 
leg, jambe/ 
length, longueur/, 
lengthily, longuement. 
less adv. moins (XXXI. 8) ; the 

less, moins (XXXIV. 3). 
lesson, lecon/. 
lest, que . . . ne. 
let, laisser ; impv. (VIII. 7c). 
letter, lettre/. 
Lewis, Louis m. 
library, bibliotheque /. 
lie v. (be false) mentir (irr. 41). 
life, vie /. : in all my life, de ma 

vie. 
like v. aimer, vouloir (irr. p. 114) ; 

like better, aimer mieux. 
like prep. conj. comme, en. 
lily, *lis (74d) m. 
listen, ecouter ; listen to, ecouter ; 

listen to reason, entendre raison. 
little adv. peu (de, V. 4, XXXI. 8); 

a little, un peu, un peu de ; little 

by little, peu a peu, petit a petit ; 

too little, trop peu de ; but little 

(with v.), ne . . . guere (XII. 5). 
little adj. petit. 
live, (dwell) demeurer, (be alive) 

vivre (irr. 32). 
lively, vif; in a lively manner, 

vivement. 
London, Londres m. 
long adj. long (VII. 6b). 
long adv. (a long time) longtemps ; 

longer, encore ; any longer, plus 

longtemps ; no longer, ne . . . 

plus (XII. 5) ; so or as long as, 

tant que. 
look v. (appear to be) avoir l'air ; 

look at, regarder ; look for, 

chercber. 
lose, perdre, manquer. 



loud adj. adv. 'baut. 

Louis, Louis m. 

Louisa, Louise/. 

love v. aimer ; be loved, se faire 

aimer, 
love ri. amour m.f.; in love with, 

amoureux de. 
low, bas ; in a low tone, low (adv.), 

bas. 
Lyons, Lyon m. 

mad, fou (VII. 7). 

madam, madame (XIV. 4). 

maid, (servant) domestique/. 

make, faire (irr. p. 150) ; (cause to 
be) rendre. 

man, bomme m. 

manner, maniere /. ; in a manner 
to, de facon a. 

manufacturer, fabricant m. 

many, beaucoup de (V. 4), bien de 
(with art. : V. 46), maint ; many a, 
maint ; as many, autant de ; how 
many, combien de, que de (XXV. 
4c) ; so many, tant de ; too many, 
trop de. 

March, *mars (74c?). 

Maria, Marie/ 

marry, (trans.) epouser, se marier 
avec ; (intr.) se marier ; be mar- 
ried, se marier ; newly-married 
(person), nouveau marie. 

Mary, Marie/ 

master, maitre m. 

matter n. affaire /. ; what is the 
matter with him, qu'a-t-il ? 
(XIII. 6b). 

matter v. importer. 

May, mai m. 

may v., subj. pres. (IX. 6b), pouvoir 
(irr. p. 119 ; XXV. 8/). 

maybe, peut-etre. 

me, me, moi. 

mean v. vouloir dire (XXXIII. 7d). 

means: the means (of anything), 
de quoi, les moyens; by means 
of, moyennant, a force de ; by no 
means, ne . . . nullement, ne . . . 
point. 

meanwhile, en attendant, cepen' 
dant. 

meat, viande/ 



MO 



ENGLISII-FREKCTI 



meet v. (trans.) rencontrer, (intr.) 
se rencontrer ; go to meet, aller 
a la rencontre or au-devant de. 

merchant, negotiant m., (retail) 
marchand ra. 

merely by, rien qu'a or que de. 

meter, metre in. 

Mexico, Mexique m. 

midday, midi in. (XVII. 4/>). 

midnight, minuit m. (XVII. 4/>). 

might v., subj. (IX. 6b), pouvoir 
(XXV. 8/). 

milk n. lait in. 

milk v. traire (irr. 21). 

million, million in. 

mine, mien (XXVII. 1, 2). 

minute n. minute/. 

misfortune, malheur m. 

Miss, Mademoiselle /. (XIV. 4), 
Mile. 

miss v. faillir (in: 50). 

mistake : be mistaken, se tromper. 

mock, (trans.) se moquer de. 

moderately, moderement. 

modest, modeste. 

Monday, lundi m. 

money, argent m. 

month, mois m. 

more, plus (XXXI. 8), plus de (V. 
4) ; the more, plus (XXXIV. 3). 

moreover, dailleurs, de plus. 

morning, matin m., matinee /. ; 
good-morning, bonjour m. 

morrow, lendemain in. 

most, le plus (XXXI. 8), le plus 
de, la plupart de (icith art. ; V. 
46). 

mother, mere/. 

mountain, montagne/. 

move, mouvoir (irr. 76), (with 
emotion, the feelings) emouvoir 
(irr. 76), toucher. 

Mr. , Monsieur m. , M. (XIV. 4). 

Mrs., Madame/, Mme. (XIV. 4). 

much, (with v.) beaucoup, tres, fort ; 
(with n.) beaucoup de (V. 4) ; as 
much, autant de ; how much, 
combien, combien de ; so much, 
tant, tant de ; too much, trop, 
trop de ; very much, beaucoup ; 
not much, ne . . . pas beaucoup, 
ne . . . guere. 



music, musique/ 
must, il faut etc. (XXX. 6, 7), 
devoir O'/r. p. 124 ; XXVI. 12/). 
my, mon (XIV.). 

name, nom m. 

napkin, serviette / 

near adv. pres, aupres ; too near, 

trop pres. 
near, near to, prep, pres, pres de ; 

go or draw near or near to, s'ap- 

procher de. 
nearly, a peu pres. 
neat, *net (76«), (clean) propre. 
necessary : be necessary, falloir 

(irr. p. 141). 
need n. besoin m. 
neighbor, voisin m., voisine f. 
neither prou ni l'un ni l'autre 

(XXVII. 7). 
neither conj. ni (XXXIV. 3). 
nephew, neveu m. 
never, ne . . . jamais (XII. 4). 
nevertheless, neanmoins. 
new, nouveau (VII. 7), neuf. 
news n. nouvelle/ (*. or pi.). 
newspaper, journal m. 
next adj. prochain ; next day, len- 
demain, jour suivant. 
next prep., pres ; conj. puis, 
niece, niece/', 
night, nuit/. 
nine, neuf (61a, 85c). 
nineteen, *dix-neuf (Sib). 
ninety, *quatre-vingt-dix (81/;). 
ninth, neuvieme 
no rep. non. 
no, none, no one adj. n. ne . . . 

aucun, ne . . . nul (XIV. 6c/. d, 

XXVII. 6), ne . . . pas or point 

de ; no longer, ne . . . plus (XII. 

5). 
nobody, no one, ne . . . personne 

(XII. 4). 
none, nee no, adj. 
nor, ni (XII. 5). 
north, nord rn. 
Norway, Korvege/. 
not, ne ; ne . . pas, ne . . , point, 

non, non pas ; not any, ne . . . 

aucun, ne . . . nul, ne . . . pas de; 

not anything, ne rien ; not ever, 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



241 



ne . . . jamais ; not any one, ne 
. . per sonne. 
nothing, ne . . . rien (XII. 4). 
novel adj. nouveau (VII. 7). 
novel n. roman m. 
November, novembre m. 
now adv. a present, maintenant ; 

conj. or ; now . . . now, tantot 

. . . tantot. 
nowhere, nulle part, 
null adj. nul. 

obey, obeir a. 

oblige : be obliged to, falloir 
(XXX. 7). 

obtain, obtenir (irr. 61). 

o'clock, heure/. (XVII. 4). 

October, octobre m. 

of, de (III. 1-3) ; en, a. 

off : be off or go off, s'en aller 
(XXIX. 1c). 

offer, offrir (irr. 53). 

officer, officier m. 

often, souvent (XXXI. 7). 

old, vieux (VII. 7), (so many 
years) age de ; too old, trop 
age ; be (so many years) old, 
avoir . . . ans (XVII. 5) ; grow 
old, vieillir. 

■on, sur. 

once, une fois ; at once, (immedi- 
ately) tout de suite, sur le champ, 
(at the same time) a la fois. 

one, un (XV. 2a), {indef.) on 
(XXVII. 4) ; no one, see no ; 
some one, s°e some ; one anoth- 
er, Tun l'autre (XXVII. 7), se 
XXIX. 8) ; one who, anyone 
who, quiconque, qui. 

only adj. seul. 

only adv. ne . . . que (XII. 5), 
seulement. 

open v. ouvrir (irr. 55), eclore (irr. 
28). 

opposite to, vis-a-vis de. 

or, ou, soit (XXXIV. 3). 

order : in order to, afin de, pour ; 
in order that, afin que, pour que. 

ordinarily, ordinairement. 

other, autre (XXVII. 6, 7) ; others, 
other people than one's self, au- 
trui (XXVII. 6a). 
16 



otherwise, autrement. 

ought, devoir (irr. p. 124). 

our, notre (XIV. 1). 

ours, notre (XXVII. 1, 2). 

out of, hors de, bors. 

outside, dehors. 

over, sur, (above) au-dessus de, (be- 
yond) par-dessus ; triumph over, 
triompher de ; be all over, e'en 
etre fait. 

owe, devoir (irr. p. 124). 

own adj. propre. 

ox, boeuf in. (pi. *boeufs ; 61a). 

package, paquet m. 

page, (of a book etc.) page/. 

pain, mal (XIII. Qa), (grief) peine/. 

paint v. peindre (irr. 16). 

painter, peintre m. 

painting n. peinture/. 

paper, papier m. 

pardon v. pardonner (to [anyone], 

a), 
parent, parent m. 
Paris, Paris m. 
pass v. passer, 
past : half past, etc. , see XVII. 4 ; 

during . . . past, depuis. 
peach, peche/. 
pear, poire/ 
peas, pois m. 

peasant, *paysan (37a) m. 
pen, plume/, 
pencil, crayon m. 
pending prep, pendant, 
people, (nation) peuple, (folks) 

gens, (indef.) on (XXVII. 4). 
pepper, poivre m. 
perceive, apercevoir (irr. 65), 

s'apercevoir de. 
perfectly, parfaitement. 
perhaps, peut-etre, probablement. 
permit, permettre (irr. 31) a. 
persuade, persuader, 
picture, tableau m. 
piece, morceau m. 
pity v. plaindre (irr. 15). 
p4ty n. pitie : it's a pity, e'est 

dommage. 
place, lieu m. place /.; take place, 

avoir lieu, 
plan n. projet m. 



242 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



plate n. assiette/. 

plaything, jouet m. 

please, plaire a (mt. 24) ; if you 
please, s'il vous plait ; please to 
(impv. ), veuillez (XXIV. 6c) ; 
be pleased to, se plaire a. 

pleasure, plaisir m. 

pocket, poche/. 

poet, poete m. 

poetry, poesie/. 

point, point m.\ on the point of, 
sur le point de. 

poor, pauvre (VIII. 5c). 

portrait, portrait m. 

possess, posseder. 

possible, possible. 

post, post-office, poste/. 

potato, pomme de terref. 

poultry-yard, basse-cour/. 

pound, livre/. 

power, pouvoir m. 

praise v. louer. 

prepare, preparer. 

present n. cadeau m. , present m. , 
don m. 

present adj. : at present, a present, 
maintenant ; be present at, as- 
sister a. 

presently, presentement. 

prettily, joliment. 

pretty, joli. 

priest, pretre in. 

probably, probablement. 

project n. projet m. 

promise, promettre (irr. 31 : to, a). 

protect, proteger. 

provide, pourvoir (irr. 69) : pro- 
vided that, pourvu que. 

prudently, *prudemment (26a). 

Prussia, Prusse/. 

punish, punir. 

pupil, (scholar) eleve m. 

put, mettre {irr. 31) ; put off, dif- 
ferer. 

Pyrenees, Pyrenees/. 

quarter, quart m. (XVI. 46). 
queen, reine/. 
quickly, vite. 
quite, tout, bien. 

ragout, ragout m. 



railroad, railway, chemin defer m., 

voie ferree/. 
rain v. pleuvoir (irr. 71). 
rain v. pluie/. 
rainy, pluvieux. • 
raise, lever, 
rather, plutot. 
read, lire (irr. 11). 
ready, pret ; get ready, s'appreter. 
really, vraiment, reellement,en efFet. 
realm, royaume m. 
reason n. raisonf. 
recall, rappeler (XXI. 3c). 
receive, recevoir (irr. 65). 
recently, dernierement, *recemment 

(26a). 
recognize, reconnaitre (irr. 18). 
red, rouge, 
regard, regarder : as regards, 

quant a. 
rejoice, se rejouir. 
relative w. parent m. 
remain, rester. 
remember, (recall to mind) se 

rappeler, se souvenir (irr. 60). 
remove, oter. 
render, rendre. 
repent, se repentir (mt. 42). 
reply, repondre. 
republic, republique /. 
requirement, besoin m. 
resolve, se resoudre (irr. 36), re- 

soudre. 
retire, se retirer. 
return, revenir (irr. 60), retourner, 

etre de retour. 
Rhine, Rbin m. 
rich, riche (in, de or en), 
riches, richesse/. 
ridicule v. se moquer de. 
right n. droit m. 
right (id j. droit : be right, avoir 

raison (XIII. 6a). 
rise, se lever, 
river, riviere/., fleuve m. 
road, chemin m., route/, 
romance, roman m. 
room, chambre/. 
rose, rose/. 

roundabout adv. alentour. 
run, courir (irr. 52) ; run away, 

se sauver. 



YOCABULAKT TO THE EXERCISES. 



243 



Russia, Kussie/. 

sailboat, bateau a voiles m. 

sailor, matelot to. 

salt, sel m. 

saloon, salon to. 

same, meme. 

Saturday, samedi m. 

say, dire {irr. p 155). 

scarcely, ne . . . guere (XII. 5), a 

peine, 
school, ecole /. ; to or at school, a 

lecole. 
score, vingt, (about twenty) ving- 

taine/. 
sea, mer/. 

seat one's self, s'asseoir (irr. 78). 
second adj. *second (58/), *deuxi- 

eme (81c). 
second n. *seconde (58/)/. 
see, voir {irr. 67); see again, revoir. 
seek, cb.ercb.er ; seek one's fortune, 

cbercber fortune, 
seem, sembler. 
Seine, Seine/ 
seize, saisir. 

-self, -meme (XXIII. 3c). 
sell, vendre. 
send, envoyer (irr. 81) ; send back, 

renvoyer ; send for, envoyer 

cbercber. 
sense : good sense, bon *sens 

(74(0 to. 
September, septembre to. 
servant, domestique inf., bonne/, 
serve, servir (irr. 44) ; serve as, 

servir de. 
set, mettre (irr. 31) ; set out, par- 

tir {irr. 38). 
seven, *sept (71«, 16a). 
seventeen, *dix-sept (7 hi, 815). 
seventh, *septieme (Tin). 
seventy, *soixante-dix (Sib, c). 
several, plusieurs. 
sew, coudre (irr. 34). 
she, elle. 
sheep, brebis/. 
sheet, (of paper etc.) feuille/. 
shepherd, berger m. 
shoe, Soulier to. 
shoemaker, cordonnier m. 
shop, boutique/, magasin to. 



short adj. court ; short of (with 
inf.), a moins de. 

show v. montrer. 

shun, fuir (irr. 47), eviter. 

shut, fermer. 

sick, malade. 

side, cote/ 

signify, vouloir dire (XXXIII. 
Id). 

silent : be silent, se taire (irr. 25). 

silk, soie/. 

silver, argent to. 

simple, simple. 

since prep, depuis ; des ; cortj. puis- 
que, (since the time that) depuis 
que, depuis que . . . ne. 

sincere, sincere. 

sincerely, sincerement. 

sing, chanter. 

sir,"*monsieur (545, 73c). 

sister, soeur/ 

sit, seoir (irr. 78) ; sit down, s'as- 
seoir {irr. 78). 

six, *six (815). 

sixteen, seize. 

sixth, *sixieme (81c). 

sixty, *soixante (81c). 

sleep n. sommeil m. 

sleep v. dormir (irr. 43). 

sleepy : be sleepy, avoir sommeil 
(XIII. 6). 

slow, lent. 

slowly, lentement. 

small, petit. 

snow, neiger. 

so adv. si, ainsi, le (XXIII. 3c) ; 
so much or many, tant de ; so 
long as, tant que ; so far as, tant 
que, que ; so-and-so, tel, un tel ; 
so that (in such a way that), de 
or en sorte que. 

so conj. ainsi. 

soft, doux (VII. 8), mol (VII. 7). 

softly, doucement, bas (XXXI. 9). 

soldier, soldat to. 

solely, seulement. 

solve, resoudre (irr. 36). 

some, de with art. (IV.), en 
(XXIII. 7), quelque (XIV. 6c), 
quelques uns (XXVII. 5), tel ; 
some time, quelque temps ; 
some one, somebody, quelqu'un 



244 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



(XXVII. 5) ; some men are, il y 

a des gens qui sont. 
something, quelque chose (XXVII. 

5) ; something to . . . with, de 

quoi. 
sometimes, quelquefois. 
somewhere, quelque part, 
son, *fils (QSc, 74rf) in. 
soon, tot, bientot ; as soon as, 

aussitot que, des que. 
sooner, plus tot, (rather) plutot. 
soup, soupe/. 
south, *sud (60a) m. 
Spain, Espagne/. 
Spanish, espagnol, d'Espagne. 
speak, parler (with, a). 
spite : in spite of, malgre. 
spoon, *cuiller (73/;)/. 
start, partir (irr. 38). 
station, gare/. 
stay, rester. 
steamboat, bateau a, vapeur m., 

vapeur m. 
stew a. ragout m. 
still adv. encore ; still more, davan- 

tage ; conj. pourtant. 
stocking, bas m. 
stop, s'arreter. 
store, magasin m. 
story, recit m., conte m., bistoire/ 
straight, droit, 
street, rue/", 
strike, frapper. 
strong, fort, 
studio, atelier m. 
successful, beureux. 
such, tel ; such a, un tel ; such- 
and-such, tel. 
suddenly, soudain, soudainement, 

tout a coup 
suffer, souffrir (irr. 54). 
suffice, be sufficient, suffire (irr. 6). 
sugar, sucre m. 
Sunday, dimanche m. 
suppose, supposer, croire. 
sure, sur. 

suspect, se douter de. 
Sweden, Suede f. 
sweet, doux (VII. 8). 
sweetly, doucement. 
sweetmeat, confiture/. 
Switzerland, Suisse/. 



table, table/. 

table-cloth, nappe/. 

tailor, tailleur m. 

take, prendre {irr. 30), (conduct) 
mener ; take back (along with 
one, ramener ; take off waway, 
oter (from, a) ; take place, avoir 
lieu ; take a walk, se promener ; 
take care, avoir soin. 

tale, conte in., recit m. 

talk, parler. 

tall, grand. 

task, tacbe/ 

tea, the m. 

teach, enseigner. 

teacher, maitre m. 

tear //. larme/ 

tedious, ennuyeux, ennuyant. 

tell, dire (irr. p. 155), raconter; 
tell a lie, mentir (irr. 41). 

ten, Mix (Sib). 

tenth, *dixieme (816*). 

Thames, Tamise/ 

than, que (IX 4), de (XV. 9). 

that pron. ce, ce . . . la (XIII. 2 
3), celui, celui-la, cela (XXIV.) 
(relat.) qui, que, lequel (XXVI.) 
all that, tout ce que ; that which, 
ce qui or que (XXVI. lO'i). 

that conj. que, pour que, afin que. 

thaw, degeler. 

theatre, theatre m. 

thee, te, toi. 

their, leur (XIV.). 

theirs, leur (XXVII. 1. 2). 

them, les, leur (XXII. 5), eux, elles 
(XXIII.). 

theme, theme m. 

then adv. alors; conj done, alors, 
puis. 

there, la, -la (XIII. 3, XXIV. la), 
y (XXIII. 8i ; there (demomtr.) 
is or are, voila ; there is etc., il 
y a etc. (XXX. 4). 

they, ils in., elles /., (indef.) on 
(XXVII. 4). 

thine, tien (XXVII. 1, 2). 

thing, chose /. ; other things, autre 



think, penser, songer ; think of 
(turn one's thoughts to), penser 
a ; think about (have an opinion 
of), penser de ; (be of opinion) 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



245 



croire (irr. 26) ; (think to be, re- 
gard as) croire. 

third, troisienie, (third part) tiers. 

thirst, soif f. ; be thirsty, avoir soif 
(XIII. 6). 

thirteen, treize. 

thirty, trente. 

this, ce, ce . . . -ci (XIII. 2, 3), 
celui, celui-ci, ceci (XXIY.) ; this 
or that is, voici, voila. 

thou, tu. 

though, same as although. 

thousand, *mille (68/),"*mil (687). 

three, trois. 

through, par, a tr avers. 

thunder r. tonner. 

Thursday, jeudi m. 

thus, ainsi, de la sorte. 

thy, ton (XIV. 1, 2). 

till, coi'j. jusqu'a ce que, que. 

time, (period) temps m., (succes- 
sive) fois /. (XVII 7), (of day) 
heure /. ; in good time, de bonne 
heure ; at the time of, lors de ; at 
the same time, en meme temps ; 
have time, avoir le temps. 

tire, fatiguer ; be tired, se fatiguer. 

tiresome, fatigant, ennuyeux. 

to, a (III. 4-6), en, dans ; de ; with 
inf., a, de, pour. 

to-day, aujourd'hui. 

together, ensemble 

to-morrow, demain ; day after to- 
morrow, apres-demain. 

too, trop ; too much or many, trop 
de ; too little or few, trop peu 
de. 

tooth, dent/. 

toward, vers, envers ; toward even- 
ing, vers le soir. 

town, *ville 168O. 

tragedy, tragedie/. 

translate, traduire {irr. 1). 

travel, voyager. 

tree, arbre m. 

true, vrai. 

truly, vraiment, veritablement. 

trunk, malle/. 

trust i\ se fier a. 

truth, verite/. 

try, essayer. 

Tuesday, mardi m.; Tuesdays, le 
mardi. 



tureen, soupiere/. 

twelve, douze ; twelve o'clock, midi 

or minuit (XVII. 46) m. 
twentieth, vingtieme. 
twenty, vingt \1Qa). 
twice,' deux fois, -bis (74tZ). 
two, deux. 

ugly, laid, vilain. 

uncle, oncle m. 

under, sous. 

understand, comprendre {irr. 30). 

undertake, entreprendre {irr. 30). 

unhappiness, malheur in. 

unhappy 3 malheureux. 

united, uni ; United Provinces, 

Provinces-Unies ; United States, 

^tats-TJnis. 
unless, a moins que . . . ne, sans 

que, bors que. 
until conj. jusqu'a ce que, en atten 

dant que. 
upon, sur. 
up-stairs, en baut. 
us. nous. 
use v. user de, se servir {irr. 44) de ; 

used to, impf. (III. 7b). 
use n . : make use of, se servir {irr. 

44) de. 
usually, ordinairement. 

vain, vain. 

value : have the value of, valoir 

(irr. 73). 
vase, vase m. 
vegetable n legume m. 
velvet, velours m. 
Venice, Venise/ 
very a*h. tres, bien, fort ; very 

much, beaucoup. 
very adj. meme. 
Vesuvius, Vesuve m. 
vie, le disputer. 
Vienna, Vienne/. 
village, ^village (68/) m. 
violet, violette/. 
voice, voix /. ; with louder voice, 

d'un ton plus baut. 
volume, volume m., tome m. 

wait, attendre ; wait for, attendre. 
wake, (trans.) eveiller, (intr.) 
s'eveiller. 



246 



ENGLISH-FKENCH VOCABTJLAKY. 



walk, marcher, se promener ; take 

a walk, se promener ; go to walk, 

aller se promener. 
want, (desire) vouloir (irr. p. 114), 

(lack, be in need of) falloir (irr. 

p. 141 ; XXX. 8). 
war, guerre/, 
warm adj. chaud ; feel or be warm, 

avoir chaud (XIII. 6) ; be warm 

weather, faire chaud (XXXII. 

9a). 
watch n. (timekeeper) montre/. 
water, eau/. 
we, nous, 
weak, faihle. 
weary v. fatiguer. 
weather, temps m. 
Wednesday, mercredi m. 
week, semaine/. 
weep, weep for, pleurer. 
well, Men (XXXI. 8) ; wish well, 

vouloir du hien ; be as well, 

valoir autant. 
well-behaved, sage, 
well- satisfied, content (with, de). 
west, *ouest (76a). 
what adj. quel (XIII. 4) ; tvbxt. 

qui, que, quoi (XXV.), ce qui or 

que (XXVI. 10a). 
whatever, quoi que, quel que, quel- 

que . . . que, quelconque. 
when adv. quand, (in or at which) 

ou ; conj. quand, lorsque, des que, 

que. 
whence, d'ou, dont (XXVI. 7b). 
where, ou (XXVI. 8). 
whereas, tandis que. 
wherewith de quoi (XXVI. Ba). 
whether, si (XXXIV. lb), que; 

whether ... or, soit . . . soit, 

soit que . . . soit que, que . . . 

ou que. 
which adj. quel (XIII. 4), ftnbst. 

lequel (XXV. 5), (relat.) qui, que, 

lequel (XXVI.) ; of which, dont 

(XXVI. 7) ; to or at which, ou. 
while conj. pendant que, tandis que. 
white, blanc (VII. Qb). 
who, whom, qui (XXV.), (relat.) 

qui, que, lequel (XXVI.). 
whoever, qui que, quel que, qui, 

quiconque (XXVI. 9). 
whole, tout entier, tout, 
whose, de qui, duquel, dont, (to 

whom belonging) a qui. 



why, pourquoi, que (XXV. 4a*). 

wicked, mauvais. 

wife, *femme (26a)/. 

will, be willing v. vouloir (irr. p. 
114; XXIV. 6e). 

William, Guillaume m. 

window, fenetre/. 

wine, vin m. 

winter, *hiver (735) m. 

wise, sage. 

wish v. vouloir (irr. p. 114), de- 
sirer ; (wish good-day etc.) sou- 
haiter. 

with, avec, (by) par, a, de, (at the 
house of) chez. 

within adv. dedans ; prep. en. 

without prep, sans, a moins de 
(with inf.) ; go or do without, se 
passer de ; conj. (XXXIV. 56), 
£ans que, hors que, que . . . ne. 

without adv. dehors. 

woman, *femme (26a)/. 

wood, bois m. 

wooden, de bois (V. lb). 

wool, laine/ 

word, parole/, mot m. ; keep one's 
word, tenir parole 

work n. (labor) travail m., (pro- 
duction) m. ouvrage. 

work v. travailler. 

workman, ouvrier m. 

workwoman, ouvriere /. 

world, monde m. 

worse adj. pire (IX. 3) ; adv. pis 
(XXXI. 8). 

worst, le pire (IX. 3) ; adv. le pis 
(XXXI. 8). 

worth : be worth, valoir (irr. 73). 

write, ecrire (irr. 12). 

wrong n. tort ; be wrong or in the 
wrong, avoir tort (XIII. 6). 

yard n. (measure) metre m. 

year, an m., annee/. 

yes, oui, si. 

yesterday, *hier (73a) ; day before 
yesterday, avant-hier. 

yet adv. encore ; conj. pourtant, 
toutefois. 

yonder adv la-bas. 

you, vous (I. 9b, VII. lb). 

young, jeune ; young lady, made- 
moiselle (XIV. 4). 

your, votre (XIV.). 

yours, votre (XXVII. 1, 2). 



FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS. 



The teacher is recommended to exercise the pupils thoroughly in the conver- 
sational phrases here given, which may be varied by substituting for the nouns 
used those contained in the accompanying vocabularies, thus familiarizing 
them with the ordinary phrases of every-day conversation as well as with a large 
number of useful words. 

I. DANS LES MAGASINS.— IN THE SHOPS. 



Je m'en vais en ville faire quelques 

emplettes ; voulez-vous m'accom- 

pagner 1 
Volontiers. Attendez seulement un 

instant ; il faut que je change de 

robe. 
Tres bien ; mais depechez-vous, et 

n'oubliez pas d'apporter votre 

portemonnaie. 
Ou allez-vous * 
A nn magasin de nouveautes ; le 

voici. Entrons. 
Avez-vous des gants 1 
Madame* desire-t-elle des gants de 

Suede ou des gants glaces ? 
Montrez-moi des gants de Suede, 

numero 6. 
En voici de tres bons, et dans des 

couleurs fort a la mode. 
Je n'aime pas ces nuances jaunes ; 

n'en avez-vous pas de noirs ? 
Madame n'ignore pas que les gants 

noirs s'usent plus vite que les 

gants de couleurs * 
N'importe ; je vous prie de me met- 

tre de cote ces deux paires ; je les 

essaierai plus tard. 



I am going to town to make some 
purchases ; will you go with 
me? 

Willingly. Only wait a moment ; 
I must change my dress. 

Yery well ; but hurry, and do not 
forget to bring your purse. 

"Where are you going ? 

First to a fancy shop ; here it is. 

Let us go in. 
Have you any gloves ? 
Do you wish undressed kid or 

glace kid gloves ? 
Show me undressed gloves, No. 6. 

Here are some very good ones, 

and in very fashionable colors. 
I do not like these yellow shades ; 

have you no black ones ? 
You know that black gloves wear 

out more quickly than colored 

ones ? 
No matter ; please put aside these 

two pairs for me. I will try 

them later. 



* The French shopkeeper almost invariably addresses his customers in the 
3d person. 



248 



FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS. 



Permettez-moi de vous faire voir 

ces gants clairs. C'est tout ce 

quil y a de plus joli pour soiree. 
Ce n'est pas la peine de me les 

montrer. Je n'en ai aucun be- 

soin. Qu'avez-vous de nouveau 

en fait de broderies 1 
Comment madame trouve-t-elle ces 

mouchoirs brodes ? II sont d'un 

genre tout a fait nouveau. 
Et qui me parait etre d'assez mau- 

vais gout. 
Madame prefererait peut-etre ces 

mouchoirs de dentelle. 
lis sont ravissants, mais ils coutent 

sans doute tres cher. 
Mais du tout, madame, ce sont des 

mouchoirs d'occasion ; nous les 

vendons 10 francs (la) piece. 
En ce cas j'en prends deux. 
Madame ne veut-elle pas jeter un 

coup d'oeil sur ces foulards des 

Indes 1 
Merci, j'ai deja to it ce qu'il me 

faut. 
Envoyez-moi tout cela, et n'oubliez 

pas d'y ajouter votre compte. 



Voila le magasin de mercerie que 

je cherchais. 
II me faut du fil et des aiguilles. 
Madame prefere des aiguilles an- 

glaises % 
Donnez-m'en de tres fines. -J'en ai 

besoin pour broder. 
Montrez-moi aussi des aiguilles a 

tricoter. Avez-vous du ruban 

de fil tres large ] Ceci fera bien 

mon affaire. 
Ajoutez-y deux bobines de coton et 

un echeveau de soie noire, 



Let me show you these light 
gloves. Nothing could be pret- 
tier for evening wear. 

It is not worth-while to show them 
to me. I do not need them at 
all. What new things have you 
in embroideries 1 

How do you like these embroid- 
ered handkerchiefs ? They are 
in quite a new style. 

And one which seems to me to be 
in rather bad taste. 

Perhaps you would prefer these 
lace handkerchiefs. 

They are charming, but they are 
doubtless very dear. 

Not at all, madame, they are bar- 
gains ; we are selling them for 
10 francs apiece. 

In that case I will take two. 

Will you not glance at these 
India silks ? 

Thanks, I have everything I need 

already. 
Send me all these things, and do 

not forget to add your bill. 



Here is the thread and needle 

shop I was looking for. 
I want some thread and needles. 
Do you prefer English needles ? 

Give me some very fine ones. I 
want them for embroidering. 

Show me some knitting-needles 
too. Have you very broad 
tape ? That will do for me. 

Add two spools of thread and a 
skein of black silk. 



I. DAXS LES MAGASIXS. — IK THE SHOPS. 



249 



Faites du tout un paquet aussi 

petit que possible. 
A combien monte mon memoire T 

Je veux le payer tout de suite. 

Je n'ai pas de monnaie. Veuillez 

bien me changer ce billet de 

banque. 



Put it all up in as small a pack- 
age as you can. 

How much is my bill ? I wish 
to pay at once. I have no 
change. Please change- this 
bank-note for me. 



VOCABULARY. 



le negociant, the merchant. 

le marchaad, shopkeeper. 

ie pbarmacien, druggist. 

la pharmacie, drug-store. 

un epicier, grocer. 

une epicerie, grocery, 

un patissier, pastry-cook. 

la patisserie, cake-shop. 

un joallier, jeweller. 

un horloger, watchmaker. 

un cordonnier, shoemaker. 

un teinturier, dyer. 

un tapissier, upholsterer. 

un libraire, bookseller. 

un relieur, bookbinder. 

un papetier, stationer. 

une marchande de modes, mil- 
liner. 

un banquier, banker. 

une boite a ouvrage, workbox. 

une aiguille a tapisserie, worsted 
needle. 

une aiguille a repriser, darning- 
needle. 

un paquet d'aiguilles, paper of- 
needles. 

du fil, thread. 

une aiguillee, needleful. 

un echeveau, skein. 



une bobine, spool. 

un peloton, ball. 

un de, thimble. 

une paire de ciseaux, scissors. 

un passe-lacet, bodkin. 

du galon, braid. 

des portes et des crockets, hooks 

and eyes, 
des boutons, buttons, 
une parure, set of ornaments, 
un collier, necklace, 
un bracelet, bracelet, 
une bague, ring, 
une montre, watch, 
une agrafe, clasp, 
une boucle d'oreille, ear-ring, 
un flacon, smelling-bottle, 
un eventail, fan. 
une ombrelle, parasol, 
un parapluie, umbrella, 
un ruban, ribbon, 
un livre brocbe, an unbound 

book, 
un livre relie, a bound book, 
la reliure, binding, 
une metre, metre, 
une livre, pound, 
l'argent, money, 
la monnaie, change. 



250 



FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS. 



II. UN DINER.— A DINNER. 



Le diner est servi. Allons nous 

mettre a table. 
Qu'est-ce qu'on va nous scrvir ? 
Voila d'abord de la soupo. Voulez- 

vous du potage a la julienne ou 

de la soupe a l'oseille "i 
Donnez-moi du potage, s'il vous 

plait. 
Prenez-vous du sauterne avec votre 

soupe ? 
J'en veux bien, si vous voulez m'en 

donner un tout petit verre. 
Auguste, coupez-moi un morceau de 

pain. 
Desirez-vous maintenant du pois- 

son 1 ? 
Ce saumon a l'air d'etre tres bon. 

J'en prendrai volontiers un tout 

petit morceau. 
Voila un bon gigot. En voulez- 

vous 1 Je peux vous en donner 

de tres bien cuit. 

Non, merci ; je ne mange jamais de 

mouton. J'attendrai le gibier. 
Auguste, versez-moi de l'eau. 

En attendant ne voulez-vous pas 

prendre des legumes *? 
Donnez-moi des petits pois et des 

asperges. 
Malheureusement il n'y a pas d'as- 

perges a ce moment-ci, mais je 

peux vous offrir des articbauts 

excellents. 



Dinner is ready. Let us sit down 

at the table. 
What is there for dinner ?* 
First there is soup. Will you 

have julienne or sorrel soup ? 

Give me julienne, if you please. 

Will you have sherry with your 

soup ? 
With pleasure, if you will give 

me a very small glass of it. 
Augustus, cut me a hit of bread. 

Do you wish some fish now ? 

This salmon looks very good. I 
will take a small bit. 

Here is a fine leg of mutton. Do 
you want some ? I can give 
you some that is very well 
done. 

No, thanks ; I never eat mutton. 
I will wait for the game. 

Augustus, pour me out some 
water. 

While waiting will you not take 
some vegetables ? 

Give me some green peas and 
some asparagus. 

Unfortunately there is no aspara- 
gus now, but I can offer you 
excellent artichokes. 



* Literally : What are they going to serve us, or give us ? 



II. 'OT DLN-ER. — A DIOTER. 



251 



\ 



S'il n'y a pas d'asperges, il faut 

que je m'en passe ; mais je deteste 

les artichauts. 
Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de me 

passer le sel % 
Voulez-vous qu'on vous apporte' 

cailles ou du lapin ? 
Je-prefere les cailles au laprn. 
Q u e ll e s a lade-voulez-vous avec votre 

caille 1 On nous sert du cresson 

et de la laitue. 
Boaaeznnei- 4u—eresson, -s 'il vou o 



I 



plait, et dites a Auguste d'aller 

nous chercher une bouteille de 

vin rouge. 
Voici une omelette aux confitures 

et—des meringues a la vanille. 

En voulez-vous ? 
<juant a mStpje-ne mange jamais 

de plats doux. 
"--6ette" omelette est pourtant ex- 

cellente. Je vous prie d'y gouter. 
J'aime mieux prendre de ces fruits. 

Voila des raisins magnifiques, et 

ces prunes aussi me semblent 

etre des meilleures. 
yMaintenant donnez-moi une tasse 

de cafe noir. 
\ Avez-vous bien dine, monsieur ? 
Moi, j'ai admirablement dine. Je 

vous fais compliment de votre 

cuisiniere. Elle nous a servi un 

diner on ne peut mieux. 



Merci, monsieur. Vous etes bien Thanks, sir. You are very kind, 
complaisant pour moi. 



If there is no asparagus I shall 

have to do without it, but I 

dislike artichokes. 
Will you be kind enough to pass 

me the salt? v 

Do you wish to have ; quail or 

hare brought you ? 
I prefer-quail to hare. 
What salad will you take with 

your quail ? There are cresses 

and lettuce. 
-Give me some cress, if you 

please, and tell Augustus to get 

us a bottle of claret. 

Here is a sweet omelette and 
some vanilla meringues. Will 
you have some ? 

As for me, I never eat sweet 
dishes. 

This omelette is nevertheless ex- 
cellent. I beg you to taste it. 

I like better to take some of 
these fruits. Here are magnifi- 
cent grapes, and these plums 
seem to me of the best. 

Now give me a cup of black 
coffee. 

Have you dined well ? 

I have dined excellently. I con- 
gratulate you on your cook. 
She has served us a dinner 
which could hardly be sur- 



252 



FAMILIAR CONYERSATIOKS. 



VOCABULARY. 



le diner, the dinner. 

le dejeuner, the breakfast. 

le souper, the supper. 

le gouter, the lunch. — 

la soupe, the soup. 

le dessert, the dessert. 

le cafe, the coffee. 

le the, the tea. 

le chocolat, the chocolate. 

la creme, the cream. 

le riz, the rice. 

l'oeuf, the egg. 

le blanc, the white of eggs. 

le jaune, the yolk " " 

la coque, the shell - " 

oeufs a la coque, boiled " 

ceufs sur le plat, baked " 

un plat, a dish. 

le bouillon, the bouillon. 

le boeuf, the beef. 

le roti, the roast. '• 

le bifstek, the beefsteak. 

le veau, the veal. 

la cotelette, the cutlet. 

le bachis, the mince-meat. 

le mouton, the mutton. 

le gigot, the leg of mutton. 

le jambon, the ham. 

le gras, the fat. 

le maigre, the lean. 

une tranche, a slice. 

la sauce, the gravy. 

le poulet, the chicken. 

le canard, the duck. 



les ris-de-veau, sweetbreads, 
les legumes, vegetables. 

le chou, the cabbage. " 

le navet, the turnip. 

la carotte, the carrot. 

le chou-fleur, the cauliflower. 

les epinards, the spinach. 

les haricots verts, string-beans. 

les tomates, tomatoes. 

le celeri, the celery. 

un oignon' an onion. 

le persil, the parsley. - — *— - 

le pate, the meat-pie. 

la tarte, the tart. ~~~ 

le fruit, the fruit. 

les cerises, cherries. ' 

les groseilles, currants. 

la peche, the peach. — " 

la poire, the pear. 

un abricot, an apricot. 

les fraises, strawberries. 

les framboises, raspberries. 

les ananas, pineapples. 

les bananes, bananas. 

les figues, figs. 

les noix, nuts. 

les amandes, almonds. 

une glace, an ice. 

une gelee, a jelly. 

les compotes, preserves. 

les confitures, sweetmeats. 

la tartine, a slice of bread, with 

butter, jam, etc. 
les crepes, pancakes. 



III. CHEZ LA COUTURIERE. — AT THE DRESSMAKERS. 253 



III. CHEZ LA COUTURIERE.— AT THE DRESSMAKER'S. 



v Est-ce que c'est ici que demeure 

Madame des Trois-Etoiles 1 
\ Oui, madame. 

VOn m'a recommande de m'adresser 
a vous pour me faire faire une 
robe. 

Je ferai tout mon possible pour 
plaire a madame, et je crois que 
mes pratiques n'ont jamais a se 
plaindre de moi. 

Que demandez-vous pour une facon 
de robe ? 

C'est selon la facon et l'etoffe. 
Quelle espece de robe madame 
desire-t-elle ? 

Une robe de merinos tres simple, 
et puis quelque chose d'habille 
pour la soiree. 

Je vous engage beaucoup a prendre 
une robe de ce velours rouge 
fonce. C'est toujours elegant, et 
9a ne se chiffonne pas. J'y ajou- 
terais des garnitures de soie 
d'une nuance un peu plus claire 
avec des passementeries. Ca 
sera une toilette ravissante. 

Et quel en sera le prix ? 

Madame l'aura pour 250 francs, 
avec les fournitures, bien en- 
tendu. 

Cela fera bien mon affaire. 

Madame la desire naturellement a 
corsage collant. 

Oui, mais ne me serrez pas la taille. 
Jaime pouvoir respirer a pleins 
poumons. 



Does Mrs. Blank live here ? 

Yes. 

I have been recommended to ap- 
ply to you to have a dress 
made. 

I will do my best to please you, 
and I think my customers 
never have to complain of me. 

What do you ask for making a 
dress ? 

That depends on the style and 
the material. What kind of a 
dress do you desire ? 

A very simple cashmere dress, 
and then something more dressy 
for evening wear. 

I advise you to take a dress of 
this dark-red velvet. It is al- 
ways handsome, and does not 
easily grow shabby. I should 
add trimmings of silk of a 
rather lighter shade and of 
passementerie. That would 
make a charming costume. 

And what will the price be ? 

You may have it for two hun- 
dred and fifty francs, with all 
the makings, of course. 

That will do very well. 

You wish it, of course, to have a 
tight-fitting waist. 

Yes, but do not make the waist 
too tight. I like to be able to 
breath with full lungs. 



254 



FAMILIAR COXVERSATIONS. 



" ' Je ferai bien attention a ce que la 
robe ne vous gene pas. 

Quant a la robe de merinos, je m'en 
rapporte a vous. Je veux seule- 
ment qu'elle soit dune facon 
simple et dune couleur foncee. 

Madame naime pas l'etoffe rayee 
ou en carreaux % 

N'importe. Je tiens seulement a ce 
qu'elle maille bien. 

Ne vous en inquietez pas, madame. 

Je vous prie de m'envoyer les deux 

robes au plus tot. 
Si madame veut les essayer lundi, 

elle les aura samedi sans faute. 



I will take care that the dress 
does not incommode you. 

As for the cashmere dress, I leave 
it entirely to you. I only wish 
it to be simply made and dark- 
colored. 

Do you not like a striped or 
plaided stuff ? 

Xo matter. I only care to have it 
fit well. 

Do not trouble yourself about 
that. 

Please send me the two dresses as 
soon as possible. 

If you will try them on Monday, 
you can have them Saturday 
without fail. 



VOCABULARY. 



un trousseau, a set of clothes. 
la toilette, the dress, 
la coiffure, the head-dress, 
un cbapeau, a hat. 
la forme, the shape, 
le bord, the brim, 
la coiffe, the lining, 
un chapeau-ferme, a bonnet, 
le noeud, the bow. 
la plume, the feather, 
un bonnet, a cap (.la&yjgfcc-— — — 
une robe, a dress. 

une robe de bal, a ball-dress. - — 
grande toilette, full dress. — 

la jupe, the skirt. 

la jupe de dessus, the over-skirt. - 
" " " dessous, the under-skirt.- 
la queue, the train. -, ■ • 



le volant, the flounce, 
un corsage montant, a high waist. 
" " decollete, a low " 
la doublure, the lining, 
les mancbes, the sleeves, 
une robe de chambre, a dressing* 

gown, 
un peignoir, a dressing-gown, 
une echarpe, a scarf, 
un chale, a shawl. -~" 
un manteau, a mantle, 
une amazone, a riding-habit, 
un mancbon, a muff. — 
un voile, a veil. 

la chaussure, all kinds of shoesT 
les bottines, ladies' boots. 

les souliers, shoes. 

les brodequins, laced shoes. 



IV. CHEZ EE TAILLEUR. — AT THE TAILOR^. 



255 



des souliers tout faits, ready-made 

shoes. 
le talon, the heel, 
les pantoufles, slippers. 



les bas, stockings. 
un jupon, a petticoat, 
tin tablier, an apron, 
une ceintnre, a belt. 



</, 



IV. CHEZ LE TAILLETJR.— AT THE TAILOR'S. 
How can I serve you, sir 



J: 
J- 



En quoi peut-on vous servir, mon- 
i sieur 1 
VJe veux me faire faire nn habit. 
\j' Charles, faites voir a monsieur des 

draps de toutes couleurs, 
Je ne veux voir que du noir. Ce 

drap-ci me semble bien bon. Quel 

en est le prix % 
Nous le vendons quinze francs le 

metre. 
V C'est bien cher, a ce qu'il me parait. 
Je vous assure que ce n'est pas cher 

pour ce drap-ci ; tatez-le done un 

peu, comme c'est fin. 
Voulez-vous vous donner la peine 

de passer dans le fond du maga- 

sin 1 On y prendra votre mesure. 
Quand viendrez-vous l'essayer % II 

sera pret des ce soir. 

L'habit vous va a merveille. 

II me semble qu'il y a un petit pli 

dans le dos. 
II y a en effet une petite correction 

a faire. 
Les manches sont trop etroites. 

Elles me genent les bras. 
Je les ferai plus longues et plus 

larges, si vous le desirez. 
Est-ce que monsieur n'a pas aussi 

besoin d'un pantalon % 



I want to have a coat made. 
Charles, show the gentleman 

cloths in all colors. 
I only want to look at black. 

This cloth seems very good. 

What is the price ? 
We sell it for fifteen francs a 

metre. 
That seems to me very dear. 
I assure you it is not expensive 

for that cloth. Just feel how 

fine it is. 
May I trouble you to go to the end 

of the shop ? They will take 

your measure there. 
When will you come to try it 

on ? It will be ready this 

evening. 
The coat fits you wonderfully 

well. 
It seems to me that there is a 

slight wrinkle in the back. 
There is indeed a slight change 

to be made. 
The sleeves are too tight. They 

confine my arms. 
I will make them longer and 

looser if you prefer it. 
Do you not need a pair of 

trousers too ? 



256 



FAMILIAR COHTEIISATIOKS. 



Non, mais vous pouvez me montrer 

des gilets de soie. 
Je trouve le dessin de celui-ci tres 

joli ; envoyez-le-moi. 

Je veux que vous mettiez un collet 
de velours a mon pardessus 
d'hiver. 

Je l'enverrai chercher ce soir. 



No, but you may show me some 

silk vests. 
I think the pattern of this one 

very pretty. You may send it 

to me. 
I want you to put a velvet collar 

on to my winter-overcoat. 

I will send for it this evening. 



VOCABULARY. 



un habit, a coat, 
un frac, a dress-coat, 
le pantalon, the trousers, 
un redingote, an overcoat, 
un paletot, " " 

un gilet, a vest. 
le collet, the coat-collar, 
les manches, the sleeves. 
les pans, the coat-skirts. 
une couture, a seam. 
la doublure, the lining, 
les revers, the facings, 
une poche, a pocket. 



les boutonnieres, the button-holes. 

des bretelles, suspenders. 

le linge, the linen. 

une chemise, a shirt. " 

un col, a collar, v 

des manchettes, cuffs. 

une cravate, a cravat. 

un cbapeau, a hat. 

une casquette, a cap. 

des bottes, boots. 

des bottes vernies, patent-leather 

boots, 
les pantoufles, slippers. 



V 



/ 



V. LA MAISON.— THE HOUSE. 



J'ai la plus grande envie de voir 
/ votre nouvelle demeure. 
v Je m'y rends en ce moment. Venez 
avec moi. Je vous ferai voir 
toute la maison de la cave au 
grenier. 
H Vous avez une tres belle facade. 
\j Prenez garde de glisser. On est en 
train de nettoyer le perron. 



your 



I want very much to see 

new house. 
I am just going there. Come 

with me and I will show you 

the whole house from cellar to 

garret. 
You have a handsome front. 
Take care not to slip. They are 

cleaning the steps. 



V 






Y. LA MAIS0!N. — THE HOUSE. 



257 



De combien de pieces se compose le 
rez-de-chaussee ? 
^ Nous avons deux salons et une salle 
a manger. 

Que votre salon donne bien sur le 
jardin ! Jaime aussi ces fenetres 
a grands carreaux. On doit 
avoir un coup d'oeil magnifique 
du haut de la maison. 

Vous allez le voir plus tard. Main- 
tenant regardez un peu la salle- 
a-manger. Comment la trouvez- 
vous ? 

Je trouve cette grande cheminee en 
bois de chene admirable. Et a 
quoi vous sert cette petite cham- 
bre en face ? 

Mon pere compte en faire son cabi- 
^ jiet de travail. 

II vous manque encore une biblio- 
theque. 

Cela se trouve au premier. Ne vou- 
lez-vous pas monter ■? 

Quel bel escalier vous avez ! D'ou 
viennent ces belles boiseries 1 

Mon pere les a fait faire expres en 
Italic 

Voila, la bibliotbeque. De ce cote- 
ci se trouvent trois chambres a, 
coucher et une petite salle-de- 
bain. 

Vous avez de grandes chambres, et 
des cabinets de toilette tres com- 
modes. 

Au second nous avons encore trois 
chambres et une chambre d'en- 
fant. 



How many rooms have you on 
the ground floor ? 

We have two parlors and a din- 
ing-room. 

How prettily your parlor looks 
on the garden ! I like these 
large-paned windows, too. One 
must get a magnificent view 
from the top of the house. 

You shall see it later. Now look 
at the dining-room. How do 
you like it ? 

I think this great fire-place in oak 
very fine. What use do you 
make of this little room op- 
posite ? 

My father is going to use it for 
his study. 

You have no library yet. 

That is on the second floor.* 

Will you not go up-stairs ? 
What a fine staircase you have ! 

Where did you get these fine 

carvings ? 
My father had them made to 

order in Italy. 
Here is the library. On this side 

are three bed-rooms and a 

small bath room. 

You have large rooms, and the 
dressing-rooms are very con- 
venient. 

On the third floor we have three 
bedrooms and a nursery. 



* The French count as the first floor of 
namely, the one up the first flight of stairs. 

17 



a house what we call the second. 



258 



FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS. 



II me semble que vous allez etre 
tres bien installee ici. Quelle 
est votre chambre a vous ? 

Je coucberai dans la chambre de 
devant au second. 

Et quand est-ce que vous comptez 
demenager ? 

On va encore poser des parquets 
dans les salons, abattre quelques 
cloisons et faire quelques ar- 
moires dans les chambres a cou- 
ch er. Mais nous comptons nous 
y installer vers la fin du mois 
prochain. 



It seems to me that you will be 
very well off here. Which is 
your own room ? 

I shall sleep in the front room on 
the third story. 

And when do you mean to move ? 

They are going to lay floors in 
the parlors, and to knock down 
some partitions and make 
some cupboards in the bed- 
rooms. But we expect to move 
in about the end of next month. 



VOCABULARY. 



la facade, the front of the house. 

la porte, the door. 

le numero, the number. 

la sonnette, the bell. 

le decrottoir, the scraper. 

le vestibule, the entry. 

le mur, the wall. 

le cloison, the partition. 

l'escalier, the stairs. 

la rampe, the banisters. 

les marches, the steps. 

un etage, a story. 

un appartement, a suite of rooms. 

une chambre, a room. 

la serrure, the lock. 

le trou de serrure, the key-hole. 

un verrou, a bolt. ■. — . 

un gond, a hinge. 

la fenetre, the window. 

le chassis, the sash. 

un volet, a shutter. 

une vitre, a pane of glass. — - 

un balcon, a balcony. 

une marquise, an awning. 



le plafond, the ceiling, 
la cheminee, the fire-place, 
l'atre, the hearth. — 



le plancher, the floor. 

la mansarde, the attic. 

une poutre, a beam. 

une solive, a joist. 

une gouttiere, a spout. 

un tuyeau, a pipe. 

un egout, a drain. 

la pierre, the stone. 

la brique, the brick. 

une ardoise, a slate. 

de la chaux, lime. 

le mortier, the mortar. 

le platre, the plaster. 

un echafaud, a scaffold. 

une planche, a plank. 

les frais, the expenses. 

les impositions, the taxes. 

le loyer, the rent. 

les locataires, the tenants. 

le proprietaire, the landlord. 

le quartier, the neighborhood. 



VI. LE MOBILIEK. — THE FURNITURE. 



259 



VI. LE MOBILIER.— THE FURNITURE. 



Je viens de louer cet appartement 
meuble. Comment trouvez-vous 
mon salon ? 

V C'est une tres belle piece, seulement 

il lui manque un je ne sais quoi. 
On voit tout de suite que ce n'est 
pas vous qui en avez choisi les 
meubles. 

\/Oui, je comprends parfaitement ce 
que vous voulez dire. Je compte 
y aj outer tout ce qu'il faut pour 
en faire un salon charmant. Com- 
ment trouvez-vous le tapis * 

^ Je le trouve tres bien. Les cou- 
leurs en sont peu frappantes, et le 
dessin tres joli. 

V Eh bien ; passons aux meubles. 

Qu'en dites-vous 1 
v J'aime beaucoup la forme de ces 
grands fauteuils, et ils sont fort 
bien sculptes. Quant au canape, 
je le trouve assez laid, je l'avoue. 

Je crois que je ferai mieux d'en 

acbeter un autre, quelque chose 

de plus leger. 
Je vous y engage beaucoup. Puis il 

vous faut quelques petites tables 

chargees de livres et de petits 

objets d'art. 
Nous avons de tres belles porcelaines 

du Japon ; si je les mettais sur 

cette etagere ? 
Certainement ; 9a fera tres bien. 
J'ai encore un petit meuble en 

acajou que je mettrai entre les 

deux fenetres. 



I have just hired this furnished 
apartment. How do you like 
my drawing-room ? 

It is a fine room, but it lacks a 
certain something. One sees 
at once that you did not choose 
the furniture. 

Yes, I understand perfectly what 
you mean. I mean to add 
everything that is necessary to 
make it a charming room. 
How do you like the carpet ? 

I like it very much. The colors 
are not striking, and the pat- 
tern is very pretty. 

Yery well; how for the furniture. 
What do you say to it ? 

I like the shape of these big arm- 
chairs, and they are hand- 
somely carved. As for the 
sofa, I confess that I think it 
very ugly. 

I think it will be better for me 
to buy another, something 
lighter. 

I advise it by all means. Then 
you need some small tables 
covered with books and bric-a- 
brac. 

We have some very beautiful 
Japanese porcelains ; what if I 
should put them on this stand ? 

Do so ; it will look very well. 

I have a small piece of furniture 
in mahogany which I shall put 
between these two windows. 



260 



FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS. 



Est-ce que vous n'avez pas d'instru- 
ment T 

Oui, j'ai un piano a queue. Je crois 
qu'il fera bon effet de ce cote-ci. 
Nous avons encore quelques 
grands tableaux qui cacheront 
un peu cette vilaine tapisserie. 

Mais que vos lustres sont magni- 
fiques ! Tout cela doit donner 
une lumiere eblouissante. 

Ne trouvez-vous pas que ces grands 
rideaux de damas assombrissent 
trop le salon 1 ? 

Mais du tout. Votre salon ne sau- 
rait etre sombre avec ces grandes 
fenetres, et je trouve que le bleu 
des rideaux convient parfaite- 
ment a votre tapis et a votre 
mobilier. Je suis sure que 
lorsque vous aurez fait les petits 
changements dont nous venons de 
parler, vous aurez un salon tout a 
fait comme il faut. 

Venez done me voir la semaine pro- 
chaine. Vous verrez que j'ai 
profite de vos bons conseils. 



Have you not a piano ? 

I have a grand piano. I think it 
will look well on this side. 
We have also a few large 
paintings which will serve to 
hide this ugly paper. 

But how splendid your chande- j 
liers are ! They must give a 
dazzling light. 

Don't you think that these great 
damask curtains darken the 
room too much ? 

^Not at all. Your room could 
not be dark with these great 
windowsfand I think that the 
blue in the curtains goes very 
well with your carpet and 
your furniture. I am sure 
that when you have made the 
slight changes of which we 
were speaking, you will have 
a drawing-room which is all 
that it should be. 

Come and see me next week. 
You will see that I have bene- 
fited by your advice. 



VOCABULARY. 



le mobilier, the furniture. 

un meuble, a piece of furniture. 

un armoire, a cupboard. ~— 

les rayons, the shelves. 

le tiroir, the drawer. 

la commode, the bureau. 

un miroir, a mirror. 

le lit, the bed. 



le bois de lit, the bedstead. 

la paillasse; the straw-bed. 

un matelas, a mattress. 

un lit de plume, a feather-bed. _ 

un oreiller, a pillow. 

une taie d'oreiller, a pillow-case. 

un traversin, a bolster. 

un drap de lit, a sheet. ,- — — 



VII. THS" VOYAGE. — A JOURNEY. 



261 



la couverture, the blanket. 

le couvre-pied, the coverlet. 

une toilette, a toilet-table, 
un lavabo, a wash-stand. 

le pot a l'eau, the pitcher. _ 

la cuvette, the basin. 

un essuie-main, a towel. ^ 

un rideau, a curtain, i 

les stores, the shades, 
le gland, the tassel, 
un calorifere, a furnace. 
la bouche de chaleur, the regis- 
ter. 

le foyer, the fireplace. ■ — 

le garde-cendre, the fender, 
les pincettes, the tonga, 
la pelle, the shovel, 
le tisonnier, the poker. 

le soufflet, the bellows. 

un ecran, a screen. 

un armoire a livres, a bookcase. — 

un coussin, a cushion. 

un tabouret, a footstool. 

un tableau, a picture. 

le cadre, the frame. 

le verre, the glass. 

la gravure, the print. 

une aquarelle, a water-color. 

la pendule , the clock. 



un vase, a vase. • 

une bougie, a candle. . 

un bee de gaz, a gas-burner. 

une lampe, a lamp. 

une allumette, a match. — ' — 

une service de porcelaine, a set of 

china, 
un buffet, a sideboard. 

un plateau, a tray. ■ — 

la tasse, the cup. 

la soucoupe, the saucer. 

un bol, a bowl. 

un sucrier, a sugar bowl. 

les pinces a sucre, the sugar-tongs. 

la tbeiere, the tea-pot. 

la cafetiere, the coffee-pot. 

la saliere, the salt-cellar. 

la poivriere, the pepper-pot. 

la carafe, the decanter. 

la batterie de cuisine, the kitchen 

utensils, 
le four, the oven, 
le fourneau, the range, 
la casserole, the saucepan. - — 
la bouilloire, the kettle. - — 
un baquet, a tub. 
un seau, a pail, 
un balai, a broom. ' — " 
un fer a repasser, a flat-iron. 



VII. TJN VOYAGE.— A JOURNEY. 



*\ A quelle heure part votre train ■? 
Je prends le train de midi et demi. 

Ne voulez-vous pas que je vous con- 
duise a la gare T 



What time does your train go ? 
I shall take the half -past twelve 

train. 
Don't you want me to go to the 

station with you ? 



262 



FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS. 



Je vous en serai bien reconnais- 
sante. 
v Est-ce que je puis vous aider a faire 
vos malles "? 

Meici ; elles sont toutes pretes. On 
est en train de les descendre. 

Eh bien, je vais vous chercher une 
voiture de place. Dites aux do- 
mestiques de charger les malles 
sur la voiture. 

Cocher, conduisez-nous a la gare de 
Lyons, et depechez-vous pour que 
nous ne manquions pas le train. 

Nous voila enfin arrives. Voulez- 
vous bien payer la voiture pen- 
dant que je vais prendre les 
billets 1 

Comptez-vous voyager en premiere 
classe 1 

Mais oui, on y est mieux, n'est-ce 
pas? 

II vous faut faire enregistrer vos 
bagages. Est-ce qu'ils sont tous 
ici? 

Voyons un peu : deux malles, une 
valise, et un carton a chapeau; 
c'est tout, n'est ce pas ? 

J'ai encore un parapluie et un petit 
sac de nuit, que j'emporte avec 
moi. 

Vous avez assez de bagages comme 
9a, a ce qu'il me semble. 

Les wagons de premiere classe se 
trouvent de ce cote-ci. En voici 
un ou il n'y a personne jusqu'a 
present. Vous pouvez vous y in- 
staller a votre aise. Preferez- 
vous etre sur le devant du 
wagon 1 



I shall be very grateful if you 

will. 
Can I help you to pack your 

trunks ? 
Thanks ; they are quite ready. 

They are carrying them down. 
Very well, I will go and get a 

cab. Tell the servants to put 

the trunks on the carriage. 

Driver, take us to the Lyons sta- 
tion, and hurry, so that we shall 
not miss our train. 

Here we are at last. "Will you 
pay for the carriage while I get 
the tickets ? 

Do you mean to travel first class ? 

Yes, one is better off there ; don't 

you think so ? 
You must check (register) your 

baggage. Is it all here ? 

Let us see : two trunks, a valise, 
and a hat-box ; that is all, isn't 
it? 

I have besides an umbrella and a 
little hand-bag, which I cany 
myself. 

You have quite enough baggage, 
it seems to me. 

The first-class carriages are on this 
side. Here is one where there 
is no one else as yet. You can 
settle yourself comfortably 
here. Do you prefer to ride 
forward ?* 



* Literally, to be at the front of the carriage. 



VII. UK VOYAGE. — A JOUKKEY. 



263 



Ca m'est egal. Je suis tres bien It makes no difference to me. I 

ici. am very well off here. 

Au revoir ! Till we meet again ! 

Bon voyage. I wish you a pleasant journey. 



VOCABTJ 

on voyageur, a traveller. ' 

une voyageuse, a female traveller. 

le voyage, the journey. 

un colis, a piece of baggage. 

une malle, a trunk. 

un paquet, a package. 

la gare, the station. 

la salle d'attente, the waiting- 
room. 

la salle des bagages, the baggage- 
room. 

le restaurant, the restaurant. 

le bureau des billets, the ticket- 
office. 

le chef de gare, the station-master, ft 

le facteur, the porter. 

le chemin de fer, the railroad. 

la voiture, the carriage or car. 

le wagon, " " " " 

le coupe-lit, the sleeping-car. 

la locomotive, the engineo 

le depart, the departure. 

1'arrivee, the arrival. 

le trajet, the trip. -* 

la route, the course. 

le halte, the stopping. 

un train express, an express-train. 

un train omnibus, an accommoda- 
tion-train. 

l'indicateur des chemins de fer, the 
rail way- guide. 



LARY. 

un bateau a vapeur, a steamer 

le cabin, the cabin.-^ ^ 

les quais, the quays. 

la douane, the custom-house, " — 

l'agent de la douane, the custom- 
house officer. 

un hotel, a hotel. 

un cafe, a coffee-house, 

le garcon, the waiter. 

le tramway, the horse-railway. 

un omnibus, an omnibus. 

le conducteur, the conductor. 

le controleur, the inspector. 

une voiture de remise,* a hired 
carriage. 

une voiture de place, a eab- 

un fiacre, a cab. 

la ville, the city. 

le bureau de poste, the post-office. 

la banque, the bank. 

la bourse, the exchange. 

les faubourgs, the suburbs. 

la rue, the street, 

les places, the squares. 

le pave, the pavement. 

le trottoir, the sidewalk, 

le niarche, the market. 

le musse, the museum, 

le pont, the bridge. 

un hopital, a hospital. 

la caserne, the barracks. 



* A voiture de place is a numbered public cab which can be taken on the 
Street, and whose charges are regulated by a fixed tariff. A voiture de remise 
6 a carriage hired from a livery-stable. A fict ere may be either. 



264 



FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS. 



f 



VIII. UNE VISITE.— A CALL. 



J 



Bonjour, monsieur. 

Bonjour, raadame. Que je suis 
heureux de vous trouver chez 
vous ! 

Asseyez-vous pres de la cheminee, 
je vous en prie. Vous devez 
avoir tres froid. II faut du 
courage pour sortir par le temps 
qu'il fait. . 

N'est-ce pas qu'il fait depuis 
quelques jours un temps abomina- 
ble ? On n'entend parler de tous 
cotes que de rbumes et de maux 
de gorge. Je redoute beaucoup 
ces brusques changements de 
temps. 

Je ne crois pas que le froid soit de 
longue duree. 

Tant que le vent soufilera du nord 
nous aurons probablement de la 
glace ; mais si le vent tourne au 
sud nous pouvons nous attendre 
a la pluie. Et comment vous 
portez-vous, madame 1 

Je me suis enrhumee la semaine 
derniere en sortant du theatre, 
et il m'en reste un toux assez des- 
agreable. 

Que je vous plains ! J'espere que 
vous n'etes pas poitrinaire. 

Mais du tout. Ce n'est qu'un rbume 
de cerveau. 

Je ne vois pas madame votre belle- 
mere. Est-ce quelle n'est plus a 
Paris % 

Malbeureusement elle se trouve 
tres souffrante. Elle est au lit 



Good morning-, sir. 
Good morning, madame. I am 
happy to find you at home. 

Pray sifr by the fire. You must 
be very cold. It takes courage 
to go out in such weather. 



Has not the weather been very 
bad for several days ? One 
hears of nothing but colds and 
sore throats. I dread very 
much these sudden/changes in 
the weather. 

I do not believe that the cold will 
last long. 

As long as the wind- blows from 
the north we shall probably 
have ice ; but if the wind 
changes to the south we must 
expect rain. And how do you 
do, madame ? 

I took cold last week in coming 
out of the theatre, and it has 
left me with a disagreeable 
cough. 

How I pity you ! I hope your 
lungs are not w r eak. 

Not at all. It is only a cold in 
the head. 

I do not see your mother-in-law/ 
Is she no longer in Paris ? 

Unfortunately she is very unwell. 
She has been in bed for tec 



VIII. L'NE VISITE.— A CALL. 



265 



depuis dix jours. Mais qu'y a-t- 

il de nouveau aujourd'hui ? 
On ne s'occupe a present que du 

manage de mademoiselle B. 
- Comment ! elle va se marier ! J'ai 

de la peine a le croire. 
II parait que le futur est un garcon 

tres distingue, mais absolument 

sans fortune. 
C'est bien singulier ce que vous me 

contez la. C'est une nouvelle 

a laquelle je ne m'attendais guere. 

Et a quand la noce ? 
Je n'en sais rien, et je ne serai cer- 

tainement pas des invites. 

II faut que je m'en aille. J'ai 
encore des courses a faire. Je 
vous prie de faire mes amities a 
madame votre belle-mere. 

Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de 
venir diner cbez moi jeudi pro- 
chain "? 

Merci beaucoup. Je n'y manquerai 
pas. 



days. But what is the news 
to-day ? 

Every one is talking of the mar- 
riage of Miss B. 

What ! she is to be married ! I 
can hardly believe it. . 

It seems that her intended is a 
clever fellow, but quite with- 
out fortune. 

What you tell me is very strange. 
It is a piece of news for which 
I was quite unprepared. And 
when will the wedding be ? 

I know nothing about it, and I 
shall certainly not be among 
the guests. 

I must go. I have still some er- 
rands to do. Pray give my re- 
gards to your mother-in-law. 

Will you come and dine with me 
next Thursday ? 

Thanks. I will not fail to come. 



VOCABULARY. 



le grand-pere, the grandfather. 

la grand'mere, the grandmother. 

le petit-fils, the grandson. 

la petite-fille, the granddaughter. 

le parrain, the godfather. 

la marraine, the godmother. 

le filleul, the godson. 

la filleule, the goddaughter. 

un epoux, a husband. 

un mari, " " 

une epouse, a wife. 

une femme, " " 



le beau-pere, the father-in-law. 

la belle-mere, the mother-in-law. 

le beau-fils, the son in-law. 

le gendre, " " 

la belle-fille, the daughter-in-law. 

la bru, " " 

le beau-frere, the brother-in-law. 

la belle-soeur, the sister-in-law. 

un parent, a relation. 

un cousin germain, a first cousin 

le tuteur, the guardian. 

le or la pupille, the ward. 



266 



FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS. 



lea maladies, the diseases. 
la fievre, the fever. 
le mal de tete, the headache. 
*' u " gorge, sore-throat. 
" " " dents, the toothache. 
" " " coaur, nausea. 
" " " mer, sea-sickness. 
la-petite verble; ThT'Smttfrpox. 
la rougeole, the measles. 
ime fluxion -de poitrine, an inflam- 
mation of the lungs. 
les oreillons, the mumps, 
la douleur, pain. 



le soulagement, relief. 

la guerison, the cure. 

la rechute, the relapse. 

l'agonie, the death-agony. 

la pluie, the rain. 

une pluie a verse, a pouring rain, 

un orage, a storm, a tempest. 

le tonnerre, the thunder. 

l'eclair, the lightning. 

la neige, the snow. 

la glace, the ice. 

la gelee, the frost. 

la chaleur, the heat. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF FRENCH VERBS. 



267 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



A. IDIOMATIC USES OF CERTAIN COMMONER FRENCH VERBS. 



ALLER (p. 128). 

Comment allez-vous ? 
. Je vais bien. Ca va bien. 

Cela ne me va pas du tout. 
. Cela ira, 9a ira. 

Cette robe ne me va pas bien. 

Cette couleur ne va pas a l'autre. 

Cette clef ne va pas a la serrure. 
Ce domaine va a cent mille francs. 

L'eau lui allait aux genoux, 
La maladie va de mal en pire. 

Cette affaire lui allait a bien. 

Le commerce va bien. 

Le terrain allait en pente. 

II est alle au-devant de moi. 

J'y vais de vingt francs. 
I II y va de ma vie. 

II se laisse aller a toutes les pas- 
sions . 

Tout s'en est alle en fumee. 
VLe fleuve s'en allait grossissant. 

1 s'en va midi. 

II va sur ses quatre ans. 
\ C'est un las d'aller. 

II va a tout vent. 

II va grand train. 
N Au pis aller. 

Allez-vous-en (p. 138). 



How are you ? 

I am well. All is well. 

That does not suit me at all. 

That will do. 

This dress does not fit me well. 

This color does not match the 
other. 

This key does not fit the lock. 

This estate will go off at a hun- 
dred thousand francs. 

The water came up to his knees. 

The sickness goes from bad to 
worse. 

This business turned out well for 
him. 

Trade is lively. 

The ground sloped. 

He came to meet me. 

I have twenty francs in it. 

My life is at stake. 

He gives way to all his passions. 

It all passed off in smoke. 

The river kept growing larger. 

It is going on noon. 

He is going on four years old. 

He is a lazy fellow. 

He changes with every influence 

He goes fast ; he lives high. 

If worst comes to worst. 

Be off with you. 



268 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 

Allons (p. 129). Va. Come now. 

Tous chemins vont a Rome. All roads lead to Rome. 

Cela va sans dire. That is a matter of course. 



\S 



VISER. 



Avisez vous a ce que vous avez a Reflect upon what you must do. . 
faire. 

Avisez-y bien ! Think it over well. 

C'est a vous d'aviser. You are the one to find a way. 

On ne s'avise jamais de tout. One can never think of every- 

thing. 

II s'est avise de venir me voir. He had the audacity to come to 

see me. 

Avisez-lui que je suis ici. Let him know that I am here. 

Je l'avisai dans la foule. I saw him in the crowd. 



\/ AVOIR (p. 70). 



Merci beaucoup. II n'y a pas de Thank you. You are welcome. 

quoi. 
Vous aurez beau parler, personne Talk as you will, no one will lis- 

ne vous ecoutera. ten to you. 

On a beau lui donner des conseils. It is in vain to advise him. 
II a de quoi l'acheter (p. 123). He has wherewith to buy it. 

Elle aura lieu d'etre bien jalouse. She will have a right to be very 

jealous. 
Je vous cherche, j'ai affaire a vous. I am looking for you, I have bus- 
iness with you. 
II a son affaire. He has what he wants ; he is 

* suited. 

Vous avez eu le dessus dans cette You had the best of it in this 

affaire. matter. 

Avez-vous des nouvelles de votre Have you heard from your 

mere ? mother ? 

Je n'aurai garde de lui dire cela. I shall be careful not to tell him 

that. 
Je n'ai que faire de cet argent. I do not know what to do with 

this money. 
Elle a deux petits enfants sur les She has two small children on 

bras. her hands. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF FRENCH VERBS. 



269 



111'* 

/il ei 



'aura a bon compte. 
en aura pour son compte. 
V J'ai des affaires par-dessus la tete. 
Je ne sais a qui il en avait. 



He will get it cheap. 
He will get what he deserves. 
I am overwhelmed with business. 
I do not know whom he was vexed 
with. 



COURIR. 
V Ce jeune homme court a sa perte. 

^ II a couru toute la journee pour ses 
affaires. 
Sa plume courait sur le papier. 
Cet erreur court beaucoup dans le 

monde. 
II court des bruits sur lui. 

Les maladies qui courent en ce mo- 
ment. 
Par le temps qui court. 

Ces garcons courent un lievre. 
Courir deux lievres a la fois. 

J'ai couru toute la ville sans le 

trouver. 
'II court tous les honneurs. 
II court la mer. 
II va courir fortune en Amerique. 

Cet homme court les bals et les the- 
atres. 
Cette a venture court la ville. 



CREYER. 
^ lis se crevent de travail. 

lis crevent de rire. 
\ Cela nous creve le coeur. 



This young man is rushing to 

destruction. 
He has been running about all 

day on business. 
His pen flew over the paper. 
This error is very current in the 

world. 
There are reports in circulation 

about him. 
The diseases which are just now 

prevalent. 
In such weather. At such a time 

as this. 
These boys are hunting a hare. 
To try to do too many things at 

once. 
I have been all over town without 

finding him. 
He competes for all honors. 
He follows the sea. 
He is going to seek his fortune in 

America. 
This man frequents balls and 

theatres. 
This adventure is talked of all 

over town. 



They exhaust themselves with 

work. 
They are bursting with laughter 
That goes to our hearts. 



270 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



n/ 



DIRE (p. 155). 

Que voulez-vous dire ? 

Cela ne veut rien dire. 

A vrai dire. 
N/Pour ainsi dire. 

Pour mieux dire. 

C'est a dire. 

C'est beaucoup dire. 
. Cela va sans dire. 

Voila qui est dit. 

Qu'en dites-vous ? 
•v/Il n'y a pas a dire la-dessus. 

II ne trouve rien a dire. 
II me dit des injures. 
Ce sont des on dit. 
II se dit votre parent. 
V Elle a bien dit son morceau. 

II commencait a lui dire des fleu- 

rettes. 
Elle a de beaux yeux qui ne disent 

rien. 
t Qui ne dit mot consent. 
Le bien faire vaut mieux que le 

bien dire. 
C'est un soi-disant grand homme. 



n/c 



What do you mean ? 

That signifies nothing. 

In truth. 

So to speak. 

Rather. 

That is to say. 

That is saying a great deal. 

That is understood. 

That is a settled matter. 

What do you say to that ? 

There is nothing to be said about 

it. 
He finds nothing to blame. 
He insults me. 
These are reports — rumors. 
He says he is related to you. 
She sang her piece well. 
He began to compliment her. 

She has fine eyes without expres- 
sion. 
Silence gives consent. 
Actions speak louder than words. 

He is a great man, according to 
his own account. 



Ce 

II 



DONNER. 



'ela donne a penser. 
II a donne dans la piege. 
n/ 11 est homme a donner dans tous les 

panneaux quon lui tend. 
V II donne tete baissee dans tous les 
projets. 
II ne sait ou donner de la tete. 

Je vous donnerai sur les oreilles. 
Les fenetres donnent sur le jardin. 



That is disquieting. 

He fell into the trap. 

He is the sort of man to fall into 

every trap that is set for him. 
He rushes blindly into all sorts of 

schemes. 
He does not know which way to 

turn. 
I'll box your ears. 
The windows open on the garden. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF FRENCH VERBS. 



271 



Quel age lui donne-t-on 1 

Cet ecrit se donne sous votre nom, 

/ Je vous le donne en trois. 
QaJjii--a--dtnnre- un poi oo on d'avril ; 
II s*en d^aae-a-sffiuijoie. 



How old is be supposed to be ? 
Tbis writing is supposed to be by 

you. 
I give you tbree guesses at it. 

Tiiey made an April lool Oi' Iran. 

iulgOG him u df tu tbefull in 



ECORCHER. 






II crie avant qu'on ne l'ecorche. 
Cela m'ecorche les oreilles. 

H-eCorche I'anguille par la queue. 
II ne fait quecorcher le'sujet. 



\ 



ENTENDRE. 



Je ne l'entends pas ainsi. 
J'entends qu'on m'obeisse. 
Elle ne veut entendre a nulle pro- 
position. 
Je ne veux pas en entendre parler. 
II entend a demi-mot. 
II ne veut pas entendre raison. 
Je m'y entends bien. 
Vous y etes, ace que j'entends. 



He cries out before be is burt. 
Tbat grates upon my ear. 

e-mtnTterTTEeTrencb language. 
"He begins~at tbe wroBg~end. 
-He-^reals llie subject VeTy-super- 

n daily. 



I do not mean it so. 

I intend to be obeyed. 

Sbe will not assent to any propo- 
sal. 

I will not bear of it. 

He can take a bint. 

He will not listen to reason. 

I understand it perfectly. 

You are concerned in it, as I un- 
derstand. 



ETRE (see p. 9). 

Etes-vous des notres * J'en suis. 
On en etes-vous de votre ouvrage 1 

J'en etais la, lorsqu'elle entra. 

Ou en est 1' affaire * 

II y est pour quelque chose. 

Je n'y suis pour rien. 

Vous ne m'ecoutez pas, vous n'y 

etes plus. 
Je n'y suis pour qui que ce soit. 



Are you one of us ? I am. 

How far along are you witb your 
work ? 

I bad done so mucb wben sbe en- 
tered. 

How does tbe affair stand ? 

He bas some part in it. 

I bave notbing to do witb it. 

You are not listening to me. You 
do not follow me. 

I am not at borne to any one. 



272 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



Nous sommes Men avec eux. 
, J en suis pour mon argent. 
Vous le voulez — soit! / 
II en sera comme vous voudrez. 
II n'est plus a. lui. V 
C'est a moi de lui parler. 
Le malade est a l'agonie. 

II est toujours a, se plaindre. 
Cet homme est mal a son aise. 
II est au boutde son latin. 



Ces deux chiens en sont aux prises. 
II en sera quitte pour cent francs. V 



Elle est toujours en course. 

II n'est pas au fait (or au courant) 

de cette affaire. 
II est fort mal dans ses affaires. V 

Vous etes de moitie dans cette af- 
faire. 



We are on good terms with them, 

I got nothing for my money. 

You wish it — be it so ! 

It shall be as you wish . 

He is no longer himself. 

It is for me to speak to him. 

The sick man is at the point oil 
death. 

He is always complaining. 

This man is ill at ease. 

He has come to the end of his re- 
sources. 

These two dogs are fighting. 

He will get out of it for a hun- 
dred francs. 

She is always out. v 

He is not familiar with this busi- 
ness. 

He is very unfortunate in his busi- 
ness. 

You have a half -interest in this 
affair. 



\ FAIRE (p. 150). 

II fait toujours le bien. 
■ Je vais faire un voyage. • 
\ Allez faire la chambre de madame> 

Ce bateau a fait naufrage. . 
Ce banquier a fait faillite. v 
Cette femme fait la cuisine. ( 
C'est a vous de faire les cartes, v 

Ce garcon fera fortune (or son 

cbemin). 
Avez-vous fait vos malles 1 
II fait la medecine. 
- II fait le commerce. * 
II fait 1' important. 
II fait le sot. V 



He is always doing good. 
I am going to take a journey. 
Go and put the lady's room in 

order. 
This boat has been wrecked. 
This banker has failed. 
This woman does the cooking. 
It is your turn to shuffle the 

cards. 
This boy will get on. 

Have you packed your trunks ? 
He practises medicine. 
He is in business. 
He puts on airs. 
He plays the fool, 



IDIOMATIC USES OF FRENCH VERBS. 



273 



J'ai fait mes adieux. 

II fait la sourde oreille. 

II a fait une lieue a pied. 

Vous faites ce velours trop cher. 

\ II fait bonne mine a tout le monde. 
V II ne fait que pleurer. 

Vous faites dire a lui ce qu'il n'a 

jamais dit. 
II fait cher vivre a Paris. 
; I Il>*fait tard. 
\j II s'est fait avocat. 

Qu'est-ce que cela me fait ? 
Y Ca ne fait rien. 
J Je me fais faire une robe. 

II m'a fait part de ce que vous avez 

dit. 
Cette piece fait fureur. 
II fait maigre pendant la careme. 
II a fait ses classes a Paris. 
II fait le proces a chaque mot. 
Elle m'a fait la morale pendant 

toute une heure. 
II fait semblant de ne rien com- 
prendre. 
\J II m'a fait bon accueil. 
Faites-lui mes amities. 
Je fais fond sur votre amitie. 
Ne me faites pas des questions. 
II se fait fort de reussir. 
II se fait jour a travers toutes les 

difficultes. 
Je me fais fete de vous voir. 
On se fait a tout dans la vie. 

Je ne sais comment cela s'est fait. 

I Sa memoire lui fait defaut. 

' C'est fait de moi. C'en est fait. 

Chemin faisant, je le rencontrai. 
18 



I have said good by. 

He turns a deaf ear. 

He has walked a league. 

You charge too much for this 

velvet. 
He is friendly with every one. 
He does nothing but weep. 
You make him out to say what 

he never said. 
It is expensive to live in Paris. 
It grows late. 
He has become a lawyer. 
What does that matter to me ? 
No matter. 

I am having a dress made. 
He told me what you said. 

This piece is all the rage. 

He fasts during Lent. 

He studied at Paris. 

He criticises every word. 

She lectured me for a whole 
hour. 

He pretends to understand noth- 
ing. 

He received me well. 

Give him my regards. 

I rely on your friendship. 

Don't ask me any questions. 

He feels sure of succeeding. 

He makes his way through all 
difficulties. 

It is a pleasure to me to see you. 

One accustoms one's self to every- 
thing in life. 

I do not know how that hap- 
pened. 

His memory fails him. 

It is all up with me. It is all 
over. 

As I was going along, I met him. 



274 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



II en fait a sa tete. 
II fait la pluie et 
chez lui. 



le beau temps 



GARDER 

Elle garde les malades pendant la 

nuit. 
II garde le lit aujourd hui. 
Gardez-vous de tomber. 
Dieu men garde ! 
II garde le silence. 
Je la lui garde bonne. 

JOUER. 

Est-ce que vous jouez aux cartes ? 

II joue du violon. 

Cette serrure ne joue pas. 

Vous jouez bien votre jeu. 

II fait jouer toutes les passions. 

II joue sa vie a chaque instant. 
Prenez garde ; il se joue de vous. 
II vous a joue un vilain tour. 
II joue la comedie, 
II se joue de toutes les difficultes. 

METTRE. 

C'est un homme qui sait tout mettre 

a profit. 
Cet argent me met a meme de l'ache- 

ter. 
Vous le mettez au rang des dieux. 
Je lai mis a la porte. 
Allez mettre les chevaux a la voi- 

ture. 
II y a mis beaucoup de temps. 

II me mit de sa partie de chasse. 

Je l'ai mis en fureur. 



He does as he chooses. 

He is ruler in his own house. 



She takes care of the sick during 

the night. 
He is keeping his hed to-day. 
Be careful not to fall. 
God forbid T 
He keeps silence. 
I have a bone to pick with him. 



Do you play cards ? 

He plays the violin. 

This lock does not work. 

You play your cards well. 

He brings all the passions into 

play. 
He risks his life every moment. 
Take care, he is deceiving you. 
He has played you an ugly trick. 
He is not in earnest. 
He makes light of all difficulties. 



He is a man who knows how to 

turn everything to profit. 
This money enables me to buy it. 

You make a god of him. 
I turned him out of doors. 
Go and harness the horses. 

He took a great deal of time for 

it. _ 

He made me one of his hunting 

party. 
I made him furious. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF FRENCH VERBS. 



275 



II a mis bas son chapeau. 

Je l'ai mis de cote. 

II a mis aii jour toute l'affaire. 

Allez mettre le couvert. 

II se met en quatre pour ses amis, 

Vous vous mettez en colere a chaque 

instant. 
Elle s'est mis dans la tete de venir. 

II se met au-dessus de prejuges. 
Je me suis mis en peine de vous. 
Le feu s'est mis chez moi. 
Elle se met tres bien. 
Je m'y mettrai demain. 

MONTER. 

Est-ce que vous montez a cheval ? 

II est monte au ciel. 

Cet homme va monter au theatre. 

La riviere a monte d'un pied. 

Ce corsage monte trop. 

Le vin lui monte a la tete. 

La rougeur lui monte au visage. 

Le ble monte. 

L'armee monte a 300,000 hommes. 

Ce memoire monte bien haut. 
J'ai oublie de monter l'horloge. 
Elle est en train de monter son cha- 
peau. 
Elle monte son violon. 
II a monte la tete a ce garcon. 
II s'est monte contre nous. 



He took off his hat. 

I laid it aside. 

He has made public the whole 

business. 
Go and lay the cloth. 
He will take any trouble for his 

friends. 
You are always getting angry. 

She has taken it into her head to 

come. 
He rises above prejudice. 
1 have been troubled about you. 
My house caught fire. 
She dresses very well. 
I will set about it to-morrow. 



Do you ride on horseback ? 

He has gone to heaven. 

This man is going on the stage. 

The river has risen a foot. 

This waist is too high-necked. 

The wine has gone to his head. 

He is blushing. 

Wheat is rising (in price). 

The army consists of 300,000 

men. 
This bill is very large. 
I forgot to wind up the clock. 
She is trimming her hat. 

She is tuning her violin. 

He has turned this boy's head. 

He is vexed with us, 



PERDRE. 

Je l'ai perdu de vue. 
II a voulu me perdre aupres de 
vous. 



I have lost sight of him. 
He wanted to ruin me in your 
eyes. 



276 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



Sa reputation perd de jour en jour. 
II joue a se perdre. 
II en perd le boire et le manger. 
II y perd son latin. 

PORTER. 

II porte la haine universelle. 

Elle porte les cheveux longs. 
II porte la barbe. 

Ce soldat porte les armes au ge- 
neral. 
Elle porte le deuil de sa mere. 

II porte bien son age. 

Ce monsieur le porte haut. 

II m'a porte un coup mortel. 

Ne portez pas la main sur lui. 

Cela vous portera bonbeur. 

II vous a porte aux nues. 

II nous porte de l'amour. 

Ne lui portez pas envie. 

Les Francais l'ont porte au trone. 

Quelle tentation vous a porte a, ce 

peche % 
II porte son jugement sur ce tableau. 

Portez-le sur votre liste. 
Le coup de fusil a porte. 
Sa vue porte bien loin. 
La perte porta sur nous. 
Comment vous portez-vous ? 
II s'est porte a, de bonteuses ac- 
tions. 

PRENDRE. 
J'ai pris le deuil. 
La gelee ne prend pas. 
Elle prend de l'embonpoint. 



His reputation diminishes daily 
He plays a losing game. 
It is taking away his appetite. 
He is wasting his breath. 



He is the object of universal 

hatred . 
She wears her hair long. 
He wears his beard. 
This soldier presents arms to the 

general. 
She wears mourning for her 

mother. 
He is well preserved. 
This gentleman carries his head 

high. 
He struck me a deadly blow. 
Do not lay hands on him. 
That will bring you happiness. 
He praised you to the skies. 
He loves us. 
Do not envy him. 
The French set him on the 

throne. 
What temptation drove you to 

this sin ? 
He passes judgment on this pic- 
ture. 
Put him on your list. 
The shot was successful. 
He is very far-sighted. 
The loss fell on us. 
How are you ? 
He has committed shameful 

deeds. 



I have gone into mourning. 
The jelly does not harden. 
She is growing stout. 



IDI03IATIC USES OP FKEXCH YEEBS. 



27? 



II a pris la clef des champs. 
C'est a prendre ou a laisser. 
Venez me prendre a mon hotel. 
II prend sur son sommeil pour tra- 

vailler. 
Vous prenez tout au pied de la 

lettre. 
Je vais prendre les devants. 
II prend du gout pour la litterature. 
II m'a pris en amitie. 
Un homme qui se noie se prend a 

tout. 
II s'en prend a, la fortune. 

Comment s'y prend-il pour faire ses 

themes ? 
Est-ce qu'il l'a pris en bonne part 1 
J'ai pris a tache de le faire. 
Cet enfant prend quatre ans. 
Le feu a pris a la maison. 
II faut prendre l'occasion aux che- 

veux. 



He has run away. 

You may take it or leave it. 

Call for me at my hotel. 

He trenches on his sleep in order 

to work. 
You take everything literally. 

I will go first. 

He begins to care for literature. 

He has taken a liking to me. 

A drowning man will catch at a 
straw. 

He lays the blame of it on for- 
tune. 

How does he set about doing his 
exercises ? 

Did he take it well ? 

I undertook to do it. 

This child is almost four. 

The house took fire. 

You must take time by the fore- 
lock. 



RENDRE. 

Je me rends chez lui. 

Je vais lui rendre visite. 

Ou se rend ce chemin ? 

II se rend a la raison. 

Elle a rendu lame. 

Rendez-moi raison de ce que vous 

faites. 
Je vous rendrai la pareille. 

Je vous rends son discours mot 

pour mot. 
Ces soldats n'ont jamais rendu les 

armes. 

REVENIR. 

II est revenu de sa maladie. 
II revient a vue d'oeil. 



I am going to his house. 

I am going to pay him a call. 

Where does this road go to ? 

He yields to reason. 

She has given up the ghost. 

Account to me for what you are- 
doing. 

I'll pay you back in your own 
coin. 

I repeat you his speech word for 
word. 

These soldiers have never sur- 
rendered. 



He ha$ recovered from bis illness. 
He is visibly improving. 



278 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



II en est ravenu d'une belle. 

Elle ne peut revenir de son trouble. 

Cela revient au meme. 

II ne me revient rien de mes cent 

francs. 
II me revient qu'il est mort, 
Revenons a nos moutons. 



He has had a lucky escape. 
She cannot get over her embar- 
rassment. 
It comes to the same thing. 
I get nothing for my 100 francs, 

I hear that he is dead. 

Let us return to' our subject. 



HIRE. 

II rit a gorge deployee. 

J'ai ri aux larmes. 

II ne rit qu'au bout des dents 

Je riais dans ma barbe. 

II ma ri au nez 

Cela rit a l'imagination. 

Rira bien qui rira dernier. 

SAVOIR (p. 159). 

II en sait bien long. 

Je ne vous savais pas malade. 

II y manque un je ne sais quoi. 

Je vous en saurai gre toute ma vie. 

Je ne saurais vous le dire. 

Ii sait bien son monde. 

II sait plaire a tout le monde. 

TENIR. 

Je tiens beaucoup a le voir. 

II n'y tient pas. 

Je vous tiendrai lieu de pere. 

lis ne peuvent tenir tete a notre 

feu. 
Le rouge tient mieux que le noir. 
Elle est une blonde, elle tijnt de sa 

mere. 



He shrieks with laughter. 
I laughed till I cried. 
His laughter is forced. 
I laughed in my sleeve. 
He laughed in my face. 
That is pleasing to the imagina- 
tion. 
He laughs best who laughs last. 



He knows a great deal about it. 
I did not know you were ill. 
An indescribable something is 

lacking to it. 
I shall be grateful to you all my 

life. 
I could not tell you it. 
He understands his public well. 
He knows how to please every 

one. 



I want very much to see him. 
He does not care for it. 
I will be a father to you. 
They cannot stand against our 

fire. 
Red holds color better than black. 
She is blonde, she takes after her 

mother. 



IDIOMATIC USES OP FBEKCH YEEBS. 



279 



II tient toujours le de de la conver- 
sation. 
Tiens, je vais te le dire. 
Je tiens mon homme. 
S'il ne tient qu'a moi. 
Qua cela ne tienne. 

Le qui tenez-vous cette nouvelle ? 

Je le tiens pour dit. 

II ne peut se tenir de rire. 

Le temps ne tiendra pas. 

Ce pare tient a la foret. 

II ne sait a quoi s'en tenir. 

TJn tiens vaut mieux que deux tu 
l'auras. 



He always leads in conversation. 

See here, I will tell you. 

I have caught my man. 

If it only depends on me. 

Don't let that make any differ- 
ence. 

From whom have you this news ? 

I regard that as settled. 

He cannot keep from laughing. 

This weather will not last. 

This park adjoins the forest, 

He does not know what to de- 
pend on. 

A bird in the hand is worth two 
in the tush. 



\ 



TOUCHER. 



L'annee touche a sa fin. 
Le recit me touche au vif 

Cela me touche de joie. 

Ce poete touche bien les passions. 

Yotre sante est un point qui me 

touche de bien pres. 
Get homme me touche de pres. 
Nous touchons au succes. 
Je vais vous le faire toucher au 

doigt. 
Touchez la 

lis se sont touches dans la main. 
Les extremes se touchent. 
II n'a pas encore touche son argent. 
II touche ses gages tous les quinze 

jours. 

TROTJVER. 

Je lui ai trouve la fievre. 
L'avis fut trouve bon. 



The year draws near its end. 

The story touches me to the 
quick. 

That fills me with joy. 

This poet treats well of the pas- 
sions. 

Your health is a matter which 
concerns me nearly. 

This man is nearly related to me. 

"We are on the point of success. 

I will make it perfectly clear to 
you. 

Shake hands on it. 

They have come to an agreement. 

Extremes meet. 

He has not got his money yet. 

He receives his wages every fort- 
night. 



I found that he had the fever. 
The advice was thought good. 



280 



IDIOMATIC PHKASES. 



J'ai trouve bon de le faire ainsi. 
Cela est bien mal. Vous trouvez ? 

II trouve a placer son mot. 

lis se sont trouves a la promenade. 

La maison se trouva vide. 

Comment vous trouvez-vous 1 

Je me trouve bien ici. ' 

Cette jeune fille se trouve mal. 



V 



TIBER. 



II tire cette affaire en longueur. 
On ne peut le tirer de la. 

On en a tire plusieurs exemplaires. 

II tire parti de tout. 

Nous avons tire au sort. 

Le malade tire a sa fin. 

II ne sait pas se tirer d'affaire. 

Tirez-vous-en comme vous pourrez. 
II tire le diable par la queue. 
II m'a tire la langue. 



I thought best to do it thus. 
That is very bad. Do you think 

so ? 
He always gets his word in. 
They met while walking. 
The house was empty. 
How are you ? 
I am well off here. 
This young girl feels faint. 



He is spinning out the business. 
It is impossible to make him 

change. 
Several copies of it have been 

printed. 
He profits by everything. 
We drew lots. 

The sick man is near Bis end. 
He does not know how to get out 

of it. 
Get out of it as best you can. 
He is very hard up. 
He stuck out his tongue at me. 



VALOIR (p. 194). 

Cette robe ne vaut plus rien. 
lis ne font rien qui vaille. 

Ce livre lui a valu l'admiration de 

tout le monde. 
Cette terre lui vaut dix mille livres 

de rente. 
Cette affaire ne vaut pas la peine 

d'y penser. 
Ma montre vaut mieux que la votre. 
II ne sait pas se faire valoir. 

Voulez-vous nous faire valoir que 
vous nous aimez ? 



This dress is good for nothing. 

They do nothing worth speaking 
of. 

This book has gained him the ad- 
miration of every one. 

This estate brings him in 10,000 
francs income. 

This affair is not worth a thought. 

My watch is better than yours. 
He does not know how to make 

the most of himself. 
Do you want to make us believe 

that you love us ? 



IDIOMATIC USES OF PEE^CH VERBS. 



281 



Autant vaut le dire que le penser. It is as well to say so as to think 

so. 
Je le dirai, vaille que vaille. I will say it, come what will. 

Le jeu ne vaut pas la chandelle. The game is not worth the can . 

die. 
Monsieur vaut bien madame. One is as good as the other. 

Cet homme est un vaurien. This man is a good-for-nothing. 



VENIR (p. 145). 

II est verm au bout de ses d esse ins. 
Tout lui vient a souhait. 

lis en sont venus aux injures. 

II faut en venir la. 

Je crains qu'il ne vienne de la pluie. 

C'etait un va-et-vient continuel. 

J'ai fait venir cette robe de Paris. 



He succeeded in his plans. 
Everything turns out well for 

him. 
They have come to insulting each, 

other. 
It is inevitable. 
I fear it is going to rain. 
There was a continual coming 

and going. 
I sent to Paris for this dress. 



VOULOIR (p. 114). 

Croyez-vous qu'elle lui veuille du 

bien? 
Que voulez-vous dire ! 
Je le veux bien. 
Que me veut il ? 
Je vous veux raisonnable. 
II ne vous en veut pas. 
Veuillez bien vous asseoir. 
II veut cent mille francs de sa terre. 

Ces enfants veulent etre menes par 

la crainte. 
Je me veux mal d'une telle fai- 



Vous en voulez a mon argent. 
Ce que femme veut, Dieu le veut. 



Do you think she wishes him 
well ? 

What do you mean ? 

I am willing. 

What does he want of me ? 

I want you to be reasonable. 

He has no grudge against you 

Pray sit down. 

He asks 100,000 francs for his 
estate. 

These children have to be gov- 
erned by fear. 

I am angry at myself for such a 
weakness. 

You have designs on my money 

Woman's will is God's will. 



282 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



VOILA. 

Tiens, vous voila ! 
Voila qu'on me cherche. 
Connaissez-vous monsieur que voi- 
la 1 
Voila qui est fait. 
Nous voila enfin arrives. 
Le voila qui vient. 
Voila comme je vous aime. 
Voila qui va bien. 
En voila assez. 
Nous y voila. 
Voila ce que c'est que de se marier. 



So, there you are ! 

There is some one looking for me 

Do you know that gentleman ? 

That is over and done with. 

Here we are at last. 

Here he is coming. 

See how I love you. 

That is going well. 

That is enough of it. 

Here we are. 

See what it is to get married. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF CERTAIN COMMONER ENGLISH VERBS. 
AFFORD. 
' I cannot afford it. v Je n'ai pas les moyens de l'acheter. 

How much can you afford to give? ^Combien etes-vous a portee de don- 

ner * 
X Cannot afford any more. Vje ne peux pas aller au dela. v/ 



AGREE. 

That agrees with me. 

They cannot agree. 

We have agreed to go there. 

We are agreed upon this point. 

I agree ; let it be so. 

ANSWER. 

That will answer. 

That will not answer at all. 

Do not answer back. 



^ela me fait du bien. y 

-/lis s'accordent comme chien et chat. , 

yNous sommes convenus d'y aller. v 



/Nous sommes d'accord sur ce point. 
J'y consens ; soit ! \/ 



Cela fera mon affaire, v 
Cela ne fera point mon compte. 
Ne faites pas le raisonneur. 



,' 



You must answer to me for it. Vous m'en rendrez compte. 



ASK. 



Some one is asking for you^ 
What did he ask you ? 



On vous demande.V 
Que vous a-t-il demande ? 



IDIOMATIC USES OF ENGLISH VERBS. 



283 



He asked me all sorts of ques- II m'a fait toute sorte de questions. 

tions. , 

I asked him to come. , Je l'ai prie de venir. 

He has asked me to dine with . II m'a invite a diner chez lui/X/ 

him. 
How much do you ask for this Combien faites-vous cet habit ? \ / 

coat ? 

ATTEND. f 

He does not attend to his business, ul ne fait pas attention a ses af- 
faires. 
I am attending to your business. V Je m'occupe de votre affaire. 
Who attends to the sick ? ^ Qui soigne les malades 1 

He attends all the lessons. / II assiste a toutes les classes. 

She is going to attend this course -v^EUe va suivre ce cours d'bistoire. 

in history. , / 

I will attend to you in a moment. VJe serai a vous a l'instant. V 



/ 



BE. 



How is he ? 



He is better. 

It is all right. 

His business is in a bad way. 

He is now at my house. 

Your house is better than mine. 

It is vain for you to speak to him. 
It is all over with me. 
My life is at stake. 



Comment va-t-il ] Comment se 

porte-t-il ? 
^ II va mieux. II se porte mieux. 

Ca va bien. 
\ Ses affaires vont mal. 
II se trouve chez moi. 
Votre maison vaut mieux que la ^^ 

mienne. 
Vous avez beau lui parler. 
C'en est fait de moi. 
II y va de ma vie. 



BECOME. 

What has become of him ? 
He has become a soldier. 
He has become bankrupt. 
This coat becomes your figure. 
This hat is very becoming to you. 

The sick man is becoming worse 
and worse. 
19 



Qu'est-il devenu 1 

II s'est fait soldat. 

II a fait faillite. 

Cet habit va bien a votre taille. 

Ce chapeau vous convient parfaite- 

ment. 
Le malade va de mal en pire. 



284 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



BEHAVE. r / 

These children have behaved very v Ces enfants se sont tres Men con- 
well. / duits. 
He behaved like an honest man. v II a agi en honnete homme. 
He behaved very badly to me. \ II a tres mal agi a mon egard. 
Do not behave like a baby. Ne faites pas l'enfant. 



BEAT. 



She is beating the eggs. 
He is beating about the bush. 
I have beaten him two games. 
I cannot beat it into his brain. 



/ 
Elle fouette les oeufs. 

n'II tourne autour du pot. 

Je lui ai gagne deux parties. 

Je ne peux pas le lui fourrer dans 

la tete. 



BREAK. 

The glass is broken. 

They bave broken their chains, \/ 

He has broken his arm. 

You have broken your word. 

They broke in the door. 

He has broken his oath. 

I have broken with my friend. 

He has to break his path through 

the snow. 
He broke into tears. 
They broke up at midnight. 
The fog is breaking away. 
The meeting has brokeimpr 



Le verre s'est brise. 

lis ont brise leurs fers. 

II s'est casse le bras. 

Vous avez manque a votre parole. 

lis enfoncerent la porte. 

II a viole son serment. 

J'ai rompu avec mon ami. 

II faut qu'il se fraie un chemin a 

travers la neige. 
II fonda en larmes. 
lis se separerent a minuit. 
Le brouillard se dissipe. 
On a leve la seance. 



BRING. 

That will bring us happiness. 
He has brought us the letters from 

the office. 
Who will bring the children 

home ? 
Bring in the dinner. 
He brought a case against us. 
I want to bring it into fashion. 



Cela va nous porter bonheur. 
'II nous a apporte les lettres de la 

poste. 
Qui va ramener les enfants chez 

enx* 
Servez le diner. 
II nous a fait un proces. 
Je veux le mettre a la mode. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF ENGLISH VERBS. 



285 



He brought the whole matter to v II a mis en lumiere toute l'affaire. 

light. 
She brings up her children badly. Elle eleve mal ses enfants. 



CALL. 

"Who is calling me ? 
I have called on her. 



I will call for you to night. 
He has called for his money. 
He often calls here. 
They called him names. 
He called me a thief. 
The actor was called back 
times. 



Qui m'appelle ? 
/ Je suis alle la voir. Je lui ai fait 
une visite. 
Je viendrai vous prendre ce soir. 
II est venu chercher son argent. 
II passe souvent chez nous 
V lis lui disaient des injures. 
y II m'a traite de voleur. 
fivey L'acteur a ete rappele cinq fois. 



CARE. 

He cares well for his patients. 
Take care not to lose it. 
I do not care. 

I do not care to do it. 
I do not care for dancing. 
That is his care. 
Take care of this letter. 



II soigne bien ses malades. 
Prenez garde de ne pas le perdre. 
Je ne men inquiete pas. Ca m'est 



Je ne tiens pas a le faire. 
Je n'aime pas la danse. 
Cela lui est a charge. 
Ayez soin de cette lettre. 



CARRY. 

Oarry this book to your father. 
He has carried his point. 
You carry the joke too far. 

He has carried his motion. 

He has carried off the great prize. 

They have carried the affair to a 

successful ending. 
The French have carried the day 

against their enemies. 
It is carrying coals to Newcastle. 



Portez ce livre a votre pere. 

II a accompli son dessein. 

Vous poussez trop loin la plaisan- 

terie 
II a fait adopter sa motion. 
II a emporte le grand prix. 
lis ont mene l'affaire a bonne fin. 

Les Francais l'ont emporte sur 

leurs ennemis. 
C'est porter de l'eau a la riviere. 



286 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



CATCH. 

He has caught cold. 
I do not catch your idea. 
The house caught fire. 
Try to catch the cat. 
My dress caught on the chair. 
He caught the typhoid fever in the 
hospital. 



,,/ 



II s'est enrhume. 

Je ne saisis pas votre idee. 
. Le feu a pris a la maison. 
i Tachez d'attraper le chat. \f 

Ma robe s'est accrochee a la chaise 

II a pris le typhus dans l'hopital. \/ 



CUT. 



I have cut my finger. 
He cut this coat badly. 
He has cut my acquaintance. 
The bird cuts the air. 



Je me suis coupe le doigt. 
II a mal taille cet habit. 
II a rompu avec moi. 
L'oiseau fend l'air. V 



DO. 
How do you do ? 

That will not do. 
That will do. 

That will do for me. 

He has done me a service. 
You will do me justice. 
She does her whole duty. 
I did my best. 

He did not do it on purpose. 

She does credit to her master. 

I cannot do without it. 

He is doing it wrong. 

His work is done. 

The meat is well done. 

I Lave nothing to do with this 

business. 
What does he do with himself ? 
What shall I do ? 



Comment vous portez-vous 1 Com- 
ment allez-vous ? 

Cela ne va pas. Cela n'ira pas. 
V C'est bien. Cela ira. Cela suffit. 
C'est tout. 

Cela me convient. Cela fera bien 
mon affaire. 

II m'a rendu service. 

Vous me rendrez justice. 

Elle remplit tous ses devoirs. 
, J'ai fait de mon mieux. J'ai fait 
mon possible. 

II ne l'a pas fait expres. 

Elle fait honneur a son maitre. 
v Je ne peux pas m'en passer. 

II s'y prend mal. 

Son ouvrage est fini. V 

La viande est bien cuite. 

Je ne suis pour rien dans cette af- 
faire. 

A quoi s'occupe-t-il * 

Qu'est-ce que je vais devenir 1 



IDIOMATIC USES OF ENGLISH VEKBS. 



28? 



DRAW. 

Who drew this landscape ? 

I cannot draw a circle. 

We are going to draw lots. 

He drew all her teeth. 

She has gone to draw water from 
the well. 

He draws his wages every month. 

He drew near him and said 

Try to draw this man out. 

He drew the attention of every 
one. 

He drew back from such a sacri- 
fice. 

The carriage drew up before the 
house. 

Has the contract been drawn up ? 



, 



Qui a dessine ce paysage 1 

Je ne peux pas tracer un cercle. 

Nous allons tirer au sort. 

II lui a arrache tous les dents. 

Elle est allee puiser de l'eau dans 

le puits. 
II touche ses gages tous les mois. 

II s'approcha de lui et lui dit 

Tachez de faire parler cet homme. 
II a attire les regards de tout le 

monde. 
II recula devant un tel sacrifice. 

La voiture s'arreta devant la mai- 

son. 
Est-ce qu'on a dresse le contrat ? 



ENGAGE. 



He is engaged in business. 

He cannot see you, he is engaged. 

She is already engaged. 

They are engaged (to be married). lis sont fiances. 



II est dans les affaires. 

II ne peut pas vous voir, il est oc- 

cupe. 
Elle est deja promise. 



FEEL. 

I do not feel well. 

I feel for your sorrows. 

Feel his pulse. 

GET. 

He got up at four o'clock. 
He cannot get a living. 
He is getting ready to go away. 
He will get back to-morrow. 
He gets more and more naughty. 
He always gets the upper hand. 
I cannot get any money. 

He got what he deserved. 



Je ne me sens pas bien. 

Je prends part a vos chagrins. 

Tatez-lui le puis. 



11 s'est leve a quatre heures. 

II ne peut pas gagner sa vie. 

II s'apprete a partir. 

II sera de retour demain. 

II devient de plus en plus mechant. 

II prend toujours le dessus. 

Je ne peux pas me procurer d'ar- 

gent. 
II a rec,u ce qu'il a merite. 



288 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



I cannot get rid of him. 

He does not know bow to get out 
of the difficulty. 

He will get on in the world. 

He will get home to-morrow. 

He is getting better. 

I cannot get along without smok- 
ing. 

GIVE. 



Je ne puis me debarrasser de lui. 
II ne sait pas se tirer d 'affaire. 

II fera son chemin. 

II arrivera demain chez lui. 

II se porte mieux. 

Je ne peux pas me passer de fumer. 



He gave me a handsome present. 
You must give an account of what ' 

you have done. 
Give heed to me. 
Give him my regards. 
Give this to your uncle. V 

He gives his mind to doing it well. 
The enemy gave battle the 20th 

of May. 
I have given up doing it. 
He gives himself up to study. 



II m'a fait un cadeau magnifique. 
II faut rendre compte de ce que 

vous avez fait. 
Faites attention a moi. 
Faites-lui mes amities. 
Remettez cela a votre oncle. 
II s 'applique a le faire bien. 
L'ennemi livra bataille le 20 mai, 

J'ai renonce a le faire. 
II se livre a l'etude. 



GO (p. 128). 

He has gone to walk. 
I am going away tc-morrow. 
She has gone out of the room. 
They go halves in this affair. 
We must go to work. 



II est alle se promener. 

Je pars demain. 

Elle est sortie de la chambre. 

lis sont de moitie dans l'affaire. 

II faut nous mettre a l'ouvrage. 



I do not know how to go about it. . Je ne sais pas comment m'y pren- 
dre. 
Go away. Allez-vous-en. 

I will go for the book. J'irai chercher le livre. 

She has gone into mourning. Elle a pris le deuil. 



HELP. 
May I help you to potatoes ? 

How can I help it ? 

I cannot help (prevent) it. 



Puis-je voui iervir des pommes de 

terre * 
Que voulez-vous que j'y fasse t 
Je ne puis pas l'empecher. Je n'y 

puis rien. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF ENGLISH VERBS. 
I cannot help (doing) it. 
It cannot be helped. 



289 



Je ne puis m'en empecher. C'est 

plus fortLque moi. 
On n'y peut rien. II n'y a rien a 
faire. 
He did his best to help on the II a fait son possible pour avancer 

work. l'ouvrage 

He helped me out of a great dif- II ma tire d'un mauvais pas. 

ficulty. 
Help ! help ! Au secours ! A moi ! 

Heaven helps those who help Aide-toi ; le ciel t'aidera. 
themselves. 



IMPROVE. 

His health is much improved. 

These children have improved in 
their studies. 

"We must improve the opportunity. 

She is much improved in appear- 
ance. 

He tries his best to improve him- 
self. 

KEEP. 

He keeps a shop in Paris. 
You do not keep your word. 
I shall keep my bed all day. 

Are you going to keep Lent ? 

Keep silence. 

Do not keep him waiting. 

"We always keep New Year's day. 

I cannot keep him from doing it. 

She keeps complaining. 

He keeps saying the same thing. 

France keeps up an enormous 
army. 

She has kept her health wonder- 
fully. 

19 



Sa sante s'est beaucoup amelioree. 
Ces enfants ont fait des progres 

dans leurs etudes. 
II nous faut profiter de l'occasion. 
Elle est beaucoup embellie. 

II fait son possible pour s'instruire. 



II tient boutique a Paris. 
Vous ne tenez pas votre parole. 
Je vais garder mon lit toute la 

journee. 
Allez-vous faire careme 1 
Gardez le silence 
Ne le faites pas attendre. 
Nous fetons toujours le jour de Tan. 
Je ne peuz pas l'empecher de le 

faire. 
Elle ne cesse pas de se plaindre. 
II est toujours a dire la me me 

chose. 
La France entretient une armee 

enorme. 
Elle a admirablement conserve sa 

sante. 



290 



IDIOMATIC PHKASES. 



The laws must be kept. 
The police keep the town in 
order. 

LEAVE. 

He has left town. 

Are you going to leave ? 

He leaves all his things lying 

about. 
We leave to-morrow for Paris. 

I give you all that is left of it. 

I leave it to you. 

He has left off smoking. 

You have left me in the lurch. 



II faut observer les lois. 
Les gendarmes maintienr.ent l'ordre 
dans la ville 



II a quitte la ville. 

Est-ce que vous vous en allez 1 

II laisse trainer toutes ses affaires. 

Nous allons partir demain pour 

Paris. 
Je vous donne tout ce qui m'en 

reste. 
Je m'en rapporte a vous. 
II a renonce a fumer. 
Vous m'avez plante la. 



LET. 

Let me look at it. 

Let him know that I am here. 

I will let you know. 

Let me alone. 

Who let you into the house ? 

He let me his house. 



Permettez-moi d'y regarder. 

Avisez-lui que je suis ici. 

Je vous le ferai savoir. 

Laissez-moi tranquille. 

Qui vous a fait entrer dans la mai- 

son 1 
II m'a loue sa maison. 



He has let the cat out of the bag. II a decouvert le pot aux roses. 



LOOK. 

Look at your watch and see what 
time it is. 

You look well. 

He looks tired. 

She always looks as if she had 
just come out of a bandbox. 

Our windows look out on the gar- 
den. 

She is looking for her music. 

He looks very much like his uncle. 

I will look through the book be- 
fore giving it to you. 



Regardez l'heure a votre montre. 

Vous avez bonne mine. 

II a l'air fatigue. 

Elle est toujours tiree a quatre 

epingles. 
Nos fenetres donnent sur le jardin. 

Elle cherche sa musique. 
II ressemble beaucoup a son oncle. 
Je vais parcourir le livre avant de 
vous le donner. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF ENGLISH YEKBS. 



291 



Look out ! 

Look here ! 

He looks down upon every one. 



Prenez garde ! 
Tenez ! Tiens ! \ 
II regarde tout le monde de baut 
en bas. 
I must look over my lesson again. II faut que je repasse encore une 

fois ma lecon. 
How did he look when he heard Quelle mine a-t-il faite quand il a 
that ? entendu cela ? 



MAKE. 

He cannot make up his mind. 
I have made up my mind to go. 
He is always making mistakes. 
She made him happy. 
I have made it up with my father. 

Make haste, I am waiting. 
Make yourself at home. 
Make yourself comfortable. 
He makes fan of everything. 
She is making believe not to see 

us. 
He has made a great deal of 

money. 
I cannot make myself heard. 
He knows how to make the most 

of his goods. 
TTe must make the best of it. 

They are making much of him. 
I do not know what to make of it. 
He has made away with his whole 

fortune. 
This fruit makes my mouth water. 

I want to make up my accounts. 
This woman makes dresses. 



II ne peut pas se decider. 

J'ai pris mon parti d'y aller. 

II se trompe a chaque instant. 

Elle l'a rendu heureux. 

Je me suis raccommode avec mon 

pere. 
Depecbez-vous, je vous attends. 
Faites comme chez vous. 
Mettez-vous a votre aise. 
II tourne tout en plaisanterie. 
Elle fait semblant de ne pas nous 

voir. 
II a amasse beaucoup d'argent. 

Je ne peux pas me faire entendre. 

II sait faire valoir ses marchan- \/ 

dises. 
II faut en tirer le meilleur parti 

possible, 
lis font grand cas de lui. 
Je n'y comprends rien. 
II a gaspille toute sa fortune. 



Ce fruit me fait venir l'eau a la 

boucbe. 
Je veux regler mes comptes. 
Cette femme confectionne des robes 



MARRY. 

This lady is to marry my son. 
He was married last week. 



Cette dame va epouser mon fils. 
II s'est marie la semaine derniere 



292 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



The bishop married them. 
He has just married off his 
daughter. 

MEAN. 

What do you mean ? 
I meant to go there. 
I mean to be obeyed. 
Does he mean it ? 
He means very well. 
I did not mean to do it. 

This sarcasm is meant for you. 

MIND. 

These children do not mind me. 
Mind your business. 
Don't mind what he says. 

Never mind. 

I do not mind that. 

Mind what you are doing. 



L'eveque les a maries. 
II vient de marier sa fille. 



Que voulez-vous dire 1 
J'avais l'intention d'y aller. 
J'entends etre obei. 
Est-il serieux 1 

II a de tres bonnes intentions. 
Je ne l'ai pas fait expres. 
Ce sarcasme s'adresse a vous. 
" " est a votre adresse. 

Ges enfants ne m'obeissent pas. 

Occupez-vous de vos affaires. 

Ne faites pas attention a ce qu'il 

dit. 
N'importe. Ce n'est rien. 
Cela ne me fait rien. 
Frenez garde a ce que vous faites. 



/ 



MOVE. 

He does not move from his place. 

They are going to move to-mor- 
row. 

He has moved one of his pawns 
(in chess). 

He will move heaven and earth to 
succeed. 

PAY. 
He paid me many compliments. 

I am going to pay her a call. 

He wants to pay his bill. 

Pay attention to what I am say- 
ing. 

He pays ready money for every- 
thing. 



II ne bouge pas de sa place, 
lis vont demenager domain. 

II a joue un de ses pions. 

II remuera le ciel et la terro pour 
reussir. 



II m'a fait beaucoup de compli- 
ments. 

Je vais lui faire une visite. 

II veut regler son compte. 

Faites attention a ce que je vous 
dis. 

II paie tout argent comptant. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF ENGLISH VERBS. 



293 



He is paying attention to Miss B. 
I will pay you up for this. 
It does not pay. 



II fait la cour a Mademoiselle B. 

Je vous rendrai la pareille. 

Le jeu ne vaut pas la chandelle. 



PICK. 

She is picking currants. 

The cook is picking the chickens. 

The dog is picking a bone. 

This man picks quarrels with 
every one. 

He picks out his friends badly. 

Pick up the gentleman's handker- 
chief. 

The key is lost ; we must pick 
the lock. 

PLAY. 

She plays the piano very well. 

Do you like to play cards ? 

He plays false. 

He always plays high. 

We played three games. 

You played a mean trick on me. 

The Cid is to be played to-night. 

Do not play the fool. 



Elle cueille des groseilles. 

La cuisiniere plume les poules. 

Le chien ronge un os. 

Cet homme cherche querelle a tout 

le monde. 
II choisit mal ses amis. 
Ramassez le mouchoir de monsieur. 

La clef est perdue ; il faut cro- 
cheter la serrure. 



Elle joue tres bien du piano. 
Aimez-vous jouer aux cartes * 
II triche au jeu. 
II joue toujours gros jeu. 
Nous avons fait trois parties. 
Vous m'avez joue un mauvais tour. 
On va representer ce soir le Cid. 
Ne faites pas le fou. 



PUT. 

This must be put an end to. 

He put several questions to me. 

Why did you put out the fire ? 

Put on your hat. 

I am going to put it off till an- 
other day. 

I have put away my things in the 
cupboard. 

He puts aside half his income. 

He has put all his papers in order. 
This house is to be put up at auc- 
tion. 



II faut y mettre fin. 

II m'a pose plusieurs questions 

Pourquoi avez-vous eteint le feu ? 

Mettez votre chapeau. 

Je vais le remettre a un autre jour. 

J'ai serre mes affaires dans Tar. 

moire. 
II met de cote la moitie de ses 

rentes. 
II a range tous ses papiers. 
On va mettre aux encheres cette 

maison. 



/ 



294 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



You put upon him too much. 
I should like to put it off forever. 



RAISE. 

You cannot raise this weight. 
He cannot raise any money. 

They have raised the price of 

wheat. 
He raised his voice so as to be 

heard. 
They have raised the siege. 
This victory will raise the courage 

of the army. 
I raise vegetables in my garden. 

He pretends to raise the dead. 
That raised our suspicion. 



Vous avez trop abuse de lui 
Je voudrais bien le renvoyer aux 
calendes grecques. 



Vous ne pouvez pas soulever ce 

poids. 
II ne peut pas se procurer de l'ar- 

gent. 
On a hausse le prix du ble. 

II eleva la voix pour se faire en- 
tendre. 

On a leve le siege. 

Cette victoire va ranimer le cou- 
rage a l'armee. 

Je cultive des legumes dans mon 
jar din 

II pretend ressusciter les morts. 

Cela nous fit naitre des soupcons. 



RISE. 

The sun rises at 6 o'clock. 

He cannot rise from his bed. 

A tempest rose. 

The army rose against its officers. 

The water is rising in the pipes. 
He was not made to rise so high. 

The Rhine rises in Switzerland. 



Le soleil se leve a six heures. 

II ne peut pas se relever de son lit. 

Une tempete s'eleva. 

L'armee se souleva contre ses of- 

ficiers. 
L'eau monte dans les tuyaux. 
II n'etait pas fait pour monter si 

haut. 
Le Rhin prend sa source en Suisse. 



SET. 

You can set your watch by mine. Vous pouvez regler votre montre 

sur la mienne. 

I am going to have these diamonds Je vais faire enchasser ces dia- 

set. mants. 

He will not set a price for it. II ne veut pas y mettre un prix. 

The doctor will set your arm. Le medecin vous remettra le bras. 

He set a trap for you. II vous a dresse un piege. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF ENGLISH VERBS. 



295 



She is setting you a bad example. 

We must set to work. 
His father has set him up in busi- 
ness. 
Who set the house on fire. 
He sets out to-morrow. 
The sun sets at seven o'clock. 
The fine weather is setting in. 
Have you set the day ? 



Elle vous donne un mauvais exexn- 
ple. 

II faut nous mettre a travailler. 

Son pere l'a etabli dans le com- 
merce. 

Qui a mis le feu a la maison 1 

II part demain. 

Le soleil se couche a sept heures. 

Le temps se met au beau. 

Avez vous fixe le jour ? 



SLEEP. 



Did you sleep well ? 
I did not go to sleep at all. 
In what room does he sleep ? 
He sleeps in the open air. 



Avez-vous bien dormi 1 
Je ne me suis point endormi. 
Dans quelle chambre couche-t-il 1 
II couche a la belle etoile. 



STAND. 

He stood opposite us. 

She is too weak to stand up. 

He stood up to look at her. 
This boy always stands first. 

The house stands at the corner of 

the street. 
I cannot stand the cold weather. 
His hair stood on end. 

He stood still for a few moments. 

As matters stand. 

The army stood firm against the 

assault. 
Do not stand on ceremony. 

STRIKE. 

It has struck noon. 

He struck me a cruel blow. 

An idea strikes me. 



II se tenait en face de nous. 

Elle est trop faible pour se tenir 
debout. 

II se leva pour la regarder. 

Ce garcon est toujours au premier 
rang. 

La maison est situee au coin de la 
rue. 

Je ne peux pas supporter le froid. 

Ses cheveux se dressaient sur sa 
iete. 

II s'arreta pendant quelques in- 
stants. 

Au point ou en sont les choses. 

L'armee tint bon contre 1'assaut. 

Ne faites pas de facons 



Midi est sonne. 

II m'a porte un coup sensible. 

II me vient une idee. 



296 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



They struck off several copies of it. 
It is a very striking color. 

The workmen have struck. 
Your news has struck me down. 
He was struck with horror. 
Strike a match. 
We could not strike a bargain. 

He surrendered without striking a 

blow. 
Has the tree already struck root ? 

TAKE. 

I am going to take a walk. 

The nurse will take the children 
to school. 

The sick man has just taken an 
airing. 

I cannot take your advice. 

I take pleasure in seeing you. 

He takes advantage of every mo- 
ment of leisure. 

You take advantage of his kind- 
ness. 

I take several newspapers. 

He has come to take leave of us. 
He does not take a joke well. 
This boy has taken all the prizes. 
Who took him prisoner ? 
He took a great deal of trouble to 

please you. 
How long does it take to go there ? 

Cain took his brother's life. 

He took himself off when he saw 

us. 
She cannot take her eyes off you. 



On en a tire plusieurs exemplaires. 
C'est une couleur qui saute auz 

yeux. 
Les ouvriers out fait greve. 
Vos nouvelles m'ont atterre. 
II etait frappe d'horreur. 
Allumez une allumette. 
Nous n'avons pu conclure le 

marche. 
II s'est livre sans coup ferir. 

Est-ce que l'arbre a deja pris ra- 
cine 1 



Je vais me promener. 

La bonne conduira les enfants a 

l'ecole. 
Le malade vient de prendre l'air. 

Je ne peux pas suivre vos conseils. 

Je me plais a vous voir. 

II profite de chaque instant de 

loisir. 
Vous abusez de ses bontes. 

Je suis abonne a plusieurs jour- 

naux. 
II est venu prendre conge de nous. 
II n'entend pas raillerie. 
Ce garcon a remporte tous les prix. 
Qui la fait prisonnier ? 
II s'est donne beaucoup de peine 

pour vous plaire. 
Combien faut-il de temps pour y 

aller ? 
Cain a ote la vie a son frere. 
II se sauva en nous voyant. 

Elle ne pent pas vous quitter des 
yeux. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF ENGLISH VERBS. 



297 



He takes after his mother. 

We took shelter from the storm. 

I have taken a liking to this child. 
She has taken a great fancy to 

him. 
Take care ! 

To take time by the forelock. 
He has taken it into his head to 

come. 
I should have taken him to be 

older. 

TIE. 

I am going to tie the dog to the 

carriage. 
Will you tie this ribbon ? 
I cannot tie a knot. 
The thief's hands must be tied. 



II ressemble a sa mere. 

Nous nous sommes mis a l'abri de 

l'orage. 
Je me suis epris de cet enfant. 
Elle s*est coiffee de lui. 

Prenez garde ! 

Prendre l'occasion aux cheveux. 

II s'est mis dans la tete de venir. 

Je l'aurais cru plus age. 



Je vais attacher le chien a la voi- 

ture. 
Voulez-vous nouer ce ruban T 
Je ne peux pas faire un noeud.. 
II faut lier les mains au voleur,. 



TRY. 

Try to do it. 

I tried to please him. 

Have you tried on your dress ? 

This thief must be tried. 

He is trying hard to learn it. 

I tried my very best to get there 

early. 
He did it to try your friendship. 

TURN. 

He has turned catholic. 

You have turned over a new leaf. 

He does not know which way to 

turn. 
She turned pale. 
He knows how to turn everything 

to advantage. 
I will turn him out of the house. 
He turned the tables on you. 



Tachez de le faire. 

J'ai cherche a lui plaire. 

Avez-vous essaye votre robe * 

II faut que ce voleur soit juge. 

II s'efforce a l'apprendre. 

J'ai fait tout mon possible pour y 

arriver de bonne beure. 
II l'a fait pour mettre a l'epreuve 

votre amitie. 



II s'est fait catholique. 

Vous avez change de vie. 

II ne sait pas ou donner de la tete. 

Elle palit. 

II sait tout mettre a, profit. 

Je vais le faire mettre a la porta. 
II vous a rendu la pareille. 



298 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



The princes have been turned out On a chasse les princes de la France. 

of France. 
He turned aside from the right II s'ecarta du bon chemin. 

path. 



WALK. 

Are you going to walk ? 

He has gone to walk (take a walk). 

I have just walked ten miles. 

He walks very fast. 

He is walking his horse. 

They are walking up and down. 

They are walking arm in arm. 

WANT. 

Bo you want to go there ? 
I want to see him very much. 

Do you want anything ? 

The necessary books are wanting. 

You are wanted. 

It wants ten minutes to six. 



Allez-vous a pied ? 
II est a lie se promener. 
Je viens de faire dix milles a pied. 
II marche tres vite. 
II a mis son cheval an pas. 
lis se promenent de long en large. 
lis se promenent bras dessus, bras 
dessoiu. 



Voulez-vous y aller ? 

J'ai grande envie de le voir. 

Ave* -vous besoin de quelque chose ? 

Vous faut-il quelque chose 1 

II nous manque les livres neces- 

saires. 
On vous demande. 
II est six beures moins dix minutes. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



The references are to pages; but the Dumbers of subdivisions occurring on the 
page are added in parentheses where called for, in order to the ready finding of 
a reference, 

Al! French and English words are to be looked for in the Vocabularies, and not 
in the Index. 



a, pron'n of. 4-5 ; when silent, 5 
(14) ; when elided, 5 (15) ; its ac- 
cent-marks, 5 (16). 

abstract nouns, inclusive article 
with, 37 (5b). 

accent of a word, 4. 

accent-marks or written accents, 
2-3 : — and see acute, circumflex, 
grave, and the different vowels. 

acute accent, 3-4 : — and see the 
different voicels. 

address, vous chiefly used in, 28 
(9b) ; titles used, 73. 

adjectives, gender, 46-9 ; number, 
50-1 ; agreement, 46-7 ; place, 
when attributive, 51-2 ; differ- 
ence of meaning, depending on 
difference of place, 52 (5c) ; com- 
parison, 54-5 ; adverbs from, 
143-5 ; adj. used as adverbs, 
145 (9). 

adverbs, made from adjectives, 
143-5 j adjectives used as, 145 ; 
comparison of adv., 145 ; classes, 
148-9 ; adv. of quantity, and 
their construction with follow- 
ing nouns, 40-1 ; negative adv. 
and their uses, 65-7 ; position of 
adv. , 150 ; adv. in adjective or 
noun construction, 40, 149 (2b). 

age, mode of expression of, 83 (5). 

ai, diphthong, pron'n of, 11 ; oi 
sometimes written for, 12 (44/;). 

aim, ain, nasal vowels, pron'n of, 
14 (50c). 

alphabet, 1-2. 



am, an, nasal vowels, pron'n of, 
13 ; exceptions, 15 (54). 

antecedent, pronoun, of relative, 
112 (2), 113 (4a), 123-4. 

apostrophe and its use, 3. 

articles, 27-8 -.—and see definite 
and indefinite. 

aspirate h, 18-9. 

an, diphthong, pron'n of, 11 (40). 

auxiliaries making compound ten- 
ses of verb, 58, 132-3 ; of reflex- 
ive verb, 135 (3) ; making passive 
conjugation, 131 ; aux. of im- 
mediate future, 129 (9c) ; of im- 
mediate past, 146 (lib) ; causa- 
tive aux., 151. 

b, pron'n of, 15. 

bodily conditions, expressions of, 
70 (6). 

c, pron'n of, 16 ; hard and soft 
values of , 16 ; cc, 16 (58c) ; use of 
cedilla with, 3 (7), 16 ; when 
silent as final, 16. 

capital letters, use of, 1-2, 73 (4c). 
cardinal numerals, see numerals, 
carrying-on of a final consonant to 

following vowel, 25-6. 
cases mostly wanting in French, 

33. * 

causative verb-phrases, with faire, 

151. 
cedilla, 3 (7). 
ch, digraph, pron'n of, 16 ; how 

treated in syllabication, 2 (4c). 



300 



GENERAL INDEX. 



circumflex accent, 3 -.—and see the 
different vowels. 

close and open sounds of e, 7. 

comparative of adjective, 54 ; of 
adverb, 145 ; original comp., 54, 
145 ; de after plus, moins, 77 (9). 

comparison of adjectives, 54-5 ; of 
adverbs, 145. 

compound forms of the verb, with 
auxiliaries, 58, 86 (5). 

conditional tense (or mode), 45, 
125 ; derived from infinitive, 
85-6. 

conditional perfect tense, 58 (6). 

conjugation of verbs, 57 etc.: of 
avoir, 57-60 ; of etre, 62-3; nega- 
tive conj., 65-7; of regular verbs, 
85 etc.; of irregular verbs, 113 
etc. 

conjugations, the three regular, 
85 ; a fourth, 85 (la). 

conjunctions, 157-9 ; conjunction- 
phrases, 158-9. 

conjunctive and disjunctive pro- 
nouns, 102-10. 

consonants, pron'n of, 15-26: — and 
see the different letters. 

countries and provinces, the article 
used with names of, 43-4. 

ct final, pron'n of, 23 (76a). 

d, pron'n of, 17 ; linking of, 26 
(85). 

date, expression of, 82-3. 

dative case, represented by noun 
with a, 34 (4a) ; dative pronoun, 
103 (5), 109. 

days of week, names of, 82. 

definite article, 27 ; combinations 
with de and a, 33-4 ; use in parti- 
tive expression, 36-7 ; inclusive 
use, 37-8 ; with names of coun- 
tries, 43-4 ; of mountains, 45 ; 
with other proper names, 44-5 ; 
makes superlative from compar- 
ative, 54-5, 145 ; its repetition, 
28 (7), 55 (5b) ; used for posses- 
sive, 73 (5a). 

demonstratives, adjectives, 69 ; 
pronouns, 111-3. 

diaeresis, uses of, 3 (8). 

diphthongs, so-called, pron'n of, 



11-2 ; real diphthongs wanting 
in French, 11 (38a) : — and see 
the different letters. 

disjunctive and conjunctive pro- 
nouns, 102-10. 

division of words into syllables, 2. 

double consonants, pron'n of, 15 
(56c). 

e, pron'n of, 5-8 ; mute e, 5-6 ; e 
acute and grave, 6-7 ; e circum 
flex, 7 (24) ; e before consonant 
in same syllable, 7-8 ; exception- 
al cases, 8 ; elision of, when final, 
8 ; written to denote the soft 
sound of g, 17 (62/'). 

e, e acute, 6-7 ; e or e before ge, 
6 (20c) ; e final of a verb-form 
before je, 89 (c). 

e, e grave, 6-7. 

e, e circumflex, 7. 
eau, pron'n of, 11 (40). 

ei, diphthong, pron'n of, 11. 

ein, nasal vowel, pron'n of, 14 

(50c).' 
elision of final vowels, 3 (9) ; of e, 

8 (26c) ; of a, 5 (15) ; of i, 9 (29/;). 
em, nasal vowel, pron'n of, 13, 14 

(50c, 53a), 15 (54). 
-eminent, pron'n of, 8 (26*7). 
en, nasal vowel, pron'n of, 13 ; ex- 
ceptional cases, 14 (50c, 52a, 

53a). 15 v 54). 
eu, diphthong, pron'n of, 11 ; in 

forms of avoir, 11 (415). 
eun, nasal vowel, pron'n of, 14 

(51). 
ex-, pron'n of, 24 (81a). 
exclamations ; use of quel in, 70 ; 

of que and quoi, 118 (4c). 
expletive ne, in dependent clauses, 

159. 

f, pron'n of, 17. 

feminine of adjectives, how form- 
ed, 47-9 : — and see gender. 

final consonants, pron'n of, 15 ; 
linking of, 25-6. 

first regular conjugation of verbs, 
85, 87-9 ; its irregular verbs, 
98-100. 

fourth regular conjugation (as 
sometimes reckoned), 85 (la). 






GENERAL INDEX. 



301 



fractional numerals, 80. 

future tense, 41 ; made from in- 
finitive, 85-6 ; fut. of immedi- 
ate action, 129 (9c). 

future perfect tense, 58 (6). 

g, pron'n of, 17-8 ; hard and soft 
values of, 17 ; double, 17 ; final, 
17 ; when linked, 26 (856) ; or- 
thographic use of e and u after, 
17-8 ; gn, pron'n of, 18. 

ge, e or e before, 6 (20c). 

gender, of nouns, 27 ; gender of 
adjective words, 27 (2) ; of arti- 
cles, 27 ; gender-forms of ad- 
jectives, 46-9 ; of pronouns, 
69-70, 72-3, 107-128. 

genitive case, represented by noun 
with de, 33 (la) ; genitive pro- 
noun, 109-10. 

gerund, 57 (3c, d). 

gn, digraph, pron'n of, 18 ; how 
treated in syllabication, 2 (4c). 

grammatical subject, ce or il, 63-4, 
112. 

grave accent, 3 (5) : — and see the 
different vowels. 

h, pron'n of, 18-9 ; mute or silent 
and aspirate h, 18-9 ; h in di 
graphs. 19 (64#) ; in syllabica- 
tion, 2(4f). 

hard c, 16 ;' ch, 16 (59a) ; g, 17. 

hyphen, 4 (10) ; used in interroga- 
tive verb-forms, 29 (106, c) ; in 
compound numerals, 77 ; before 
object pronouns, 104, 105 (9c). 

i, pron'n of, 8-9 ; accent, 9 (29a) ; 

elision of final, 9 (296). 
im, nasal vowel, pron'n of, 13 

(50) ; exceptions, 15 (54c). 
imperative, 49 ; made from present 

indicative, 86 (6) ; impv. use of 

present subjunctive persons, 52 

(7c). 
imperfect indicative tense, 34-5 ; 

made from present participle, 

86(4). 
impersonal or indefinite subject, 

63-4, 112, 139-40. 
impersonal verbs, 139-42. 



in, nasal vowel, pron'n of, 13 (50). 

inclusive article, 37 (5). 

indefinite article, 28. 

indefinite pronouns, 73-4, 127-8. 

indefinite or impersonal subject, 
ce or il, 63-4, 112. 

indirect object, pronoun forms for, 
103 (5). 

infinitive, 57 (2) ; sign of, 57 (26), 
154 (46) ; other prepositions and 
preposition-phrases governing, 
154 (4, 5); future and conditional 
made from inf., 85-6. 

interrogatives, 70, 117-9, 149 (6a), 
158 (2) ; form of interr. sentence, 
28-9, 118-9; with negative, 67 
(8) ; interr. paraphrases, 97 (8a), 
119 (7) ; interr. used also as rela- 
tives, 121. 

intransitive verbs, auxiliary taken 
by, 132-3. 

irregular verbs of first conjuga- 
tion, 98-100 ; irr. verbs in gen- 
eral, 113-4 ; their conjugation 
in detail, 114-198 ; alphabetical 
list, with references, 199-201. 

j, pron'n of, 19. 

je, pron'n of, after verb, 6 (18c). 

k, occurrence and pron'n of, 19. 

1, pron'n of, 19-20 ; liquid 1, after 
i, 19-20 ; after i preceded by 
other vowels, 20 (686) ; excep- 
tional cases, 19, 20. 

letters, French names of, 1. 

linking or carrying-on of final con- 
sonants to following vowels, 25- 
6. 

liquid 1, see 1. 

m, pron'n of, 20-1 ; makes pre- 
ceding vowel nasal, 12-5 : — see 
nasal vowels. 

masculine and feminine, see gen- 
der. 

material, expressed by noun with 
de, 40. 

measure, de used in expression of, 
after noun or adverb, 40 ; after 
adjective, 83 (6). 



302 



GENERAL INDEX. 



mn, pron'n after vowel, 14 (536), 

21 (69a). 
month, day of, how expressed, 80 

(3a) ; names of months, 82. 
mountain, article used with the 

name of a, 45 {be). 
mute e, 5-6 ; after another vowel, 

8 (28rt), 10 (35), 12 (45). 
mute h, 18-9. 
mute syllables, restricted occur 

rence of, 6-7. 

n, pron'n of, 21 ; makes preceding 
vowel nasal, 12-5 : — see nasal 
vowels. 

nasal vowels, pron'n of, 12-5 ; an, 
am, em, en, 13 ; on, om, 13 ; im, 
in, ym, yn, aim, ain, ein, 13-4 ; 
oin, 14 (50d) ; urn, un, eun, 14 ; 
exceptional cases, 14-5 ; carry- 
ing-on of their n when final, 26 
(86c). 

negative conjugation, 65-7. 

nouns, gender, 27 ; number, 30-1 
case, absence of, 33 ; case-rela 
tions as expressed by de and a 
33, 34 ; partitive noun, 36-7 ; in 
elusive sense of noun, 37. 

numerals, 76-84 ; cardinals, 76-7 
ordinals, 79-80 ; cardinals for 
English ordinals, 79-80 ; frac 
tionals, 80. 

o, pron'n of, 9 ; accent, 9 (316). 
object - pronouns, 103-5 ; place, 

104-5. 
oe, diphthong, before il, 11 (41c). 
oeu, pron'n of, 11 (41a). 
oi, diphthong, pron'n of, 12 ; oi 

written for ai, 12 (446). 
oin, nasal vowel, pron'n of, 14 

(bOd). 
om, nasal vowel, pron'n of, 13 (49). 
on, nasal vowel, pron'n of, 13 (49) ; 

exception, 15 (546). 
open and close e, 7. 
ordinal numerals : — see numerals, 
ou, diphthong, pron'n of, 12 ; with 

following vowel, 12 (42a). 

p, pron'n of, 21. 

participles, 57-8. 

partitive sense of a noun, 36 ; ex- 



pressed by de, with or without 
article, 36-7 ; use or omission 
of article, 37 (3), 57, 67 ; of de, 
37 (4), 67 (7a) ; en as partitive 
pronoun, 110. 

passive conjugation, 131-2 ; Eng- 
lish passive otherwise expressed 
in French, 127 (4c), 132 (4) ; ex- 
pression of ' by ' after passive, 
132 (3). 

past anterior tense, 58 (6). 

past definite tense, so-called, 38 
(7c) : — see preterit. 

past indefinite tense, so-called, 58 
(6a) :— see perfect. 

past or passive participle, 57-8 ; 
compound tenses and passive 
made with, 58, 86, 131 ; form of 
participle in such combinations, 
58 (56), 122 (26), 131 (16), 133 (8), 
135 (4). 

perfect tense, 58 (6). 

personal pronouns, 102-10 ; con- 
junctive and disjunctive, 102 ; 
subject, 102-3; object, 103-5; 
reflexive, 108 ; en and y, 109-10. 

ph, digraph, pron'n of, 19 (64#) ; 
how treated in syllabication, 2 
(4c). 

pluperfect tense, indicative 58 (6). 

pluperfect tense, subjunctive, use 
of, 34(16). 

plural of nouns, how formed, 30- 
1 ; of adjectives, 46, 50-1. 

possessives, adjective, 72-3 ; sub- 
stantive, 126-7 ; rules for use, 
73 (3, 5) ; replaced by article or 
personal pronoun, 73 (5a). 

possessive case, see genitive. 

predicate, form of personal pro- 
noun in, 108 (3d, e) ; of interrog- 
ative, 118 (4a) ; of relative, 122- 
(2a). 

prepositions, commonest, 33-4, 43; 
others, and preposition-phrases, 
153-4 ; prep, followed by infini- 
tive, 154. 

present participle, 57 ; apparent 
use with en, or gerund, 57 (3c, d); 
certain tenses made from, 86 (4) ; 
also plural persons of present, 
86 (4a), 114 (5c). 



GENERAL INDEX. 



303 



present tease, indicative, its plural 
forms found from present par- 
ticiple, 86 (4a), 114 (5c) ; impera 
tive found from it, 86 (6). 

present tense, subjunctive, 52 ; use 
of its persons as imperative, 52- 
3. 

preterit tense, 38 ; imperfect sub- 
junctive found from it, 86 (7). 

principal parts of the verb, 85 ; 
formation of the other parts 
from them, 85-6 

pronouns and pronominal adjec- 
tives, 69-74, 102-128 ; personal, 
102-10 ; reflexive, 108, 135 ; pos- 
sessive, 72-3, 126-7 ; demonstra- 
tive, 69, 111-3 ; interrogative, 
70, 117-9 ; relative, 70 (56), 121- 
4 ; indefinite, 74, 127-8 :— and 
see the different classes. 

pronunciation, 4-26 ; of vowels, 
4-10 ; of diphthongs, 11-2 ; of 
nasal vowels, 12-5 ; of conso- 
nants, 15-26 : — and see the differ- 
ent letters. 

proper names, use of article with, 
43-5; prepositions used with, 44. 

q, pron'n of, 21. 

quantity of French vowels, 4 (12). 

r, pron'n of, 21-2 ; final, 22 ; 
double, 22 (73a - ). 

reciprocal use of reflexive forms, 
138 

reflexive pronoun, 108 (4), 135 (2). 

reflexive conjugation, 135-8. 

regular conjugations of verbs, 85- 
97. 

relative pronouns and pronominal 
adjective, 70 (5b), 121-4; ad- 
verbs, 123, 149 (6a), 158 (2) ; rel- 
ative not omitted, 124 (11). 

repetition, of article, 28 (7) ; of 
prepositions de and a, 34 (5). 

responsive particles, 149 (6c). 

s, pron'n of, 22-3 ; when as z, 22 ; 

final s, 22-3 ; ss, sc, sch, 22 ; 

linked or carried on, 26 (856). 
s, lost, replaced by circumflex on 

vowel, 3 (6c) 



s added to 2d sing. impv. before 
en and y, 88 (10a), 129 (9a). 

sc, pron'n of, 23 (755). 

sch, pron'n of. 23 (75c). 

second regular conjugation of 
verbs, 85, 90-2. 

silent e, h, syllables, see mute. 

soft sound of c, 16 ; of g, 17. 

ss, pron'n of, 23 (75^). 

strong forms of irregular verbs, 
115 (d). 

subject-pronoun, its place, 102-3. 

subjunctive tenses, 52, 55 ; im- 
perative use of subj. forms, 52- 
3 ; subj. present found from 
present participle, 86 (4) ; im- 
perfect, from preterit, 86 (7). 

superlative, made from compara- 
tive, 54-5, 145. 

syllables, division of words into, 2. 

t, pron'n of, 23-4 ; final, 23-4 ; ti 
of endings before a vowel, 24 ; 
th, 76 (28). 

t, added to a 3d sing, before fol- 
lowing pronoun, 29 (10c), 89 
(9b). 

th, pron'n of, 24 (78) ; treatment in 
syllabication, 2 (4c). 

third regular conjugation of verbs, 
85 ; as sometimes reckoned, 85 
(la), 190. 

time of day, expression of, 64 (a), 
83. 

u, pron'n of, 9-10 ; after q and g, 
9 (33) ; accent, 10 (34) ; written 
after g to denote its hard sound, 
18 (62/) ; u and a following 
vowel, 10 (35). 

ue after c or g, before il, 11-2 (41tf). 

urn final in Latin words 10 (33c), 
14 (516). 

am and un, nasal vowel, pron'n of, 
14 (51). 

v, pron'n of, 24. 

verbs, conjugation of, see conjuga- 
tion ; auxiliaries, see auxiliaries ; 
passive verbs, 131-2 ; reflexive, 
135-8 ; impersonal, 139-42 — 



304 



GENERAL INDEX. 



and see the various tenses, modes, 
etc. 
vowels, pron'n of, 4-15 ; simple 
vowels, 4-10 ; diphthongs, 11-2 ; 
nasal vowels, 12-5 : — and see the 
different letters. 

w, pron'n of, 24 (80\ 

weather, phrases describing, 141 

(5), 150 (9a) ; impersonal verbs 

of, 140. 
week, names of its days, 82. 



x, pron'n of, 24-5 ; when linked, 
26 (856). 

y, pron'n of, as vowel, 10 ; be- 
tween vowels, 10 ; as consonant. 
25 ; interchange of i and y, 10 
(376), 100 (6). 

ym and yn, nasal vowel, pron'n of 
13 (506). 



z, pron'n of, 25. 



$ 



JMi 16 195J 



Ml 





• W : 




v v rw <jr ~ - 















- .4 n .wm. 



: *>* 



^0< 

,4 o. 






•s^. 



aS O, 



^ "3* 
















^0* 

^9* 













% 













^ <3* 



^ ^ 











003 128 391 7 



■ 



■ 









H 



■ 



H 



